TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINCS

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(INCORPORATED)

VOL. LVII.

{Wira Portrait, Ten Prates, aNp Turrty-two Ficures IN THE Text]

SS
EDITED BY PROFESSOR WALTER HOWCHIN, F.G.S.

[Each Author is responsible for the soundness of the opinions given,

and
for the accuracy of the statements made in his paper.]

PRICE: FIFTEEN SHILLINGS.

Adelaide:
PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY,
ROYAL SOCIETY ROOMS, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE,
DECEMBER 23, 1933.

{Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide, for Transmission by Post as a Periodical]

PRINTED BY GILLINGHAM & Co. Lrmrrep, 106 anp 108, Currie STREET,
ADELAIDE, SourH AUSTRALIA.

a
Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society

of South Australia from the United States
of America can be forwarded through the

Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.

THE LATE SIR JOSEPILT C. VERCO, M.D., F.R.C.S.

TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(INCORPORATED)

VOL. LVII.

[Wrru Portrait, TEN Plates, AND THIrtTy-TWo Ficures IN THE TEXT]

EDITED BY PROFESSOR WALTER HOWCHIN, F.G.5.

[Each Author is responsible for the soundness of the opinions given, and

for the accuracy of the statements made in his paper.]

PRICE: FIFTEEN SHILLINGS.

Adelaide:
PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY,
ROYAL SOCIETY ROOMS, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE,
DECEMBER 23, 1933.

{Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide, for Transmission by Post as a Periodical]

PRINTED BY GILLINGHAM & Co, Limitep, 106 ann 108, Currie StreeET,
ADELAIDE, SoutH AUSTRALIA.

Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from the United States
of America can be forwarded through the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.

A

il.

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA
(INCORPORATED).

Patron:

HIS EXCELLENCY BRIG.-GENERAL SIR A. G. A. HORE-RUTHVEN,
V.C.,, K.C.M.G,, C.B., D.S.0.

OFFICERS FOR 1933-34.

President:
J. M. BLACK, A.L.S.

Vice-Presidents:

T. D. CAMPBELL, D.D.Se.
C. T. MADIGAN, M.A,, B.E.

Hon. Editor:
CHAS. A. E. FENNER, D.Sc.

Hon. Treasurer: Hon. Secretary:
W. CHRISTIE, M.B., B.S. RALPH W. SEGNIT, M.A., B.Sc.

Members of Council:
HERBERT M. HALE.
PROFESSOR J. BURTON CLELAND, M.D.
JAMES DAVIDSON, D.Sc.
ROBERT H. PULLEINE, M.B., Ch.M.

L. KEITH WARD, B.A., B.E., D.Sc.

H. K. FRY, D.S:O., M.B., B.S., B.Se.

Hon. Auditors:
W. C. HACKETT. O. A. GLASTONBURY

— Se

lil.

CONTENTS
Page
Opiruary Notice: Sir Joseph Verco. With Portrait .. Es : v.
Howcuin, Pror. W.: The Dead Rivers of South Australia, Part Il. — The Eastern
Group. With Map. Plates i. to iv. .. : = ‘ 1
Warp, Dr. L .K.: Inflammable Gases Occluded in the Pre- Peas Vek me Sah
Australia a st sa A 2 a Bee te ae a We paeeye
- Womersiey, H,: A Preliminary Account of the Collembola-Arthropleona of Australia 48
Casumore, A. B.: Two New Danthonias (Communicated by J. M. Black) s# eeu /2
Evans, J. W.: A Revision of the Eurymelini (Homoptera Bythoscopidae) + bi BETAS
Isinc, E. H.: Notes on the Flora of South Australia—No. 1 took 5 ie Hep ROll
CotguHowun, T. T.: Distribution of Myoporaceae in Central Australia = = Os
Rogers. Dr. R. S.: Contributions to Orchidology of Australia Ne toy
WomersLey, H.: A Preliminary Account of the Bdellidae (Snout Mites) of hehe eon OY),
Womerstey, H.: On some Acarina from Australia and South Africa ss 108
CLELAND, Pror. J. B., and Pror. T. H. Jounston: The Ecology of the 2 a
Central Australia; Botanical Notes. Plate v. -s Re = = ” aaa dS:
Fintayson, H. H.: On Mastacomys fuscus (Thomas). Plates vi. and vii. .. i Ber 3)
TrnpaLe, N. B.: Tantanoofa Caves, South-East of South Australia. Geological and
Physiographical Notes ne oS $5 a So wll)
Brack, J. M.: Additions to the anid of Seats phere shes oie 31. Plates viii. and ix. .. 143
Turner, Dr. A. J.: New Australias Lepidoptera Me ae aa is a ae 159.
Isrnc, E. H.: Notes on the Flora of South Australia—No. 2 . re be a eens 1183)
CLELAND, Pror. J. B.: Australian Fungi. Notes and Descr Sidoad —wNo. 9 2 187

Fin.tayson, H. H.: On Mammals from the Lake Eyre Basin. Part I1—The Dasyur id 195
Fintayson, H. H.: On the Eremian Representative of Myrmecobius fasciatus (Water-

house) os ae a ae ee a ne Re we hee $3 = 205
TInpDALE, N. B.: Geological Notes on the Cockatoo Creek and Mount Liebig Country,

Central Australia. Plate x. a rs - da a ‘ et oa cae 206
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS es me ce ae Bs 6 ca ee a oe ellie)
ANNUAL Report j a4 A Pak ne ec a3 ee na ct ay en
Sir JosEPH VERCO ae a es Fv © ie re ae #6 Be me 220
BALANCE-SHEETS - pss a A a Ss ag ie an Pe 229-230
ENDOWMENT FUND at as oe me we so i, un ee, hd ee Ul
Donations To Lrsrary IN EXCHANGE bay ra eis a kgs vs a Be pee 4
List or FELLows, MEMBERS, ETC... a oe = > a ae oy see ek
PasT AND PRESENT OFFICERS OF THE SOCIETY ke 241

Appenpix: A List of Original Papers and other Works Published - etice Boecbin 242

INDEX ays S oe a os a a ae zs a ba) oh S250

ERRATUM

Page 142, for crosus Lam. read erosus Lam.

OBITUARY NOTICE.
STIR JOSEPH VERCO (1851-1933).

WITH PORTRAIT AS FRONTISPIECE.

Joseph Cooke Verco was born at Fullarton, S.A., on August 1, 1851. Both
his parents were Cornish, as, it is interesting to note, were those of a great con-
temporary physician, Sir William Osler, Bart. (1849-1919), another colonial who
was born and educated in Canada. Sir Joseph began his formal education at a well-
known Adelaide school of last century conducted by John Lorenzo Young, an out-
standing teacher and one of the foundation members of what later became the
Royal Society. On leaving school, Sir Joseph spent twelve months in the service
of the S.A. Railway Department, his ambition being to be able some day to write
the mystic letters ‘“C.E.” after his name, but, as he learnt after a year’s drudgery
copying statistics in the office, the training he could get there was too primitive to
lead to his success in the engineering profession, and he therefore decided to
qualify for the medical profession. ‘To brush up his classics, he attended
St. Peter’s College and, in 1869, won its coveted Young Exhibition, a valuable
prize awarded to the best scholar of the year.

Early in 1870 he left Adelaide and began his medical studies in London, In
1875 he gained the M.B. degree at the University of London, and its two medals,
one for his success in forensic medicine and the other in medicine; next year he
secured its M.D. with the medal for proficiency in all subjects; and in 1877 its
B.S. with medal. Some years ago Sir Joseph presented these four handsome gold
medals to the Public Library. They are exhibited in the Coin Room, where they
may be seen by any visitor interested in the academical triumphs won by an Aus-
tralian student in the ’/0’s of last century. In 1874 he gained the distinction of
M.R.C.S. (Eng.), and three years later was advanced to its F.R.C.S. In 1875
he became L.R.C.P. (Lon.). His medical studies were made at St. Bartholomew’s
Hospital, and in 1876 he was appointed its House Physician, and in 1877 its Mid-
wifery Assistant.

His connection with the venerable hospital occurred at a time of great
importance in the history of surgical treatment; for when he entered it as a
student, the cardinal discoveries that the genius of Lister had successfully applied
at Edinburgh were condemned at “St. Bart’s,” but before he left it they were
blessed. In 1923, its 800th anniversary was celebrated, and Sir Joseph Verco
received a special invitation to join in the ceremonies. Ile, with Lady Verco,
went to London, and after an absence of nearly half a century, he was able to
revive his impressions of his old medical school.

In 1878 he returned to South Australia and began practising his profession
in Adelaide. A few years later he was recognised as its leading physician, a
distinction that he retained until his retirement in 1919. It is difficult to sum-
marize his many medical and philanthropic activities during his half century of
active life in Adelaide. For several years he was Hon. Physician to the Adelaide
Children’s Hospital and later became its Hon. Consulting Physician. For thirty
years (1882-1912) he was Hon. Physician to the Adelaide Hospital, and on his
retirement became its Hon. Consulting Physician. He took a great interest in the
formation of the Medical School of the Adelaide University, and from 1887 to
1915 was its Lecturer on Medicine; was Dean of its Faculty of Medicine, 1919-21 ;
and Dean of its Faculty of Dentistry in 1921. He was a member of the Council
of the University from 1895-1902, and seventeen years later was again elected
and remained on the Council until his death. In 1886-7 he became President of
the branch of the British Medical Association in South Australia, and from 1914

Vi.

to 1919 he filled the same distinguished position. On his retirement he was
created a Knight Bachelor.

He was President of the first Intercolonial Medical Congress at its Adelaide
meeting in 1887, when he delivered a striking address, widely reported in the
Press of that day, dealing mainly with the reaction of the Australian environment
on the descendants of Europeans. His medical publications include the important
chapter “‘ITydatid Disease,” contained in Allbutt & Rolleston’s System of Medi-
cine (vol. iv., 1907). In 1926 he presented to the University the sum of £5,000
for the purpose of publishing medical investigations in ‘““The Australian Journal
of Experimental Medicine and Medical Science.”

“My interest in shells began when I was quite a lad and made a museum in
the back yard of our home in Morphett Street, Adelaide. Shells, I thought, were
more desirable to collect than insects, less liable to explode than birds’ eggs and
not quite so easily broken.” ‘These words are taken from a fragment of auto-
biography written by Sir Joseph to explain his interest in malacology, his favourite
hobby, on which he spent much time and money and greatly advanced the know-
ledge of marine life along the Australian coasts. Fortunately, when as a lad he
began his elementary studies, there was a collection of South Australian shells in
the embryo S.A. Museum exhibited in a room above the Newspaper Room of the
Public Library. These shells had been probably named by F. G. Waterhouse, the
then Curator, and young Verco found them a useful guide in naming his own
collection. His greatest treat, he wrote, was on school holidays to find his way
to the Semaphore, then a row of uninhabited sandhills, and scour the beach for
shells. But the schoolboy’s passion for collecting was inhibited by the year he
spent in the Railway Department, followed by another year at St. Peter’s College,
and then seven years in London medical schools; when he returned to begin prac-
tising his profession in Adelaide, the juvenile museum in the back yard had cer-
tainly, and the young man’s interest in shells had apparently, vanished. About
1887 he suffered from an attack of enteric, and when he became convalescent his
cousin, Dr. S. J. Magarey, invited him to stay for a few days at Glenelg. There
Dr. Verco spent many hours walking along the sandy beach north of the Patawa-
longa Creek, and his interest in shells revived. ‘To complete his convalescence he
took a trip to New Zealand, and there gathered a large assortment of shells. They
were brought back to South Australia and the more showy ones installed in a
glass cabinet and exhibited in the Doctor’s waiting room. The ailment that he
once humorously described as “conchylophobia”’ now held him in thrall. His
eldest brother, Mr. W. J. Verco, was a wheat merchant who owned several ketches
that were used to bring wheat from the outports to Port Adelaide. For several
consecutive years Dr. Verco had one of the ketches lent to him, and usually, with
some of his nephews, he spent a week or more dredging for shells in the gulfs
and bays of the State. Defects in the dredging apparatus were carefully noted
and remedied for the next trip; not only were shells taken, but also corals, crabs,
sea urchins, sponges, and other forms of marine life. The technique of preserv-
ing them was mastered, and they were forwarded to the experts in the various
departments of the 5.A. Museum and to collectors in other States. Space cannot
be spared to give even a list of various dredging trips that became his regular
form of recreation. He has left a mantiscript account of these excursions, written
at the time each was made, and containing a description of the hauls, as well as
kindly and humorous comments on the events that occurred on board. If some
day these are published, they will be found to be of scientific as well as general
interest to many readers. Several times he hired a seaworthy tug and, with some
co-workers interested in marine life, spent sometimes ten or twelve days dredging
in the deeper waters covering the continental shelf off the Great Australian Bight.
The expenses, wholly defrayed by Sir Joseph, were considerable, but the results

Vii.

were of great value to marine biology. His interest in the study of shells brought
him into communication with similar workers in other parts of the Common-
wealth; as time passed, some of these died and he purchased their collections and
embodied them in his own. For many years he was Hon. Conchologist to the
S.A. Museum, and his services in that capacity were invaluable. When in 1919
he released himseli from the practice of his profession he spent many hours daily
at the Museum; and when bodily weakness compelled him to relinquish this work
of love, he presented to the Museum his valuable collection of shells and the
cabinets containing them, as well as his conchological literature, comprising
volumes in English, French, and German, some of them very rare and costly. His
shells were catalogued with meticulous care; with each species was a sheet of
specially made paper containing not only the technical descriptive matter but a
summary of its distribution in space and time, and full references to literature
and all important discussions of nomenclature and synonymy. It is a marvel of
compression, and is capable of being added to when new information is available.
It was a munificent gift, the value of the books alone being estimated at over
£1,200.

Even a bald account of the services rendered by Sir Joseph to the Royal
Society may seem to a reader unacquainted with its history to be unduly
exaggerated, One, however, can truly assert that his influence, generosity, and
powers of administration raised it from an obscure position to be among the most
influential scientific bodies in the Commonwealth. He was elected a Fellow in
1878 when it was designated the Adelaide Philosophical Society, and at the time
of his death, on July 29, 1933, was the doyen of the Society. In, 1903, when he
was first elected President, its fortunes soon brightened. He was elected Presi-
dent year by year until 1921, when he declined further nomination; but the
Fellows were determined to keep him on the Council and during 1921-23 elected
him one of the Vice-Presidents, and until the day of his death he remained a
member of the Council. In the year Sir Joseph Verco became President our
Royal Society was incorporated, thereby possessing the legal privilege of owning
property and of being able to sue as well as of being sued in a court of law. One
result of this was that the Society began building up a Research and Endowment
Fund. Sir Joseph started it in 1908 by contributing £1,000; and the other principal
donors, Mr. Thos. Scarfe (£1,000), Mr. R. Barr Smith (£1,005), Sir Edwin
Smith (£200), and Mrs. Ellen Peterswald (£100), were each persuaded by Sir
Joseph to bequeath their respective contributions to this valuable fund that for
ages should radiate its beneficent energy in aid of scientific research in South
Australia. Nor did the contribution to the Endowment Fund exhaust the finan-
cial aid that Sir Joseph gave: at one time the Society was confronted with the
difficulty of properly displaying the large number of exchange publications that
yearly poured into it, and, to provide extra shelving to display them, Sir Joseph’s
cheque came as a great aid; he presented also the handsome Presidential chair.
Those who recall the methodical habits and great care that characterised Sir
Joseph in all his work need not be reminded that his duties as President were
ably carried out: he listened attentively to all papers and his comments on them
were shrewd and kindly; his own papers on conchology were models of compres-
sion and clear in style; his rulings from the chair showed a knowledge of the
Rules and Regulations laid down by the Society; and the influential position he
had attained in South Australia was a powerful factor in successfully urging the
claims of science to the consideration of its citizens.

Since his death it has been known that his benefactions to the Royal Society
have not ended. Lis will, for which probate was recently. granted, showed that
he was a wealthy man. The income from the estate has been bequeathed to Lady
Verco for life, and we all earnestly hope that she may long enjoy it; but when the

viii.

inevitable happens, the whole estate is to be divided among many philanthropic,
religious, and scientific bodies, among the last-named being the Royal Society.
This bequest should substantially increase its Endowment Fund.

The Society has not been ungrateful to the memory of its greatest President.
In 1928 it established the Sir Joseph Verco Medal, to be awarded for distinguished
scientific investigations carried out by a member of the Royal Society of South
Australia. The first recipient of the medal was Professor Howchin, who has
won a distinguished name for the work he has done in proving the wide extent
of glacial action in Australia. Sir Joseph attended the presentation ceremony
and handed the medal to Prof. Howchin. It was Sir Joseph’s last recorded
attendance at the meeting of a Society on which, for a half century, he had
lavished much devoted attention.

ApDENDA.—The “South Australian Naturalist” for August, 1933, contains
the titles and references to all the malacological papers published by Sir Joseph
Verco between the years 1895 and 1931. There are 26 papers recorded, the last
two being in conjunction with Mr. Bernard C. Cotton, of the S.A. Museum.

The following list, kindly compiled by Prof. J. B. Cleland, M.D., gives the
names of species of animals named in honour of Sir Joseph Verco by different
naturalists, as well as a reference to the periodicals in which they first recorded
them :—

I. MOLLUSCA.—(GastTERopopa) Notocypraea verconis Cotton and God-
frey, 1932, a cowry for S.A., W.A., and Tasmania (1, xiii, p. 41); Prosimnia
verconis Cotton and Godfrey, 1932, S.A. (1, xill., p. 46); Nassarius verconis
Cotton and Godfrey, 1932, Verco’s Nassa, S.A. (1, xiti., p. 95); Alcithoe verconis
(Tate 1892 as Voluta), S.A. (3, xv., p. 125, fig. 5); Aethodoris (Albania)
verconis Basedow and Hedley, 1905 (3, xxix., p. 154); Nembrotha verconis
Basedow and Hedley, 1905 (3, xxix., p. 158). (PELEecypopa) Protonucula
verconis B, C. Cotton, 1930. Dredged by Sir Joseph at Eucla (2, iv., p. 223);
Scaeoleda verconis Tate (as Leda), 1891 (3, xiv., p. 264); Corbula verconis
Finlay, 1927 (4, 57, p. 531). (PotypiacopHora) (Loricata) Ischnochiton
verconis Torr, 1911 (3, xxv. p. 102) = Strigichiton verconis; Chiton verconis
Torr and Ashby, 1898 (3, xxii., pp. 215-216) ; Acanthochiton verconis Torr and
Ashby, 1895 (3, xxii., pp. 217, 218).

II. CRUSTACEA. — Leptostylis vercot Hale, 1928 (3, lii., p. 48).
A Cumaceous Crustacean of Geographe Bay, W.A.

III. PISCES.—Syngnathus vercoi Waite and Hale, 1921 (2, i. p. 298).
A Lophobranchiate fish dredged in St. Vincent Gulf by Sir Joseph.

REFERENCES :—1. S.A. Naturalist; 2. Records of S.A. Museum; 3. Trans.

Roy. Soc. S.A.; 4. Trans. N.Z. Inst.
B.S. R.

PR Peterborough
Yongala

estown

Farrell's Flat

Robertstown,

burt
Aalyd Upper R. Light
fe: A Marrab; \

i a anil udunda

\)
8 \ Taree Hahsborough
f tockpty ap da

@ Dutton
Stockwell
Nuriootpa
hPa
apAyck
a
Gnd nett 4
1 R.TORREN y/
Hope Valley
ADELAIDE
Brighton aX
on
Ld? Be pod 90h if
Morphet ao Mt.Bold
Vale i
@ Noaflunga
Dwi
Willunga
@Sellick’s Hill

Scale: (Miles).
10 20 30 40

C —_ __ SAL

Fig. 1. Map of part of South Australia on which is shown, in red, the probable
direction of some of the main river courses [the eastern group] before they were truncated.

THE DEAD RIVERS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA,
PART II - THE EASTERN GROUP WITH MAP

BY PROF. W. HowWcHIN, F.G.S.

Summary

Transactions

of

The Royal Reo of South Australia (Incorporated)

VOL. LVII.

THE DEAD RIVERS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
PART IlL—THE EASTERN GROUP.
By Proressor Water Howcuin, F.G.5.
[Read November 10, 1932. ]

Prates I. to 1V.

CONTENTS, Page
I. MANNANARIE, JAMESTOWN, SPALDING, CLARE, AND WAKEFIELD VALLEY
Cu ANNEL .. ‘ 2
(1) Mannanarie and Jamestown bs 2
(2) River Broughton Depression 2
(3) Spalding and Neighbourhood 3
(4) Freshwater and Deep Creeks 3
(5) Hutt and Hill Rivers .. = 5
(6) Clare . 6
(7) River Wakefield Valley 6
II. Dawson, PETERBOROUGH, YONGALA, Boowoxow 1E, “RIverton, “Stock K-
FORT, WASLEYS, AND Two WELLS CHANNEL ie 7
qd) Peterborough and the North-Eastern Plain 7
(2) Yongala and Canowie Belt 8
(3) Booborowie South £. an Fe a ~ Re 9
(4) Riverton and Tarlee .. eee an 10
(5) Stockport, River Light, Hamley Bridge, and Wasleys are a 11
(6) Gawler, Roseworthy Agricultural College, and St. Kilda... 13
ITI. Rogertstown, ‘NURIOOTPA, Barossa, Elorpe VALLEY, BLACKWOOD, AND
NoARLUNGA CHANNEL ds * fe a 16
(1) Robertstown, Point Pass, and Eudunda if * ne ns 16
(2) Dutton .. ae — A oa 17
(3) North-Western Tributary Upper Light and’ Kapunda Districts 17
(4) Stockwell As a so ae te als o 18
(5) Nuriootpa Be a an a tt = fp fs 19
(6) Tanunda ae st zt _ vi a3 a ee 19
(7) Rowland’s Flat .. - ac ea Pe 3. bs 5. 19
(8) Lyndoch .. ee i, rt. ne by ss fe ens 20
(9) Sandy Creek .. Hs Li a Re ie 20
(10) Barossa and Adjoining Hundreds as aa A: re 8 21
(11) One-Tree Hill .. = ba = on i 22
(12) Sampson’s Flat and Southwards a i ae A f 24
(13) Anstey’s Hill Road (Highbury) .. a us a5 op 24
(14) Hope Valley and Golden Grove... mA Se be Sa 25
(15) A Truncated Segment oy 3 S. em eA es 27
(16) River Torrens .. bs Pye Eu i ay oe 28
(17) Blackwood and Eden Hills .. = ot , a mes 30
(18) Happy Valley .. &: od ate oy 31
(19) Reynella, Morphett Vale, and Hackham . ms ey fon 32
(20) Noarlunga and Aldinga. a” ay 8 te \.. 34
TV. River ONKAPARINGA AND ITS DESERTED VALLEY ne aes = ats 35
V. CorRELATION AND AGE OF THE BEDs .. 94 ibs a 3 a 38
CoNCLUSION ‘ a 2s i bs a +4 39

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL “REFEREN CES” ks a fe ns be Ru 40

2

In a previous paper [Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. Iv., 1931, p. 113] it was
explained that the original river systems of South Australia followed an inclined
plane from Central Australia to the southern coast. The elevation of the Mount
Lofty Ranges, at a comparatively late geological period, formed an east-west
barrier to the central drainage by which these older rivers were truncated and
formed numerous lakes on the northern side of the barrier. Although the rivers
ceased to flow in their lower channels the physical features incidental to their
former existence have persisted, somewhat modified, to the present time. Among
these features the most remarkable are the extensive deposits of sands and gravels,
in a consolidated (as well as unconsolidated) condition, which bear testimony to
their former existence.

In the former paper, referred to above, the western occurrences of these
extinct rivers were approximately defined as to their respective origins and the
channels that they occupied. The most easterly member of this group was the
river that had its source to the northward of Lake Frome and followed a southerly
course by the way of Orroroo, Caltowie, Gulnare, and Rochester, finally uniting
with another trunk river that formerly came down the Koolunga and Snowtown
plain. Our present purpose is to follow up these investigations with respect to
those extinct rivers that formerly drained the eastern portions of the Mount Lofty
Ranges and had their outlet via the plain that is now drowned by the sea in Gulf
St. Vincent. [See fig. 1.]

I. MANNANARIE, JAMESTOWN, SPALDING, CLARE, AND
WAKEFIELD VALLEY CHANNEL.

(1) MAnNnanarte AND JAMESTOWN,

The township of Mannanarie, in the Hundred of the same name, is situated on
a plain, four miles to five miles in width, with a northerly extension which
connects it with the Black Rock Plain. The same valley extends, meridionally, in
a southerly direction for about 70 miles. It is bounded on the westward, by the
Mount Lock, the Bundaleer, and other ranges; and, on the eastern side, by the
Browne’s Till Range, the Belalie Range, Camel’s Hump, and other ranges, form-
ing, respectively, the eastern and western boundaries of eight Hundreds in lineal
succession. ;

In the neighbourhood of Mannanarie township, a flat, low median ridge
divides the plain, longitudinally, into two parts, giving rise to two parallel, sub-
ordinate valleys, that follow the base of the ranges on either side to beyond James-
town. By following the plateau (or middle road) from Jamestown, southwards,
the valleys on the right and left are well seen, Eight miles from Jamestown the
road, going south, comes to a dead end, facing Section 7 [Hd. Belalie], with steep
roads going right and left down to the respective secondary valleys. These,
originally, were united and formed a single main river channel. In the border
districts of the Hundreds of Belalie and Reynolds a low, flat water-parting crosses
the valley in an east and west direction, but the ancient valley passes over this
slight rise and is continued to Clare, via Spalding.

The last-named township is situated near to the River Broughton, which
occupies the lowest position in a broad and shallow trough that forms a peculiar
physiographical feature in the district, and needs explanation before proceeding ”
further with the subject of the extinct river.

(2) Tue River Broucuton Depression,

In the elevation of the Mount Lofty Ranges minor secondary movements of
both ¢levation and depression took place which had important effects on the
drainage. In the case now under consideration the ancient river channel under-

3

went a transverse down-fold, or sag, having a north and south length of 45 miles.
Jamestown, on the northern side, has an elevation of 1,495 feet above sea level;
and Clare, on the southern side, an elevation of 1,305 feet; while Spalding, near the
axis of the down-fold, has a height of only 945 feet, showing a depression between
these marginal points of about 400 feet.

The River Broughton was brought into existence to carry off the drainage
that became concentrated as a consequence of the sagging of the contours. The
stratigraphical features are not affected by this depression, and the streams of the
main valley have preserved their meridional courses—only, whilst those on the
northern side have retained their southerly direction, those on the southern side have
become reversed in their flow, as determined by the altered direction of the grade.

The River Broughton is the most typically defined as a transverse river in
the existing river systems of South Australia. It takes its rise on the Booborowie
plain, fed by numerous streams from the western flanks of the Bald Hill Range,
where it is known as the Yakkalo Creek. After crossing the Booborowie plain,
at right angles, it cuts through the Camel’s Hump Range, crosses the Spalding
plain, and, near the latter township, intersects the Bundaleer Range, where it has
entrenched itself in the strong rocks of the Adelaide Series, excavating a deep
and rough gorge that is continued to Yacka; which, in a straight line, would
represent 12 miles, but is probably twice that distance in following the tortuous
course of the river, It is, emphatically, a superimposed river discordantly
developed on an older system that has become defunct, cutting transversely
through four of these primordial channels in its passage to the sea.

(3) SpaALpING AND NEIGHBOURHOOD.

The township of Spalding, situated near the northern banks of the River
Broughton, together with the Freshwater and Deep Creeks, draining in from the
north, and the Hutt and Hill Rivers draining in from the south, show associated
features that may be considered together as a geographical unit.

The width of the valley, from ridge to ridge, varies from about eight to nine
miles, while the valley proper has an average width of four miles. As a general
feature, the central portion of the valley, longitudinally, from north of James-
town to Clare, has the form of a low plateau, two to three miles wide, bordered on
either side by longitudinal streams, as, for example, the Hutt and Hill Rivers.
This central, meridional plateau is sculptured into rounded, oblong hills, mostly
flat-topped, which represent the original peneplained valley floors, which often
carries consolidated river material. The bed-sock of the district consists entirely
of the upper members of the Adelaide Series, beginning with the Glen Osmond
Slates and Quartzites; and, rising, include the Sturtian Tillite, Tapley’s Hull
Slates, Brighton Limestones, and, at Clare, the Purple Slates of the Cambrian
Series. The strike is approximately north and south, and at, or near, the vertical
in dip. The Sturtian Tillite, which has been subjected to much denudation, and
occurs mostly level with the general surface, is exposed on the western side of
Yongala, and passes southward close to Spalding, following the main platform
between the Hutt and Hill Rivers, southward to the eastern side of Clare. A very
extensive exposure of the tillite can be seen in the bed of the River Broughton,
at the swimming pool, near Spalding. Slates are the dominant feature of the
district and form most of the high ground, where they are but little decomposed,
but are uniformly rotten and decomposed where the ancient alluvial rests upon
them. [See also forward, at page 13.]

(4) FRESHWATER AND DEEP CREEKS.
Freshwater Creek has its origin in the slight rise that forms the border lands
of the Hundreds of Belalie and Reynolds, and is fed by a series of flood waters
that are delivered from the western flanks of the eastern ranges. The banks of

4

the stream are usually about 15 feet in height and consist of alluvium. Where
the bed-rock is exposed, which is rarely the case, it consists of slate in a kaolinized
condition. There is little lateral erosion, but, at one spot, where the road
approaches the banks of the stream, lateral washouts have cut into the banks and
reduced the land, for an acre or more, into the condition of “bad-lands.” ‘The
water in the channel is derived mostly from soakages from the sides, is of small
quantity and intermittent in occurrence. The stream, after flowing for 18 miles
in a north-south direction, junctions with the River Broughton at the Recreation
Reserve, Spalding.

Deep Creek is situated nearer to the eastern ranges than the Freshwater
Creek and has a direct drainage from the ranges, which gives a more effective
erosive force to the stream. It is the deepest of the local streams and, in one part
of its course, shows a sheer wall of sediment 60 feet in height, Nearer to its
junction with The Broughton it is contracted and relatively small, having, by the
absorption of its waters in the alluvium, on which it chiefly rests, lost much of its
energy. It has a length of about six miles,

Very thick alluvial sediments occur throughout the district now under descrip-
tion. Alluvial ridges fill the space between the Freshwater Creek and Deep Creek.
Mr. Michel sank a well in Section 391 [Hd. Andrews], near the boundary dividing
the latter Hundred from the Hundred of Reynolds, to a depth of 150 feet in river
deposits. A well sunk near the Masonic Hall, in Spalding, was in river sand to
28 feet, when it had to be discontinued on account of the running sand and water.
The same result followed in another well situated at a short distance from the
latter.

A deposit of sand in an old valley, between two ridges of Tapley’s Hill
shales, supplied the sand required for making the cement in the construction of
the open culvert of the Bundaleer Reservoir. Vhe deposit is at high level, above
the caretaker’s house, in Section 382 [Hd. Andrews], four miles to the south-
eastward of Spalding, not far from “Marble Hill.”

Consolidated Alluvia near Spalding.

In this district, as elsewhere, there are many examples in which the ancient
alluvial deposits have been very strongly consolidated, both by silica and hydrated
iron-peroxide, The silica, in the form of chalcedony, has frequently penetrated
the fine argillaceous and sandy material, converting the sediments into an intensely
hard and tough rock, and the coarser gravels into massive conglomerates, often
of considerable thickness. The infiltration is sometimes irregular, forming con-
cretionery and stalagtitic masses. The following local occurrences may be
mentioned :-—“)

(a) In Section 88 | Hd. Reynolds], two miles northward of Spalding, situated
on the northern side of the east-west road and adjoining the main road between
Spalding and Jamestown, are several patches of consolidated alluvium. One of
these, visible from the road, covers an area 80 square yards, and at a distance of
about 100 yards further to the northward, a similar exposure occurs of about the
same size. The two patches are on the same level and were originally united.
Some distance to the westward of these, but in the same Section, is a much larger
patch, also having a north and south direction, extending for about 140 yards.
The remains, which originally consisted of clay and sand, are now strongly
cemented and, where exposed, exfoliate in large spherical or irregular masses.

@) T am much indebted to the Rev. B. S. Howland, of Spalding, for valuable assistance
in exploring this locality. His intimate knowledge of the country and interest in the subject
led him, not only to render willing service, but was also successful in making independent
observations on the occurrence of certain consolidated gravels in the neighbourhood of Yongala,
Spalding, and Booborowie, which have since been visited and corroborated by the writer,

5

(b) Going southward, Hundred of Andrews, Section 393, situated on the
eastern side of the main road, one mile northward of Spalding, three more
exposures follow a north and south line. The smallest group, covering about six
square yards, occurs near the northern limits of the Section; the second is about
a chain square; and the third covers a much larger area; in each case the stone
is fine-grained and very siliceous.

(c) Within the limits of the township of Spalding, behind the public school,
lumps of conglomerate occur scattered over the surface.

(d) Following the cemetery road, in a south-easterly direction, about a mile
from Spalding, on the eastern side of Section 398, a ridge occurs, the top of which
is capped by consolidated gravels that extend in a north and south direction for
one-third of a mile, the cement being of a ferro-siliceous nature. On the opposite
side of the road from the latter, in Section 373, on a similar elevation, are two
other patches of a like kind.

(e) In Section 398, on the southern side of the Bundaleer reservoir channel,
on the property of Mr. F. Trengove, is a remarkable vertical monolith of siliceous
ironstone, which, from the road, has the appearance of an ancient haystack, It
stands about 9 feet high and is in contact with a ferruginous quartz conglomerate.
This prominent feature is in the direct line of the ancient gravels, while the con-
necting spaces between the rocks, in situ, are scattered with blocks and individual
boulders of the same description.

(f) Ina direct line with the preceding, after an interval of low ground, the
deposits follow the top of a ridge, going southwards, through Sections 345, 290,
287, and 286, in a length of one mile, extensive slabs of the consolidated alluvia
occur at about surface level, while innumerable water-worn quartz pebbles,
liberated from the old alluvial deposits, are scattered over the paddocks.

(g) On a more westerly line, in Section 3528, southwards of the Spalding
Recreation Reserve, a small outcrop of the conglomerate occurs, and continues
southward in occasional exposures through Sections 342 and 341; also, on the -
opposite (western) side of the main road to Clare, in Section 407,

(5) Hurr anp Hitt Rivers,

These rivers take their rise in the knot of hills that surround Clare, Seven
Hills and Penwortham, of which Mount Oakden and Mount Horrocks are the
chief heights. They follow a parallel course throughout their respective lengths,
separated by about two miles of a broken plateau, as already described. They
follow a low, downward grade, from Clare, northwards, to The Broughton, near
Spalding.

Like the streams situated to the north of Spalding, those on the southward
side occupy the bed of an ancient river, the main physical features of which they
have had no part in developing, but, like The Broughton, they are superimposed
on an older system and, in the case of the Hutt and Hill Rivers, actually follow
a reversed direction from that which the older river followed.

The Hutt River drains the western portions of the main valley, fed from the
higher ground on either side. It is less tortuous than the Hill River, but has
precisely the same general characteristics. It flows (when it carries sufficient
water to reach its outlet) into the River Broughton, at the western angle of the
great northern bend of the latter, shortly before The Broughton enters its rocky
gorge, The Hutt River makes a very insignificant junction with the main stream
by what is little more than a narrow gutter over which a man could easily straddle.

The Hill River is of little more importance than the Hutt River. It is'indeed
a gross exaggeration to call either stream a “river.” The Hill River is seldom
wider than can be stepped or jumped over, and might be more appropriately called
a “ditch.” It follows a most serpentine course, the banks are only a few feet in

6

height, vertical, and consist of alluvia, The grade is low—not more than 15 inches
in the mile—and the current feeble. It seldom, if ever, rises above its banks, and
the weakness of its flow is seen in that, notwithstanding the sharp angles it makes,
fails to undermine the banks at their acute curves. The bed is mostly dry, except
at intervals where pools of water remain, probably held up by the presence of clay
deposits, or older rocks either at, or near, the surface. The bed of the stream is
mostly choked by a growth of reeds. It unites with The Broughton, near to that
of the Deep Creek affluent, which comes in from the opposite side, and is about
two miles to the south-eastward of Spalding. The junction is made by a narrow
drain, while most of the water that comes down at flood times spreads out over
the surrounding land, forming, for the time being, a swamp. Its length, in a
direct line, is about 30 miles. It is narrower at its outlet than it is at its source.

Consolidated Alluvia between Spalding and Clare.

(a) About five miles more to the southward than the last-mentioned
occurrence [see p. 5 (g) | and nearly opposite to the township of Euromina, on its
eastern side, heaps of a ferruginous, coarse conglomerate were observed at the
side of the main road, that were being broken for road metal, A local resident
stated that these stones came from the higher ground on the eastern side of the
Hill River valley.

(b) The most remarkable occurrence of these ancient alluvial remains that
came under the writer’s notice in the Hutt River and the Hill River district was
in Section 571, Hundred of Milne [pl. I. figs. 1 and 2]. It is situated on the
western side of the “middle road” (between the two rivers mentioned), which
here runs parallel with the White Hut Creek, a tributary of the Hutt River and
about a mile to the westward of Hilltown. The eastern scarp of the formation
can be well seen from the road at an elevation of about 80 feet above the latter.
The rock is a coarse conglomerate carrying white water-worn pebbles of quartz,
up to six inches in diameter, very strongly cemented. The bed forms the capping
of a flat-topped hill, which, by measurement, proved to be four acres in extent,
with an apparent original thickness of about 15 feet.

(6) CLARE,

In the neighbourhood of Clare and Seven Hills there is a knot of hills that
intercepts the ancient waterway and forms a local water-parting. The Clare rail-
way station is 360 feet higher than the railway station at Spalding, The physio-
graphical history of this group of hills is obscure. The geological features agree
with those that are present both north and south of this area. It is possible that
in the epeirogenic elevation of South Australia some differential movements of
elevation and depression took place which established local watersheds and which,
under fluvial erosion would become intensified. This seems to have been the case
in the reversals of the streams in the Hill River valley.

On the eastern side of Clare, the Hill River occupies a wide valley, choked with
silt and is subject to overflows. The river takes its rise on the northern slopes of
Mount Horrocks, and the River Wakefield, flowing southwards, takes its rise
immediately to the eastward of the latter,

(7) River WAKEFIELD VALLEY.

The water-parting on which the River Wakefield takes its rise, at 1,000 feet
above sea level, carries alluvial sediments in a thickness that could scarcely be
expected in such a position. Near Undalya the river has cut its bed in these sedi-
ments, which, on its left bank, show vertical cliffs 30 feet in height. After leaving
Undalya, the river swings round to the westward and cuts into the high ground
on its right bank, and apparently follows the western side of the original river
channel,

7

Like most of the superimposed rivers of recent date, in its lower reaches it
takes on a westerly course, transversely to the ranges, cutting a gorge in the older
rocks, until, within about seven miles from Balaklava, it leaves the latter and
enters on the great Snowtown plain which formerly carried the important trunk
line of drainage that came down from the north via Crystal Brook, Koolunga,
Snowtown, etc. At Whitwarta, near the apex of the northern bend of the river
below Balaklava, the newer alluvial deposits are seen to rest on an older bed of
compact, mottled clays, that are characteristic of the antecedent river deposits.

Consolidated Alluvia in the Wakefield Valley District.

From Undalya, the ancient valley is bounded on the westward by the Wake-
field Scrub Range, and on the eastward by the Alma and Rhynie Ranges. At
several points within this area consolidated fine material and siliceous con-
glomerates were observed.

(a) Exposures on the ridge that forms the high ground on the western side
of the River Wakefield occur on Mr. R. H. Dennison’s property. [Private House
on Sec. 98, Hd. of Up. Wakefield.] Shortly after entering the gate on the private
road to the house, in Section 86, several exposures of a compact, ferruginous
conglomerate were seen on the high side of the road and level with the suriace,
Also on the rise of the hill fragments of the conglomerate, as well as white quartz
pebbles, weathered from the latter, are scattered over the ploughed land. ‘These
deposits are about a quarter of a mile back from the river and about 100 feet
above the level of the latter.

(b) At Salter’s Springs, Hundred of Alma [about nine miles south-westward
of Riverton], two outcrops occur in a lineal order. The first of these occurs on
the north-western road, at about three-quarters of a mile from the Salter’s Springs
village, before reaching the six-road ends. A large mass of a ferruginous con-
glomerate lies by the road (on its eastern side), and in the paddocks, on either
side [Sections 37 and 50], there are scattered fragments of a similar conglomerate
and well-rounded quartz pebbles, one of those obtained had a circumference of
13 inches. The other deposit is situated a little over two miles from Salter’s
Springs, in the same direction as the preceding, on Section 14. The larger stones
have been dragged to the north-eastern angle of the Section and form two heaps,
of about a dozen stones each, in a slight depression in one of the head waters of
the Hermitage Creek. The stone is a highly siliceous and glassy conglomerate.
The white quartz pebbles make a striking feature, set in the glassy matrix, when
seen in section. These two occurrences near Salter’s Springs are not conspictious
and might have been missed but for the kind assistance of Mr. Robert Smyth in
guiding me to the localities.

From Salter’s Springs the ancient river-course continued in a south-westerly
direction (to the westward of Balaklava), via Owen and Stockyard Creek, where
it united with other lines of drainage in the sandy plains bordering on the
St. Vincent region.

lL DAWSON, PETERBOROUGH, YONGALA, BOOBOROWIE,
RIVERTON, STOCKPORT, WASLEYS, AND TWO WELLS CHANNEL.

(1) PETERBOROUGH AND THE NORTH-EASTERN PLAIN,

An extensive plain extends from Peterborough in a north-easterly direction
for 40 miles, passing through the Hundreds of Coglin, Cavenagh, and Minburra,
having a drainage in a southerly direction. At 50 miles northward from Peter-
borough the drainage is reversed and flows towards Lake Frome.

This important north-easterly plain runs, approximately, parallel with the
Orroroo plain from which it is separated, going northward, by the Peterborough

8

Range (in which the Sturtian Tillite is a marked geological feature), Black Rock
Range, Peaked Hill Range, Eke’s Hill, Marchant’s Hill, ete. Dawson is on this
plain, 15 miles northward from Peterborough.

Peterborough is unfortunately situated. The alluvial soil, on the north-eastern
plain, is absorbent of the ordinary rainfall which drains from the higher ground,
but with heavy rains the valley carries flood-waters that impinge on the township,
to divert which a definite channel has been cut to carry off the drainage. From
Peterborough the flood-waters take a south-westerly direction, passing to the north-
ward of Yongala (which is 56 feet lower than Peterborough), and blend with
the Nalia and Boniah Creeks, which have a northerly trend and are lost on the
Black Rock Plain.

(2) YoNGALA AND CANOWIE BELT.
(Near the Crest of the East-west Water-parting.)

Judging from the numerous deposits of the consolidated alluvium, in the
neighbourhood, Yongala was in the direct line of the old river channel.

(a) The most northerly deposit of this kind, seen, was in Section 179 [Hd.
Yongala], a little more than two miles north-easterly from Yongala, on the
western side of the main road to Peterborough. It can be recognised as an un-
ploughed patch, about 125 yards in from the road. The deposit covers 6 yards
by 6 yards, with large blocks resting on a floor of similar material. The stone is
a silicified sand-rock, the upper surface sometimes showing nodular prominences.
Large stones of the same kind occur beside the road.

(b) In Section 175 (towards its northern boundary), about half a mile south-
easterly from the last-named occurrence, a similar group can be seen from the
road. The stone is light-grey and buff in colour, and, by means of a hand-
glass, is seen to be a fine, silicified silt, containing well-rounded sand grains.
Surface smooth.

(c) In the same Section, situated at its south-western corner, between the
main road and the railway, one mile from Yongala, is a conspicuous deposit of
large blocks that form the side of a small dam, just inside the fence and for some
distance around, crossing the railway, and also in lumps along the road, It consists
of fine-grained, silicified material, sometimes showing mammillary surface features.

(d) One mile east from Yongala, on the southern side of the public road,
level with the surface, is a small exposure of a nearly pure form of a yellowish
chalcedony, showing red lines, and spotted with small granules of red oxide of
iron, each surrounded with a white aureola. Also at the same spot, on the northern
side of the fence, in Section 174, is a coarser siliceous rack, very dense, in which
sand grains are visible by means of a hand-glass; occasional cavities occur in
the rock.

(¢) In Section 19, one and a half miles south-westerly of Yongala, there is a
very extensive and remarkable exposure of this class of rock. It covers the upper
portion of a flat-topped ridge, either above or slightly below the surface, estimated
by the owner to have an area of from seven to eight acres. It also extends into
Section 22, near the fence. At the southern end it forms a compact, solid wall of
rock, six feet high, with a breadth of 10 yards and a length of 90 yards. It consists
mainly of a white-quartz conglomerate.

(f) Ata distance of half a mile, in a north-westerly direction from the last-
named, in Sections 159 and 161 [Hd. Mannanarie], there is a still larger exposure
of the older alluvia. It crosses the road to Yongala, and at its northerly limits
shows an elevated peak-like scarp. The stone generally is a brownish and coarse-
grained sand-rock, cemented, but not quite so highly silicified as is commonly the
case, except at its northerly extremity. Towards its western margin it is con~
glomeratic.

9

To the southward of the township of Yongala there are almost continuous
exposures of these rocks for a distance of 10 miles, as far as Canowie Belt.

(g) Section 111, one mile from Yongala, near mile post, a few yards inside
the fence, there is a patch of the fine-grained siliceous type, 5 yards by 10 yards im
extent. At a quarter of a mile further, southward, is another similar exposure.

(h) Section 16, two and a quarter miles from Yongala, exposures occur in
the field, on the western side of the road. ‘Iwo large patches, situated approxi-
mately 350 yards in from the road, level with the surface and also in large blocks,
extending over 23 yards by 13 yards, The stone is a white-quartz conglomerate
—-pebbles up to six inches in diameter.

(i) In the next field, 300 yards to the southward of the preceding, a similar
conglomerate covers an area a chain square. Also to the south-east of same,
situated in the corner of Section 15, at the three mile post, close to the district
road, going west.

(j) On Travelling Stock road, opposite Section 96, there is a white silicified
sandstone, consisting of four large blocks, and others, extending southwards.

(k) Section 180 [Hd. Whyte], and on by-road forming the southern boundary
of the Section, situated a half-mile eastward of the main road, before reaching
bend in the road, a fine-grained, light-coloured, silicified argillaceous sand, with
water-worn grains, that covers 64 yards by 300 yards, much of it in large slabs,
level with the surface. Also extends southwards from the road, in Section 179,
and, as seen from a distance, still further south, forming crest of hill.

(1) Eight miles from Yongala, seen on district road, between Sections 164
and 490, and on each of these Sections, in eight large patches, covering many
acres. The stone is very siliceous and compact, cementing fine sand mixed with
some larger grains. Surface sometimes smooth and mammillary.

(m) About nine miles from Yongala, on the eastern side of the road, near
the centre of Section 491, about 400 yards in from the main road (is best
approached from the east by back road), a most extensive area of consolidated
alluvia, forming raised terraces covering several acres. On the southern side the
material consists of fine particles, cemented by silica; including two peculiar
smooth-surfaced pyramids that stand up about 6 feet from the general level, having
a circumference, at the base, of about 10 yards. The northern side of the deposit
is a coarse conglomerate consisting of white-quartz pebbles.

(3) Boosorowle SouTH.

The ancient Yongala-Canowie valley continues well defined in a north and south
direction through the Hundreds of Whyte, Anne, Ayers, Hanson, Stanley, Saddle-
worth, and Gilbert, to the township of Riverton, and there becomes the valley of
the River Gilbert. Within these Hundreds the valley is bordered by the Mount
Bryan and Bald Hill Ranges, on its eastern side; and by the Belalie, Mount
Browne, and Camel’s Hump Ranges on its western side.

At Booborowie South some extensive deposits of consolidated alluvia occur,
as follow :—

(a) The public road that goes eastward from the Andrews railway station
passes from the Hundred of Andrews into the Hundred of Ayers, between
Sections 374 and 379 of the latter Hundred. After passing the first cross road,
the latter takes a rise and the old conglomerate is exposed at surface on the road
and continues for about a quarter of a mile, forming the lower platform of the
alluvial beds. A second rise on the road forms the crest of the minor ridge
[Section 90]. On this ridge, and on the slope, on the other side, there is a very
extensive show of the fine-grained siliceous alluvium. In making the road over
the crest the deposit had to be quarried, and the stones were left by the side of the

10

road in large lumps. The area covered by the beds at this spot, on the road and
over the fences on either side, was proved to be 174 yards, in an east and west
direction, and 43 yards, north and south.

(b) In the paddock, to the southward of the main exposures on the road, at
a distance of 200 yards from the latter, large blocks of a quartz-pebble con-
glomerate, resting on a floor of the same material, form a patch that measures
10 yards by 6 yards.

(c) In the paddock, on the opposite side of the same road (on Mr. I. W.
Hawker’s property), both fine and coarse masses of consolidated alluvia occur.
Also, in the same Section, about 400 yards to the eastward of the last mentioned,
is another patch.

(d) Subsequently to the above observations, Rev. B. S. Howland reported
the existence.of another exposure, situated on the same road, about a mile further
to the eastward of those just described, bordered by Section 81, and at about the
same level as the preceding.

(e) Near a main road, about a mile northward of. the last described, and
parallel with it, there is a patch of conglomerate a few yards wide and level with
the ground. It is situated to the westward of the Booborowie Creek, shortly
before the latter crosses the road [Section 366], and about 240 yards to the east-
ward of the house on Mr. Hawker’s property.

(4) Riverton AND TARLEE

South of Booborowie the valley follows a south-south-east direction and is
drained, throughout the whole of the Hundred of Hanson, by Farrell’s Creek.
The creek has a north and south course and is, in part, at a local base-level. The
drainage is defective and, in winter, swamps and temporary lakes are developed.
On the eastern side of both Farrell’s Flat and Merildin (Mintaro) railway stations
there are well-defined salt lagoon areas. In the adjoining Hundreds of Saddle-
worth and Gilbert, the River Gilbert carries the drainage and continues south.
wards to Hamley Bridge where it discharges into the River Light.

Riverton is situated on the River Gilbert, in the Hundred of that name. The
following observations were made in 1911. A few stones of the older alluvium
were noticed on a rise, on ploughed land, a little to the north-eastward of Mr.
W.S, Kelly’s homestead at Giles’ Corner. Also on the public road, a short distance
to the eastward of Riverton, a few similar stones had been utilized, with some
others, to stop a small washout beside the road. In neither case was the forma-
tion seen im situ.

Tarlee. Observations made in 1921. Remains of ancient river terraces occur
on the slopes of the valley, on the eastern side of the township, the deposits being
more or less indurated.

(a) At one and a half miles to the north-eastward of Tarlee, in Sections
1931 and 357 [Hd. Gilbert], near the cemetery.

(b) A low ridge, having a surface of ferruginous sands and gravels, crosses
the east-west district road, in Sections 275 and 326 and is also seen in a small
excavation by the side of the road that divides these Sections, three feet deep.
without reaching the base.

(c} The following examples also occur in this neighbourhood. A little more
than a mile to the southward of Tarlee, on the east-west road that forms the
southern boundary of the Hundred of Gilbert, in Section 322 (adjoining the rail-
way), there are surface stones of the usual consolidated type, as well as a heap
of the same kind near the fence; the rock is also seen, in situ, in an excavation in
the same paddocks.

The late Mr. J. J. East (1, p. 3), in a Geological Section of the country now
under description, shows a Tertiary formation of a “gritty sandstone” resting

11

unconformably on the older rocks of the chief ranges of hills, He states: “The
most extensive and unbroken series of it is met with on the Alma Range, where
it forms a cap and flanking formation all the way from Stockport to Saddleworth.”
I cannot confirm his determinations in this respect. He has evidently mistaken
a light-coloured quartzite, of the Adelaide Series, which is sometimes partially
decomposed, for a Tertiary rock, The “blue-clay,” which he also associates with
his Tertiary beds and correlates it with the blue clays of the Adelaide Plains, is
evidently the decomposed condition of the blue-metal limestone and shale of the
Adelaide Series. He recognised the existence of the ferruginous conglomerates of
the district, that occur at a lower level, but did not realize their significance.

(5) Stockport, River Light, HAMLEY Brince, AND WASLEYs,

(a) Stockport is the centre of one of the most extensive deposits of the ancient
alluvia within the State. The River Gilbert, an insignificant stream, has cut its
way through these deposits to a considerable depth, As the train, going north, nears
the railway station, these beds form scarps on both sides. On the western side,
a horizontal terrace forms the sky line, rising from the water level to a height of
60 feet. The scarp face on this side is composed of very strongly cemented
ferrtuginous sands and gravels that are exposed in a quarry face where the stone
is broken for road metal [pl. IJ., fig. 1]. The surface of the terrace carries, in
places, sufficient light, sandy soil to admit of cultivation, but a large proportion
shows a rocky surface that cannot be ploughed, The ancient terrace goes west-
ward for three-quarters of a mile and is surrounded by a district road [the
southerly portion is now closed] that embraces Sections 121, 122, 601, 602, and
636 [Hd. Alma]. The south-westerly portions consist of a rocky floor with a
massive scarp, facing west; the rock, on one side, consists of fine material, very
strongly cemented by silica, and on the other, a coarse quartz conglomerate. These
stony patches cover several acres. On the northern side, these deposits cross the
road and are well developed in Sections 604 and 605. In the last named, a low
rise is heavily covered with a very dense, siliceous, light-coloured example, that
is deceptively like our most siliceous ancient rocks.

(b) Along the southern boundary of the ancient river terrace, just described,
the River Gilbert has cut a wide channel in these beds, showing a scarp of the
consolidated alluvia on its southern banks, which can be traced westwards for
more than a mile.

(c) On the eastern side of Stockport the conglomerate deposits attain a high
level. Following the main, easterly road from Stockport, the public school on the
rise of the hill joins on to Section 484 [Hd. Light]. Here the ground is strewn
with alluvium in both free and consolidated conditions, Two river terraces are
indicated on this side, with large blocks of conglomerate on each. At a higher
level, on Section 483 [Mr, Connelly’s farm, in 1913], a remarkable deposit forms
the hill top [pl. IL, figs. 2 and 3]. The hill is conical in shape, coloured white
round the collar and is capped by a layer of reddish conglomerate. The latter is
about five feet in thickness and rests upon an uneven floor of white, kaolinized
slate, forming part of the higher of the two terraces. This bed of ancient con-
glomerate is estimated to be situated 200 feet above the flat on which the town-
ship is built and above the base of corresponding beds on the opposite side of the
River Gilbert. ‘he hill, with its capping, can be seen from the railway, on the
right hand, soon after the train has left the station, going north.

(d) The main road, going southward from Stockport, is bordered on either
side by similar consolidated gravels, or sand. The writer followed a little used
district road that runs eastward from the main road, southward of Stockport, to
Light bridge, near Linwood, a distance of two miles. Blown sand, resting on
harder reddish sand, continued as the surface feature all the way. Near Linwood,
above the bridge, the river flows between banks of loamy clay, 20 feet in height.

12

A feature of these loamy banks is the presence of an enormous number of stalactitic
concretions in the bed. These weather out of the cliffs and gather in such numbers
at the base that they can be shovelled up in mass. In plates, similar concretions
occur as flat, irregular masses at certain horizons, like the rows of flint in chalk
[Obs., in 1906]. The river has, here, probably intersected the remains of the
older system of drainage coming in from the north, causing some rearrangement
of the original sediments.

(e) Following the south road from Stockport, through sandy country for
three miles, the road crosses the River Light at the new bridge (known as Ayliffe’s
bridge). The river has cut its way down through a great thickness of loamy clay,
with steep banks, resting in places on rotten slates. On the southern side of the
river, at a distance of half a mile, is a prominent hill in the form of a promontory,
from which a good panoramic view of the valley is obtained. The hill has a height
of about 170 feet above the river, consists, throughout, of alluvium, which, near
the upper portion, contains a few large, but loose, masses of ferruginous con-
glomerate and a few scattered stones of silicified finer material. Irom the height
referred to, an ancient, mature valley can be recognised, through which the River
Light, as a juvenile, superimposed, and entrenched meander, has cut its course.
On the northern side, of the rivet, about a mile distant from the latter, is a ridge
of white sand, carrying a scrubby vegetation, that is well seen from a distance and
is estimated to be 200 feet above the river level.

(f) Within the river area, about a quarter of a mile below the bridge, the
stream flows over a very strong bar of ferruginmous conglomerate; and a little
lower down (past the remains of an old bridge that was destroyed by a flood)
vertical cliffs of clay form the banks. Above the new bridge ferruginous con-
glomerates occur both in the banks and in the bed of the river, at intervals, for a
mile up stream. A little below the bridge, as well as a little above the latter,
sections are seen in the clay cliffs that show two periods of deposition that are
unconformable to each other, an older and a newer one. The clay banks bordering
the stream have an average height of 20 feet.

The physiographical features of the country under description are of much
interest. From Tarlee, southwards, and from lHamley Bridge to Stockport and
Linwood (in an east and west direction, covering a distance of six miles), there
are no prominent exposures of the Cambrian or Pre-Cambrian rocks, which
suggest that a peneplanation had been reached in this district before the disruption
of the older drainage; and also a base level that permitted the accumulation of
alluvia in a thickness of at least 200 feet. The elevation of the ranges increased
the grade, which rejuvenated the streams and gave birth to an east and west
drainage that became centred in the River Light. The latter, through most of
its course has worked its way down through soft material, approximately, to the
old base level, flowing occasionally over a shallow patch with small ripples,
separated by long stretches of still water and large waterholes.

Hamley Bridge igs situated three and a half miles, in a straight line, to the
south-westward of Stockport. The main road between these townships passes
through sandy country, and in a cutting on the road, adjoining Section 228,
[Hd. Alma], a vertical face of fine gravel is exposed, five fect in thickness.

(a) A quarter of a mile northward of Hamley Bridge railway station, a
shallow cutting occurs on the railway, consisting mainly of travertine limestone.
A little further north a deeper cutting occurs, eight chains in length and about six
feet in height, the chief feature of which is an indurated variegated sand-rock,
partially silicified, interbedded with which is a thinnish bed of gravel, consisting
of well-rounded quartz pebbles, reaching a diameter of three or four inches. The
sand-rock is overlain by travertine limestone and, in one place, these ancient
alluvial beds are seen to rest on white, rotten slates.

13

(b) At a short distance on the railway line, going southward, after passing
over the River Light, another cutting occurs, 10 chains in length, with a maximum
height of 12 feet, the greater part of which consists of indurated, mottled sand-
rock similar to that, just described, on the northern side of Hamley Bridge. The
highly kaolinized condition of the slates at Hamley Bridge is very characteristic
of the ancient river channels.

(c) Two and a half miles further southward on the eastern side of the rail-
way, at the south-western corner of a small plantation, in Section 251 [Hd, Mudla
Wirra], are lumps of ferruginous alluvium, with fragments of a like kind scattered
over the adjoining paddock.

The sandy country, mixed with clay, continues in a southerly direction as far
as Gawler, including Wasleys. The outline of former sand-dunes in low ridges
can be recognised. These are now protected from drifting through being covered
by a mallee scrub, the whole district having been formerly covered by a scrub of
this nature.

Depth |Thick- Depth |Thick- |
from ness from ness
Surface| of bed, Surface | of bed,
in Feet Jin Feet in Feet jin Feet
3 3 | Loam. | 339) 35 | Hard grey rock.
27 24 | Red clay. i 360] 21 | Sandstone and quartzite,
33 6 | Sandy clay. | 377 17 | Sandstone and quartz.
72 | 39 | Red clay. 384 7 | Hard grey quartzite.
116 44 | Sandy clay. 453 69 | Quartzite.
181 65 | Yellow sand. 520 67 | White quartzite with veins.
304 | 123 | White sandstone. Bore abandoned at 520 feet.

The Alluvial Series appears to end at the 304 feet level.

(6) GAWLER, RosEwoRTHY AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE, AND St. KILpA.

(a) Gawler shows a most striking section of these ancient alluvial beds, The
town is built, partly, on the scarp face [Gawler East] of the most westerly step-
fault of the ranges, and, partly, on the flat country at the base of the scarp. The
fault to which the scarp owes its origin has truncated the old river bed, which is
excellently exposed in vertical sections. On the southern side of the township the
beds have been quarried by the side of the road and the material used for foot-
paths, etc. The section shows alternating beds of sand, clay, and gravel. The
sands are often consolidated into a toughish sand-rock, and the gravels consist
almost entirely of white, well-rounded quartz pebbles, in various grades. Numerous
specimens of silicified wood, showing organic structure, have been obtained from
these beds. The edge of the scarp, at the summit of the road, is about 150 feet
above the level of the plain, but it still rises at a lower angle to the eastward in
cultivated ground. Mr. A. J. Sexton, manager of the local hydraulic works, gave
me a nine-inch specimen of silicified wood that he had obtained, in a shallow
sinking, about a hundred yards back from the edge of the scarp, showing an
extension of the alluvial beds to the eastward.

(b) About a quarter of a mile to the northward from the quarries on the road
mentioned above, is a much more important exposure of these beds in a blind,
flattish gully (Martin’s Gully) that, at some time, had been excavated by natural

14

means. As the sand from this locality had been extensively utilized for castings
in the late James Martin & Co.’s foundry, the face has been worked in many places.
The “gully” is about an eighth of a mile in length, in an easterly direction, and
the alluvial face is about 50 feet in height, without showing bottom. The beds
vary from a very fine white or yellowish sand, more or less indurated, up to a
definitely silicified rock. Near the head of the gully is a strong exposure of this
latter type, in which the rock has developed smooth and curved “jointing.” Casts
of stems and roots of trees are not uncommon in the beds. The ancient river
channel, as exposed along the face of the scarp, has a length of nearly a quarter
of a mile in a north and south direction.

The isolated nature of the Gawler deposits creates a difficulty in determining
the topographical relationship which these bear to the obsolete river systems.
Brown, in his Geological Map of the Barossa District (2), gives these an extension
eastwards of two miles, separated by a gap of one mile from the Barossa beds of,
presumably, the same age. On the other hand, they may have formed an easterly
curve in the important river that at one time came down from the north, via
Stockport and Wasleys, which seem the more probable explanation.

It is worth noting, in this connection, that there is a marked contrast between
the water-worn pebbles brought down by the cxtinct Gawler River and those found
today in the two Paras that flow on either side of it. In the latter case the rounded
stones consist almost entirely of quartzite, with few quartz pebbles; while those
of the ancient river are, with few exceptions of white quartz, which is a charac-
teristic feature of the ancient trunk rivers that had a north and south direction.
In an enquiry as to the nature of the deposits that lie to the westward of the
gravels exposed on the Gawler Last scarp-face, the following information has
been obtained.

Many years ago a bore was put down in the Waterworks yard, near the base
of the scarp, which proves the extension of the old river bed in a westerly direction.
Samples obtained from this bore have been preserved in the office, and the local
Manager, Mr. Sexton, courteously permitted the writer to examine the same and
make the following record -—

Depth |Thick- | Depth |Thick-
from ness from ness
Surface |of bed, Surface] of bed,
in Feet jin Feet in Feet jin Feet
15 15 | Surface loam. 85 5 | White and yellow sand.
20 5 | Brown sandy clay. B7 2 | Coarse white pebbles.
26 6 | Coarse sand. 93 6 | Ferruginous grit.
33 7 | Coarse gravel and sand. 101 8 | Fine gravel, cemented.
40 7) Pipe clay with excessively 104 3 | White quartz pebbles.
fine sand. 107 3 | White clay and sand.
49 9 | Sand and ferruginously ce- 110 3 | Coarse, gritty sand.
mented gravel. 117 7 | Darkish clay and grit,
53 4 | White and yellowish sand, 130 13 | Coarse quartz pebbles.
54 1 | White quartz pebbles. 149 19 | Very fine sand.
55 1 | Consolidated white sand. 155 6 | Argillaceous dark - coloured
74 19 | Argillaceous coarse sand. sand,
76 2 | Sand and small pebbles. 156 1 | Very fine argillaceous sand.
80 4 | White sand and white clay.
|

The section, down to the 49 feet level (which was sunk as a well) appears
to have been in recent alluvium, as the pebbles are mostly of a quartzite type,

15

while those below that level are almost invariably of white quartz, a feature that
is common to the ancient river deposits in general. The boring does, not seem, at
the 156 feet level, to have penetrated the full thickness of these beds.

Further information as to the deposits on the plain adjacent to the above was
kindly supplied by officers of the Mines Department. In Gawler South three wells
were sunk, following a north and south direction, passing through alluvial deposits
to 120 feet, the last 20 feet was in gravel. Another well, a little further to the
south-west, gave a similar section, with the bed of gravel a little deeper. Two
other wells situated south-westward of the racecourse, in Section 3,220 [Hd.
Munno Para], a little more than a mile from Gawler East, showed gravel from
the 70 feet level to 80 feet, resting on white clay. Another well, situated in
Section 3,215, about one and a half miles from Gawler East, in a south-westerly
direction, contained a bed of sand and gravel between the 100 feet and 130 feet
levels. Another, a little further to the westward, had a thin bed of gravel at the
45 feet level, and another of 4 feet, between 72 feet and 76 feet.

There can be little doubt that the section passed through in the Waterworks
yard, at Gawler, represents a downthrow of the alluvial beds seen in the upcast
in the face of the scarp; but it is not so easy to define the stratigraphical relation-
ships of similar alluvial beds at a greater distance.

Gavin Scoular (5) has recorded the results of several well sinkings on the
plain, southwards of Gawler. At two and a half miles distant from the latter
township, in Section 3,205 [Hd. Munno Para] a shaft was sunk; and at a further
four miles, in a south-westerly direction, Section 4,151 (a mile and a half south-
eastward from Smithfield), two shafts were put down, all of which gave the
same records, wviz., the first 80 feet consisted of a “calcareo-argillaceous material,”
below which was a “semi-consolidated white-yellow siliceous sandstone” that was
proved to a further depth of 40 feet without reaching its base. The description
of the last-named formation is suggestive of the ancient consolidated alluvium,
and may be an extension of the deposits of a similar type that are exposed at
Gawler.

Roseworthy Agricultural College is situated about three miles southward of
Wasleys, and six miles north-westward of Gawler. The alluvial remains at the
latter township occur, apparently, on the eastward margin of the ancient river
valley, while Roseworthy College farm is situated nearer the longitudinal centre
of the old river channel. In passing from Wasleys, in a south-westerly direction,
the surface features become increasingly sandy, and, in places, too loose for cultiva-
tion. South-westerly from the college numerous ridges of white sand occur that
are the remnants of ancient sand-dunes, held in position by the conservative
influence of the primeval scrubs. These are particularly numerous for about two
miles on either side of the Gawler River, in the direction of Catrclew, Virginia, and
Angle Vale. Indeed, the whole of the coastline, from the Lower Light to St. Kilda,
is covered with fresh-water deposits.

Particulars of a boring put down on the Roseworthy College grounds have
a kindly supplied to the writer by the scientific staff of the institution, as
ollow :-—

Height above sea level, about 320 feet.

Thickness,

D 7 i

arte in tee Strata. Tae” Waele: se eet, Strata. ie-foch

| Surface soil 1 302-5 Sandstone 27
5 Limestone 4 303 Gravel 0-5

200 Clay 195 492 Sandstone 189

250 Sandy clay 50 529 Grey clay slate 37

275 Sand 25 607 Hard quartzose sand 78

275-5 Gravel 0-5 |; Completed 26/10/89

From the above Log the alluvial beds appear to have a thickness of about 490 feet.

16

In nearing the coast the surface features become more uniform and pass into
extended plains that have had a composite origin, both terrestrial and marine, the
material being, from time to time, commingled or rearranged, according to chang-
ing conditions. In following the ancient fluviatile channels through such a region,
dependence must be placed on what data can be gathered from wells and borings,
and these are of doubtful value where the alluvial fans from the higher ground
overspread the lower. The two following may be quoted :—

St. Kilda Bore—Information supplied by Mr. F. McCauley (of_the firm,
O’Loughlan, McCauley, and Smith, Contractors), Section 5,013 [Hd. Port
Adelaide], two and a half miles from the coast; thickness in feet: red clay, 130;
slate-coloured clay, 10; very fine white sand, 30; clay, 6; dark, tough sand, 50;
fossiliferous dark sand, 10; dark rock and boulders, 5; sand with overflowing
water (7).

Sir Sidney Kidman’s Bore—lInformation supplied by Mr, F, McCauley.
Situated about half a mile southward of Penfield, and between three and a half and
four miles north-easterly from St. Kilda Bore, Passes through similar beds as at
St. Kilda and at similar depths, but was continued a little further than the latter.
Total depth, 280 feet. Samples of the fossils from both the St. Kilda and Kid-
man’s bores were supplied to the writer, which yielded nine genera of mollusca and
the foraminifer, Orbitolites complanata, The latter, from St. Kilda, is a par-
ticularly fine and robust example, measuring 21 mm. in diameter and 2 mm. in
peripheral thickness. The fossils have an Older Pliocene facies.

Il]. ROBERTSTOWN, NURIOOTPA, BAROSSA, HOPE VALLEY,
BLACKWOOD, AND NOARLUNGA CHANNEL.

(1) Roserrstown, Point Pass anp Eupunpa.

The physiographical factors that characterise the eastern limits of the Mount
Lofty Ranges resemble closely those that occur on the western side. An abrupt
scarp, facing east, with step-faulting in a throw-down to the Murray Plains, may
be compared with the western scarp of the ranges near Adelaide, only in more
subdued relief. The down-throw on the western side, to the valley of the gulfs,
has given most of the existing rivers a transverse direction to the westward,
while the down-throw to the eastward, on the eastern side, has, diverted the
drainage, in a transverse direction to the eastern lowlands, as with the Baldina
Creek, Burra Creek, Deep Creek (Eudunda), Pine Creek (Dutton), and many
others. In this north-eastern country an ancient peneplanation, coupled with
earth movements tending to depression has obliterated the older river channels,
resulting in featureless plains, deep alluvial deposits, and a riverless region.

In the Hundred of English, at the base of the eastern scarp, the ancient
waterway, on that side, becomes more defined. At Robertstown, on the valley-
plain, and Point Pass, at the base of the ranges, there is a very distinct down-
throw to the eastward with a repetition of beds. These carth movements probably
occurred during the life-history of the now extinct river. This is suggested by
the very juvenile physiography of the district, seen in the steepness of the scarp,
and while the latter is incised by scores of small impetuous streams in their descent
to the valley, none of these streams have worked back their head-waters suffi-
ciently far as to capture the streams of the plateau at the back.

The valley, on its eastern side, is bordered by a range of rounded and lower
hills, which become more defined as they pass to the southward. At present there
is no distinct north and south drainage in the locality. The torrential streams that
come down the scarped face, on the west, are speedily absorbed in the alluvial
of the valley, but, in wet seasons, the water gathers into swamps and temporary
pools [7, p. 347].

17

The valley passes Eudunda [Deep Creek] on the eastern side of the town-
ship, and continues through Neales Flat, with only fragmentary and intermittent
streams that follow an easterly direction.

(2) Dutton.

Pine Creek, the most important waterway of the district, intersects the
Hundred from west to east, passing through the township of Dutton. The sides
of the creek show thick alluvial sediments. The lower nine feet consist of a very
tenacious white and yellow clay, on which rest twelve feet of sand and gravel.
It is possible that the basal clay over which the stream runs represents the local
slates in a highly decomposed and kaolinized condition.

Consolidated Alluvia near Dutton.

(a) About one and three-quarter miles on the northern side of the township
of Dutton, in Section 262, Hundred of Dutton, on the eastern side of the road,
there is an extensive show of consolidated alluvium covering one and a half acres.
On the southern side of the deposit the stone is fine-grained and very siliceous,
exposed in compact masses with chalcedonic lenticles; and on its northern side
changes to a coarse conglomerate. It is on a rise in the field and is visible from
the road.

(b) In the same Hundred (Section 35, Water Reserve), two miles to the
south-westward of Dutton, there is a considerable patch of the old alluvium,
similar to that last described, but more ferruginous. Further examples of a similar
kind occur in large pieces by the side of the road, three miles to the south-west
of the last named, in Section 242, on the boundary line between the Hundreds of
North Rhine and Moorooroo, south-westward of Truro.

From the last mentioned situation the ancient river channel can be traced
across the northern portion of the Hundred of Moorooroo, following the western
side of Stockwell, where the valley is three miles wide. Its remains are very
pronounced, going southward, through the Hundreds of Belvidere, Nuriootpa,
and Barossa. The township of Stockwell is situated at the base of the eastern
ranges of hills [near Truro] in which the Stockwell Creek and St. Kitt’s Creek
take their rise, flowing north-westerly, to the River Light. The valley, occupied
by these and other creeks, appears to be connected with an older channel of
drainage coming in from the north, in a course almost parallel with the Roberts-
town-Eudunda unit, with which it junctions near Stockwell. This will be deait
with in the next section.

(3) NorrH-wesTern TrrpuTary: Upper Licot anp Kapunpa Districts.

The River Light is another of those interesting rivers that are superimposed
on the older system of drainage. It takes its rise on a low water-parting in the
northern areas of the Hundreds of Saddleworth and Waterloo. In its upper
reaches it follows within the limits of an ancient meridional and mature valley,
as a sluggish and very serpentine stream with mud banks for 16 miles, southerly,
to the township of Hamilton. Here its characteristics entirely change. It takes
a sharp turn, in an easterly direction in a course transversely to the physiographical
grain of the country, until at the end of 9 miles it impinges on high ranges, near
Hansborough, which causes it once more to take a southerly direction, and then
westerly, in a great loop. The disturbing factors which impelled the change in
its course were, probably, in the first instance, the faulting down to the range on
the eastward (such as occurred in other similar situations, further to the south-
ward), which drew the drainage in that direction. Then, being diverted by the
highlands on the eastward, it was driven in a reverse direction, which brought it

18

under the control of the great down-throw on the western side and to the western
sea, as has happened to all the others of our upland rivers.

It is quite impossible that the older river, that excavated the broad and mature
valley in which the River Light began its course, could have taken the erratic
course of the latter in its lower reaches, for from the time The Light made its
easterly divergence it developed the features of a juvenile stream eroding
for itself a narrow and rocky gorge. except where it intersected the sedi-
ments of an alien hydrographic system, We must, therefore, look for the southerly
extension of the older fluviatile channel in a direction more consistent with its
physical relationships than that presented by the present River Light.

The head-waters of the former river, in addition to the main channel now
occupied by The Light, included two other lateral streams now represented by
the Tothill Creek and Julia Creek. The three probably converged and formed a
united stream down the valley of the present Allen’s Creek, which reaches The
Light a little to the south-eastward of Kapunda. The valley is continued in the
same direction, but with a reversed grade, on the opposite side of The Light, now
drained by the St. Kitt’s Creek, the Stockwell Creek, and others.

Consolidated Alluvia near Marrabel.

The township of Marrabel is situated on the boundary between the Hundreds
of Gilbert and Waterloo, seven miles east by north from Riverton, on the Upper
River Light, near its junction with the Tothill Creek. A half-mile from the town-
ship, on the road going easterly, a group of large stones was observed on the road-
side, facing Section 1,122 [Hd. Waterloo]. The most of the stones consisted of
a fine-grained alluvium consolidated to a siliceous compact rock. The stones had
probably been gathered from the adjacent grounds. At a quarter of a mile further,
in the same direction, a large mass of a similar rock was observed on the opposite
side of the road. About one mile distant from the township, in Section 1,131,
on the southern side of the road, there is a large patch of the consolidated alluvium
showing a rough exposure, which, above and a little below the surface, covers
an area of two acres. The stone is a ferruginous conglomerate showing white
quartz pebbles and river sand held in a dark-coloured cement. Blocks of the
material were exposed that weighed many tons, while the softer portions had been
quarried out for road metal, with an exposed face of nine feet in height.

(4) StrocKWELL.

The township of Stockwell is situated, as already stated, at the base of the
eastern ranges of hills in which the Stockwell Creek takes its rise. At this point
two valleys converge. One, already described, comes in from the north, via
Eudunda and Dutton; the other comes in from the north-west, via Kapunda and
Koonunga; the Spring Creek Ranges forming the eastern limits, and the Greenock
and Moppa hills form a low barrier on the western side. The country, situated
between, is low-lying and boggy, receiving the flood waters of the Stockwell Creek,
Moppa Creek, and St. Kitt’s Creek. The road that crosses this low-situated
ground (the “back road” to Kapunda) is known as the “Bog Road” and is often
under water and impassable. The country is sandy, forming part of the extinct
river channel, but is rendered retentive by the sediment brought down from the
higher ground by floods. This low area, situated in the neighbourhood of Neu-
kirch, probably marks the spot where the north-westerly tributary made its junction
with the main stream,

Considerable sedimentation has occurred in this ancient waterway. Near
Koonunga, six miles to the south-eastward of Kapunda, the St. Kitt’s Creek has
washed out an extensive area in finely stratified alluvium and small gravel, showing
vertical river cliffs, up to 40 feet in height, without exposing the base.

19

(5) Nurioorpa,

From Stockwell, southwards, the country widens out into an extensive plain,
characterised chiefly by sandy sediments representing the channel of the combined
streams, now extinct, described above. At five miles southward from Stockwell,
Nuriootpa, in the Hundred of the same name, is situated near the centre of the
plain bordered by the Angaston Ranges on the eastward, and the Greenock hills
on. the westward. On the western side of Nuriootpa there are low and broad
ridges of white sand that have been brought under cultivation as vineyards and
orchards, The local cemetery is in these sands.

This country has been interestingly described by the late J. G. O. Tepper [9],
who for a time was schoolmaster at Nuriootpa, He says: “The township itself
stands upon a fertile sand, gradually merging into the sandhills west and north-
westward. South and south-east, more or less loose, either fertile or almost barren
sand prevails to within a mile of Tanunda. Below the sand and mould, which are
of slight thickness at places or missing altogether, follows first a yellowish, sandy,
and gravelly clay, in many places sufficiently pure and plastic for bricks, and from
20 to 40 feet or more thick. Underlying this, and occasionally rising to the surface,
is a white and blue very adhesive clay, here and there stained deep rusty, and
which is remarkable on account of including layers of impure salt, associated with
thin hard layers of ferruginous cement, Even the wells become brackish and
finally undrinkable in those areas which have this formation, Under the blue
clay follows a white, yellow, or red sandstone, porous and water bearing, but of
unknown thickness, nor is it known what is below it, as at a depth of, I believe,
about 200 feet, reached by boring near the hotel in search for kerosene or coal,
the base rock was not reached.”

(6) TAnunpas,

The township of Tanunda is situated on the left-hand banks of the North
Para (or Gawler) River, five miles to the southward of Nuriootpa. The interven-
ing country is a continuation of the same general features with a considerable
development of the hydrous oxide of iron as a cementing agent in the alluvium.
Tepper [loc, cit., p. 27], in referring to this deposit, says: “In structure it varies
from that of a real sandstone, finely and evenly grained, to a coarse conglomerate
of pebbles three to six inches in diameter. Sometimes cavities, as if shells had been
removed, are found in it, but no fossils were ever seen here, except a fragment of
wood converted into brown haematite, found south-west of Tanunda.”

This so-called “Ironstone” is found, sporadically, throughout the district. In
Section 124 [Hd. Nuriootpa], situated a little to the northward of Tanunda, the
house of Mr. W. R. S. Dempster is situated on a hill, the surface of which consists
of a very dense layer of this ironstone conglomerate, which prevents cultivation.
Similar exposures can be followed for several miles. On either side of the public
road, bordered by Sections 631 and 682, workings for alluvial gold are in progress,
while a little further to the southward, in Section 698, on a scrub hill, there is a
quarry in a 3-foot layer of fine ironstone gravel that is used for building and road
purposes. There are many such workings in the neighbourhood, and the. majority
of the buildings in Tanunda and district have been constructed with this material.

(7) Row ann’s Frar.

The North Para River runs from Tanunda in a south-south-west direction
for five miles, to Rowland’s Flat, where it takes a reversed direction to the north-
ward, forming the south-eastward extremity of the Hundred of Nuriootpa. The
peninsular-like area within this river bend consists of a hill of sand of remarkable
extent. The area is, half a mile in width, and a height of about 160 feet above
the river which flows at its base. The South Australian Government, when con-
structing the bituminised road through the district, obtained many thousands of

20

tons of sand from this source, which has made little impression on the quantity
available, The workings at the excavations show a thickness of about 70 feet,
without any evidence of the base. The exposure, on the face, shows a top layer
of 12 feet of pure white sand, under which is a thicker layer of iron-stained sand.

The presence of the chalcedonized variety of the consolidated alluvia did not
come under my notice in this district, although the ferruginous. variety is very
common, but Tepper [loc. cit.| records its occurrence as “a hard grey sandstone
grit, cemented by silica, fringing low ridges”; and “a similar but more jaspery
rock on the hillsides near Sheaoak Log, showing numerous root-like enclosures.”

The North Para River, which has followed the ancient valley from Nuriootpa
to Rowland’s Flat, after leaving the latter, makes a sharp turn to the westward, by
which it passes from a valley of mature features to those of a juvenile stream,
and excavates for itself a canyon in the rocks of the Adelaide Series. This
divergence to the westward was caused by the tilting of the Gawler-Barossa
faulted block, which raised a modified scarp-face along its northern edge, that
formed the left bank of the North Para, subsequently reduced by weathering to
its present softened features.

The river intersects sediments, older or newer, in its course, At Rosenthal
there is a washout of 30 feet, going down to the river, At this point the river
banks consist entirely of alluvium, up to 40 feet in height, but a little lower down
the stream the bed rock again appears. Near the first bend, southward, on the
left bank, there are large water-worn pebbles of quartzite forming an old terrace,
now under cultivation, 50 feet above the level of the river. The older rocks have
a very consistent dip to the eastward; that is, to the base of the Barossa fault-
scarp in that direction.

(8) LyNbocH.

The railway, which follows the North Para River from Nuriootpa to
Rowland’s Flat, leaves it at the latter place and continues on the ancient river-
flats, through the low, sandy country to Lyndoch. Shortly before reaching the
latter township, from the north, it has to make a horse-shoe bend, following the
edge of the higher ground to avoid a low, swampy area on the northern side of
the township. From the latter it continues through sandy country to Sandy Creek,
where this class of country widens out into the Barossa alluvial mining district.

(9) Sanpy CREEK.

Sandy Creek railway station is situated six miles to the eastward of Gawler.
On leaving the former of these stations, the line, on an incline, passes rapidly from
a country of upland features to a sandy valley, or plain, which is still mainly
covered with its primeval scrubs that is gradually being encroached upon by cultiva-
tion. The creek, which is only a shallow ditch, is choked with sand and only runs
after heavy rains.

Throughout this wide valley-plain, from Stockwell to Sandy Creek, all the
cuttings, whether by railway, rivers, streams, and roads, except where these
impinge on the rises that mark the boundary of the ancient valley, are in alluvial
deposits. ‘lepper suggested the former presence of lakes in this country, which
is highly probable.

‘The comparative absence of coarse gravel and the great thickness of finer
material throughout the district, indicate a weak transporting agent, which may
have been in the form of local base-levelling, tending to develop lakes. The
presence of layers of salt in the alluvium points to intermittent lagoons, and the
hydrous oxide of iron would form under certain conditions as bog-iron-ore. Its
presence at the surface, as a cementing agent, may have been caused by capillary
action, from a soluble solution, much as travertine forms at the surface over a
calcareous subsoil.

21

(10) Barossa anp Apyorninc HuNDREDS,

The ancient river system that is so well represented in the alluvial deposits
of Nuriootpa, Tanunda, Rowland’s Flat, and Sandy Creek districts, seems, at one
stage in its history, to have made a breach in its channel and overflowed in a
south-easterly direction, covering most of the Hundreds of Barossa and Para
Wirra with some portions of adjoining Hundreds; the ancient river bed being
represented by the present secondary hill-tops, which are extensively capped by its
sediments.

The westerly limits of this area occur in the neighbourhood of the Sandy
Creek railway station. By following the road from the latter in a south-easterly
direction, the country is very sandy and has a tendency to drift. Mr. R. Paine,
postmaster at Cockatoo Valley, informed the writer that he had sunk a bore on his
premises to a depth of 60 feet in drift sand, but failed to reach the bottom of the
deposit.

, As an alluvial mining field the Barossa district has been examined and mapped
with considerable detail by the Mines Department, under the late Government
Geologist, H. Y. L. Brown [2], and his assistant, H. P. Woodward [3 and 4].
These writers make a distinction between the Older Gold Drift, which caps the
hills, and the Newer Gold Drift, which occurs in the gullies and flats, probably by
a redistribution from the older deposits.

Mr. Brown gives a general description of the beds in the following terms:
“These Tertiary deposits consist of cappings of ferruginous sandstone, con-
glomerate, sand, clay, and quartz gravel, resting on the bed rock, sometimes in
small outlying patches, at others forming large continuous sheets. They are the
portions which have escaped denudation (by the action of the present drainage
system) of the ancient rivers or water-courses which in Tertiary times drained
the surrounding country, They occupy various positions, in some places forming
cappings on hills, in others filling valleys; the difference between their surface
elevation being sometimes as much as from 150 feet to 200 feet. This leads to
the idea that some of the elevated cappings may be of greater age than the main
deposit which lies at a much lower level, although in most cases this is not so, as
the high level cappings are connected continuously and can be traced down to, and
found to unite with, the latter. . . . From the widespread nature of these
beds it seems likely that they mark the position of lakes, or a chain of water-
holes, in which the gravel, sand, and clay denuded from the surrounding ranges
was gradually deposited. The smaller cappings at a distance from the main body
seem to point to the probability of the whole area in the vicinity having been under
water. Of the smaller areas of Tertiary formation the most important is that
which extends from Section 3,028 to Gawler, where it occupies a wide area between
the junction of the North and South Para River.” [2, p. 3.]

Mr. Woodward extended the field-work of the Department into the south-
westward portions of the Hundred of Barossa and where the auriferous beds
crossed the South Para River into the western portion of the Hundred of Para
Wirra, which included portions of the Humbug Scrub [3]; and in a further
map [4] into the eastern portions of the Hundred of Para Wirra, lying to the
southward and eastward of Mount Crawford. Under the heading of “The Older
Gold Drifts (Made Hills and Capping)” Mr. Woodward states, these “are
ferruginous conglomerates, sandstones, claystone (cement), sand, clay, gravel, etc.
These rocks cover a large area of this district, particularly in the eastern portion,
where they form all the low hills, and flank the range to the south-east. This
formation appears to be the remains of what was a lake bed in Tertiary times;
levels, carefully taken, show that there was no outlet low enough to drain the
central part until the present (South Para) river gorge cut its way through. The
lake probably overflowed at the low saddle, towards Springton, and was fed by
various tributaries, portions of the beds of which are still left, one of which comes

22

down from Blumberg [Birdwood] cemetery; there are also two others coming
from a south-west direction” [4, pp. 1, 2].

While Mr. Woodward seems to favour the view that the eastern portions of
the ancient drainage had an outlet to the eastward, in his “Notes” on the western
portions of the field, he assumes that the outlet, on that side, was to the westward.
He states: “During the Tertiary period the main range was out of water; but
two main streams flowed, one on each flank, into which small gullies probably ran.
Both these creeks flowed north, as is proved by the level of their old-beds descend-
ing in that direction. The one on the east side seems to have risen sorfiewhere near
Mount Gawler, thence flowing in a northerly direction, its course being now traced
by a few outlying patches of made ground, and by a general line of low country
crossing the present creeks. The other had its rise somewhere to the southward
and passed on the west side of Mount Gawler and flowed northward towards the
Humbug Scrub, where, at the head of Leg of Mutton gully, it was joined by the
eastern stream. Thus increased in size, it flowed across the present river of the
Barossa goldfield, and so on, in a north-westerly direction, to Gawler, where it
discharged itself into the sea” [3, p. 1].

From the abnormal features pertaining to the extensive alluvial deposits of
the area under consideration, it may'be inferred that they are the consequence of
certain crustal movements that revolutionized the former local drainage system.
That large sheets of fresh water followed these movements is evident from the
extent of surface that is still covered with fluviatile sands. It is significant that
these lacustrine and fluviatile remains are carried on the great Barossa fault-
block, and it is probable that the two things had a physiographical relationship.
There seems to be two possible explanations. One of these might arise from the
tilting of the fault-block down to the eastward, by which the waters of the
Nuriootpa river were temporarily drawn off in that direction; or by the elevation
of the Barossa Ranges in association with such a tilt created a new watershed
with a confined drainage until the rising waters cut out for themselves channels
through the barrier. ‘This seems to have been effected by the rivers North and
South Para (characteristically juvenile streams), and these effectively drained
the area, Mr. Woodward’s suggestion that one stich stream, flowing westerly,
discharged its waters into the sea at Gawler, as quoted above, is inconsistent with
the geological evidences. It is true that marine deposits of Miocene age occur
at Gawler, but the sea of that period had retreated from the locality long before
the adjacent fluviatile deposits were laid down. The levels, quoted by Wood-
ward, may have no correspondence with those that existed under the older
physiography.

(11) One Tree Hite,

Extensive ancient fluviatile deposits occur on the eastern side of the Hundreds
of Munno Para and the adjoining western side of the Hundred of Para Wirra,
intersected by the Tenafeate Creek, This area may be considered as the south-
westerly extension of the old fluviatile deposits seen in Barossa and their junction
with the main river course that followed the One Tree Hill and Hope Valley
channel. :

Three miles, in direct measurement (south-easterly) from Smithfield the road
reaches the top of the western scarp of the Adelaide Ranges. A strong quartzite
faces westerly, near the crest, and just beyond are impure limestones. The
plateau-form of the foothills, the ancient river level, is well seen from here.

The sandy country begins a little to the westward of the township of One
Tree Hill) [Hd. Munno Para, Secs. 4,193-4,230]. A compact white sand-rock

2) The “One Tree Hill,” from which the township takes its name, and as shown on
the map, is situated about a mile to the westward of the township.

23

% BAROSSA

Gawler toe Saat %

ye
ev aune
EE eve ne

fa avall WA
SiS thee T EL) 2 | B10 nS Weir
ree pl TORRE
Kal? ws NN J ai

Ge SCALE.
/

j rrgradize 3

ridge miles.

Fig. 2. Parts of maps of the Hundreds of Munno Para, Para Wirra, and Yatala,
on which are stippled the positions of alluvial remains of an ancient river, now extinct, that
formerly flowed through these districts. Isolated areas occur, on rises, marginal to the
valley.

B

24

outcrops on the road, This sand patch goes in a northerly direction to Sections
3,267 and 1,516; and at a further distance of about a mile and a half in the same
direction, forms a sandy cap on the summit of Gawler Town Hill. [See fig. 2.]

The main patch of this sandy area (much of it still left in its virgin condition )
preserves an uninterrupted spread in a north and south direction for nearly four
miles, and its greatest breadth, extending into the Ilundred of Para Wirra, of
two miles. Mr. 1. H. Blackham (to whom the writer is much indebted in examin-
ing this country) has his residence near the easterly limits of the formation, in
Section 6,382 [Hd. Para Wirra]. Near the house Mr. Blackham has a gravel pit,
from which was exhumed part of a silicified tree trunk that measures 4 feet
6 inches in length and has a circumference of 4 feet. This specimen is in the
macerating yard of the Adelaide Museum.

In the adjoining Section, No. 4,363 [Hd. Munno Para], there is a continuous
spread of sand and gravel to the One Tree Hill township, and, in places, these have
been quarried. On the eastern side of Section 6,381 [Hd. Para Wirra] there is a
strong outcrop of the gravels, forming a flat-topped hill with a steep scarp face.
A shaft 30 feet deep has been sunk on the face of the slope (at the base of this
scarp) showing eight feet of coarse gravel at top, then five feet of finer, white
quartz gravel, and then fine reddish sand, at bottom. Examples of silicified wood
were discovered on the surface of the sandy plateau. The thickness of these
ancient alluvial deposits, when judged by the difference in height between the
height of the sand-topped hills and the depth proved by the valleys and the wells
sunk, cannot be less than 200 feet. Cappings on the hills along the eastern margin
extend the arca, as shown on the accompanying map, fig. 2.

In following the scrub road from Mr. Blackham’s, in a south-easterly direc-
tion, with Kelly’s Gully to the left, the road passes over a ridge of sand, etc., and
rises to the top of a conical hill on the dividing line between Sections 79 and 80
[Hd. Para Wirra], which also shows a capping of sand; from which point, in a
southerly direction, at a distance of about two miles, is Mount Gawler [distinct
from Gawler Town Hill], which has a height of 1,789 feet above sea level. The
Mount Gawler Range was probably one of the heights that was above the fresh-
water level when the auriferous and other alluvia were deposited in the
neighbourhood,

(12) Sampson’s Frat anp Sourmwarps.

After passing through One Tree Hill township in a south-easterly direction the
road descends sharply to Sampson’s Flat, on the western borders of the Hundred
of Para Wirra, bordered on its northern side with sandy deposits. On the
southern side of Sampson’s Flat the drainage goes southward to Gould’s Creek
[the northern branch of the Little Para]. There is a small water-parting between
Tenafeate Creek and a small creek which runs into Gould’s Creek, from the crest
of which there is a good view of the plateau country, bordered on its eastern side
by the prominent Mount Gawler Range.

On leaving Sampson’s Flat, going southwards, and crossing Gould’s Creek,
the road enters the Hundred of Yatala at its north-eastern angle, rising to a steep
hill, Passing over the crest, very hard siliceous and ferruginous consolidated
river sands and gravels outerop on the road and in paddocks on cither side
[Secs, 1,732-1,733]. In Section 1,733 the gravels are quarried, showing a face of
12 feet in thickness without exposing the bottom. In Section 1,732 there are
extensive outcrops of similar deposits on the top of the hill and along the slopes,
not less than 30 feet in thickness.

(13) Awstry’s Hitt Roap (HicHsury).
No ancient fluviatile remains were noted in the rough country forming the
upper region of The Little Para River, but at a distance of about two miles, south-

25

ward from the last recorded exposure, they appear in the neighbourhood of
Golden Grove and are continued southward to the Hope Valley reservoir [see fig. 2].
For convenience this area will be described in a reversed order, beginning at the
metropolitan end.

The Anstey’s Hill road crosses the River Torrens at Paradise at a height of
200 feet [military map] above sea level. As the road rises to the hill, decomposed
slates of the Adelaide Series show in a cutting on the road, with a dip. E. at 62°.
At a little higher level examples of a ferruginous quartzose conglomerate occur,
in isolated pieces, by the roadside,

Soon after passing the Hope Valley reservoir there are more striking evidences
of the fluviatile remains by the occurrence of sand, sand-rock, and fine gravel.
Three well-marked river terraces can be recognised.

First River Terrace—This accords with the flat on which the Highbury
Hotel is situated, two miles distant from Paradise and at a height of 450 feet
above sea level. The terrace extends over several Sections. Opposite the hotel, a
by-path goes down the side of the hill towards the river, Along this path the
alluvial beds are exposed in an estimated thickness of 100 feet; and these, again,
rest on the slates, at about 100 feet above the level of the river.

Second River Terrace-—About a mile on the rise from the hotel is a second
terrace, on the western side of the road, forming part of Hope Valley, which is
preserved in its natural condition [1906] with a characteristic flora of Grass
Trees [Xanthorrhoea] and associated plants that have their habitat on sandy soils.

Third River Terrace —This is the most distinct and remarkable of the three
terraces, at a height of 650 feet above sea level. It occurs on the eastern side of
the road with an extensive flat top and scarped face to the westward, ending in a
steep cliff on the southern side. The rock varies from a soft sandstone to a hard
quartz conglomerate, resting unconformably on the rising ground of old rocks to
the eastward [pl. ii. fig. 1].

Anstey’s Hill forms the summit of the road, immediately following the highest
terrace of the old river deposits, and marks the average ‘plateau elevation of the
ranges at 1,300 feet. The hill consists of a very thick quartzite that can be
correlated with the Black Hill and Mount Lofty quartzite horizons.

(14) Hope Vattry ANpD GOLDEN Grove [fig. 2].

Hope Valley forms the central feature of a well-defined section of the ancient
river course that comes down from the One Tree Hill and Nuriootpa districts,
following a south-westerly direction. Hope Valley represents a valley of erosion
that has passed through three stages. The first of these was inaugurated when
the former river excavated its bed in the slates of the Adelaide Series, to
a depth of over 200 feet. A period of alluviation followed as a sccond stage,
during which sediments were laid down to a thickness of over 300 feet. Then a
second period of erosion took place, when a new channel was cut in the older
fresh-water sediments, to the extent of 100 feet, as exists today. Only small
transverse streams occur in the valley at the present time. The presence of lignitic
material in the sediments has led to numerous bores being put down that have
supplied interesting information as to the deposits.

An Adelaide syndicate put down three bores to test the existence of lignite.
The first of these was in Section 827 [Hd. Yatala], situated three-quarters of a
mile to the northward of the Hope Valley reservoir, which proved bed-rock at a
depth of 17 feet. A second bore, in Section 308, a little to the westward of the
reservoir, reached bed-rock at a depth of 145 feet. A third attempt, made in
Section 845, on the eastern side of Modbury, near the western limits of the basin,
touched bed-rock at 60 feet. In each of these trials the bore passed through sand,

26

gravel, and clay, but no lignite. The South Australian Government then under-
took investigations, particulars of some of the more important bores being sum-
marized as follow :—

No. 1 Bore [10, p. 10; 11, p. 19].—In Section 2,093, near the public road on
its southern side (opposite the reservoir). The bore passed through sand. sand-
stone, and clay; including 65 feet of drift sand, followed by 43 feet of clay and
lignitic material, resting on pipe-clay at a depth of 193 feet.

The Government then put down nine bores in Section 824, situated within a
short distance of the north-easterly angle of the reservoir reserve, of which the
following particulars give a generalized account of some of the more interest-
ing logs.

No. 4 Bore |12, p. 33|—Passed through red and white sandstone, 29 feet;
friable argillaceous sandstone, 108 feet; pebbles, 5 feet 6 inches; lignitic clay and
lignite, 57 feet; clay, 28 feet. Rotten slate was struck at a depth of 235 feet.

No. 5 Bore—Sandstone with a bed of small quartz pebbles, 75 feet; drift
sand, 64 feet; sand and small boulders, 5 feet; lignitic clay, etc., 58 feet; bottom,
white clay, 8 feet. Total depth, 210 feet.

No. 6 Bore.--Sandstone, pebbles, and drift sand to 105 feet; lignitic clay,
12 feet; coarse white sand, 28 feet; lignitic clay, etc., 37 feet; bottom, white clay,
14 feet. Total depth, 197 feet.

No. 7 Bore.—Sandstone, 85 feet; drift sand, 81 feet; lignite and lignitic clay,
62 feet; bottom, white clay, 2 feet. Total depth, 230 feet.

No, 11 Bore-—Sandstone (containing 11 inches bar of ironstone), 64 feet;
drift sand, 77 feet; lignite and lignitic clay, 55 feet; bottom, white clay, 17 feet.
Total depth, 216 feet.

It was found that the lignite deposits do not extend eastward much beyond
No. 7 bore, as they were not present in bores 9, 10, and 12.

For further information see Government Mining Review, No. 33 (1921).

A bore put down at Tea Tree Gully, in Section 5,485 [Hd. Yatala], two miles
to the north-eastward of the Hope Valley group, passed through variously coloured
clays with quartz pebbles, resting on rotten slate at a depth of 178 feet. The bore
was continued to a depth of 341 feet in the upper phyllites and blue metal lime-
stone of the Adelaide Series as bed-rock. [Information kindly supplied by
Engineer-in-Chief’s Department.] A shaft was sunk on the kaolinized slate, and
the latter worked in the interests of the pottery works, at Hindmarsh, for many
years.

The old fluviatile valley shallows on the western side and has been reduced by
denudation to numerous disconnected patches of alluvial deposits, both fine and
coarse, that cap the low elevations [fig. 2]. Gravels of various grades occur under
such circumstances in Sections 2,114, 2,141, 2,133, 2,134; and near the cross roads,
taking in parts of Sections 2,126, 2,127, 1,596, 1,595 [Hd. Yatala]. A quarry in
gravel [Sec. 2,141], near the residence of Messrs. Smith Bros. [observation made
in 1909], showed the following section: (a) At surface, consolidated gravel,
puddingstone, somewhat ferrtiginous; (b) hardish treestone, 4 feet; (c) gravel,
fine and coarse (coarser below) argillaccous in part, carrying calcarcous pipes,
20 feet, resting on variegated pipe-clay. Black calcareous slate and blue-metal
limestone show on the roadside, near Smith Bros., on the southern side of Section
2,143, with a dip. E. 20S. at 35°. The same limestone occurs in a well, near-by,
at a depth of 120 feet.

The ancient fuviatile remains in the Hope Valley district form a continuous
mantle for many miles. In their southerly limits they pass around the Hope
Valley reservoir, parallel with the course of the River Torrens, and then take, as

27

their easterly margin, the eastern side of the main north-eastern road, rising to
the base of Anstey’s Hill, From there they follow the western side of the mam
road to Tea Tree Gully, continuing northwards to Golden Grove, where they
curve rotind to the broken margin of these beds on the western side, as already
described, forming a continuous area, seven miles long and three miles wide [see
fig. 2]. On the northward side, after an interval of two and a half miles, they
reappear in the extensive deposits of Sampson’s Flat and the One Tree Hill
district. In a southerly direction, two miles to the southward of the Hope Valley
reservoir, they reappear on the southern side of the River Torrens, at the Thorn-
don Park reservoir.

Post-Miocene Age of the Hope Valley Alluvia.

The presence of lignitic material in the bores at Hope Valley might, at first,
convey the impression that they could be correlated with similar material dis-
covered by borings at Moorlands and other places in the Murray Plains, under-
lying the fossiliferous Miocene beds. That these respective deposits are of
different geological ages is quite clear. Deposits of carbonaccous matter are a
frequent feature in the swamps and backwaters of large rivers in their mature
stage, and may be of any age. ‘he following are points of contrast existing
between the respective lignitic deposits at Hope Valley and the Murray Plains :—

(a) So far as known, the lignite at Hope Valley is limited to a patch not
exceeding a mile in length.

(b) The deposits at Hope Valley show no stratigraphical relationships with
the Miocene beds.

(c) Moreover, precisely similar alluvial deposits overlie the fossiliferous
Miocene at Happy Valley, Morphett Vale, Reynella, and other localities, as occur
at Hope Valley.

(d) The lithological features of the two formations are much in contrast. In
the Moorlands district, where over 100 borings have tested the ground, beds of
gravel are almost absent, while at Hope Valley they are a frequent feature (up
to 26 feet in thickness), occurrences being both at depth and at the surface.
Glauconitic sands and clays are common in the Moorlands sections, but are totally
absent in those at Hope Valley. Quicksands form thick beds at the latter, but
are not present at Moorlands. The alluvial sediments at Hope Valley, including
the bores and surface terraces, show a vertical thickness of 400 feet.

(15) A TruncaTep SecMenrt [fig. 3].

A remarkable tectonic feature is present in the foothills of the ranges in the
neighbourhood of Adelaide. A crescentic segment has, by faulting, been let down
which broke the continuity of the piedmont plateau, and for a distance of eight
miles the foothills, represented by the Glen Osmond-Mitcham quartzites and
slates, have disappeared. The horns of this faulted crescentic segment are:
(a) at the Stockade, in the north; and the other, (b) at Marino, in the south. The
line of fracture follows the base of the ranges along the slopes of the Three Sugar
Loaves, Black Hill, Stonyfell, Glen Osmond, Mitcham, Tapley’s Hill, and to the
seaboard near Brighton [see fig. 3]. The piedmont plateau, to be consistent with
the general physiographical features, should be continuous between the Hope
Valley plateau and the Belair-Blackwood plateau, Instead of this, where the foot-
hills ought to show themselves, in this interval, there is an alluvial plain, having
the Hope Valley and the Belair-Blackwood sections truncated on either side.
Patches of what appear to be remains of the ancient river terraces occur on the
slopes of the ranges within the limits of the gap.

A deep boring, carried out by the Municipal Tramways Trust, at Kensington
Gardens, near the south-eastern corner of Section 270 [Hd. Adelaide], by Messrs.

28

Horwood, Bagshaw, Limited, who have courteously supplied the writer with a
copy of the Log, is of great interest as bearing on the geological features under
discussion.

The following is a generalized record of the Log, showing the beds passed
through :—

Depth | Thick-! | Depth Thick-; —_—— == ie ee
in {ness in| in |nessin
Feet. | Feet. ’ x _Feet. | Feet. 4
22 22 | Sand and boulders—bed of 610 38 | Brown sand.
old creek. 626 16 | Brown sand, becoming coarser.
60 | 38 | Red clay and gravel. | 635 9 | Sandstone.
145 85 | Clay and boulders. 667 32 | Stiff black clay.
285 | 140 | Yellow clay. 680 13 | Sandstone.
290 5 | Sand and gravel. 695 15 | Chalky [ (7) Kaolin] clay.
337 | 47 | Boulders in yellow drift-sand. 705 10 | Green clay.
368 31 | White, coarse sand. 720 15 | Shaly slate [ (?) Bed-rock].
436 68 | Red sand. 740 20 | Layers of clay and white
443 7 | Sandy clay, sandstone,
550 | 107 | Black sand. 752 12 | Sandstone.
572 | 22 | Sandy clay. |

It is possible that the last 47 feet in the above section represent the bed-rock,
but the 700 feet overlying this horizon undoubtedly represent fluviatile deposits.
The latter are considerably thicker than occur in other bores in the district. At
the Dry Creek bore they proved to be 320 feet in thickness; at the Metropolitan
Abattoirs, 368 fect; Croydon, 395 feet; Kent Town, 69 feet. If the piedmont
plateau, referred to above, which carried a segment of the ancient alluvial beds, was
let down by a step-fault, it would receive the wash from the ranges from several
creeks that debouch on the plain, which, in association with the older alluvium,
may explain the extra thickness of the sediments present in the Kensington
Gardens bore. At the same time the 32 feet of “stiff black clay,” between the
depths 635-667 feet, may represent the impure carbonaceous beds in the Hope
Valley sections, and the reported “chalky clay” resting on “shaly-slate” may
represent the kaolin, or decomposed bed-rock present in all the lope Valley bores.
If the ancient fluviatile remains have been dropped, as suggested, with the faulted
segment, this subsidence has occurred since the Hope Valley river ceased to flow.

(16) Tur River Torrens.

‘The question of the relation that the River Torrens bears to the ancient
hydrography is full of interest. The river originated on a plateau of compara-
tively low relief in the process of elevation, and has, by erosion, kept pace with
the epeirogenic uplift throughout its life history. The river has its head waters
in the neighbourhood of Mount Pleasant, about 22 miles from its outlet at the
gorge where it debouches on the Adelaide Plains, eight miles from the city.

The river basin includes the relatively lower ground bordered by the Mount
Torrens [1,918 feet] Range and Forest Range, on its southern side; and the
Mount Gould [1,725 feet] Range, on the northern. At Mount Pleasant the river
flat has a height of 1,400 feet above sea level. Ten miles lower down the stream,
at Gumeracha, the river is at the 1,100 feet level, with adjacent heights, on either
side, of 1,400 feet. Twelve miles lower down stream, where the river emerges
from its gorge, the normal water level is 300 feet above sea level, with adjacent
heights within the gorge of 1,400 feet on its northern side and 1,200 feet on its
southern.

29

In the upper reaches, where the rocks are generally more yielding, narrow
lateral deposits have been laid down, but when the stream cuts through the hard
barriers of rock, near its outlet at the gorge, the river bed is narrow and enclosed

SCALE

oe ee a aintog Glen Osmond and Mitcham
Quartzites and Slates

&} @ Modbury i" ; eae

Sifis.t i +] Anstey’s Hil
eo “Hope Valley»

x
Aiase b
i Rell] toed,
a Steet
Ae 1 Ea fades ~ ™" © Paradise . : y

ALLUVIAL PLAIN

ADELAIDE

—_ —~ ~ ae
(| Kensington Gardens Bore @

A
“~~ —er M

i
ALLUVIAL PLAIN , : q

, e ~ 6
R Ancient - ¢
or ee ee |

Fig. 3. Sketch plan of foothills, near Adelaide, showing the break in their continuity
and let down, by faulting, of a segment, eight miles in length, together with the ancient
fluviatile remains on top; also showing the truncated portions of the latter, as cappings,
on the platforms on either side of the broken portion. The Glen Osmond and Mitcham
quartzites form one bed, but through a synclinal fold are repeated on the plan.

30

by steep precipitous sides. ‘The absence of waterfalls and river terraces of any
account are indications of a youthful stage of erosion, Rapids occur near Castam-
bul, starting at the base of the “Devil’s Staircase” and continue down stream for
about a quarter of a mile in a fall of about 50 feet. The gorge is cut in the Basal
Grits of the Adelaide Series, resting unconformably on the Pre-Cambrian massif.
In one part of the rapids is a pothole sufficiently large to allow six or eight men
to sit comfortably in it, and in front of the rapids is a hole excavated in the hard
rock that goes by the name of the “Devil’s Hole,” which is said to be 15 feet in
depth, probably excavated at the base of a former waterfall that has now been
reduced to rapids.“

With respect to the geological age of the river, the evidences seem to suggest
that it was called into existence under the deformation that was incidental to the
elevation of the Mount Lofty Ranges. In that movement the country received a
tilt to the westward—a pitch-down in the direction of the fault-trough—which
became the controlling factor in determining the lines of drainage on the southern
side of the uplift, having a westerly direction.

While the river shows juvenile characteristics, as already described, it is
evidently of considerable antiquity, as it has incised its bed through some of the
hardest rocks to a depth of at least 1,400 feet. The fact that it has been able to
keep its course open to the westward is proof of the very slow movements operat-
ing in the elevation of the ranges, and supplies a rough index datum in estimating
the age of this Pleistocene (or earlier) earth movement.

(17) BLackwoop anp Epen Iiitys.

The steep faces of the Mitcham and Brighton hills mark the limits of the
Adelaide Plain on its southern side where the highlands curve round to the coast-
line. The main South Road rises to the plateau at Tapley’s Hill, at which eleva-
tion a fine panoramic view of the Belair-Blackwood plateau can be obtained,
bounded, on the eastward, by the ranges that form the Upper Sturt platform levels.

The Belair-Blackwood plateau is, really, a broken continuation of the Hope
Valley plateau, at about the same level and with similar physical features. “Che
most of the surface in the neighbourhood of Blackwood consists of a loose, sandy
soil, especially on the western side from the railway, and southwards. Some
parts are under cultivation, while other portions are still in a virgin condition of
sandy scrub. On the northern side of the railway station a deep cutting has been
made in the beds, partly tunnelled by the railway, showing a face of about 20 feet
at the southern end of the cutting, where the alluvial beds rest unconformably on
rotten slates of the Adelaide Series. /

The beds consist, more or less, of cemented sand-rock, irregularly stained
by iron oxide. Lumps of similar rock are widely scattered over the district,
indicating the presence of these beds below the surface. In the approach to the
railway station an interesting section is exposed [pl. iii., fig. 2] of an ancient river
channel filled with fluviatile deposits that are not seen at the surface level and
have no relationship to any form oi existing drainage.

On the western side these deposits extend to Eden Hills, forming a high-
level platform at about 200 feet above the Eden railway station. At this level, a
little to the eastward of the Friends’ Meeting House, indurated sand-rock is seen
on the road and in the gully, on the left. The softer portions of the formation
have been excavated for sand.

these interesting rock structures in the bed of the river have been destroyed.

31

dark-coloured, carbonaceous, sandy clay, very absorbent and boggy, in wet seasons,
and deeply cracked during the dry. It could not have originated in such a position,
and suggests its former occurrence as a back-water or stagnant pool in a stream.

At Mr. Wade's brickyard, situated a little to the southward of the last named,
the following section was noted [Observation made in 1918] :—Top clay (soft),
allowing for rise in the ground, 20 feet; mottled clay, 6 feet; white, very fine,
indurated sand bed, containing isolated pebbles up to six inches in diameter,
6 feet; giving a total of 32 feet. Bed-rock, rotten slates penetrated by quartz
veins.

On the Belair side, a capping of sand-rock is seen in many places, Near the
Inebriate Retreat [1904] indurated sand-rock, covered by dark-coloured clay was
seen exposed in waterholes, having a thickness of 8 feet, without bottoming,

in a south-westward direction and nearly due south of the Eden railway
station, high-level alluvium forms cappings on the flat surfaces on both sides of
the Blackwood Creek, south-westward of the Metropolitan brick works; also on
the higher levels, bordering the Sturt River, in the same locality.

(18) Happy VAtiey,

By a curious coincidence the three metropolitan reservoirs, namely; Hope
Valley, Thorndon Park, and Happy Valley, are situated within the channel of the
ancient river bed, the depression between the ranges being favourable for water
storage. The first two mentioned are on the northern side of the great break in
the foothills, and the third is on the southern side. Thorndon Park reservoir,
which is somewhat affected by the faulted segment, is 100 feet lower than the
others, while Hope Valley and Happy Valley are, respectively, about the same
height with regard to sea level.

The reservoir at Happy Valley is situated on an extensive ancient river
terrace, which forms the floor on which the water rests and exhibits scarp faces
on two sides, These remains are among the most impressive of their kind in
South Australia. The rock varies from an argillaceous to a siliceous sandstone,
of a pure white to a reddish, mottled colour, and from a consistency that is some-
what easily acted upon by the weather to that of a very compact, weather-resisting —
rock. A channel has been excavated on the southern side of the reservoir to
convey the overflow into the Field River. This channel is bordered on its southern
side by cliffs of the sandstone rock, varying in heights to 25 feet, which are con-
tinuous in a westerly direction for one and a quarter miles. At the south-westerly
angle of the reservoir, a bridge on the main road crosses this channel. Here the
beds have an exposed thickness of 15 feet, with vertical walls and a solid floor
which appears to be impervious to the water resting upon it. From this point the
water follows an excavated canyon-like channel, in the same rock, for a quarter
of a mile, when it spills over into lower ground as it unites with the natural
drainage of the district. The Hope Valley scdiments rest on the decomposed
slates of the Adelaide Series, while the Happy Valley deposits rest, in part, on
the eroded beds of the fossiliterous Miocene.

In 1904, Basedow (13) noted these occurrences at Happy Valley, but described
(following Tate) the fossiliferous beds, as Eocene, and the alluvial beds, as
Miocene Sandstone.

Evidences of the great width of the ancient river valley are abundant in the
surrounding neighbourhood. On the eastern side, opposite the reservoir, thick
deposits of sand occur on the slopes towards Cherry Gardens. The cemetery at
Cherry Gardens, as well as several of the adjacent Sections, situated at a distance
of four miles from the reservoir, has a surface of fine alluvial sand, which may

32

possibly indicate a lateral tributary of the main stream coming in from an easterly
direction. These high level positions seem to connect with those at Blackwood,
which are about at the same elevation,

Going southwards from the Happy Valley reservoir the ancient river deposits
are continuous for many miles, clothing the floor and sides of a well-defined valley.
Immediately adjacent to the reservoir are numerous vineyards, the soils of which
are conspicuously sandy. Within half a mile southward of the reservoir, the foot-
hills, on the eastern side, show a terrace of the variegated sandstone in which the
buildings of the Horndale winery have been set, by excavations, in successive
elevations, to a height of 60 feet; and a bore on the premises penetrated the same
rock to a depth of 40 feet without reaching its base. At a further distance of
three-quarters of a mile in a south-westerly direction, as reported by Basedow,
a bore put down at the Vale Royal winery passed throtgh 30 feet of the same
kind of rock without reaching bottom.

(19) Reynetta, MorpHetr VALE, AND Hacknam.

The ancient river valley in this neighbourhood tends a little west of south
with a gentle down-grade in that direction. There is no longitudinal drainage in
the valley, and the streams that debouch from the hills on the eastern side are
rapidly absorbed as they reach the valley flats. The Adelaide-Willunga railway
follows the western side of the valley, passing through many cuttings between
Reynella and Noarlunga, most of which are in the alluvial deposits of the extinct
river. The following occurrences may be noted :—

(a) One mile before reaching Reynella from the northward, the main south
road passes by a bridge over the railway where the latter runs through a deep
cutting of the ancient river sediments. These are of a light-coloured, sandy nature,
false-bedded ; about 20 feet are exposed in the section, and the beds are 424 feet
above sea level.

(b) On the southern side of Reynella the railway makes a deep cutting
through a ridge that shows a stratigraphical unconformity. The lower 25 feet
consist of rotten slate, nearly horizontal in the bedding, with a slight anticlinal
fold at the southern end of the cutting. Resting on these slates are 15 feet of
variegated, fluviatile sand-rock.

(c) A boring at Reynella (on the property of Mr. F. L. Byard, three-quarters
of a mile to the southward of the Happy Valley reservoir, and situated on a flat
about 40 feet below the reservoir level) was carried out by Mr. E. 5. Horwood.
The contractor reported that soft sand and sedimentary soils were met with to a
depth of 247 feet, including a bed of brown coal, 18 inches thick, at a depth of
70 feet, and another similar bed, 6 inches thick, at a lower level, At the depth of
247 feet the bore entered hard rocks of the Adelaide Series [‘“The Register,”
January 3, 1922]. It seems probable that this section could be correlated with the
beds passed through in the borings at Hope Valley, referred to above; or, other-
wise, the sub-Miocene lignitic series.

(d) At the 184 mile-post (three-quarters of a mile southward of Reynella)
a cutting occurs in the Purple Slates, 9 feet in height, with a dip of 35° (or more)
W.S.W. Portions are much kaolinized. No alluvial remains occur in this cutting.
The railway here makes a curve to the south-east that carries the line more into
the valley.

(e) At the 194 mile-post (three-quarters of a mile before reaching Morphett
Vale) a deep cutting, that reaches a maximum height of 35 feet, exhibits some
interesting features. With the exception of a few feet at the surface, the whole
of the section consists of the characteristic variegated sand-rock, which has been

33

greatly eroded by rain and has thereby developed a secondary cliff on the face.
Differential weathering has produced cavities, stalactitic forms, and deep rain
gushes that cause rapid changes in the wearing away of the sides. The cutting is
a quarter of a mile long. The base of the beds is not seen.

(f) At the 195 mile-post, shortly before reaching the Morphett Vale railway
station (which is 78 feet lower than that at Reynella), the railway tends easterly
towards the present valley flat. On the western side of the railway, near Morphett
Vale, ihe consolidated sand-rock forms a considerable ridge with its slope towards
the line. The crest of the ridge is covered by a layer of loose and bleached sand
that is partly wind-blown. Near the highest point this sand is about four feet in
thickness, under which is a foot of black, rather carbonaceous sand, which probably
represents an old surface layer with vegetation. Under this, again, is a bed of
yellowish sand, two feet in thickness. The true floor of undisturbed sediments
underlies the latter, consisting of the usual indurated sand-rock, carrying, in
places, thin layers of travertine limestone. The face of the ridge, towards the
valley, is moderately steep, and as the prevailing wind that acts on the exposed
side is evidently a south-easterly one, that side of the hill has been bared of sand,
exposing the indurated alluvial beds, while the disintegrated sand has been carried
by the wind to the crest and spread over the neighbouring fields in that direction.
There are several acres bared in this way, and the older alluvial deposits have
become deeply channelled by the rain on the slopes of the hill—in one instance
the rain has cut out a gutter six feet in depth. This sandy ridge has been the
camping ground of aborigines. Several circles of stones were noticed, still in
position, that had been used for cooking purposes, and a large number of their
chippings were scattered over the bared floor and patches of charcoal occurred
in the undisturbed layer of sand at the top. These stone chippings were observed
throughout the four feet of loose sand on the top of the hill, and on the bared
floor, but there were no signs of them in the indurated sands.

(g) The ridge, on its southern side, slopes down to the Morphett Vale Creek,
by which it is intersected, while the old river deposits appear again on the other
side of the ercek, and are once more exposed by the railway in the first cutting on
the line after passing the Morphett Vale railway station, at a quarter of a mile
distance from the latter. The cutting shows a maximum height of 40 feet
[pl. iv., fig. 1], and with the exception of two and a half feet of surface soil,
consists entirely of the usual highly-coloured rock in white and red. A deep red
has been the original feature, as to colour, the white patches and vertical lines
having been caused by the solvent action of rain water on the iron-stained grains
of sand.

(h) The ridge is continued on the eastern side of the cutting, just described,
in a gradual slope that extends to the centre of the valley. In this extension of
the fluviatile remains the upper portion, having a thickness of several feet, consists
of disintegrated sand-rock, more or less wind-blown into hummocks and depres-
sions that carry a characteristic flora of native pines, Banksia, and an undergrowth
of Mesembrianthemum. A space of about an acre has been wind-blown and bared
to the top of the red sand-rock, resting on which a considerable number of chipped
stones, by the aborigines, occur. Ag the slope of the ground nears the valley floor
the vegetation changes to good-sized gum trees,

At the township of Morphett Vale there is an outlier of the fossiliferous
Miocene in the form of glauconitic clay and sands. It can be seen in a road
cutting at the back of the township, and was also proved in sinking a well opposite
to the institute. Samples from the latter were given to the writer in March, 1886,
by Mr, King, These Miocene deposits occur at a higher level than the ancient
alluvial beds and were eroded by the former river when cutting its channel,

34

(i) The next cutting on the line occurs shortly before reaching Hackham rail-
way station. The embankment, connecting the two cuttings, in a length of ten chains,
has been constructed entirely of the stone quarried from the cutting near Morphett
Vale, described above. The face of the Hackham cutting has a height of about
24 feet and is interesting as showing a stratigraphical junction of the ancient
fluviatile system and the fossiliferous Miocene. | Pl. iv., fig. 2.] The latter, at
the southern end of the cutting, forms a low anticline with a maximum dip of
5°S. The railway, also, has a gradient of 1 in 45, rising north. This, with the
slight rise of the Miocene in the direction of the upgrade, thins out the alluvial
beds and the cliffs consist mainly of Miocene. In the latter Turritella aldingae
is a very common fossil, but as the beds have been letched of their lime the fossils
occur only as impressions anid casts, the lime, to some extent, being replaced by
silica. The alluvial beds are of the usual type and include a bed of small gravel
which thickens towards the southern end. The pebbles consist almost entirely of
white quartz, much water-worn. The alluvial sand-rock is also calcareous, in
places, through proximity to the Miocene, and the latter has also led to the forma-
tion of travertine near the surface. At the southern end of the railway cutting
the main road comes within a few yards of the latter, and in the road cutting a
very similar geological section is seen, as, also, in the ground at the back of the
Hackham railway station, and on a district road that goes westerly from the latter.
In a low cutting on the main road, on the southern side of the last-named village,
a reddish sand-rock is exposed, mixed with travertine.

An Ancient River Bed seen in the Railway Cutting, about a mile before
yeaching Hallett's Cove from Adelaide,

The bed rests directly on the fine-grained quartzites of the Purple Slates
Series. The pebbles in the bed are highly water-worn and vary in size up to two feet,
the average being about a foot in diameter. They show a glaze or polish that reflects
strongly in the sunlight. ‘hey are contained in a darkish-coloured indurated
mudstone. The pebbles can be easily dislodged from the matrix and leave behind
a smooth surface with a cast of their outline, The exposure is over 100 yards in
length. There is no drainage in the neighbourhood with which they can be asso-
ciated, The stream appears to have had, approximately, a north and south direc-
tion, and was, probably, a lateral contributory to the main river that drained the
St. Vincent Plain before the incoming of the sea.

(20) NosrLunGA AND ALDINGA.

At a little more than a mile in a south-westerly direction from Hackham, on
a north-south district road, between Sections 46 and 47 [Hd. Noarlunga], water-
worn pebbles occtir on ploughed land about 80 feet above the main road. The
larger stones, up to a foot in diameter, have been gathered from the land and
thrown over the fence on to the road. Fluviatile deposits also occur on the opposite
side of the valley. Here the stone has been quarried to a small extent. The upper
portion of the bed, by disintegration, makes a loose and sandy soil.

Approaching Noarlunga and the banks of The Onkaparinga, the ancient sedi-
ments are much in evidence, On the road, near the church, where the road goes
sharply down to the river level, a bed of gravel, containing large stones, is seen
sn section. The land along the northern banks of The Onkaparinga is very sandy,
while on the southern side of the river the evidences are still more marked. Ata
height of about 200 feet above the river level the entire surface has a thick deposit
of indurated red sand. The superficial loose sand has been removed by the wind,
exposing the undisturbed sand-rock that, from a distance, appears as a conspicuous
red patch. On this bared ground, deeply eroded by rain channels, many stone
chippings of the aborigines were found. [Observation made in May, 1904. |

35

These deposits can be traced, going easterly, along the southern boundary
lines of Sections 72, 19, 20 and 65, following the ridge as far as Section 68 [Hd.
Willunga] at Sea View, the residence of the late Chief Justice, Sir Samuel Way,
(where indurated gravels surround the house) covering an east and west distance
of two and a half miles,

On the main road connecting Noarlunga and Aldinga, as the road approaches
the margin of the wide valley on which the latter township is situated, several
deep cuttings are passed through in which good sections of the old fluviatile beds
are exposed. These beds do not show a dip to the valley but are horizontal and
truncated, marking stages when the valley sediments stood at a much higher level
than at present.

This great northern river, now extinct, formed a junction with another river
that came from the east, now represented, in part, by The Onkaparinga, which
will be considered in the next section.

IV. RIVER ONKAPARINGA AND ITS DESERTED VALLEY.

A group of hills around Mount Pleasant, Mount Torrens, and McVitties Till,
with their respective ranges, form an east-west water-parting in which several
rivers take their rise. Reedy Creek flows eastward to the Murray, while the Rivers
Torrens and Onkaparinga flow westward to Gulf St. Vincent.

The Upper Onkaparinga, as a sluggish stream, flows through open country
that has subdued relief, passing the townships of Charleston, Woodside, and
Balhannah. Some of the head waters of the Onkaparinga have been captured by
the younger and more energetic River Torrens. There is a striking contrast
between the Upper and the Lower Onkaparinga. Instead of widening out, as it
nears its outlet, it contracts its valley area and becomes an entrenched meander,
held within canyon-like walls. This reversal of the usual order in river develop-
ment is explained by the fact that The Onkaparinga, at one time in its history,
changed its course in its lower reaches, forsaking its original channel and excavat-
ing a new one.

The point at which this divergence took place appears to have been in the
neighbourhood of Mount Bold, The river, after passing the latter, makes a great
loop in a sudden turn to the southward, followed by an equally sharp turn to the
northward. It was at this most southerly bend that the river appears to have
changed its course. Here the high rocks, on its left banks, end abruptly, and an
alluvial bank takes their place which, divergently from the river, is continued in
valley form for many miles in a westerly direction and carries all the evidences of
being the deserted channel of an important river. It is bounded on its southern
side, in part, by the Saddle Bags Range, and, on its northern, by the higher ground
through which the present River Onkaparinga has its deep-seated hed.

Mr, Durrant, a local gold digger, informed the writer that a shaft had been
sunk in Section 305 [Hd. Kuitpo], at the southern bend of the river where the
river is supposed to have changed its course, that passed through sand and gravel
for more than 100 feet without reaching bed-rock ; the upper part of the shaft went
through a quartz-pebble conglomerate, evidences of which can be seen on the
surface to this day. The width of the ancient alluvial deposits in this locality is
defined on its northern side by Sections 756 and 757 (the property of Elijah White
and Son) ) at a height of 270 feet above the level of the river. The most of the
hill top is covered with more or less consolidated coarse sand and conglomerate
consisting of white, water-worn quartz. The deposits have been worked showing

( The personal references in this district were made from observations and notes
taken in October, 1908,

36

a quarry face of 5 feet in thickness, without exposing the base, the material having
been utilized in the construction of the adjacent road.

On the southern side of the valley, commencing at the southerly bend of the
river, similar material skirts the side of the Saddle Bags Range. A. very distinct
ancient river terrace with a scarp face of sand and conglomerate continues for
some distance parallel with the new road. (lately constructed in connection with
the building of the weir of the Mount Bold reservoir). The terrace is some
50 feet above the level of the road and its material has been utilized for making the
latter.

From this point of proximity to the river the ancient alluvial deposits continue,
uninterruptedly, in a south-westerly direction to the margin of Gulf St. Vincent.
A line taken across the valley, in the neighbourhood of Clarendon, supplies the
following evidences, :

On the southern side of Clarendon is a ridge known as Pickett’s Hill which
runs parallel with the river and is 240 feet above it. At one mile from Clarendon,
near the top of the hill mentioned and on the southern side of the crest [Sec. 758,
Hd. Kuitpo], a cutting on the road shows a striking section of the consolidated
alluvial beds, 14 feet in thickness, resting unconformably on rotten slates. The
alluvial beds do not follow the slope of the hill, but are horizontal to the plane of
the valley below. At a somewhat higher level than the cutting on the road, the
beds curve round slightly to the northward, passing through the grounds of Mr.
T. B. Brooks [Sec. 745], following the southern side of the crest of the ridge at
a height of 300 feet above the Onkaparinga, but are not seen on the river side
of the hill.

At a lower level, going southerly, Baker’s Gully and the Kangarilla Flats,
including the cemetery and blockers’ settlements, consist entirely of sand -or
coarser alluvial material. On Mr. Edward Steer’s ground, Sections 840 and 826,
there are large deposits of very clean sand and gravel, In the first-named Section
the gravel is about 12 feet in thickness, resting on sand, ‘The pebbles are mostly
quartz, limited to two inches diameter, mostly smaller, The coarser sand and such
stones as passed through a quarter-inch mesh were obtained here for the cement
in constructing the Clarendon weir, amounting to 4,000 yards of material. From
Section 826, situated about half a mile from the last mentioned, 600 yards were
obtained for the same purpose.

Continuing southwards, on Joseph Oakley’s land, in Section 854, a well was
sunk in gravel, clay, and marl, to a depth of 20 feet, below which was 20 feet of
quicksand which led to the relinquishing of the sinking, Samples of silicified
wood were found in this shaft. On the adjoining Section, 166, southwards, owned
by C. E, Parsons, 80 feet of quicksand was met with. The well was bricked up,
but the run of fine sand between the bricks was so great that the whole quickly
collapsed. The line of section, north and south, just described, proves that the
ancient river valley at this part was, at least, three miles wide.

What was probably a tributary of the river that formerly flowed down this
wide valley, came in from the south-east, between ranges now represented by
Mount Panorama and Knott’s Hill, on the eastern side, and by Wickham’s Full
and low ranges on the western. The writer entered this valley by Stony Nob on
the western side of Mount Panorama. The valley is flat and shallow, covered by
a thick deposit of white sand which forms the bed of Peters’ Creek, on the one
side, and a heavy sandy road on the other. The valley was followed as far as
the Knott’s Hill school-house but was not traced further. It is probable that the
Meadows Creek has captured the upper portions of Peters’ Creek.

These ancient fluviatile deposits can be traced in a further westerly direction
through the Hundred of Willunga, where, in several places they are found. resting

37

on fossiliferous Miocene beds. A well sunk by Mr. F. G. Scammell in the south-
eastern corner of Section 11 (situated about two and a half miles to the westward
of Wickham’s Hill) gave the following record :—Sandy loam, 2 feet ; stiff reddish-
yellow clay, 8 feet: gravel, 21 feet; fine sand, 33 feet; soft sandstone with iron-
stone bands, 12 feet, This gives a thickness of 76 feet of alluvium; below which
was Miocene fossiliferous sandstone, 14 feet. [Govt. Geol. Ann, Rep., 1914
(1915), p. 9].

The district road that crosses the line near the McLaren Vale railway station
rises to the hill on its northern side. About 30 feet above the level of the railway
a bed of fossiliferous Miocene crosses the road. The fossils, which are chiefly in
casts, are of common and characteristic species. In going up to the next rise,
towards Sea-View, a cutting in the road shows the alluvial beds resting on a
friable outcrop of glauconttitic clay, also of Miocene age. The hill, which is, about
150 feet above the level of the valley, is capped with beds of sand, gravel and
ferruginously cemented conglomerate.

The River Onkaparinga supplies an interesting physiographical study, Next
to the River Murray it is the most ancient of South Australian rivers and may
be classed as an antecedent river, having been contemporaneous with some of the
later stags in the great geographical revolution that brought to a close an older
hydrographical system and initiated a new one. In this deformation, that proved
fatal to most of the original river systems of South Australia, Vhe Onkaparinga,
like The Murray, has kept its way open to the seaboard, Its origin can be definitely
fixed as Post-Miocene, as its original channel was excavated in the raised sea-
bed of that period, The tectonic movements that raised the Mount Lofty Ranges
and brought about great block-faulting (under which the Mount Lofty segment
was pitched down to the base of the Willunga fault scarp) may have created the
conditions favourable for its origin, the faulting having brought into existence a
sunk-land that became a natural channel for the local drainage. This may be con-
sidered as the initiatory stage in the river’s existence. [See 6, p. 53-59]

A second stage was reached, when by base-levelling, slow sinking of the
earth’s crust, and loss of grade, the river aggraded its bed, overspread its banks
on the northern side, carrying with it its alluvia which, in the deeper channels,
reached a thickness of at least 300 feet. The river had now reached its maturity ;
largely blocked by its own sediments, it spread its waters over a wide flood-plain,
in a meandering course, by lateral erosion. At this stage its delta-like channels
had a width of ten miles, extending from Sellick’s Hill, in the south, to Noarlunga
in the north, possibly making a junction with the Hope Valley-Blackwood river
(if they synchronized in age) in its lower stretches. [See ante, p. 35.]

A third stage was initiated by a reversal of earth movements, from a negative
to a positive development, causing an increase of grade that gave rejuvenated
energy to the stream. At this juncture the old-time Onkaparinga happened to have
had its course near the northern limits of its valley, and in that situation began
to erode its own sediments, reaching bed-rock. The ditch thus created restricted
the river to a definite narrow channel, which marks its rejuvenation stage and
fixed its topographical features ; following a serpentine course, and from being a
base-level stream it became an entrenched meander, as it is in the present day.
Collateral evidences of the relatively recent age of the present channel of The
Onkaparinga are seen in the fresh condition of the Purple Slates over which it flows
in its lower portions, as compared with the rotten and kaolinized condition of
the slates that are seen in the deserted channels of the extinct rivers, This
development of a higher grade throughout the region, incidental to the process of
elevation, also had its influence on the upper reaches of the river which, under the
rejuvenation stimulus, also incised their channels, creating secondary valleys within
the main valley.

38

A fourth stage in the history of The Onkaparinga is seen in the partial re-
excavation of the deserted valley that lies to the southward of the present outlet of
the river, extending from near Mount Bold to the present sea coast. No streams
of importance exist in this wide valley today. ‘The residual sediments of the
former river course absorb all the drainage that comes from the Willunga Ranges,
while a few minor streams originate near the coast, and these have had only a
modern existence. [See “Story of Aldinga,” “The Chronicle,” No. 3,994, June 1,
1933, p. 46.] It is probable that the excavation of the deserted river valley may
have been accomplished, chiefly, during the period of cooler temperatures and
greater rainfall in South Australia which immediately preceded modern times.

There ig a certain chronological relationship between the River Murray and
The Onkaparinga, inasmuch as their respective origins date back to the antecedent,
main hydrographic systems of the country and from their being the only rivers
of those ancient systems that have maintained their outlet to the sea in South
Australia during the subsequent physiographical changes. ‘There are clear evidences
that The Murray formerly reached the sea through the present Wimmera district
of Victoria, The elevation of the south-eastern portions of South Australia,
amounting to 250 feet, within Pleistocene and Recent times gradually forced The
Murray channel in a westerly direction until arrested by the highlands of South
Australia. The geological history of this great river has been dealt with by the
writer in a paper, “Notes on the Geology of the Great Pyap Bend (Loxton),
River Murray Basin, and Remarks on the Geological History of the River Murray”
[Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., vol. liii., 1929, pp. 167-195, pls. vi.-viti.].

Vv. CORRELATION AND AGE OF THE BEDS.

The late Professor Ralph Tate noted the occurrence of consolidated alluvia
in some places in South Australia, which he defined as “Upland Miocene” ; but he
offered no explanation of their occurrence, and incorporated under the same terms
formations that were of widely different geological ages.

Some of the features pertaining to these beds, if met with in Central Aus-
tralia, would be classed as Desert Sandstone, and it is not improbable that some of
the beds, so called, might be synchronized with the remains of rivers, once active
but now extinct, in the southern portions of their courses.

Several geological observers have recognised the existence of certain “high-
level, flat-topped alluvial deposits” in Central Australia, more or less consolidated
by interstitial cement, often carrying silicified wood. Madigan (14) has referred
these older alluvial deposits of the interior to a special class that he names the
Arltungan Beds. Among the localities mentioned were the Todd, Paddy’s Hole,
Hale, and Plenty Plains. The author quoted states (loc. cit., p. 97): “They had
every appearance of being remnants of an older filling of the same valley plains
in which they now lie. One such was described from the western region, in the
plain, in the middle of the Waterhouse Range, where coarse gravel contained large
silicihed tree trunks . . . On the Plenty Plain, the flat-topped remnants are
much bigger and more conspicuous, standing out as small tablelands or mesas.”
One of these described had “a flat-top that stood about 90 feet above the plain.
The bottom 50 feet was grey sandy clay, overlain by 15 feet of red ferruginous
sandstone, and capped by 25 feet of white chalcedony, the thickest of such cappings
observed.” The resemblances of these Arltungan beds to similar remains found
in the dry river channels of South Australia, is suggestive of a probable correlation
of the two as to age as well as a direct physiographical relationship in a former
larger hydrographical system.

The geological history of these old sands and conglomerates is of absorbing
interest, for they have shared in one of the greatest geological revolutions that

39

has happened in the southern portions of Australia. When were these dry river
channels, many hundreds of miles in length, the beds of refreshing streams? If
they were fed by streams from the Far North the present physical barriers could
not at that time have had any existence, so that their active stage must have
antedated the elevation of the Mount Lofty Ranges, and, therefore, antecedent to
what E. C. Andrews has called “The Kosciusko Epoch,” a period that may be
referred to a geological stage within either late Pliocene or early Pleistocene times.

An important datum, in fixing the age of these beds, is their definite Post-
Miocene occurrence. At Happy Valley, Morphett Vale, Hackham, and McLaren
Vale the ancient channels intersect and overlie the marine deposits of the Miocene
period. Another datum bearing on the age of this line of ancient drainage 1s
available. The bed of the extinct river in the neighbourhood of Adelaide rests on
the highest of the shelvings caused by the step-faulting of the western scarp of
the ranges, forming the foothills in the line of Hope Valley, Belair, and Black-
wood, having an elevation of from 600 feet to 1,000 feet above sea level. No
important river could occupy such a position with the present configuration of the
country. We must assume that at the time of the river’s existence it had,
approximately, reached the base-level of the river system, which was before the
major tectonic movements occurred that caused the great trough-fault of the gulfs,
and transformed the river system, by a change of grade, from a north and south
to an east and west direction.

At a later date, when the older rivers had ceased to carry their burdens to the
sea, an intensification of the trough-fault caused further step-faulting along the
slopes of the ranges, when a segment of the foothills was faulted down, over
700 feet, carrying the old river sediments with it. This happened subsequently
to the truncation of the older drainage system, but before the earth settlements,
near Adelaide, had reached their maxima.

There are two fossiliferous Pliocene horizons (an older and a newer) in the
neighbourhood of Adelaide, but neither of them is found in stratigraphical
relationship with the extinct river basin. The evidences seem to favour the view
that the encroachments of the sea, that laid down at least the newer of these
deposits, occurred subsequently to the truncation of the older river systems. A
better acquaintance with the palaeontology of these so-named Pliocene beds may
lead to their being placed, chronologically, at higher geological horizons.

CONCLUSION,

‘The present attempt to determine the effects produced by the elevation of
the Mount Lofty Ranges on the older river systems of the country and the
delimitation of the main river channels of these ancient systems must be regarded,
to a certain extent, as tentative. The country concerned is very extensive; the
time involved in the tectonic revolution, considerable; the evidences are super-
ficial, and more or less evanescent under the meteorological conditions to which
they have been exposed; and further, the disturbing influence of a superimposed
system of drainage which intercepts and to some extent has rearranged the material
of the older systems of drainage, all tend to obscure the question.

On the other hand, the facts are so clear and consistent, over hundreds of
miles of lineal deposits, that the general principles involved seem to be beyond
question. Some local adjustments may be required as to the routes followed by
the trunk lines, and by detailed observations more tributaries may be added to
complete the respective river systems as they once existed.

The older physiography illustrates the amplitude of the freshwater
resources that formerly distributed their life-giving streams, not only over the
coastal regions of the continent, but, also, over much of what is now the arid
interior.

40

It is perhaps necessary to state, that as the observations recorded in these two

papers have ranged over more than 30 years, certain local names and references
may be found out of date, and as a warning the date of observation has in some
cases been included in the text.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)
(12)

(13)

(14)

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL REFERENCES.

East, J. J., 1886—Geological Section from the Head of St. Vincent Gulf,
eastward across the Wakefield and Light River Basins. Trans. Roy.
Soc. S. Aust., vol. viii., pp. 1-9, pl. i.

Brown, H. Y. L., 1889—Geological Map of the Tertiary Deposits of the
Hundred of Barossa with Explanatory Notes. Govt. Printer,
Adelaide, No. 29.

Woopwarp, H. P., 1885—Geological Map of the Barossa and Western
Portion of the Para Wirra Gold Field Reserve. Govt. Printer,
Adelaide, No. 178.

, 1886—Geological Map of the Eastern Reserved Portion
of the Hundred of Para Wirra, known as the Mount Crawford and
Gumeracha Diggings, and Reserved Scction in the north of ‘Talunga.
Govt. Printer, Adelaide, No. 62.

Scoutar, G., 1878-9—Geology of the Hundred of Munno Para. Trans.
Phil. Soc. of Adelaide (Roy. Soc. S. Aust.), pp. 60-70.

Howcuin, W., 1911—Description of a Disturbed Area of Cainozoic Rocks
in South Australia, with Remarks on its Geological Significance.
Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. xxxv., pp. 47-59, pls. x.-xix,

, 1927—Sturtian Tillite in the Neighbourhood of Eden, ete.
Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., vol. li., pp. 330-349, pls. xiv.-xv.

, 1929. Notes on the Geology of the Great Pyap Bend
(Loxton), River Murray Basin and Remarks on the Geological History
of River Murray. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol, liti., pp. 167-195,
pls. vi.-viii.
Tepper, J. G. O., 1888—Notes on the Surface Features and Rocks of
Nuriootpa and its Neighbourhood. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. vol. xi.,
pp. 25-29.
DEPARTMENT oF Mines, 1911—Review of Mining Operations. No. 14.
1914 Do. Do. No. 20.
1921 Do. Do. No. 33.

Basevow, H., 1904—Notes on Tertiary Exposures in the Happy Valley

District. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. XXVill., pp. 248-252, pls.
XXXV.-XXXV1.

Manican, C. T., 1932—The Geology of the Eastern MacDonnell Ranges.

Central Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. lvi., pp. 71-117,
pls. iti-v.

41

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

Piate I.

Fig. 1. Ancient Consolidated Gravels forming a plateau in the ridge between the
Hutt and Hill Rivers. Escarpment facing east. Hundred of Milne, Section 571. Photo,
Prof. W. Howchin,

Fig, 2. Ancient Consolidated Gravels. Same site as in Fig. 1; showing bird’s-eye
view of the surface of the plateau. Photo, Prof. W. Howchin.

PiateE IT.

Fig. 1. Ancient River Plateau on the western side of Stockport, showing escarpment
facing east. Photo, Prof. W. Howchin.

Fig. 2. High-level Ancient River Terrace of Consolidated Gravel; east side of
Stockport, 200 feet above the site shown in Fig. 1. Photograph taken from near base of
hill. Photo, Prof. W. Howchin.

Fig. 3. The same as shown in Fig. 2, in near view. Photo, Prof. W. Howchin.

Pirate ITI.

Fig 1. Escarpment of Ancient River Terrace, 80 feet, situated on the eastern side
of Hope Valley, near Anstey’s Hill. Photo, Prof. W. Howchin.

Fig. 2. Section of Old Consolidated Alluvium resting unconformably on decomposed
slates. Back of Blackwood railway station. Photo, Prof. W. Howchin.

PLATE [V.

Fig. 1. Ancient Alluvial Sand-rock, exposed in railway cutting near Morphett Vale.
Photo, Prof. W. Howchin.

Fig. 2. Railway cutting, near Hackham, showing Ancient Gravels resting uncon-
formably on fossiliferous Miocene beds. The line of junction is shown by the position
of the hammer, Photo, Prof. W. Howchin. ;

INFLAMMABLE GASSES OCCLUDED IN THE PRE-PALAEOZOIC
ROCKS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY L. KEITH WARD, B.A., B.E., D.SC.

Summary

In the latter part of 1921 a borehole was drilled by the American Beach (K.L) Oil Coy., N.L., in
search of petroleum at a place selected by the divining rod. 7 miles to the south-west of Penneshaw
(Hog Bay), Kangaroo Island. After passing through 135 feet of the older sand-dune formation,
probably of Pleistocene age and consisting of calcareous and siliceous sands, the drill entered a
thick bed of bluish clay, possibly of Tertiary age, containing no boulders and -extending- to a depth
of 292 feet from the surface. Beneath the clay the drill penetrated mica-schist, phyllite and quartz-
mica-schist. The borehole was visited when the total depth was 307 feet, and in the face of strong
advice to the contrary, the Company decided to continue boring. Misfortune met the driller, who
lost the sinker bar and drill attached at 366 feet. The Company had arranged for a deep hole and
insisted on the fulfilment of the contract. A new hole was, therefore, drilled at a site only 4 feet
from the first hole, so that the "stream of oil” might not be missed.

42

INFLAMMABLE GASES OCCLUDED IN THE PRE-PALAEOZOIC ROCKS
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By L. Kerrs Warp, B.A., B.E., D.Se.
[Read April 13, 1933.]

I. OCCURRENCE AND COMPOSITION.

In the latter part of 1921 a borehole was drilled by the American Beach (K.1.)
Oil Coy., N.L., in search of petroleum. at a place selected by the divining rod, 7
miles to the south-west of Penneshaw (Hog Bay), Kangaroo Island.

After passing through 135 feet of the older sand-dune formation, probably of
Pleistocene age and consisting of calcareous and siliceous sands, the drill entered
a thick bed of bluish clay, possibly of Tertiary age, containing no boulders and
‘extending to a depth of 292 feet from the surface. Beneath the clay the drill
penetrated mica-schist, phyllite and quartz-mica-schist. The borehole was visited
when the total depth was 307 feet, and in the face of strong advice to the contrary,
the Company decided to continue boring. Misfortune met the driller, who lost the
sinker bar and drill attached at 366 feet. ‘The Company had arranged for a deep
hole and insisted on the fulfilment of the contract. A new hole was, therefore,
drilled at a site only 4 feet from the first hole, so that the “stream of oil” might
not be missed.

In July, 1922, inflammable gas was reported from the borchole, and extra-
ordinary statements were made regarding a ball of fire travelling backwards and
forwards between the bore site and the sea. The Company was urged to obtain
samples of the gas, and the method of collection from the bailer was explained.
Samples were collected and analysed by the Government Analyst, at a time when
a depth of 615 feet had been reached. Boring was continued and more gas was
reported, a further sample, obtained from 950 feet, being submitted to the Works
Chemist of the South Australian Gas Works. The details of these analyses are
as follows :—

I. Il.
Depth of borehole .... ee ia 615 ft. 950 ft.
Analyst aks lade the oe W. A. Hargreaves N, L. Woore
Carbon dioxide _.... Nis acs 5+3% 0°52%
Oxygen ae 7 sea o. 4-3% 3-55%
Ethylene, ete. ool aed ai 0-5% Nil
Carbon monoxide .... ‘sd A Nil Nil
Hydrogen _.... 3 aa a 513% | 68.64° %
Methane vies 5 tes. ths 2:6% 4-68%
Nitrogen (by difference) .... Se 36-00% 22°61%

Total... 100% 100%

Boring operations ceased when a total depth of 961 feet 4 inches was reached,
and have not been resumed. Water level in this borehole was at a depth of
116 feet from the surface.

More recently, in 1931, a borehole was started at a place 64 miles to the east
of Minlaton, on Yorke Peninsula, where the Permo-Carboniferous tillite has been
removed by erosion from the Cambrian archaeocyathinae limestone. This site
also was selected by diviners. The hole is now 1,800 feet deep, and may be
deepened. Splendid samples have been kept at all stages of this work, and have

43

been submitted for examination. ‘The following condensed section is based on
these samples :—

Surface to 253 ft. ... Cambrian limestone with Archaeocyathinae.

253 ft. ,, 292 ft. ... Basal Cambrian shale, sandstone and grit.

292 ft. ,, 548 ft. ... Upper Pre-Cambrian limestone with some phyllite and
calcareous and siliceous slate.

548 ft. ,, 855 ft. ... Upper Pre-Cambrian crystalline limestone.

855 ft. ,,1,800 ft. Upper Pre-Cambrian light and dark grey limestone.

SECTION AT THE BOREHOLE OF
THE AMERIGAN BEAGH(K.I.) OIL COY. LT

7 Mites S.W. oF PENNESHAW, K.I.
SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

on Older sand-gune formation, calcareous and
: i siliceous sand. (Pleistocene)

Mica-schist, phyllite & guartz-1Ca-SChist.
(Pre- Cambrian.)

The Cambrian beds appear to be horizontal or nearly so, but the attitude of
the subjacent limestone is unknown. Water level stands at 160 feet below the
surface in this borehole.

Inflammable gas was first observed in the sludge raised in the bailer when a
depth of 370 feet had been reached. Samples were not recovered till the hole was
790 feet deep, and further samples were taken by Mr. R. W. Segnit and the writer
when the depth was 860 feet. Another sample was taken by the driller when the
bottom of the hole was 1,666 feet below the surface. All these samples have been

44

analysed by the Government Analyst, with the results shown in the following
table :—

I. Il. III, IV. V. VIL
Depth from suriace 790 ft. 790 ft. 860 ft. 860 ft. 860 ft. 1,666 ft,
Carbon dioxide .. 0:8% 0:2% 0:8% 0-8% 0-6% Nil
Oxygen. .. Sy Nil Nil 32% 2-4% 3°0% 1°2%
Ethylene, ete. on Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
Carbon monoxide . Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
Hydrogen .. .. 740% 76°0% 60:°0% 64°4% 60:0% 84-0%
Methane ..-.. 7+5% 75% 5°4% 70% 56% Nil

Nitrogen
(by difference) 17-79% 16°3% 30-6% 254% 30-8% 14-:8%

100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

In neither case, at Kangaroo Island or near Minlaton, has it been possible to
estimate the quantity of the gas liberated. Drilling was done in each case by a
percussion plant. Water level is far below the surface, and it is not possible to
say whether there is any appreciable amount of gas rising through the deep column
of water in the borehole. The gas was seen bubbling out of the sludge after its
discharge from the bailer, and could be seen escaping from the top of the bailer
when it is raised from the bottom of the hole to the surface.

It would appear that the pressure of the water column facilitates the solution
of the gas as it is liberated from the rock pounded up by the drill, and that on the
diminution of this pressure (by the raising of the bailer to the surface) the gas
in solution bubbles off.

It does appear, moreover, that the amount of gas set free and taken into
solution is variable in different parts of the same formation. It has been found,
when efforts have been made to collect samples, that it is sometimes easy to fill
a quart bottle from a single bailer, and that on other occasions several bailers
must be raised to the surface in order to get a single bottleful of gas.

II. ORIGIN OF THE GASES.

A cursory glance at the composition of these gases shows that they are entirely
distinct from the “natural gas” that is associated with many occurrences of petro-
leum, from the “fire damp” that is liberated from coal seams, and from the “marsh
gas” derived trom the decomposition of vegetation under wet conditions that
prevent cxidation by the atmosphere.

Yet the kind of gas obtained in these boreholes has been found before in the
systematic examination of rocks and meteorites for the nature and amount of
their gas content. The classic work is that of Professor R. I. Chamberlin, of
Chicago, whose study of “The Gases in Rocks” was published in 1908 by the
Carnegie Institution, of Washington, as one of the series of contributions to cos-
mogony and the fundamental problems of geology. A summary of the work of
many investigators will be found on pages 276 to 288 of the fifth edition of “The
Data of Geochemistry,” by F. W. Clarke, published as Bulletin 770 of the United
States Geological Survey.

The essential point of difference between the gases obtained by Wright,
Tilden, Travers, Gautier, Chamberlin, and Brun from various rocks and those
concerned in this paper, lies in the fact that the investigators named recovered
their samples from specimens heated to redness in vacuo, whereas the gas samples
here mentioned were obtained by the mere pounding up of the unheated rocks
during drilling.

45

Both Gautier and Chamberlin attribute the greater part of the gases to
reactions within the rocks themselves, brought about by heat; but recognise that
there are gases in some minerals like beryl that must have an origin outside the
mineral host, which does not carry enough water and iron to give the amounts of
hydrogen present. Chamberlin regards the water giving rise to the hydrogen as
derived largely from the micas of the deep-seated rocks, that is to say of magmatic
origin, He proved by numerous analyses that the gases in rocks consist of
H,5, CO,, CH,, H,, and N,, but that chlorine and its compounds are absent. The

SEGTION AT THE BOREHOLE OF
THE MINLATON OIL PROSPECTING SYND.

6; Mites _E£. OF MINLATON Y.P.
SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

Archaeocyathinae limestone. (Cambrian)

253"
292 Shale, sandstone & grit.(Cambrian)

5] Limestone,with phyllite & calcareous &
13" siliceous slate. (Pre -Cambriar.)

C| Light & dark grey limestone.
(Pre - Cambrian )

©
Ss
XQ
‘
4
<e

ferromagnesian rocks carried the most gas, and in general hydrogen and the oxides
of carbon predominated. Chamberlin found, also, that H, and CO, are about
equally important in deep-seated rocks, but that CO, predominated in surface
flows. So far as age is concerned the oldest rocks contained the most gas, and
recent lavas gave much less than Archaean plutonic types. One noteworthy feature
of Chamberlin’s work was his neglect of the carbonates—limestones and dolo-
mites—doubtless because of the probable obliteration of other gases by the CO,
that would be set free by his method of treatment.

46

Commenting on the results of the analyses of the South Australian gases,
one would be inclined to note particularly :—

(a) The presence of methane in notable proportions in highly altered and
apparently non-carbonaceous rock types. The possible origin is men-
tioned below in paragraph (c).

(b) There is an obvious source of carbon in a limestone, but not in the
case of mica-schist, phyllite or quartz-mica-schist, unless there is
present some smail but unnoticed proportion of a carbonate mincral.

(c) The presence of methane and hydrogen looks strange in the presence
of carbon dioxide and the complete absence of carbon monoxide. The
presence of a powerful reducing agent would Icad one to expect the
reverse position, unless there has been some such reaction as Gautier
claimed to have induced at high temperatures. He gave the follow-
ing equations :—

At 900° to 1,000° .. 4CO + 2FL, = 2H,O + CO, +4 3C.
At 1,200° to 1,220° . 4CO + 8H, = 2H,O + CO, + 3CH,.

(d) No organic matter has been observed in the old limestones at Minlaton,

although there are organic remains in the overlying Cambrian limestone,

The occurrences being such puzzling ones for which to provide a satisfactory
explanation, Professor R. T. Chamberlin has been consulted and has been good
enough to write several times on the subject. He drew attention to the fact that
the case is essentially different from the situation obtained in his experimental
work, in that he heated the rock material and that the bulk of the gas obtained
was undoubtedly the result of reactions which took place at the temperatures
used by him. But he stated further that he was able to show that a proportion of
the gases, in some cases at least, was already present in the rock in the gascous
condition, Professor Chamberlin’s later communication (June 24, 1932) deals
with the origin of the constituents of the gas in the following words :—

“The methane would seem to me to be probably of organic origin, even
though coming from a quartz-mica-schist. I am assuming that this rock was
originally a sediment containing organic matter, and that in the processes of
consolidation, metamorphism, etc., decomposition of this mattcr gave rise to
methane and that gas thus far has not been able to escape, or in any case a
considerable amount of it still remains in the rock. Carbon dioxide has
probably also come from the same process; hydrogen might also, if during
metamorphism the temperature became sufficiently high, Hydrogen, of
course, may also have come in from some action below. ‘That carbon dioxide
has not been reduced to the monoxide seems to me to indicate that the tem-
perature has never been sufficiently high to cause this reduction.

“Such results as I obtained are inherently involved in volcanic and other
high temperature phenomena, and hence their importance in those fields.
There being no carbon monoxide in the gas upon which you report, whereas
methane is particularly high, it seems to me that the set-up is different, and
the gases primarily have resulted from low-temperature reactions probably
in large part involving organic material. I think that, if this difference be kept
clearly in mind, you will find the results not inharmonious.

“JT know that there are various occurrences of methane and carbon dioxide,
with perhaps minor amounts of hydrogen also, where the source 1s presum-
ably the decomposition of organic material. The Dexter gas well in Kansas
and various other occurrences in unmetamorphosed Palaeozoic rocks are
illustrations. Apparently in your case the peculiarity is the gas coming from
intensely metamorphosed rock, but, after all, if that were originally a sedi-
ment, and much of the gas could not escape, the results would be somewhat
like what you have.”

47

In an earlier letter (March 23, 1932) Professor Chamberlin had stated :-—

“In some potash mine near Stassiurt there are blowers of gas of which
hydrogen composes 93%. A possible explanation of this might be the
reaction between water and ferrous compounds which goes on when the tem-
perature is raised sufficiently. I am wondering whether in the process of
metamorphism which developed the slates and phyllites, the temperature
might have been raised 100° or 200°, which caused some reaction between
water and ferrous compounds. At the same time, a slight rise in temperature
would break up organic matter, giving rise to methane. Some of these gases
would then remain within the rocks until tapped by boring.”

In granting permission for the publication of these quotations from his letters,
Professor Chamberlin, on December 15, 1932, made further suggestions in the
following terms :—

“The only later suggestion which occurs to me is the possibility that all
the gas has not come from the same source. The presence of methane and
ethylene seems to me to suggest organic origin, but the high proportion of
hydrogen rather suggests that it has come from inorganic sources. So as a
wild guess the methane has come from ancient sediments, whereas the
hydrogen may have come from a magmatic source or from a high-temperature
chemical reaction between ferrous iron and water.

“Tt would seem to me possible for the hydrogen to have moved upward
and to have become mixed with the methane somewhat closer to the surface.
This is highly speculative, but after all it seems to me not impossible. If so,
there probably was not much carbonate or carbon dioxide involved in the
lower depth, otherwise I should be inclined to expect carbon monoxide in the
gases. Of course, some carbon dioxide could be taken up in carbonation of
rock materials, and hence the small amount found.”

Before leaving the subject, it should be remarked that no examination has
been made of the residual nitrogen to ascertain whether helium is present. ‘There
are no data, therefore, for the consideration of a radio-active origin for any of
the gas.

If we are right in assuming an organic origin for some at least of the gas,
the interesting question arises as to the possibility of the survival of this gaseous
matter in the occluded state in rocks that have lost by metamorphism all other
traces of their organic content.

These iacts of occurrence and composition, and these questions of origin are
brought forward in the hope that others may assist to clear up a rather puzzling
mystery that shows already signs of wide distribution in space and perhaps in
time. One cannot expect that similar phenomena will be observed where the hole
is a dry one, or where an artesian flow exists to carry off the gas as fast as it is
liberated from the rock broken up by the drill. But it seems reasonable to expect
that other similar occurrences will be noted by observant drillers where a con-
siderable depth of water stands in the holes, if they watch carefully for
effervescence in the water and sludge raised to the surface.

A PRELIMINARY ACCOUNT OF THE COLLEMBOLA-ARTHROPLEONA
OF AUSTRALIA

BY H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S.

Summary

That the Collembola as a whole, and this superfamily in particular, has received very little attention
from entomologists in Australia is doubtlessly due to their small size and to the supposed lack of
economic importance. Most of the species recorded and described in this paper were collected by
the writer while working in Western Australia as an officer of the Commonwealth Council for
Scientific and Industrial Research.

A PRELIMINARY ACCOUNT OF THE COLLEMBOLA-ARTHROPLEONA
OF AUSTRALIA.

By H,. Womerscey, A.L.S., F-R.E.S. (Entomologist, South Australian Museum).

PART I—SUPERFAMILY PODUROIDEA.
{Read June 8, 1933.]

That the Collembola as a whole, and this superfamily in particular, has
received very little attention from entomologists in Australia 1s doubtlessly due to
their small size and to the supposed lack of economic importance.

Most of the species recorded and described in this paper were collected by
the writer while working in Western Australia as an officer of the Commonwealth
Council for Scientific and Industrial Research.

In addition, very great help and encouragement have been received from
Dr. R. J. Tillyard and other friends who have collected material in other States
and forwarded it for identification and study. To all these the writer tenders his
deepest thanks. All stich records are acknowledged by placing the collector’s
initials after the particular record.

Three species of this superfamily were described in 1899 by Sir J. Lubbock
as from Tasmania (168). His names for these were Anoura tasmaniae, A. dendyt,
and A. spinesa. In 1906, Borner placed the last two species in new genera and
left the first in the genus Achorutes Temp., which had replaced Anoura, Borner’s
names for the first two species were Acanthanura dendyi and Holacanthella
spinosa (38). In 1925, Dr. G. H. Carpenter (Mem. & Proc. Manchester Lit. and
Phil. Soc., vol. lxix.), while describing some Collembola from New Zealand
showed that Lubbock’s species had been erroneously recorded from ‘Tasmania,
and that they had been found in New Zealand.

The first authentic record, then, of species of Collembola belonging to this
superfamily occurring in Australia would appear to be that of J. W. Rainbow
(198) in 1907. In that paper the author described two new species, Achorutes
speciosus and Isotoma troglodytica, from New South Wales. Through the
courtesy of the Curator of the Australian Muscum at Sydney, the writer has been
able to examine the type slides of Rainbow’s material, and it is now shown that
these two species are synonymous with earlier known European species, namely
Xenylla mucronata Axelson and Protsotoma minuta (Tullberg). ‘The second
species belongs to the superfamily Entomobryoidea, and will be dealt with in a later

aper.

In 1917, Schétt (226), in his paper on the Collembola collected in Australia
by the Mjoberg Swedish Expedition of 1910-13, recorded only the following five
species :—Hypogastrura armata (Nicolet), Pseudachorutes incertus Schott,
Ceratrimeria maxima (Schott), Achorules rosaceus Schott, Achorutes cirratus
Schott.

In this paper further records are given for four of Schott’s species as well as
Xenylla mucronata; in addition 24 species are added to the list, making a total of
30 species of Poduroidea now known to occur in Australia. The fuil list is as
follows :—*Hypogastrura armata (Nicolet); *H. manubrialis (Tullberg); *#.
manunbrialis var. neglectus Borner; *H. purpurascens (Lubb.); *H. pseudo-
purpurascens Womersley; *Xenylla maritima Tullberg; *X. grisea Axelson;
X, litteralis, n. sp; X. occidentalis, n. sp.; *X. mucronata Axelson; *Friesia
mirabilis (Tullberg); Ceratrimeria maxima (Schott); *Odontella lamellifera

49

(Axelson) ; Pseudachorutes incertus Schott; *P. rhaeticus ( Carl); *Brachy-
stomella parvula (Schaffer) ; B. fungicola, n. sp.; B. afurcata, n. sp.; B. acantha,
n. sp.; B. anomala, n. sp.; *Anurida granaria (Nicolet); Neachorutes glauerti,
n. gen, n. sp.; Achorutes rosaceus Schott; A. cirratus Schott; A. hirtellus
Borner; A. newmani, n. sp.; *Onychiurus fimetarius (Jinn. Lubbock); *0O.
ambulans (Linn., Tullberg) ; *O. armatus Tullberg; Tullbergia trisetosa (Schaf-
fer); T. australis, n. sp. Of this number nine species and one genus are new to
science, and no fewer than 15 species and one variety are well+known European
forms. The latter are marked by an asterisk.

Economic Importance of the Poduroidea.

Although considerable attention is being focussed on the economic importance
of certain Collembola belonging to the family Sminthuridae, little notice appears
to have been taken of the species discussed in this paper.

The attention of economic entomologists was first directed to the Collembola
by Dr. G. H. Carpenter (68) in 1905, when he recorded Hypogastrura (Achorutes)
armata (Nicolet) and Onychiurus (Lipura) ambulans (Linn., Lubbock) as attack-
ing bean seeds, and H. (A.) armata and H. (A.) longispina (Tullberg) as occurring
on fruit lying on the ground,

In 1911, before the First International Congress of Entomology, held at
Brussels, F. V. Theobald (241) surveyed the recorded instances of damage due
to species of Collembola. He enumerated 23 species, of which 20 are at present
regarded as valid, the remainder being synonyms, Representatives of the
Poduroidea in Theobald’s list number eight, five of which occur in Australia,
These species are:—Hypogastrura (Achorutes) armata (Nicolet), H. (A.) manu-
brialis (Tullberg), H. (A.) longispina (Tullberg), H. (A.) purpurascens (Laib-
bock), H. (A.) rufescens (Nicolet), Onychiurus ( Lipura) armata (‘Tullberg),
O. (L.) ambulans (Linn., Tullberg), O. (L.) fimetarius (Linn., Lubbock), Kala-
phorura (Lipura) burmeisteri (Lubbock),

In addition he gave the following personal observations of damage by these
small insects:--l. H. (A.) purpurascens (Lubbock) on cabbages; 2. H. (A.)
rufescens (Nicolet) damaging mushrooms; 3. O. (L.) ambulans (Linn., Tull-
berg) attacking celery, cauliflower, sea kale and asparagus; 4. O. (L.) fimetarius
(Linn, Lubbock) attacking strawberry plants.

In 1906 W. E. Collinge (82) recorded O. (L.) ambulans on bulbs damaged by
eel-worm, and H. (A.) armata from nursery gardens in Birmingham, England
In his “Manual of Injurious Insects” (82) the same author proves that Collembola
are often the primary cause of injury to orchids, bulbs, beans, peas, and fruit
trees, the resultant injuries allowing the access of fungal spores, thus leading to
subsequent decomposition of the plant tissues. Recently three species of Ony-
chiurus have been described from Japan by J. Matsumota and T. Satto (177) as
occurring on and damaging wheat.

Apart from feeding on foliage and decaying organic matter, the members of
this superfamily of Collembola are often found inhabiting the gills of various
fungi, and in microscopic mounts the intestines are often found to contain fungal
spores. From this it follows that even if the initial damage caused by these insects
is not of itself great, yet they may readily be the cause of more serious and exten-
sive harm.

In addition, while many of the species are essentially soil feeders, they will
also attack the young roots and rootlets of plants. If present in large numbers, as
they often are, this may lead to serious harm and even death of the plants.

On the other hand, at least one species, Hypogastrura viatica (Tullberg) has
been shown to be of considerable industrial use (29). It can be used to clean
automatically the top of sewage filter beds from the growths of algae, which other-

50

wise interfere with the proper working and necessitate periodical stoppage for
its removal.

While the recorded cases of damage by this group of Collembola may be con-
sidered as slight, it must always be kept in mind that those species which are now
shown to occur in Australia, probably as introductions, may, under the more suit-
able climatic conditions, become major pests and cause extensive and widespread
damage as in the case of the Clover Springtail.

CoLLEMBOLA-ARTIIROPLEONA Borner, 1901.

This suborder of the Collembola, which comprises all those forms with
elongate bodies, has been divided by Borner (44) into two superfamilies which he
calls Entomobryomorpha and Poduromorpha. As these names are decidedly
cumbersome, it would seem better to follow the suggestion of Dr. R. J. Tillyard
and adopt the customary superfamily ending “oidea.”

The two families are separated thus :—

1. (2) Prothorax free, similar to the other thoracic segments, furnished
with hairs, not hidden under mesothorax. Cuticle mostly granular,
in some cases with pseudocelli. Antennae short, 4-segmented.

Superfamily Poduroidea
= Poduromorpha Borner, 1913

2. (1) Prothorax not haired, more or less hidden under mesothorax.

Cuticle smooth, haired or scaled. Antennae long, 4-6-segmented.
Superfamily Entomobryoidea
== Entomobryomorpha Borner, 1913

Superfamily PODUROIDEA.
Family HY POGASTRURIDAE Borner, 1913.

Syn.=Achorutini Borner, 1901 (ad partem) ; Achorutinae Borner, 1901
(ad partem) ; Hypogastrurinae Borner, 1906.

Genus Lypocastrura Bourlet, 1839; Borner, 1906.
Syn.=Podura Linne, 1746 (ad partem); Achorutes Templeton, 1835
(ad partem); Hypogastrura Bourlet, 1839; Achorutes Tullberg,
1872: Schéttella Schaffer, 1896.
Subgenus Hypocasrrura s. str. Borner, 1906; Linnaniemi, 1912.

Syn.=Achorutes Schaffer, 1896 (ad partem) ; Achorutes Borner, 1901
(ad partem) ; Hypogastrura s. str. Borner, 1906 (ad partem),

HYpPocASTRURA ARMATA (Nicolet).
(Text fig. 1, a-c.)

Podura armata Nicolet, 1841; Achorutes armatus Tullberg, 1871; Achorutes
boletivorus Packard, 1873; Achorutes texensis Packard, 1873; Achorutes
pratorum Packard, 1873; Achorutes marmoratius Packard, 1873; Achorutes filt-
formis Wahlgren, 1906; Hypogastrura armata (Axelson) Linnaniemi, 1911.

Description—Length, 1:5-2°0 mm., with moderately long dorsal setae,
often serrated. Ocelli, eight on each side on black patches. Postantennal organ
with four unequal peripheral lobes. Antennae shorter than head. An exsertile
sac between third and fourth antennal segments. Fourth antennal segment with
7 olfactory hairs and an apical knob. Claws slender, with inner tooth near the
middle and a lateral outer tooth. Empodial appendage with basal lamella and

51

apical spine which often reaches tip of claw. One long tibio-tarsal hair present,
which is not clavate. Dens twice as long as mucro. Mucro apically rounded,
outer lamella with deep incision and tooth-like lobe. Anal spines longer than

Fig. 1.

a. Hypogastrura armata (Nicolet). Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.

b - a - Mucro from side.

¢. FA Antennae III. and IV.

d, te manubrialis “(Tullberg). Mucro and dens from side.
e m ” Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.
f pseudopurpurascens Womersley. Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.
g Xenylla maritima Tullberg. Furea from side,

} i ‘ Anal segment.

i - grisea Axelson. Antennae IV. and apex of III.

f. 4 S » Anal segment from above.

k i m 5 Furca from side.

ae) Ss

52

claws, narrow, curved and placed on papillae which touch at their base. Colour
variable, from brownish to blackish.
Three varieties of this species are recognised and can be separated by the
following key :—
1. (4) Anal spines present,
2. (3) Bristle of empodial appendage reaching beyond tip of claw and
apically bent—H. armata var. cuspidata Axelson.
3. (2) Bristle of empodial appendage straight and only reaching tip of
claw.—H. armata (Nicolet) forma principalis.
4, (1) Anal spines absent—H. armata var. tnermis Axelson.

This almost cosmopolitan species was first recorded from Australia in its
typical form by Schott in 1917 (226). This form is, however, generally widely
distributed, and the writer has seen specimens from the following localities :—
Adelaide, S. Aust. (no date, in S.A. Museum collection); Urrbrae, Adelaide,
S. Aust., October, 1929 (Waite Institute); Perth, W. Aust., October 4, 1930;
Guildford, W. Aust., October 6, 1930; Albany, W. Aust., October 17, 1930;
Claremont, W. Aust., December 19, 1930; Belgrave, Vict., April 19, 1931
(H. F. D.); Sherbrook, Vict., April 19, 1931 (HL. G. A. & H. F. D.); Studley
Park, Vict., August, 1931 (H. G. A.); Pinjarra, W. Aust., September 29, 1931
(D. C. S.).

Var. IneRMts Axelson.

Studley Park, Vict. August 1931 (H. G. A.); Woodside, S. Aust., July,
1933 (H. W.).
HYPOGASTRURA MANUBRIALIS (Tullberg), 1869.
(Text fig. 1, d-e.)
Achorutes manubrialis Tullberg, 1869; Achorutes Schotti Reuter, 1895;
Achorutes assimilis Krausbauer, 1898; Achorutes neglectus Borner, 1901.

Description—Length to 1:5 mm. Colour blackish-brown to grey-blue,
mottled. Hairs short curved. Antennae shorter than head. Antennae IV. with
4 olfactory hairs. No eversible sack between antennae III. and IV. Postantennal
organ with five peripheral lobes. Claw without inner tooth, with basal lateral
tooth. Empodial appendage filiform, with basal lamella. Tibiotarsal tenent hair
only indistinctly clavate. Mucro two-thirds as long as dens. Dens ventrally
tuberculate. Mucro narrow, with simple or curved apex and simple lamella. Anal
spines very small, on separated papillae.

The following varieties are recognised :—

1. (4) With anal spines and papillae.

2. (3) Mucro long and pointed with very narrow lamella. Blackish-
brown.—H. manubrialis (Tullberg) forma principalis.

3. (2) Mucro broad with broader lamella—Var. assimilis (Krausbauer }.

4, (1) No anal spines or papillae—Var. neglectus (Borner).

Localities —Forma principalis: South Perth, W. Aust., June 28, 1928
(K. C. R.}; Perth, W. Aust., August, 1931; Urrbrae, Adelaide, S. Aust., July,
1930 (Waite Institute). Var. neglectus (Borner): Adelaide, S. Aust. (in 5.A.
Museum collection, without date).

IIYPOGASTRURA PURPURASCENS (Lubbock), 1868.
Hypogastrura purpurascens Linnaniemi, 1912 (ad partem).
Description—Length, 2-0 mm. Colour very variable but mostly blue-black.

Hairs short and sparse. Ocelli, 8 on each side on dark patches. Postantennal
organ with 4-5 peripheral lobes and central boss. Antennae IV. with olfactory

53

hairs. No eversible sac between antennae III. and IV. Claw with subapical
inner tooth. Empodial appendage with broad inner lamella. Tibiotarsus with
2-3 clavate hairs in a transverse row. Furca with apical hook and distinct narrow
lamella to the mucro. Anal spines small, curved, one-fourth as long as hind claw
and on rather long papillae.

In the S.A. Museum is a tube of specimens of this species taken in Adelaide,
but without data.

HYPOGASTRURA PSEUDOPURPURASCENS Womersley,
(Text fig. 1, f.)

Hypogastrura purpurascens Linnaniemi 1912 (ad partem),

This species was separated from the European H. purpurascens Lubbock
(265) on the relative disposition of the clavate tibiotarsal hairs, colour, and
habitat. In Lubbock’s species the clavate tibiotarsal hairs are placed in a trans-
verse line, whereas in this species the lateral hairs are twice as far from the apex
as the medial one. The insects are usually of a brownish mottled colour and do
not appear to assume the blue-black of typical purpurascens. In habitat it appears
to be confined to the crevices of rotten bark rather than to damp walls. In hi's
valuable monograph Linnaniemi (158) alludes to this difference in the arrangement
of the tibiotarsal hairs, but has apparently not appreciated its importance.

Australian localities for this species are:—Bridgetown, W. Aust., November
3, 1930; Belgrave, Vict., April 19, 1931 (F. H. D.) ; Sherbrook, Vict., April 19,
1931 (H. G. A.).

Genus XENYLLA Tullberg, 1869.

XENYLLA MARITIMA Tullberg, 1869.
(Text fig. 1, g-h.)
‘“Xenylla brevicauda Reuter, 1895.

Description—Length, 1:5 mm. Colour, grey-blue to black. Antennae shorter
than head, [V. with 3-4 olfactory hairs. Claws without inner teeth. Clavate hairs
on tibiotarsi 1 to 2. Mucro fused to dens, with apical hook and narrow lamella.
Anal spines small on broad adjacent papillae. Ocelli, 5 on each side, Clothing
sparse, of curved, seldom serrated hairs.

This is a well-known European species which has not previously been recorded
from Australia. The writer has seen specimens from the following :—Perth,
W. Aust., November 24, 1930; same, May 23, 1931; Studley Park, Vict., August,
1931 (H. G. A.) ; Denmark, W. Aust., October, 1931.

XENYLLA GRISEA Axelson, 1900.
(Text fig. 1, i-k.)
? Xenylla gracilis Guthrie, 1903.

Description —Length, 1-2 mm. Colour, grey; seldom bluish. Hairs long and
outstanding. Cuticle granular. Antennae two-thirds as long as head, IV. with
4-5 olfactory hairs. Claw toothless. Tibiotarsus with 2 clavate hairs. Furca short
and strong. Mucro with broad inner lamella and curved hook-like apex. Anal
spines 2, large, on adjacent papillae.

This is a well-known Luropean species. It occurred on decaying bulbs at
Claremont, W. Aust., March 3, 1931.

Xenylla littoralis, n. sp.
(Text fig. 2, a-f.)
Description—Length, 1-4 mm. Colour, dark brownish to blue-black.
Antennae three-fourths as long as head, ratio of segments I. : II. : III. : IV. =

54

20 : 20 : 20: 20, IV. with approximately 4 olfactory hairs, II]. with the usual
form of sensory organ. Ocelli, 5 on each side on black patches. Postantennal
organ absent, Claw with strong inner tooth just beyond the middle. Empodial
appendage absent. Tuibiotarsus with 2 clavate hairs reaching tip of claw. Furca
long, mucro distinctly separated from dens, tapering to a fine point and with
narrow cntire inner lamella, mucro slightly longer than dens. Dens with two
inner setae. Anal spines minute, on papillae of their own length, bases of papillae
not touching. Ratio of mucrodens : tibia IIL. : claw II]. = 5: 34: 2. Cloth-
ing of fairly numerous short setae, slightly longer analwards,

This species appears to be of truly littoral habitat. It occurs under stones
between high and low tide marks along the coast along with Neachoritles

€ bee
J (aa
ae Ri its
om eye go7 ae
. on eY y ee
Se: ss? eS
He 3y's NY cel
a ae “ \S gt é
wee \ Ly
Sy te
eG “ae, ae BSE
s ch
5 7? | oce
Ye Py cre
s* My vA
< Cm
4 > \ i
2a
Fig, 2.

Xenvylla littoralis, n. sp.

Lateral view of entire inscct.
Ocellar field.

Sensory organ on antennae IT.
Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.
Anal spines.

Furca from side.

Tha aa gf

MSP SFO WHs ao s

s

55

Fig. 3.

Nenvila mucronata Axelson. Mucerodens from side.
r occidentalis, n. sp. Furca.
Friesca mirabilis (Tullberg). Claw and tip of tibtotarsus.
ee f Anal segment from side.
” is i Furea from side.
Odontella lanmellifera Axelson. Anterior ocelli and postantennal organ.
5 if * Furca from side and another view of mucr?.
" re " Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.
Pseudacharules rhacticus Carl. Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.
” x Furca from side.
Brachystomella acautha, n. sp. Occllar field.
7 5 » » Libiotarsus and claw.
bl » »y5 Muera and dens from side.

56

ylauerti, n, sp., and Axelsonia littoralis Moniez. It was first obtained by Mr.
L. J. Glauert from Rottnest Island, Western Australia. Its nearest allies appear
to be X. longicauda Fols. from Japan and X. orientalis Handschin from the Dutch
Indies. From the first it differs in the presence of an inner tooth to the claw
and in having anal spines. From the latter the form of the mucro is distinct.
Loealities-—Rottnest Island, W. Aust., January 31, 1931 (L. J. G.);
Christy’s Beach, Port Noarlunga, S. Aust., January 17, 1932 (D.C. S.).

XENYLLA MUCRONATA Axelson, 1903.
(Text fig. 3, a.)

Achorutes speciosus Rainbow, 1907.

Description—Length, 1-3 mm. Colour, bluish. Claws small, with small
inner tooth. Furea narrow, mucro separated from dens.

Through the kindness of the Curator of the Australian Museum, Sydney, the
writer has been able to examine the type slide of Rainbow’s species. This has
revealed the fact that speciosus Rainbow is but a synonym of mucronata, The
statement by Rainbow that the eyes in his species number eight on each side is
erroneous. Actually there are only five, which is the normal number for the
genus Xenylla. Possibly the dark pigmentation of the eyc-patch misled him. The
absence of the empodial appendage also confirms it as a Xenvla.

Localities —Bathurst, N.S.W., 1907 (Rainbow); You Yang Mountains,
Vict., September 24, 1931 (Miss J. W. R.); Kenwick, W. Aust., April 4, 1932
(H. W.).

Xenylla occidentalis, n. sp.
(Text fig. 3, b.)

Description —Length, 0-6 mm. Colour, dark brownish. Antennae rather
more than half as long as head, ratio of segments I. : Il. : Hl: IV. =7: 7
: 9: 11, IV. with at least 4-5 olfactory hairs, sensory organ on ant. III, probably
normal but indeterminate. Ocelli, 5 on each side on dark patches, Postantennal
organ absent. Claws apparently without inner teeth. Empodial appendage absent.
Two clavate tibiotarsal hairs. Futrea strong, mucro short only about one-fifth the
length of dentes, with broad lobe-like appearance, dens with two inner setae.
Anal spines very minute, scarcely more than enlarged granulations of the cuticle.
Yenaculum with 3 barbs. Mucro four times as long as hind claw.

This species is very distinctive in the structure of the mucro and cannot be
confused with any other described species. It has been taken as follows :—Red
Hill, W. Aust., August 27, 1931, in fungus (D. C. S.); Kalamunda, W. Aust.,
May 30, 1931, in fungus (D.C. S.).

Genus Frresea Dalla Torre, 1895,
Syn. = Triaena Tullberg, 1871; Macgillivraya Grote, 1894.
FRIESEA MIRABILIS (Tullberg), 1871.
(Text fig. 3, c-c.)
Triaena mirabilis Tullberg, 1871.

Description —Length, 1-0 mm, Colour, grey-blue, mottled, Antennae shorter
than head, IV. with 4-5 olfactory hairs. Claws toothless. Empodial appendage
present, without terminal seta. No clavate tibiotarsal hairs. Iurca very small,
mucro represented only by a hook. Anal spines three, occasionally four, on small
papillae. Body hairs not clavate.

A single specimen of this European species was found along with Xenylla
grisea’ Axelson, on decaying bulbs at Claremont, W. Aust., March 19, 1931.

57

Several specimens, including one of the form guadrispina Axelson with four anal
spines, were taken in garden soil by means of the Berlese funnel at Glen Osmond,
South Australia, March, 1933.

Genus CERATRIMERIA Borner, 1906.
CERATRIMERIA MAXIMA (Schott).
Schéttella maxima Schott, 1901.

Description,—Length, 2°5 mm. Colour, grey-blue with light stripes, ventral
surface whitish. Body stumpy, segments dorsally with prominent pleural areas.
Antennae short, segments III. and IV. indistinctly separated, IV. with trilobed
terminal organ. Ocelli, 8 on each side. Postantennal organ half elliptical with
about 30 tubercles. Mouth parts suctorial. Integument with hexagonal areas.
Claws broad with lateral lamellae, with large lateral teeth. Empodial appendage
absent. Anal spines absent.

This interesting species was recorded from Queensland by Schétt (226) in
1917. The writer has had specimens from Belgrave, Vict., April 19, 1931
(H. F. D. & II. G. A.) ; Sherbrook Falls, Vict., April 19, 1931 (H. G, A.).

Genus OpONTELLA Schaffer, 1897.
Syn. = Xenyllodes Axelson, 1903 (ad partem).

ODONTELLA LAMELLIFERA Axelson, 1903,
(Text fig. 3, f-h.)

Xenyllodes lamellifera Axelson, 1903; Odontella suecia Wahlgren, 1906.

Description—Length, 1°3 mm. Colour, blue-grey with distinct mottlings.
skin richly tuberculate. Hairs short and sparse. Antennae shorter than head,
segment IV. with curved olfactory hairs. Ocelli, 5 on each side. Postantennal
organ with 4 peripheral lobes in a groove. Claw toothless. ‘Tibiotarsi with two
simple spur hairs. Mucro equal to dens in length, with two characteristic lobes
on inner lamella. Anal horns about equal in size to the cuticular granules, two
in number.

This is a rare species, hitherto known only from Northern Europe. It 1s,
therefore, of much interest that it should be found in Australia. It was obtained
from the following localities by means of the Berlese funnel :—Sherbrook Falls,
Vict., April 19, 1931 (H. G. A.); Belgrave, Vict., April 19, 1931 (H. F. D.).

Genus PseupacuorutTes Tullberg, 1871.
Syn. = Schéttella Schaffer, 1896 (ad partem).
PSEUDACHORUTES RITAETICUS (Carl), 1899.
(Text fig. 3, i-7.)

Schotiella rhaetica Carl, 1899.

Description —Length, 1-5-3-0 mm. Colour, dark brown to black. Antennae
with trilobed apical knob and 3-4 olfactory hairs on segment TV. Postantennal
organ with 12-15 peripheral lobes. Claw toothless, seldom with small inner tooth
and lateral tooth. Clavate tibiotarsal hairs and anal horns absent. Dens some-
what swollen and with strong tubercles... Mucro straight dorsally, apex curved,
lamella with notched edge. Hairs short and sparse. Mandibles present and
needle-like.

This species is markedly distinct from the only true species of this genus
known from Australia, namely P. tncertus Schott. It can now be recorded from
the following places :—Parkerville, W. Aust., October 5, 1930 (H. W.); Belgrave,

58

Viet.. April 19, 1931 (H. G. A.); Sherbrook, Vict.. April 19, 1931 (H.G. AL &
H. F. D.); You Yang Mountains, Vict., September 24, 1931 (Miss J. W. R.);
Sassafras. Vict., December, 1931 (H. G,. A.).

Genus BRaAcHYSTOMELLA Agren.

Syn, == Schottella, Schaffer, 1896 (ad partem) ; Schtscherbakow, 1899
(ad partem) ; Carl, 1901 (ad partem) ; Schott, 1902 (ad partem).
Brachystomella, Agren, 1903; Stach, 1929. Schdéttelodes Becker,
1905. Chendrachorutes Wahlgren, 1906; Denis, 1924.

In 1929 Stach (238) restudied the species Schdttella parvula Schaffer, as
well as all the then known allied species. [le went into the position very thoroughly
and showed that Schaffer’s species belonged to the genus Brachystomella of Agren,
which differed very definitely from Pseudachorutes s. str. in the entire absence

Fig. 4.
a. Brachystomella parviula (Schaffer). Sensory organ on antennae IIT.
b. . - Anterior ocelli and postant. organ,
c. » © a Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.
d. & . 4 Mucrodens.
c. - fungtcola, n, sp., Head of maxilla.
f. 48 e » x» Antennae LV. and tip of LIL.
gy. i . Anterior ocelli and postant. organ.
h. : » « Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.
i as 7 » » Mucro from side.
j. M afurcata » Apex of antennae IV.
k, ms e » 9, Sensory organ of antennac [TT.
ie a i » » Anterior ocelli and postant. organ.
m, s 3 » » tlead of maxilla,

I, 4 8 » » Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.

59

of mandibles. In the place of these organs, the heads of the maxillac are modified
by being strongly toothed.

BRACHYSTOMELLA PARVULA (Schaffer), 1896.
(Text fig. 4, a-d.)

Schéttella parvula Schiffer, 1896; Schottella media Axelson, 1900; Chondra-
chorutes wahlgreni Denis, 1924; Schéttella minor Schtscherbakow, 1899; Schét-
tella albomaculata Carl, 1901; ? Schéttella crassicornis Schott, 1902; ? Brachy-
stomella maritima Agren, 1903.

Description —Ot Pseudachorutes build. Length, 1:0 mm, Colour, brownish,
mottled. Ocelli, 8 on each side. Postantennal organ with 5-6 peripheral lobes.
‘Tibiotarsi with 2-3 long hairs, not clavate or only indistinctly so. Claws with
inner tooth. Mucro short and tapering. Dens with 5-6 setae. Mandibles want-
ing, maxillae with broad, toothed head.

This European species appears to be common and widely distributed through-
out the southern part of Australia. Specimens have been seen from the following
localities:—Corney Point, S. Aust., date? (M, Klem); South Perth, W. Aust.,
June 28, 1926 (K. O. R.); Beverley, W. Aust., October 2, 1930 (H. W.); Nan-
gara, W. Aust., November 11, 1930 (B. A. O’C.) ; Crawley, W. Aust., May 14,
1931 (H. W.); National Park, W. Aust., September 3, 1931 (D. C. S.); Man-
durah, W. Aust., April 29, 1931 (H. W.); Queenwood, Preston Valley, W. Aust.,
June 12, 1931 (H. W.); Encounter Bay, S. Aust., May, 1929 (J. B. C.); Urrbrae,
Adelaide, S. Aust. 1930 (Waite Institute); Studley Park, Vict., August, 1931
(H. G. A.).

Brachystomella afurcata, n. sp.
(Text fig. 4, j-n.)

Description —Length, 1-2 mm. Colour, bluish-black. Antennae. slightly
shorter than head, ratio of segments 1. : I. : HI: 1V.=8: 8: 10: 12,
IIL. and IV. only indistinctly separated, IV. with trilobed apical knob and 4-5
olfactory hairs, antennal organ IIL. as figured. Qcelli 8 on each side on a dark
field. Postantennal organ with 5 peripheral lobes as figured. Mandibles absent,
head of maxillae broad and toothed. Claws without teeth. Tibiotarsus with 3
. strongly clavate hairs, one subapical and outside, two inside and more proximal.
Furea absent. Clothing of sparse but fairly long and fine setae.

This species is closely related to B. parvitla Schaffer, but differs in the absence
of the furca and the strongly clavate tibiotarsal hairs.

Localities —Beverley, W. Aust., June 4, 1931 (H. W.); Pine Island, Mur-
rumbidgce River, F. C. T., June, 1931 (R. J. T.) ; Red Hill, W. Aust., August 27,
1931 (D.C. 8.).

Brachystomella acantha, n. sp.
(Text fig. 3, k-m.)

Description —Length, 0°9-1-0 mm. Colour, yellowish. Head and antennae
bluish, eye patches black, Antennae slightly shorter than the head, ratio of seg-
ments 1. : (1. : T1.+1V.= 10: 10: 20, IV. with trilobed apical knob, organ
on ant. III. indeterminate. Ocelli, 8 on each side on black patches. Postantennal
organ wanting. Claws strong without inner teeth. No clavate tibiotarsal hairs.
Empodial appendage wanting. Mandibles wanting. Head of maxillae as in genus.
Furea small, dens twice as Jong as mucro with three strong, curved spines on
ventral aspect, mucro with inner and outer lamellac with lobes, apex of mucro
rounded. Clothing of sparse, short fine hairs. Cuticle finely granular.

This rather small but strikingly distinct species was found in numbers in a
species of Boletus at Crawley, Western Australia, May, 1931 (D.C. S.) along
with Brachystomella fungicola, n. sp.

60

Brachystomella fungicola, n. sp.
(Text fig. 4, ¢-2.)

Description.—Length, to 3-5 mm. Colour, brownish, lighter ventrally. An-
tennae as long as head, ratio of antennal segments I. : IL: HE: IV. = 30:
35: 25 : 35, segments III. and IV. indistinctly separated, 1V. with trilobed apical
knob and 2 (?) olfactory hairs, III. with organ as figured. Ocelli, 8 on each side
on a dark field. Postantennal organ with 4 peripheral lobes. Mandibles wanting,
head of maxillae as figured. Tuibiotarsi without clavate hairs. Claws strong with
inner tooth. Empodial appendage absent. Furca well developed, dens broad and
tuberculate and twice as long as mucro, mucro with inner and outer lamellae,
basally granular. Cuticle finely granular and clothed with fine and short but
sparse hairs.

This species is very distinctive in the structure of the mucro and claws. It
has been taken at Mandurah, W. Aust, April 30, 1931; Crawley, W. Aust., May,
1931 (D.C. 8.).

Brachystomella anomala, n. sp.
(Text fig. 5, a-g.)

Description-—Length, 2°5 mm. Colour, bluish-brown. Antennae slightly

shorter than head, ratio of antennal segments I. : I]. : IIL. : IV. = 10: 10:

ae wy

lan ee

ae or EN
Ce CO4%,2
SC fa tURno-
Pry Qecay
Vaal vse
WIE CY
ye )
C
vie A
43
&

Fig. 5.
Brachystomella anomala, n. sp. Sensory organ of antennae IIT,
i . 4, QOcelli and postantennal organ.
‘3 » oo» Head of maxilla.
5 » » Tip of tibiotarsus and claw.
:
b:

ey

ay

« y» Dorsal cuticle.

» a Dens and mucro from side.
: yO Rami,

Anurida granaria (Nicolet). Claw.

”

FOS AS

61

10 : 11, IV. with small trilobed apical knob, olfactory hairs (?}, organ on
antennae IJ]. indeterminate. Ocelli, 8 on each side, not on a pigmented field.
Postantennal organ rosette-like, with 12 lobes. Mandibles absent, head of maxillae
as in Anurida (text fig. 5, c). Claws without inner teeth. Empodial appendage
absent. ‘Tibiotarsal clavate hairs 2 on inner side, long. Furca well developed,
dens granular and about three times as long as the mucro, mucro broad with simple
inner lamella. Rami of tenaculum with 3 barbs. Cuticle strongly granular with
numerous long, simple setae.

Described from four specimens from the following localities :—Sassafras,
Vict., December, 1931 (H. G. A.), 3 specimens; Sherbrook, Vict., April 19, 1931
(H. G, A.), 1 specimen.

It is with considerable doubt that this species is placed in the genus Brachy-
stomella. From other species of this genus it differs very definitely in the strongly
granular structure of the cuticle, in this respect recalling that of Anurida granaria
(Nicolet). Mandibles are wanting, but the complex head of the maxilla resembles
that of Anurida rather than Brachystomella, he ocelli are 8 on each side, and
not 5 as in Anurida maritima Guerin, or absent as in 4. granaria (Nicolet). The
postantennal organ also resembles that of the latter species. The furca is similar
in structure to that of Brachystomella parvula (Schaffer).

In all probability this species will have to be placed ultimately in a new genus.

Genus ANurma Laboulbene, 1865.

Sya.=Anoura Nicolet, 1847 (ad partem); Aphoromma MacGillivray,
1893; Anurida Schott, 1893.

ANURIDA GRANARIA (Nicolet), 1847.
(Text fig. 5, A.)
Aphoromma granaria MacGillivray, 1893.

Description —Length, 1-8 mm. White. Ocelli absent. Postantennal organ
present, rosette-like with 12-21 lobes. Antennac shorter than head. Antennae
IV. with 8 olfactory hairs. Claws toothless. Empodial appendage absent or only
represented by a small nodular piece without bristle. Hairs short and sparse.
Cuticle with large granules.

‘This is a typical soil inhabiting species and most probably has been introduced
into Australia. It has been found in material from Mount Lofty Ranges, Adelaide,
S. Aust., November 17, 1931 (D.C. S.).

Genus Neachorutes, n. gen.

Description —General facies as in Anurida maritima Guerin. Antennae
4-segmented, longer than head. Ocelli, 8 on each side on dark field. Postantennal
organ absent. Furca long and simple, dens somewhat bowed in the horizontal,
mucro small and not distinctly separated from dens. Mandibles present, strongly
toothed apically but without molar area. Claws strong. ‘Tibiotarsi without
clavate hairs. Male with last abdominal segment strongly produced.

Genotype Neachorutes glauerti, n. sp.

Neachorutes glauerti, n. sp.
(Text fig. 6, a-7.)

Description —l.ength of male, 3-0 mm.; of female, 2-4 mm. Colour, deep
bluish-black. Antennae nearly twice as long as head, ratio of segments I. : II. :
Ill. : IV.=6: 8: 12: 10. Ocelli, 8 on each side on a dark field. Postantennal
organ absent. Clavate tibiotarsal hairs absent. Furca very well developed, long

62

and thin, especially the dentes which are slender, parallel-sided and highly granular.
Mucro small, less than one-seventh of the length of the dens and with distinct
lamella. Rami of tenaculum with 4 barbs. Clothing very sparse except on
appendages, on apical antennal segments the setae are twice the width of segments,
all setae simple. The adult male differs from the female in that the last abdominal
segment is produced in an upturned manner, the prolongation being as long as the
basal segment itself. The cuticle richly granular,

‘Lhis genus and species is of littoral habitat and occurs under stones between
high and low water marks. It can withstand immersion in a good depth of water,
and is often taken in numbers in the crevices of rocks lying in several feet of water.
From its habitat it can possibly be regarded as replacing Anurida maritima Guerin
of the Northern Hemisphere in the Australian region.

Fig. 6.

Neachorutes glanertt, n. g., 0. Sp.

a. Male insect, side view.

bv. 4 53 ventral view.
c. Female insect, side view.

d. Ocellar field.

e. Head of maxilla.

f. Head of mandible.

g. Tip of tibiotarsus and claw.
h, Tip of dens and mucro.

i. Rami.

It was first discovered by Mr. L. J. Glauert, of the Perth Museum, on Rott-
nest Island, Western Australia, in the described habitat, along with another inter-
esting littoral species, Areisonia littoralis (Moniez). The detatled localities are -—
T.ongreach Bay, Rottnest Island, W. Aust., January 3-6, 1930 (1. J. G.); Fresh-

63

water Bay, Swan River, W. Aust., February 2, 1930 (Miss Horgan) ; Point Perron,
W. Aust., 1931 (11. W.); Christy’s Beach, S. Aust., January 17, 1931 (D.C. 5.);
Marino, S. Aust., March 24, 1929 (R. H.).

Genus AcHorutes Templeton, Borner,

Syn.=Achorules Vempleton, 1835 (ad partem) ¢ Blax IXoch, 1840;
Anoura Gervais, 1842; Anura Tullberg, 1869; Neanura MacGilliv-
ray, 1893. ;

ACHORUTES ROSACEUS Schott, 1917.

Description—tLength, 1:5-2-0 mm. Colour, in life, rose; in spirit, white.
Facies of typical Achorutes form. Cuticle uniformly tuberculate. Ocelli, 2 on
each side on edge of head prominence. Postantennal organ absent. Antennae IV.
with a trilobed organ. Claw toothless. Dorsal setae strong but simple.

This species was described by Schétt from North Queensland in 1917 (226).
in Western Australia it seems to be generally abundant and has been taken as
follows:—Perth, W. Aust., October 4, 1930; Denmark, W. Aust., October 17,
1930 (H. W.); Margaret River, W. Aust., April 25, 1931 (L. J..N.); Mandurah,
W. Aust., April 30, 1931 (H. W.); Mount Lofty Ranges, 5, Aust., March 2, 1931
(H. G, A.).

ACHORUTES cirRATUS Schott, 1917.

Description—Length, 1:5 mm. Colour, in spirit, white, Cuticle in regular
fields and prominences of tubercles. Ocelli, 2 on each side, not pigmented, Post-
antennal organ wanting. Antennae IV. with an apical trilobed organ. Claws
simple. Setae on outstanding prominences of abdomen, large, strongly feathered
but not clavate,

This species, also described by Schétt from North Queensland, has been since
found in the following localities :—Studley Park, Vict., August, 1931 (H. G. AL);
You Yang Mountains, Vict., September 24, 1931 (Miss J. R.).

Achorutes newmani, n. sp.
(Text fig. 7, d-e.)

Description—Length, to 3-0 mm. Colour, in life, creamy white. Antennae
only half as long as head, segments subequal, 1V. with 4 or 5 olfactory hairs,
antennal organ ILI. inconspicuous and indeterminate. Ocelli, 3 on each side, with-
out pigment, one placed sublaterally and subposteriorly on a prominence, the other
two not on a prominence, their own diameter apart and four to five times their
diameter from, the anterior edge of the prominence on which is the other ocellus.
The dorsal surface is highly tubercular and shows a number of prominences as is
usual in this genus, as follows —On head, three transverse rows, anterior one of
two each with four strong setae, medial row of five, the three middle ones with
3 setae and the outer ones with 4, a posterior row of six, the middle four with
2 setae and the outer ones with 4 sctae; thorax IJ., a row of six, the outer promin-
ences with 1 setae, the others with 2 setae; thorax I., a row of six, outer ones with
4, others with 3 setae; thorax III, row of six as in thorax II; abdomen L., IT., and
1II. with a row of six, median pair with 3 setae, mediolateral pair with 3 strong
setae and 1 fine seta, ectolateral with 2 setae; abdomen IV. with row of six, media!
pair with 2 setae, mediolateral with 2 strong and 1 fine setae, ectolateral with
3 setae; abdomen V. with row of four, median pair with 3 setac, outer ones with
3 strong and 1 fine setae; abdomen VI. with two prominences, each with 6 setae
dorsally. Mouth organs small, needle-like, mandibles present without molar plate.
Claws without inner tooth, but basal lateral teeth present, tuberculate almost to tip

64

of claw. Empodial appendage absent. Furca absent. Clothing of the strong,
rather blunt and indistinctly ciliated setae as on the prominences.

This species is closely related to 4. zefntneri Handschin described from Java.
It differs in not having the carmine colouration in life of Handschin’s species and
in the absence of an inner tooth to the claw. The relative disposition of the ocelli
is also distinctive. It is named in honour of the Government Entomologist of
Western Australia, in whose company the writer was when he first found this
species in large numbers under loose bark at Picton Junction, Western Australia
October 10, 1930.

’

Fig. 7.
a. Achorutes hirtellus Borner. Ocelli.
b. ‘5 a S Tip of tibiotarsus and claw.
i ji - Anal tubercles and setae.
* newman, n. sp. Tip of tibiotarsus and claw.

e. ‘ yeahs | -Oeetti,

65

ACHORUTES HIRTELLUS Borner, 1906,
(Text fig. 7, a-c.)

Description.—Length, 2°0 mm. In spirit, as in life, yellowish-white, Claw
with ventral tooth. QOcelli, 2 on each side, unpigmented. Dorsal setae long,
feathered and strongly clavate.

A single specimen taken at Sherbrook Falls, Victoria, April 19, 1931
(H. G. A.) is somewhat doubtfully referred to this species.

Family ONYCHIURIDAE Borner, 1913.

Syn. Aphorurinae Borner, 1901; Aphorurint Borner, 1901; Ony-
chiurinae Borner, 1901.

Genus Onycuturus Gervais, 1841; Borner, 1901.
Syn.Podura Linne, 1758 (ad partem); Lipura Burmeister, 1838 (ad
partem) ; Onychiurus Gervais, 1841, in littoris; Adicranus Bourlet,
1843 (ad partem); Anurophorus Nicolet, 1841 (ad partem) ;
Aphorura MacGillivray, 1893; Pretaphorura Borner, 1909.

Fig. 8.
a. Onvehinrus fimelarius (Linn) Postantennal organ.
b $; 3 - Antennal sensory organ.
c 3 > Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.
d. 43 ambulans 5 Postantennal organ.
z. is - Antennal sensory organ.
f bs 4 » Claw‘and tip of tibiotarsus.
g 2 6 i, Anal spines.
h " armatus (Tullberg). Postantennal organ.
4 6 bg rs Antennal sensory organ.
7 ‘ , v. denticulata Handschin. Claw.

66

ONYCIHURUS FIMETARIUS (Linne, Lubhock).
(Text fig. 8, a-c.)
Podura fimetaria Linne, 1766; Lipura fonetaria Lubbock, 1867; Lipura
inermis Tullberg, 1869; Lipura wrightii Carpenter, 1895; Aphorura inermus
Schaffer. 1896; Onychiurus pseudofimelartus Folsom, 1916.

Description —Length, 1°5-2°0 mm. White. Sensory clubs of antennal organ
IIL. smooth. Postantennal organ with 12-16 clusters of tubercles. Pseudocelli on
antennae bases 2, behind 1. Claw toothless, small. Empodial appendage with
bristle as long as claw. Anal spines wanting.

This is a common inhabitant of garden soils, and when it occurs in large
numbers often does considerable damage. In Australia it has been found as
follows :—In hot-houses, Government Gardens, Perth, W. Aust., November 18.
1930; ditto. February 13, 1931 (H. W.); Mount Lofty Ranges, S. Aust.,
November 7, 1931 (1D. C. S.); Glen Osmond, S. Atst., April, 1932 (D.C. 3.);
on Cortinarius, sp.. Neutral Bay, N.5.W., 1929 (J. B.C.) ; in S.A. Museum, with-
out data; in green-house, Adelaide, March, 1933 (H. M. H.).

ONYCITIURUS AMBULANS (Linne, Nicolet).
(Text fig. & d-y.)
Podura ambulans Linne, 1758 (ad partem); Anurophorus ambulans Nicolet,

1847; Lipura ambiulans Lubbock, 1862; Aphorura ambulans MacGillivray, 1862;
? Aphorura willentt Borner, 1901.

Description—Length, 2°0 mm. White. Antennal organ IT. with smooth
sensory clubs. Postantennal organ with 12-15 granular tubercles. Antennac
bases with 2 pseudocelli. Claws toothless. Empodial appendage with basal
lamella and bristle. Anal spines present, large and slightly curved, on smaller
papillae.

‘This species is to be found in soil like the preceding one. I[t is very conmmon
in Europe where it exists in two forms, O. ambulans (Nicolet) forma principalis,
with anal spines, and O. ambudans var. inermis Agren, without anal spines. It
occurs commonly in most cultivated soils in the Perth area of Western Australia,
but only the typical form has so far been found.

Onycniurus ARMATUS (‘Tullberg), 1869,
(Text fig. 8, f-7.)

Lipura armata Tullberg, 1869; ? Lipura fimetaria Dalla Vorre, 1888;
Aphorura armata Reuter, 1898.

Description.—Length, 0-9-2°5 mm. White. Antennal organ ITT. with sen-
sory clubs like btnches of grapes. Postantennal organ with 16-32 simple
tubercles. Claws with or without tecth. Anal spines long, weakly curved, or
papillae sometimes absent.

‘This is another common soil inhabitant in Europe. Owing to its attacking
the rootlets of plants and killing them by sheer weight of numbers, it must be
regarded as of economic importance. The variety without anal spines, var. inermis
Agren, has not yet been found in Australia, but both the typical form and the
variety denticulata Handschin, which has an inner tooth to the claw, have been
found as follows:—Forma principalis: Government Gardens, Perth, W. Aust.,
February 2, 1932; in green-house, Adelaide, S. Aust., March, 1933 (11. M. I1.).
Var. denticulata Handschin: Mount Lofty Ranges, S. Aust., October 29, 1931.

67

Genus TuLLBERGIA Lubbock, 1876.

SynceStenaphorura Absolon, 1900; Mesaphorura Borner, 1901;
Borneria Willem, 1902.

TULLBERGIA TRISETOSA (Schaffer) Borner.
(Text fig. 9, a-c.)

_
Fig. 9.

a. VTullberyia trisctosa (Schaffer). Sensory organ ou antennae ITI.

b. Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.

C. nt i a Anal spines.

d. australis, n. sp.. Sensory organ on antennae IIT.

e. a 7 » « Claw and tip of tibiotarsus.

f. - . . « Anal spines from above.

g. ” " 5 . " » side.

Aphorura trisetosa Schaffer, 1897; Aphorura trisetosa var. quadrisetosa
Willem, 1902; Bérneria quadrisetosa Willem, 1902.

Description Length, 1-4 mm. Colour, whitish-yellow. Antennae slightly
shorter than the head, ratio of antennal segments I. : IT, : IE: 1V.= 73) :
74: 11: 12, IV. with 3 or 4 olfactory hairs, II]. with sensory organ of 3 parallel-
sided stout sensory clubs lying behind a layer or fold of the cuticle; between the
two inner clubs is a pair of minute sensory rods; papillae apparently absent; on

68

ventral side of antennae III., at about the middie of the segment, is a fourth
slightly curved and parallel-sided club. Antennae base marked off from the rest
of the head by a smaller size of the cuticular tubercles. Claws strong, without
inner tooth. Empodial appendage present with narrow inner basal lamella and
apical bristle which almost reaches the middle of the claw. Clavate tibiotarsal
hairs absent. Eyes absent. Postantennal organ long with 80-100 tubercles.
Furca absent. Anal spines 2, long and slightly curved on papillae of almost their
own length. Anal spines twice as long as the hind claws. Cuticle strongly
granular. Clothing of fine and long setac, especially analwards. Pseudocelli =
ant. base 1, base of head 1 plus 1, thorax L., IL, and III., 1 plus 1, abdomen 1.-I1.
2 plus 2, 1V.-V. 1 plus 1, VI. 0.

The Australian specimens which are referred to this species differ in the
number of tubercles in the postantennal organ from the figures given by
Borner (35). His number is 100, whereas in the material examined it is round
about 80. The localities are:—Sherbrook Falls, Vict., April 19, 1931 CH. G. A.
and H, I’. D.); Belgrave, Vict., April 19, 1931 (H. G. A.) ; Mount Lofty Ranges,
S. Aust., November 7, 1931 (D, C. S.); You Yang Mountains, Vict., Septem-
ber 9, 1931 (Miss J. W. R.); Specimens in the S.A. Museum (?), Adelaide, no
other data.

Tullbergia australica, n. sp.
(Text fig. 9, d-y.)

Description—Length, 0°9 mm. Colour, white. Antennae slightly shorter
than head, ratio of segments I. : I. : UL : IV. =4:4: 6: 7, 1V. with 4
olfactory hairs, organ on III. with 2 strongly curved parallel-sided sensory clubs
almdst touching at their tips, and two minute rods, Ventrally on ant. II. there
is also a third sensory club. Cuticular granules on antennae bases about the same
size as those on the head. Ocelli absent. Postantennal organ with about 60
tubercles. Claws without inner teeth. Empodial appendage present with small
inner lamella and terminal bristle which does not reach to more than one-third the
length of claw. Clavate tibiotarsal hairs absent. Furca absent. Anal spincs
small, on small papillae not touching at the base. Pseudocelli large. Base of
antennae with 1, base of head 1 plus 1, thorax I. to abdomen III. 1 plus 1, IV.
2 plus 2, V. 1 plus 1. Cuticle finely granular.

‘This species is very closely related to the European T. krausbaueri Borner,
from which it differs in the presence of the third club on antennae ITT., in the
number of lobes in the postantennal organ and in the number and arrangement of
the pseudocelli. It has been taken as follows:—Crawley, W. Aust., October 2,
1930 (D.C. S.) ; November 19, 1930 (D. C. S.); April 16, 1931 (IT. W.) ; Kala-
munda, W. Aust., June 15, 1930 (D. C. S.); Sassafras, Vict., 1931 (IL G. A.).

Key ro THe GENERA OF THE COLLEMBOLA-ARTHROPLEONA.

Superfamily PODUROIDEA.

A. Without pseudocelli. With or without occlli. Sensory organ of antennae III. with rods
but without sensory cones or outer papillae. Antennae LV. without subapical pit but always
with retractile sensory knob.

J. Head hypognathus. Ocelli placed on hind part of head. Dentes bowed horizontally,
annulated distally, over-reaching ventral tube. Manubrium resembling that of the
Collembola-Symphypleona, with a special medial support piece of the dentes.

Family PODURIDAE Borner, 1906,
(A single genus and species Podura aquatica Linne,
not known from Australia.)

Il. Head obliquely prognathus. With or without ocelli, if present then on the front of the
head. Dentes not annulated, fairly straight, seldom reaching ventral tube, or the furca
more or less reduced. When present the furca is simple and without the medial support

piece of the dentes.
Family HYPOGASTRURIDAE Borner, 1906.

69

(a) Mandibles with well-developed molar plate.

Subfamily Hyrocasrrurtnar Borner, 1906.

Postantennal organ absent. Ocelli, 5 or 4 on each side. Empodial appendage
absent. Turca more or less reduced. Anal spines 2, usually very small.

Genus XenyLita Tullberg, 1869.
Postantennal organ present.@) 2

Postantennal organ simple, elliptical or indistinctly lobed. Empodial appendage
absent. Anal spines absent or present.
Postantennal organ compound with peripheral lobes. 3

Ocelli absent. Postantennal organ simple, cordate. | Mandibles without
proximal portion, basally with a pair of hooks, Head dorsally with a pair of
curved spines or hooks. Anal spines 2, as long as the claws. Empodial
appendage absent.
Genus Gomphtocephalus Carpenter, 1908
(not Australian),
Ocelli present. Mandibles normal. Empodial appendage absent. Anal spines
absent.
Genus Schéttella Schaffer, 1896 (including Beckerella Axels, 1912)
(not Australian)
Furea poorly developed. Ocelli absent. Postantennal organ with 4-6 lobes.
Empodial appendage present. Anal spines 2, very small, often absent.

Genus Willemia Borner, 1901
(not Australian)

Furca well developed. Ocelli, 8 or fewer on each side. Postantennal organ

with 4, seldom 7, lobes. Empodial appendage present or not. 5

Cuticle with large granulations. Furca well-developed but mucro small in
relation to dens. Ocelli, 8 on each side. 6
Cuticle smooth or with only fine granulations. Ocelli, 8 or fewer,
Genus Hypocastrura (Bourlet, 1839) Borner, 1906 (in-
cluding subgenera Schdfferia Absolon, TypPhlogastrura
Bonet, Mesachorutes Stach, Mesogastrura Bonct, Fols-
omiella Bonet).
Anal spines 3, large and on large papillae. Empodial appendage rudimentary.
Genus Triacanthella Schaffer
(in New Zealand but not Australia).
Anal spines small, 2. Empodial appendage well developed.

Genus Proxenyllodes Denis, 1926
(not Australian)

(@) Mandibles entirely absent or without molar plate.

Subfamily Acnorutinagz Borner, 1906.

(c) Anal segment with undivided supra-anal valve, with or without furca.

1.

Tribe PskunacuorutTini Borner, 1906

Anal spines present, although sometimes hardly larger than the cuticular
granules,

Anal spines entirely absent. 4
Anal spines 4 or more, almost straight, papillae scarcely present.

Genus Polyacanthella Schaffer, 1900
(not Australian).

Anal spines 3, 1 behind 2 in front, occasionally 0 or 5, always curved and on
distinct papillae. Furea reduced. QOcelli, 8 or fewer on each side. Empodial
appendage absent.

Genus Fresca Dalla Torre, 1875.

Anal spines 2, sometimes small and little more than cuticular granules. Past-
antennal organ present. Ocelli, 5 on each side. 3

@) Except in Aypogastrura (Mesogasirura) coeca Jonesco?

an

6.

12.

70

Empodial appendage present. Mucrones with normal lamellae Postantennal

organ large, trilobed. Genus Xenyllodes Axelson, 1903
(not Australian).

Empodial appendage absent. Mucrones with two consecutive lobes. Anal
spines represented by two rather larger granules of the cuticle. Postantennal
organ small, 4-lobed.

Genus OvonteLta Schaffer, 1897,

Sight ocelli on each side. 8
Fewcr than 8 ocelli on each side. 5
Postantennal organ present. Ocelli generally present. 6

Postantennal organ absent. Ocelli, 2 or 3. Empodial appendage absent.
Mouth-parts reduced.
Genus Paranura Axclson, 1902
(not Australian).

Mouth-parts very much reduced. Maxillae styliform without teeth. Empodial
appendage absent.

Mouth-parts not so much reduced. Head of maxillac with teeth, not styliform.
Ocelli, 5 on each side or absent. Empodial appendage present.

Ocelli, 1 on each side. Postantennal organ trilobed. Furca very much reduced,
dentes and mucrones not differentiated. White, elongate.
Genus Stachia Folsom, 1932
(net Australian).

Ocelhi, 2 or 4 on cach side. Postantennal organ 6-20 lobed. Colour, bluish-grey
or bluish-white.
Genus Micranurida Borner, 1901
(not Australian).
Mandibles with only a curved apical tooth and a subapical lobe-like expansion.
Postantennal organ with 13-15 lobes. Occlli wanting.
Genus Anuridella Willem, 1906
(not Australian).
Mandibles with many teeth and no lobe. QOcelli, 5 on each side or absent. 9
Genus Anurripa Laboulbene, 1865.
Furea very long and slender. Dens many times (seven). as long as mucro.
Antennae 3 times as long as head. Male with abdomen VI. produced. Qcelli,

5 on each side. Postantennal organ absent.
Genus NEACHORUTES, 1. gen.

Furea much shorter or absent, when present of normal length. Antennae
;

scarcely, if at all, longer than the head. 10
Species of flattened form with prominent pleural areas. il
Species of normal build. 12

Furca present. Ocelli, 8 on each side. Postantennal organ half-clliptical with
numerous lobes. Empodial appendage absent. Cuticle marked in hexagons.
Body segments with cross furrows.
Crenus CERATRIMERIA Bérner, 1905 (including
Lomanienia Philiptschenko, 1926).

Turca absent. Occlli. 5 on cach side. Postantennal organ circular with 12-13
lobes. Empodial appendage absent.
Genus Platanmwrida Carpenter, 1925
(not Australian, but occurs in New Zealand).

Mandibles absent. Ocelli, 8 on cach side. Postantennal organ present or
absent. Furca present or absent.
Genus BracHystoMELLa Agren, 1903,
Cincluding Guacharia Jackson, 1927),

Mandibles present, styliform, Ocelli, 8 on each side. Postantennal organ
present or absent. Furca present.
Genus Pseupacuorctss Tullberg, 1892.

71

(d) Anal valve 2-lobed, broad. Abdomen VI. relatively large. Body generally with
segmental tubercles. Postantennal organ of numerous cutaneous tubercles or
absent. Tribe AcHoruTINI Borner, 1906.
1. Body covered with numerous spines. ;

Genus Holacanthella Borner, 1906

(in New Zealand, not Australian).
Body not as above. 2

2. Sides of thoracic and abdominal segments produced backwards in long processes.

Genus Acanthanura Borner, 1906
(not Australian, but known from New Zealand).
Not as above.

3. Head of maxillae as in -Anurida with a large-toothed head and 2-3 finely-
toothed lamellae as well as a basal erect lobe, seldom without these. 4
Head of maxillae needle-like, without teeth or lamellae, at most at the base
as in 4 with a tooth-like lobe.

Genus Acuorutes Templeton, 1835; Bérner, 1906.

4. Abdomen VI. hidden under V. Postantennal organ present, of numerous

clustered lobes. J
Genus Morulina Borner, 1906

(not Australian)
Abdomen VI. visible from above, not hidden under V.
Genus Protanura Borner, 1906
(not Australian).

B. With pseudocelli. With or without furca. Antennae with 2-3 sensory clubs, sensory rods,
with or without papillae and protective setac. Antennae IV, mostly with subapical groove,
seldom with retractile knob. QOcelli absent. Postantennal organ mostly present and well
developed.

Family ONYCIITURIDAE (Lubbock, 1867) Borner, 19153.

The 2 or 3 sensory clubs of antennal organ IIL. smooth, curved towards one another,
often an accessory club ventrally about the middle of the segment Ant. FV. with
typical olfactory hairs. Postantennal organ with numerous simple lobes. Empodial
appendage absent or bristle-like, Furca absent. Body long and narrow. 2
The 2 sensory cluhs on antennal organ TIT. smooth or tubcrculate, not curved towards
one another. Postantennal organ of few or many simple or clustered tubercles or
absent. Empodial appendage generally well developeed. Furca present or absent or
rudimentary. Body broader and more robust. 3

Pscudocelli on body segments in the form of a rosette lying in a pit.
Genus TcLiBercia Lubback, 1876,

Pseudocelli consisting of two unequal, slightly curved rods lying in a pit. Lightly

chitinised, brownish species.
Genus Paratullbergia Womersley, 1930

(not Australian).

Furca present, well developed with distinct manubrium, dentes and mucrones. Anal
A

spines 4. Postantennal organ absent.
Genus Tetrodontophora Reuter, 1882

(not Australian)
Furea, when present, quite rudimentary. Postamtennal organ present. 4
Cuticle with large granulations. Pseudocelli few, without a ring of chitin. Tmpodial
appendage with basal lamella. Anal horns strong on large papillae.

Genus Kalaphorura Absolon, 1901
(not Australian).

Cuticle with numerous pseudocelli with distinct chitinous rings. No large cuticular
granulations. Postantennal organ with simple tubercles or grape-like clusters. Furca
absent or when present very rudimentary. With 4, 2 or 0 anal spines.

Genus Oxycururus Gervais, 1842; Bérner, 1901.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

This will be given at the end of Part If. of the paper, which will deal with

the Entomobryoidea.

TWO NEW DANTHONIAS

BY A. B. CASHMORE

Summary

Danthonia Duttoniana, n. sp. Culmi 50-60cm alti, robusti ; folia angusta, 15-25 cm. longa, glabra;
panicula sublaxa, 8-15 cm. longa, circa 5 cm. lata, ramis inferioribus 6-10 cm. longis, basin versus
longe nudis; spiculae glomeratae, pedicellis 20-30 mm. longis, distantibus; glumae exteriores latae,
15-20 mm. longae ; spiculae 5-9-flores, aristis glumas exteriores valde superantibus; pars basilaris
glumae floriferae fusca, lata, 3-4 mm. longa, supra et subter annulo pilorum cincta ; lobis lateralibus
6-10 mm. longis, pro dimidio eorum aristatis; arista centralis 14-17 mm. longa, infra geniclum
brunnea et arcte torta; palea 7 mm. longa, acuta, emarginata, dorso glabra.

72

TWO NEW DANTHONIAS.

By A. B. CasHMore (Waite Agricultural Research Institute).
(Communicated by J. M. Black, A.L.S.).

[Read June 8, 1933.]

Danthonia Duttoniana, n. sp. Culmi 50-60 cm. alti, robusti; folia angusta,
15-25 cm. longa, glabra; panicula sublaxa, 8-15 cm. longa, circa 5 cm. lata, ramis
inferioribus 6-10 cm. longis, basin versus longe nudis; spiculae glomeratae, pedi-
cellis 20-30 mm. longis, distantibus; glumae exteriores latae, 15-20 mm. longae;
spiculae 5-9-flores, aristis glumas exteriores valde superantibus; pars basilaris
glumae floriferae fusca, lata, 3-4 mm. longa, supra et subter annulo pilorum cincta ;
lobis lateralibus 6-10 mm. longis, pro dimidio eorum aristatis; arista centralis
14-17 mm. longa, infra geniculum brunnea et arcte torta; palea 7 mm. longa,
acuta, emarginata, dorso glabra.

Mount Lofty Range; Victoria; New South Wales.

Differs from D. semianniularis in the larger and looser panicle, with numerous
spikelets and the lower panicle-branches much larger and naked towards the base
for about half their length. This species, mentioned as D. Duttoniana but not
described by Mr. E. Breakwell in his “Grasses and Fodder Plants of New South
Wales,” p. 234 (1923), was named after Mr. J. Dutton. observer at the Bathurst
Experiment Farm.

Danthonia Richardsonii, n. sp. Culmi 60-70 cm. alti, robusti; laminae
foliorum 20-30 cm. longae, angustac, glabrae; panicula densa, 8-12 cm. longa,
4-3 cm. lata, circa 70-spiculata, ranus erectis, inferioribus 1-4 cm. longis fere
tisque ad basin spiculis vestitis; spiculae 4-5-flores; glumae exteriores latae,
11-14 mm. longae; pars basilaris glumae floriferae 4 mm. longa, pilis subsparsis
vel in seriebus verticalibus potius quam transversis, lobis lateralibus 4 mm. longis
lanceolatis et brevissime aristatis; arista centralis 8 mm, longa, pallida, infra
geniculum tantum semel torta; palea 4 mm. longa, obtusa, oblonga-cuneata, dorso
glabra, laciniis villosa.

Werribee, Victoria.

Differs from D. semiannularis in the broader, denser panicle, the much
shorter, pale-coloured and only once-twisted central awn, the shorter lateral lobes,
and the scattcred hairs of the flowering glume. Named after Dr. A. E. V. Richard-
son, first Director of the Waite Agricultural Research Institute.

English description in Comm. Aus. C.S.1.R. Bull, 69 (1932),

A REVISION OF THE EURYMELINI (HOMOPTERA, BYTHOSCOPIDAE).

BY J. W. EVANS, M.A., F.R.E.S.

Summary

Insects of the Eurymelini division of the Eurymelinae have attracted the notice of collectors in
Australia since the earliest days of settlement, and for upwards of a century specimens have been
sent to Museums in Europe for description by entomologists. Many of the descriptions were made
from single specimens, with the result that synonyms are abundant, since the specific descriptions
were largely based on colour characteristics, and with the majority of the known species the
colouration is extremely variable.

A REVISION OF THE EURYMELINI (HOMOPTERA, BYTHOSCOPIDAE).

By J. W. Evans, M.A., F.R.E.S.
(Division of Economic Entomology, Council for Scientific
and Industrial Research. )

[Read June 8, 1933.]

INTRODUCTION.

Insects of the Eurymelini division of the Eurymelinae have attracted the
notice of collectors in Australia since the earliest days of settlement, and for
upwards of a century specimens have been sent to Museums in Europe for descrip-
tion by entomologists. Many of the descriptions were made from single specimens,
with the result that synonyms are abundant, since the specific descriptions were
largely based on colour characteristics, and with the majority of the known species
the colouration is extremely variable.

Up to the present it has been the custom to place large individuals in the
genus Eurymela Le P. & S. and the small ones in the genus Eurymeloides auctt.,
but for a long time it has been apparent that the classification of, the group was in
need of revision. The late Professor C. F. Baker had intended undertaking this
work, and went so far as to prepare a tentative classification; this was never pub-
lished. The revision presented here is based on a study of material examined in
the collections of the British Museum; the Australian Museum, Sydney; the
National Museum, Melbourne; the South Australian Museum; the Macleay Collec-
tion of the University of Sydney; the Froggatt Collection at Canberra, and the
author’s private collection. In addition, material has been Jent by the Queens-
land Museum, and five paratypes of species described by Kirkaldy have been lent
to the author by Mr. O. H. Swezey of the Hawaiian Sugar Planters’ Association.
The author is indebted to the authorities of these institutions for permitting him
to examine the collections in their care. He also particularly wishes to acknow-
ledge his indebtedness to Mr. W. E. China, of the British Museum, without whose
ever ready help and advice he would have been unable to carry out this work. Mr.
China permitted full use to be made of a tentative key to the Eurymelinae genera,
(MSS.), prepared by him in 1926, and also furnished descriptions and drawings
of type material in the British Museum collection.

SYSTEMATICS.

The Eurymelinae are considered to be a division of the Bythoscopidae on
account of the facial position of the ocelli. Further research may show that they
merit elevation to family rank. In a paper published in 1926, China‘ con-
sidered the Pogonoscopini as a sub-family; here they are classed as a tribe, In
addition to insects allied to Pogonoscopus spp. and Eurymela spp., there exist in
Australia a number of genera similar to those mentioned above in having the
ocelli facially placed. They also resemble them in habits and general appearance,
but they Jack the typical Eurymeloid colour pattern and differ in the structure of
the genitalia. These insects are provisionally placed in the Ipoini. The three
tribes of the sub-family Eurymeclinae may be separated by means of the follow-
ing key —

@) China, W. E., Trans, Ent. Soc., London, 1926 (2), 289,

74

1. Tegmina, a shiny blue, black, or brown colour, with or without white or coloured
fasciae; sub-gemtal plates broad and flap-like, with styles... 7, om i 8
Tegmina, hyaline or more or less transparent; if coloured brown or black, then with-
out definite fasciae, and lacking the typical Eurymeloid colour-pattern; sub-genital
plates long and narrow, without styles. bs .. if £; * .. Jpornt

Nw

Head, including the eyes, narrower than the pronotum at the base; hind-tibiae rounded
in section with the outer sides flattened, and bearing a regular armature of spines
arising direct from the tibiae themselves. a of Be, .. PoGoNoscorrnt
Head, including the eyes, wider than the pronotum at the base; hind tibiae quadrilateral
in section, bearing distinct spurs with modified spines at their apices. .. EuryMEntnt

This paper is concerned only with the Eurymelini; the Ipoini will be dealt
with at a future date. The Pogonoscopini') have already been revised by China
(1926). Among the Eurymelini examined were many single specimens represen-
tative of new species. These will not be described until further material is
available. .

Key ro THE GENERA OF THE EURYMELINI.

1. Tegmen with four or five large and distinct apical cells; appendix well developed :
hind tibial armature variable. a Me =e 7 aes Sa a 8
Tegmen without distinct apical cells, usually reticulate apically, or with eight or mine
apical cells partially developed; appendix small; hind tibiae with one to three distinct
spurs@) a *, 4 a n te ss fe an a2 ney 2

2. Head in profile evenly convexly rounded or globose... be an Me 4 SS
Head in profile not evenly convexly rounded or globose, the frons being produced into
a trausverse spade-shaped process in the middle, which is concave dorsally,

EuryMebops Kirkaldy

Genotype Eurynela rubrovittata A. & S.

_ 3. Head in profile evenly convexly rounded, not globose; tegmina, when closed, strongly
tectiform ae a3 - 2; is ri & PL e > 25 -

Head in profile strongly globosely convex; tegmina when closed not strongly tectiform,

the clavus more or less horizontal and in the same plane as the pronotum and

scutellum. st ts 3 a 73 os .. PLATYEURYMELA, gen, nov.

Genotype Eurymela semifascia Walker

4. Tegmina, black or brown with or without whitish fasciae: femora of fore legs with
four to stx pairs of short blunt spurs on their interior margins: hind tibiae with
one spur, me bs EuryMera Le P. & S.

Genotypa Euryniwla fenestrata Le P. & S.
Tegmina, black with one or two whitish fasciae, if two. the anterior one very large
and the posterior one small, usually reticulate apically, occasionally with large apical
cells; femora of fore legs spurless; hind tibiae with two, occasionally three spurs.

PAURQEURYMELA, gen. nov.
Genotype Eurymela amplicincta Walker

5. Front and middle femora spineless; hind tibiae with three ta five distinct spurs
decreasing in size from the apex of the tibiae to the hase. Ls wd oF on 6
Front and middle femora with strong outwardly-curved spines (front with one, m'ddle
with three spines); hind tibiae with two distinct spurs on the apical half, and several
feeble ones towards the hase. 3 ae 3 of .. EtryMerira, gen. nov.

Genotype Euryinela ternutinalis Walker
6. Hind tibiae with three to five distinct spurs: sub-genital plates with distinct styles.
EuryvMetormrs Kirkaldy
Genotype Eurymela bicincta Erichs.
Hind tibiae with two distinct spurs and numerous spines: sub-genital plates with only
a very slight development of a style .. an A .. TeURYMELESSA, gen. nov.

Genotype Eurymeloides moruvana Distant

@) AU the representatives of this tribe, so far described, have been collected in Western
Australia. In the South Australian Museum are specimens from Kangaroo Island, South
Australia, and Victoria.

©) These spurs are not homologous with those that occur on the hind tibiae of the
Cercopidae, but are actually the enlarged bases of mobile spines.

75

TEurYMELA Le Pelletier and Serville.
Eneyc. Meth. 10; 604, 1825.
Signoret, Ann. Soc. Ent, Fr, (2) viii.; 503, 1850.

Signoret divided this genus into two sections, but did not name them. Since
the genus as it now stands comprises only a few of the many species originally
included in it, a redescription is given below.

Wedge-shaped insects, 6-14 mm. in length (from the apex of the head to the
tip of the folded tegmina). The general colouration is brown or purplish-black,
and the head in profile is evenly convexly rounded (fig. C, fig. 5). The venation
of the tegmina is reticulate apically, and the hind tibiae have one distinct spur.

Twelve species have been described belonging to this genus as now defined;
only three of these are recognised here, the others heing considered as local races
that differ in colour pattern and occasionally in size, but not in structure. One
new species is described.

EURYMELA FENESTRATA Le P. & S. (Genotype).

*Eurymela fenestrata le P. & S., Encyc. Meth, 10; 604, 1825. *Hurymela
ruficollis Burm., Genera Insectorum, 1838-45. *Eurymela discoidalis Sign.,
Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (2) viii.; 505, 1850. Hurymela distincta Sign., Ann. Soc. Ent.
Fr. (2) viii.; 506, 1850. Eurymela vicina Sign., Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (2) viii;
506, 1850. *Eurymela suffusa Walk., List Homoptera iti.; 640, 1851. Furyitela
speculum Walk., List Homoptera iti.; 641, 1851. *Eurymela plebeia Kirk.,
H.S.P.A. Exp. Sta, Bull. 1 (9); 355, 1906. Eurymela lubra Wirk., H.S.P.A. Exp.
Sta. Bull. 1 (9); 355, 1906. *Zuryvmela subnigricans Dist.. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg.
52; 105, 1908.

A great number of varieties of this species exist, many of which have been
given specific names. These varieties can be divided into two groups. One group
comprises individuals in which the general colouration is bronze or brown; in the
other group the predominating colour is black. Since no morphological differences
can be discovered between the many varietics of both groups, and intergrades
exist between them, they are best considcred as comprising one species. There
is, however, no doubt that Eurymela fenestrata as defined here contains a number
of incipient species, any one of which, if isolated for a sufficiently long period,
would probably acquire distinct structural characters, Separate descriptions for
the two groups are given below. The synonyms marked * belong to the brown
group, the remainder to the black group. Figure A is a diagrammatic represen-
tation of the tegmina of some of the varieties of the brown group, Although
these forms are well established and not chance varieties; it is felt that it would
only confuse their identification to give them specific rank, especially as there are
certainly many more colour combinations than those figured here. The figures
are drawn from individuals examined by the author, and were selected as showing
the range of variation, and not as representing named varieties. ,

Brown Group.

Description—Length, 10 mm. (from the apex of the head to the tip of the
folded tegmina). Head, entirely orange-rufous or very dark brown, or marked
with a pattern containing both colours; maxillary plates always cream coloured.
Pronotum and scutellum entirely apricot orange, orange rufous or dark purplish-
brown, or marked with a pattern of orange and brown. Tegmen, with the anterior
costal margin always rufous or yellowish, the rest of the tegmen dark brown or
very dark purplish-brown, except for whitish fasciae which may be present; these
vary in number from one to three, and though constant in position and size as far
as the varieties are concerned, present numerous combinations within the group

76

and may be entirely absent (fg. A). Legs, coxae, and femora concolorous with
the thorax; tibiae and tarsi black, excepting the proximal tarsal segment of the
hind legs, which is white. Abdomen, ventral surface pale or dark ochreous;
genital segments variable in colour, the lobes of the last ventral segment in the
female long and narrow (fig. C, fig. 3). Male genitalia, sub-genital plates large
and boat-shaped, having a long narrow style lying along the interior margin of
the plate; the base of the style is attached to the thickened edge of the ventral
margin of the plate; aedeagus as in figure (fig. B, fig. 1; fig. C, fier 8).

Distribution. (O__Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria and South Aus-
tralia.

BLack GROUP.

Description.-Length, 10-14 mm. Ilead, black, but for the maxillary plates,
which are white or cream. Pronotum and scutellum, black, Tegmen, bluish or
purplish-black, usually with one, two or three whitish fasciae; these, though con-
stant in size and position as far as the varieties are concerned, present numerous
combinations within the group and may be entirely absent; costal margin always
black, never rufous or yellow. Legs, coxae, and proximal halves of femora scarlet
(some museum specimens have yellow abdomens, it is not known whether this was
their original colour) ; male and female genital segments black.

Distribution.—Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia,

Note.—There is a transitional form between the two groups which has all the
colour characteristics of the black group, excepting that the anterior portion of
the costal margin of the tegmen is rufous.

EURYMELA ERYTHROCNEMIS Burmeister.

Eurymela erythrocnemis Burm., Genera Insectorum, 1838-45,

Description—Length, 8-9 mm. Head, black, maxillary plates broadly white.
Pronotum, black, posterior margin white. Scutellum, black with apex rufous.
Tegmen, black with the costal and claval margins broadly fulvous. Two white
fasciae; anterior fascia strongly widened towards clavus across which it extends
half way; posterior fascia arcuate, more or less parallel-sided, not much wider at
costal margin than at apex of clavus. Legs, front and middle legs with coxae and
proximal halves of the femora reddish, distal halves of the femora and tarsi
black; hind coxae, femora and tibiae red, apices of tibiae and last two tarsal
segments black, first tarsal segment white. Abdomen, ventral surface black, with
a pallid spot in the middle of the last ventrite, and a small pale spot on the middle
of each of the sub-genital plates (8). Male genitalia, aedeagus as in fig. B, fig. 2.

Distribution—New South Wales.

EURYMELA RUBROLIMBATA Kirkaldy.
Eurymela rubrolimbata Wirk., H.S.P.A. Exp. Sta. Bull. 1 (9); 354, 1906.

Description —Length, 9 mm. Head, black, but for a narrow white border to
the maxillary plates. Pronotum, either entirely black, or with the posterior half
dull olive; the band of this colour being widest in the middle of the pronotum.
Scutellum, black. Tegmen, bluish or bronzy black with the costal and claval
margins fulvous; there are two whitish fasciac, the anterior irregular in shape,
often narrow and transverse, the posterior transverse and always wider at the
costal than at the hind margin of the tegmen. Legs, front legs, coxae, and
proximal halves of femora reddish, distal halves of the femora, tibiae and tarsi
black ; middle legs entirely reddish but for the tarsi, and the distal halves of the

or Distribution records refer to insects examined and do not necessarily inflates the
limits of any species.

77

Fig. A.

Diagrammatic figures of the tegmina of insects belonging to the brown division of
Eurymela fenestrata, to show the range of variation.

78

femora, which are black; hind legs entirely reddish, but tor the distal quarters of
the tibiae, which are black, and the first tarsal segment which is white. Abdomen,
ventral surface black. Male Genitalia, aedeagus, as in fig. B, fig. 3.

Distribution—New South Wales.

Eurymela bakeri, n. sp.

Description —Length, 6-7 mm. Head, black, maxillary plates white. Pro-
notum, black, frequently the posterior margin is white. Scutellum, black.
Tegmen, black, with the costal and claval margins fulvous, and having two white
or grey fasciae; the anterior fascia is irregular in shape, frequently extending into
the clavus, the posterior lunate, reaching transversely right across the tegmen,
much wider at the costa than at the clavus. Legs, front and middle legs with the
coxae and proximal halves of the femora reddish, distal halves of the femora,
tibiae and tarsi black; hind legs entirely reddish-brown, but for the apex of the
tibia which is black, and the first tarsal segment which is white. Abdomen, ventral
surface black. Male genitalia, similar to those of E. erythrocnemis, the ventral
outgrowth from the base of the aedeagus, differently shaped (fig. B, fig. 4).

Distribution—New South Walcs.

‘Type @ from Canberra, F. C. T., (12/30), in the collection of the Division
of Economic Entomology, Council for Scientific and Industrial Research at
Canberra. Described from a long series of males and females.

Platyeurymela, gen. nov.

Insects comprised in this genus may at once be recognised by being almost
oval in outline when viewed from above (fig. C, fig. 1), and not wedge-shaped
like those of related genera.

The head is globosely convex. The tegmina, which have their venation
reticulate apically, are not strongly tectiform, but have the clavus more or less
on a plane with the pronotum. The hind tibiae have one spur, and the front
fernora five or six pairs of very small spurs on the inner edge.

PLATYEURYMELA SEMIFASCIA Walker (Genotype).
Eurymela semifascia Walk., list Homoptera iii.; 643, 1851.
Eurymela tasmani Dist., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. 52; 106, 1908.

Description—Length, 8 mm, Head, black, maxillary plates entirely black.
Pronotum, black, hind margin narrowly white. Scutcllum, black. Tegmen, black,
costal and claval margins narrowly reddish; two narrow white fasciae, the
anterior one on a level with the middle of the clavus and extending from very
near the costal margin to the claval commisure; the posterior one on a level with
the apex of the clavus and extending thence to the costal margin. Legs, fore and
middle coxae, extreme base of anterior femora and proximal halves of middle
femora, reddish-brown; anterior femora except base, distal halves of middle
femora, tibiae and tarsi, black; hind legs with coxac and proximal halves of
femora reddish, distal halves of femora, bases of tibiae and ultimate tarsal seg-
ment, black; tibiae except bases reddish, first two tarsal segments brownish-
yellow. Abdomen, ventral surface black; posterior margin of penultimate seg-
ment, a spot-on the middle of the two previous segments, and the ovipositor sheath,
fulvous yellow. Male genitalia, aedeagus with the ventral lobe developed, the
gonopore opening at the side (fig. B, fig. 5). ,

Distribution —New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia.

79

Var. tasmanit Distant.

Similar to the typical form, but the anterior white fascia on the tegmen
broadened, and the inner half of the corium between the fasciae entirely
white. The maxillary plates are entirely black as in semifascia. The male
genitalia show slight differences, such as a narrower and more apically rounded
ventral lobe of the aedeagus.

Distribution —Tasmania.

PLATYEURYMELA ATRA Walker (fig. C, fig. 1).
LEurymela atra Walk., List Homoptera iii.; 645, 1851.

Description.—Length, 8 mm. Head, black, with a narrow white margin to
the maxillary plates. Pronotum, black, with the hind margin narrowly white.
Seutcllum, black. Tegmen, dark brown, shading to black at the apex and the
base of the clavus. Legs, fore and middle coxae and proximal halves of femora
reddish-brown; distal halves of the femora, tibiae and tarsi, black; hind legs with
coxae and proximal halves of the femora red, distal halves of the femora and
the ultimate tarsal segment black; tibiae and the first two tarsal segments reddish-
brown. Abdomen, ventral surface black, each segment having a brown posterior
margin; sub-genital plates fulvous. Male genitalia, similar to those of P. sem#-
fascia, but with the apex of the aedeagus much broader, and the ventral process
with a distinct bump on the side (fig. B. fig. 6).

Distribution.—Tasmania and South Australia,

Pauroeurymela, gen. nov.

This genus contains small species from four to six millimetres in length.
The head in profile is evenly convexly rounded. The tegmina, while usually
having the venation reticulate apically, occasionally have large distinct apical cells.
The fore femora are spurless, and the hind tibiae bear from two to three spurs.

PAUROEURYMELA AMPLicINCTA Walker (Genotype).
Euryvinela amplicincta Wall., Ins. Saund. Homopt. 84, 1858.

Description—Length, 4-6 mm. Head, black, maxillary plates white. Pro-
notum, either black with the posterior margin narrowly white or olive, or entirely
dull olive. Scutellum, black. Tegmen, black with a narrow fulvous margin;
there are two transverse grey or pale yellowish-brown fasciae, the anterior very
much larger than the posterior; the fasciae converge towards each other, being
much closer together at the hind margin than at the costal margin of the tegmen.
Legs, front and middle Jegs with the coxae and proximal halves of the femora
red, distal halves of the femora, tibiae and tarsi, black; hind legs entirely red.
but for the distal tarsal segment, which is black. Abdomen, ventral surface black.
Male genitalia, the sub-genital plates are more or less rectangular; the opening of
the gonopore its at the extremity of the aedeagus, not at the side; there is a spine
at the posterior edge, and the anterior ventral process arising from the base of
the aedeagus, is present (fig. B, fig. 11).

Distribution——~New South Wales.

Pauroeurymela parva, n. sp. (fig. C, fig. 2).

Description —Length, 7-8 mm, Ilead, black, eyes dull brown; the vertex seen
from above is angular. Pronotum, black, the posterior margin very narrowly red-
dish. Scutellum, black. Tegmen, black with a narrow fulvous edge to the costal and
claval margins; there are two pale yellowish-brown fasciae, the anterior trans-
verse and wide, narrower at the costal than at the hind margin of the tegmen

80

(When the tegmina are closed these two fasciae form a band right across the dorsal
surface of the insect.) Posterior fascia, a very small triangular pale area lying
against the costal margin of the tegmen. Legs, reddish, but for the fore tibiae,
fore tarsi, tarsi of the middle pair of legs, and the distal tarsal segment of the
hind legs, which are black. Abdomen, ventral surface black. Male genitalia,
aedeagus with no anterior ventral process developed, but similar to that of the
genotype in having a spine present on the posterior margin, and the opening of
the gonopore at the extremity of the aedeagus (fig. B, fig. 12).

Distribution—New South Wales.

Type ¢ from Katoomba, New South Wales (October 3, 1926) ; paratypes,
two females from the same locality; type and one of the paratypes in the collec-
tion of the Australian Museum, Sydney.

EuryME.ops Kirkaldy.
HLS.P.A. Exp. Sta. Bull. 1 (9); 350, 1906.

‘Kirkaldy defined Eurymelops as a sub-genus, it is here given generic rank.
This genus comprises insects eleven to fourteen millimetres in length, which are
brightly coloured, red being the predominant colour. The frons is produced into
a transverse spade-shaped process; this process is concave dorsally, and hence
the eyes from above appear very prominent (fig. C, fig. 6). The venation of the
tegmen is reticulate apically, and the hind tibiae have two, occasionally three,
spurs.

EURYMELOPS RUBROVITTATA Amyot & Serville (Genotype).

Eurymela rubrovittata A, & S., Hist. Nat. des Ins. Hemip., 555, 1843.
Eurymela rubrofasciata Stal, Ofv. Vet.-Ak. Forh. 22; 156, 1865. Lurymelops
rubrovitta Kirk., H.S.P.A. Exp. Sta. Bull. 1 (9) ; 354, 1906.

Description —Length, 14 mm. Head, black, excepting the maxillary plates
and a narrow band between the eyes, which are red. Pronotum, black, posterior
margin red. Scutellum, black. Tegmen, small area along the anterior edge of

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURE B.

Aedeagus of Eurymela fenestrata.
Eurymela erythrocnemis.
, » Eurymela rubrolimbata.
Eurymela bakeri.

Figure 1
2
3
4... ey
Pi bape ws _ » Llatyeurymela scemifascia. .
6
7
8

”

: Platyeurymela atra.
s » HLurymelops bicolor.
nt , Lurymelops rubrovittata.

; D G4 we % » Eurymelops latifascia.

a0 LO) es 5. ib ., Lurymelops generosa.

» ll .. a8 an » Paurocurymela amplicincta,
og LE eis he fs » Pauroeurymela parva.

oo UK an dy 1 » Eurymeloides pulchra.

io WR Se oe » Lurymeloides bicincta.

y 1s ,. y. + , Hurymeloides marmorata.

» lb .. i , Lurymeloides punctata.

yy. le” &. * a » Lurymeloides lincata,

» 18 .. he 5 » Burymeloides walkeri.

ye WD as os 3 » Hurymeloides minutum.

a 20? 4. z. » » Lurymeloides perpusilla.
ees oe te it » Lurymeloides adspersa.

sey ee an . , Lurymelessa moruyana,

i oe ZS in iz » Eurymelessa froggatt.

a or aan ” » Lurymelita terminalis.

ek DT wy oh . ,. Sub-genital plates, styles (s) and

parameres (p.), of E. terminalis.

81

Fig. B.

[For description see opposite pagel

82

the costal margin, and two transverse fasciae, red; the anterior fascia is sinuate;
the rest of the tegmen is black, including the costal margin between the two fascia.
Legs, coxae and proximal halves of the femora red; distal halves of the femora,
tibiae and tarsi, black, excepting the first tarsal segment of the hind legs, which
is white. Abdomen, red, genital segments black; the flap on the last ventral seg-
ment of the female, short and broad (fig. C, fig. 4). Male genitalia, sub-genital
plates and parameres similar to those of Eurymela spp., aedeagus as in figure
(fig. B, fig. 8).
Distribution —New South Wales and Victoria’

EuRYMELOPS BICOLOR Burmeister.

Eurymela bicolor Burm., Gencra Insectorum, 1838-45. Eurymela basalts
Walk., List Homoptera iti.; 640, 1851.

Description —Length, 14 mm. Head, metallic blue or greenish-black, with
the maxillary plates and the dorsal margin of the frons red, or the whole head
entirely red. Pronotum, either entirely bluish or greenish-black, or black with
the posterior margin red. Scutellum, bluish or greenish-black ; in some specimens
there is a red spot in the middle. Tegmen, entirely a metallic greenish or bluish-
black with the anterior costal area red, or all the anterior half of the tegmen, but
for a black spot on the clavus, red, and the posterior half metallic blue. These
are the two commonest combinations of red and bluc found in this species, but
there are many others. Legs, usually entirely black, coxae and anterior halves
of femora of fore legs occasionally red. Abdomen, ventral surface red. Male
genitalia, aedeagus as in figure (fig. B, fig. 7).

Distribution.—Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia,

EurYMELops LaTrFAscia Walker.

Eurymelu latifascia Walk., List Tlomoptera iti.; 639, 1851. Lurymela
pascoci Dist., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. 52; 106, 1908.

Description—Length, 11 mm. Head, ochreous, {frequently with a black area
in the middle of the frons, and another between the eyes. Pronotum, entirely
black, black with a reddish posterior margin, or pale or dark ochreous, with an
oval-shaped black area in each anterior corner. Scutellum, black. Tegmen,
black, a basal area of varying extent ochreous, and with two red or reddish trans-
verse fasciae which are joined along the costal margin of the tegmen by a narrow
reddish or ochreous band, which widens anteriorly ; the anterior fascia is the same
width at both ends, while the posterior fascia is wider at the costal than at the
hind margin of the tegmen, (‘The basal ochreous area is always connected to the
anterior fascia along the fore border of the tegmen; the connecting red area mity
be narrow or wide.) Legs, coxae and proximal halves of femora ochreous ; distal
halves af femora, tibiae and tarsi, black, Abdomen, ochreous, frequently suffused
with black. Male genitalia, aedeagus as in figure (hg. B, fig. 9).

Distribution —Western Australia and South Australia.

TeURYMELOPS GENEROSA Stal.

Eurymela generasa Stal, Ofv. Vet.-Ak, Forh, 22; 156, 1865. furymela
bunda Dist., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. 52; 106, 1908. :

Description—Length, 14 mm. Head, entirely ochreous or reddish-testaceous,
with bluish-black irregular markings on the frons and vertex. Pronotum and
scutellum, bluish-black or testaceous, or marked with a combination of both
colours. Tegmen, reddish-testaceous, with two transverse hluish-black fasciae
that extend from the hind margin of the tegmen to close to the costal margin;
these fasciae may be broken up into small irregular black areas, not forming a
band; apical area of the tegmen, a hyaline brownish-ochreous. Legs, coxae and

83

proximal halves of femora red; distal halves of femora, tibiae and tarsi, black.
Abdomen, ventral surface, reddish-testaceous; genital and anal segments black;
sub-genital plates in the male with an oblique yellow stripe. Male genitalia,

aedeagus as in figure (fig. B, fig. 10).
Distribution.—Western Australia.

J.URYMELOIDES Kirkaldy.
H.S.P.A. Exp. Sta. Bull. 1(9) ; 354, 1906.
Lurymelias WKirk., H.S.P.A. Exp. Sta. Bull. 3; 29, 1907,

Eurvmeloides Ashmead (Ent. Amer. 5; 126, 1889), is invalid, since it was
described without reference to a specics. By his action in fixing E. bicincta
Erichs. as genotype (1906), Kirkaldy validated the genus, which should thus be
attributed to Kirkaldy and not to Ashmead. The establishment by Kirkaldy of
anew genus Eurymelias with type E. hyacinthus was therefore unnecessary, and
Eurymelias automatically becomes a synonym Eurymeloides, since bicincta and
hyacinthus are generically identical.

This genus contains a larger number of species than the other genera, and
comprises insects ranging in size from five to eleven millimetres. The head in
profile is slightly convexly rounded, in some species almost flat, and the vertex
seen from above is angular. ‘he tegmen has distinct apical cells and a well-
developed appendix. The hind tibiae have three to five distinct spurs decreasing
in size from the apex of the tibia to the base. ‘he male genitalia have large, broad
sub-genital plates, with distinct curved styles, that lie along the ventral external
margin of the plates, but are not covered by them. The aedeagus invariably has
one or two spines on the side of the posterior edge, and no anterior ventral
process.

EURYMELOIDES BiCLNCTA Erichson (Genotype).

Eurymela bicincta Erichs., Beitrag ziir fauna v. V. D. L., ‘Archiv. Natur-
gesch. 286, 1842. Eurymeloides bicinctellus Kirk., H.S.P.A, Exp. Sta. Bull. 1 (9);
352, 1906.

Description —Length, 7 mm. Head, fuscous mottled with straminaceous,
the vertex mostly black, or head entirely black. Pronotum, brown or black, with
a narrow white posterior margin. Scutellum, brown or black. ‘legmen, shiny
black with two narrow white fasciae, the anterior stretching from the middle of
the costa to just anterior to the apex of the scutellum (when the tegmina are
folded) ; the posterior transverse and widest at the costal margin; in addition to
the fasciae there may be some small white spots on the tegmina. Legs, coxae,
femora, and first tarsal joint of hind legs, white, the rest black; hind tibiae with
three spurs. Abdomen, 4 ventral surface black, but for the posterior margin ol
each segment, which is white; 9 ventral surface white, genital segments black.
(There is a variety with the abdomen, coxac, and femora, scarlet.) Male
genitalia, aedeagus as in figure (fig. B, fig. 14).

Distribution —Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia.

EURYMELOIDES PULCHRA Signoret.

Eurymela pulchra Sign., Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (2) viti.; 508, 1850. Eurynela
discifera Walk., List Homoptera iii; 641, 1851. Eurymeloides hyacinthus Kirk.,
H.S.P.A, Exp. Sta. Bull. 1 (9); 351, 1906, f

Description —Length, 11 mm. Head, clypeus and vertex black, the latter
with a median orange stripe; maxillary plates and lorae pale straminaceous; frons
pale rose with a median black stripe; eyes orange-red. Pronotum, black, with
two more or less oval orange areas; entirely black, or entirely orange. Scutellum,
orange, with a round black spot lying against the anterior margin. Tegmen, black,

84

with two yellow, pink or whitish transverse fasciae; the anterior fascia is made
up of two distinct pale areas that meet at the claval suture; these two anterior
fasciae may be quite separate or absent altogether; posterior fascia narrowly
wedge-shaped. Legs, coxae and proximal halves of femora pale rose, distal halves
of the femora, tibiae and tarsi, black, but for the first tarsal segment of the hind
legs, which is white; hind tibiae with five spurs decreasing in size from the apex
of the tibia to its base, and numerous spines. Abdomen, pale greenish-yellow ;
genital segments, black. Male genitalia, aedeagus as in figure (fig. B, fig. 13).
Distribution —Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia.

EURYMELOIDES LINEATA Signoret.

Eurymela lineata Sign., Ann, Soc. Ent. Fr, (2) viii.; 509, 1850. Hurymela
livida Walk., \ist Homoptera iii.; 642, 1851. Eurymela decisa Walk., List
Homoptera iii.; 643, 1851.

Description —Length, 8-9 mm. Head, Black, external border of the lorae
straminaceous; frons red, with a central longitudinal black stripe; eyes ferru-
gineous. (The head may be entirely yellow but for a black posterior border. )
Pronotum, black, with a narrow white posterior margin, or almost entirely red.
Seutellum, either all black, or black with a red apex. Tegmen, black, purplish-
black or purplish-brown, with a posterior transverse wedge-shaped fascia, widest
against the anterior border of the tegmen; veins anterior to the fascia, pale yellow,
posterior to the fascia, black. (The veins may be faintly pale or black, and the
fascia divided into two areas, a broad triangular area against the costal margin
of the tegmen, and a small irregular area against the hind margin; the
latter may be absent; the tegmina in some specimens are entirely black with
no pale markings.) Legs, coxae and the proximal halves of the femora red;
distal halves of the femora, tibiae and tarsi, black; hind tibiae with three spurs
and numerous spines. Abdomen, ventral surface red, genital segments, bluish-
black. Male genitalia, aedeagus as in figure (fig. B, fig, 17).

Distribution New South Wales, Victoria and South Australia.

EuRYMELOIDES PUNCTATA Signoret.

Eurymela punctata Sign., Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (2) viii. 511, 1850. Eurymela
trifasciata Sign., Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (2) vili-; 512, 1850. Hurymela ocellata Sign.,
Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (2) viii.; 511, 1850. Eurymela varia Walk., List Homoptera
iii. 644, 1851. Eurymeloides cumulosus Kirk., H.S.P.A, Exp, Sta. Bull. 1 (9);
351, 1906. Eurvmeloides ornatus Kirk., H.S.P.A, Exp. Sta. Bull. 1 (9); 352.

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURE C,

Figure 1 Platyeurymela atra.

fect Pauroeurymela parva.

» 9 Eurymela fenestrata, ventral view of apex of abdomen of female, to show over-
lapping lobes of last segment.

he eet Eurymelops rubrovitlata, ventral view of apex of abdomen of female.

at eed Eurymela fenestrata, head in profile.

» 6 Eurymelops rubroviltata, hoad in profile.

» 7 Eurymeloides nigra, hind tibia.

» 8 Eurymela fenestraia, lateral view oi tale genitalia; sp., sub-genital plate ;
p., paramere; a., aedeagus; s., style.

, 9 ., Eurymetita terminals, lateral view of male genitalia; lettering as in fig. 8.

» 10 .. Pogonoscopus myrmex, lateral view of male genitalia; lettering as in fig. 8.

» ll .. Eurymeloides rubrivenosus of Kirkaldy, aedeagus,

» 12 .. Eurymneloides rubrivenosus of Kirkaldy, sub-genital plate and paramere, (p.).

, 13. ., Eurymeloides froggatti, sub-genital plate, style (s.) and paramere (p.).

, 14... ZIpo pellucida, sub-genital plate and paramere (p.).

» 15 .. Ipo pellucida, aedeagus.

, 16 .. Lasioscopus acmaeops, sub-genital plate, style, (s.) and paramere, (p.).

86

1906. Eurymeloides testaceus Dist., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg, 52; 101, 1908.
Evuryineloides atromaculatus Dist., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. 52; 103, 1908.

This species, as the synonymy stiggests, is a very variable one, and were it
not for the large amount of material examined which showed transitional forms
hetween the named varieties, would have been treated as several species. From
the material available, forty-four specimens were selected, of which no two were
identical; the genitalia of a number of these were examined, but no appreciable
differcnees discovered.

Description—Length, 6-8 mm. Head and pronotum, black mottled with
yellow, pale brown mottled with yellow, or dark brown mottled with white; eyes
reddish-brown. Scutellum, similar to pronotum, or with black or brown mark-
ings, or all black or all brown. ‘Tegmen, usually black, but may be pale or dark
brown; there may be two complete whitish fasciae, the anterior oblique and the
posterior transverse; cither of the fasciae may be incomplete, and have black or
brown areas of varying shape in the middle of them; there may be a third
transverse fascia between the other two; the fasciae may be an opaque white of
merely semi-transparent areas of the tegmen ; in nearly all the varieties examined
the distal termination of the two anal veins have been white; the clavus may be
dotted with white or light brown spots. Legs, coxae and femora light brown;
tibiae and tarsi dark brown, excepting the first tarsal segment of the hind legs,
which is white, and the spurs and spines on the hind tibiae which are white or
yellow ; hind tibiae with five spurs. Abdomen, ventral surface very pale brown
or yellow, occasionally scarlet (this latter colour is found in aberrant forms of
many species) ; genital segments dark brown or black, Male genitalia, aedeagus
as in figure (fig. B, fig. 16).

Distribution —Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia.

EURYMELOIDES PERPUSILLA Walker.

Eurymela perpusilla Walk., Ins. Saund. Homopt. 83. 1858.

Description length, 6 mm. Head, maxillary plates and lorae yellow; the
clypeus, frons and vertex, black; eyes. egreyish-yellow. Pronotum and scutellum,
black mottled with yellow. Tegmen, black with two bright yellow fasciae; the
anterior extending from the base of the tegmen to beyond the middle of the costal
margin (not transverse but longitudinal), the posterior transverse and widest
against the costal margin, In addition to two distinct fasciae there may he a
number of yellowish or whitish spots on the tegmien, and the posterior fascia may
be broken up into a number of irregular pale areas. Tegs, coxae and proximal
halves of the femora yellow, distal halves of femora and tarsi black; tibiae black
with yellow spines; hind tibiae with three spurs. Abdomen, ventral surface black.
Male genitalia, acdeagus as in figure (fig. B. fig. 20).

Distribution —Qucensland and New South Wales.

JEURYMELOTDES MARMORATA Burmeister.

Euryinela marmorata Burm., Genera Insectorum, 1838-45. Bythuscopus
nigro-oencus Walk., List Homoptera iit. ; 867, 1851. Euryineloides sonatus Dist.,
Ann, Soc. Ent. Belg. 52; 104, 1908.

Description —Length, 7 mm. Head, black, mottled with light or dark brown.
Pronotum, light brown mottled with black and dark brown. Scutellum, black.
frequently with pale markings on the posterior half. Tegmen, black or brown,
with two indistinct yellowish or reddish transverse fasciae; in addition there may
be a number of small pale markings between and on both sides of the fasciac ;
these may be so numerous that much less than half the total area of the tegmen
is black or brown. Legs, coxae and femora yellowish or reddish-brown; tibiae

87

dark brown with pale spots, hind tibiae with three spurs. Abdomen, ventral

surface pale brown or reddish-brown; genital segments pale brown. Male

genitalia, aedeagus as-in figure (fig. B, fig. 15).
Distribution—Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia.

EURYMELOIDES ADSPERSA Signoret.
ELurymela adspersa Sign., Ann, Soc. Ent. Fr. (2) viii.; 510, 1850.

Description—Length, 9mm. Head, pronotum, and scutellum, black, mottled
with reddish-brown and yellow; eyes greyish-brown. Tegmen, black with
yellowish and whitish irregular markings arranged in the form of three indistinct
fasciae; the claval area dotted with white spots. Legs, coxae and femora pale
brown; tibiae dark brown with yellowish spots; hind tibiae with three spurs.
Abdomen, ventral surface yellow; genital segments very dark brown. Male
genitalia, aedeagus as in figure (fig. B, fig. 21).

Distribution —Tasmania and Victoria.

EURYMELOIDES WALKERI Distant.
Eurymeloides walkeri Dist., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. 52; 102, 1908.

Description—Length, 7*°5 mm. Head, bright egg-yellow, vertex largely
black except for the lateral margins; a median longitudinal stripe and a small
spot on each side near the edge of the pronotum, which are bright yellow; middle
of frons and clypeus black. Pronotum, bright yellow, with a large black spot
behind cach eye and a pair of longitudinal black stripes in the middle. Scutellum,
black with the apex and markings on the disc yellow. Tegmen, shiny black, with
an irregular arcuate spot on the corium anteriorly, a wedge-shaped white spot on
the costa posteriorly extending half-way to the apex of the clavus, and a pair of
small white spots between the apex of the wedge-shaped spot and the apex of the
clavus; claval suture with a long percurrent white stripe, a small arcuate white
band extending from the claval suture inwards towards the apex of the scutellum
at a level slightly anterior to the fascia on the corium; three small white spots on
the clavus, one at the apex of each of the claval veins, the other slightly beyond
the inner end of the claval fascia, on a level with the apex of the scutellum. Legs,
coxae, basal halves of femora, and apices of hind femora, yellow, the rest of the
legs black, except for the first segment of the hind tarsi, a row of spots down the
outer edges of the tibiae and the bases of the hind tibial spines, which are
yellowish-white. Abdomen, ventral surface bright yellow, sub-genital plates in
male shining black; sides of the ninth segment in the female black; disc of
penultimate segments in both sexes somewhat infuscate. Male genitalia, aedeagus
as in figure (fig. B, fig. 18).

Distribution —Western Australia (Albany).

Eurymeloides minutum, n. sp.

Description—Length, 5 mm. Head, black, mottled with yellow and brown;
vertex as seen from above convex, not angular, Pronotum, black, with a few
scattered small yellow spots. Scutellum, entirely black. Tegmen, hyaline, very
dark shiny brown in colour with two white fasciae, the anterior divided into two
more or less oval parts, both lying in the costal area; the posterior, an irregular
transverse fascia, interrupted near the middie; it is wider at the anterior than at
the posterior border of the tegmen; the claval area has a number of small yellow
spots on it, and there are a few larger round yellow spots along the costal margin.
Legs, coxae and femora pale yellowish-brown; tibiae and tarsi dark brown with
white spots at the bases of the spines; proximal tarsal segments of hind legs,
white ; hind tibiae with three spurs. Abdomen, very dark brown; genital segments

D

88

of female pale brown, of male dark brown. Male genitalia, aedeagus as in figure
(fig. B, fig. 19).

Type, @ from Matcham, near Gosford,'New South Wales (March 27, 1924),
paratype é from the same locality ; both specimens in the collection of the Aus-
tralian Museum, Sydney.

Eurymeloides nigra, n. sp.

Description—Length, 10 mm. Head, black, but for the external margins of
the lorae, the external borders of the maxillary plates and the sides of the frons,
which are white; eyes, scarlet. Pronotum and scutellum, black. Tegmen, black,
with a single transverse posterior wedge-shaped white fascia, widest at the costal
margin. (Paratype, with a small circular anterior fascia.) Legs, black, hind
tibiae with three spurs (fig. C, fig. 7). ‘Abdomen, ventral surface, the anterior
three visible segments black anteriorly, pale brown posteriorly, the remaining
segments black.

Distribution —New Guinea.

Type, @ from Bisiatabu, Port Moresby, New Guinea, Paratype ¢ from
the same locality. Both specimens in the collection of the South Australian
Museum.

Eurymelessa, gen. nov.

This genus can be separated from Eurymeloides, which it somewhat
resembles, principally by the characters of the male genitalia, The styles on the
sub-genital plates are rudimentary (fig. C, fig. 13), and the aedeagus is longer
and narrower than those of Eurymeloides spp. (fig. B, figs. 22 and 23). The head
is slightly sub-angularly produced, and is inclined at a steep angle to the rest of
the body, the maxillary plates are very broad. The venation of the tegmina is not
reticulate apically, and the appendix is well developed. The hind tibiae have
two spurs and numerous spines.

EuryMELESSA MORUYANA Distant (Genotype).
Eurymeloides moruyana Dist., Ann. Nat. Hist. 20; 188, 1917.

Description —Length, 6°5-7 mm._ Head, black with the posterior margin of
the vertex moderately pale brown. Pronotum, entirely pale brown. Scutellum,
black. Tegmen, dark brown shading to black apically; an oblique stripe across
the middle of the corium from the claval suture to the costa; the costal edge, most
anterior, and apices of the two anal veins, yellow or white; two apical white spots
on the coritum, one at the apex of the clavus, the other on the costal margin, at
the same level; clavus sometimes entirely pale yellow. Legs, brown, last segment
of the hind tarsi fuscous. Abdomen, ventral surface yellow. Male genitalia,
sub-genital plates with rudimentary styles (fig. C, fig. 13); aedeagus long and
narrow (fig. B, fig. 22).

Distribulion.—Queensland and New South Wales.

Eurymelessa froggatti, n. sp.
Description —Length, 6 mm. Head, black, or black with a pale brown crown,

eyes, reddish-brown. Pronotum, either entirely pale brown, or entirely black. Scu-
tellum, black. Tegmen, with one incomplete whitish apical fascia, or a number of
small white apical spots; clavus and claval border of the corium, often largely
dirty yellow. Legs, brown, last segment of hind tarsi black. Abdomen, ventral
surface black, with the posterior margins of the segments narrowly pale brown.
Male genitalia, aedeagus as in figure (fg. B, fig. 23).

Distribution.—Queensland, New South Wales, and Victoria.

Type, @ in the collection of the South Australian Museum, Described from
a long series of males and females.

89

Eurymelita, gen. nov.

This genus contains a species very similar in general appearance to insects
belonging to the genus Eurymeloides. The head, in profile, is almost flat, The
tegmina have large, distinct apical cells and a well-developed appendix, and the
front and middle femora have strong outwardly curved spines, the front with
one and the middle with three spines. The hind tibiae have two distinct spurs
on the apical half and several feeble ones towards the base. The male genitalia
have very short parameres, and the sub-genital plates have a style arising from
the dorsal edge, and not from the ventral edge as in all previous genera, (Fig. B,
fig. 25, and fig. C, fig. 9).

The species described below is variable in colouration. Two main varieties
exist, one with black tegmina and narrow pinkish-coloured fasciae, the other with
brown tegmina and whitish fasciae. ‘These varieties are connected by a series of
transitional forms, but no morphological differences have been discovered
between any of the many specimens examined.

EURYMELITA TERMINALIS Walker.
Eurymela terminalis Walk., List Homoptera iii. ; 642, 1851.

Description —Length, 9 mm. Head, usually all black, but for the maxillary
plates, which are whitish; the latter may be pale chocolate colour and the frons
have red markings on it, or the head may be entirely brown. Pronotum and
scutellum, black with the hind margins chocolate or rufous; sometimes the choco-
late colouration extends right over these sclerites ; they may also be pale brown.
Tegmen, black with two narrow white, cream or dull pink fasciae; the anterior
one where it meets the hind margin of the clavus extends anteriorly towards the
head, so that when the tegmina are closed, the anterior fasciae form an X; posterior
fascia wider at the costal than at the hind margin of the tegmen; in some speci-
mens the area of the tegmen anterior to the proximal fascia, is chocolate in colour,
in others the whole tegmen, other than the fasciae, is pale brown. Legs, coxae and
proximal halves of femora reddish-brown, distal halves of femora, tibiae and
tarsi, black, Abdomen, ventral surface red, genital segments black. Male geni-
talia, sub-genital plates, parameres and aedeagus as in fig, B, figs. 24 and 25, and
fig. C, fig. 9,

Distribution —Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia.

MIscELLANEous Notes,

The insects described under the following names have not been included in
this revision, since they belong to the Ipoini.

Eurymela porriginosa Sign., Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (2) viii.; 512, 1850.
Eurymela lignosa Walk., Homopt. Ins. Suppl. 166, 1858. Eurymeloides lenti-
ginosus Kirk., H.S.P.A, Exp. Sta. Bull. 1 (9); 353, 1906. Lurymeloides rubri-
venosus Kirk., H.S.P.A. Exp. Sta. Bull. 1 (9) ; 353, 1906. Eurymeloides insignis
Dist., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. 52; 103; 1908.

The following were originally placed in the genus Eurymeloides by Jacobi:
Pogonoscopus lenis Jacobi and Lasioscopus acmaeops Jacobi. (Jacobi, A., 1909,
Faun. S.-W. Aust., Michaelsen u. Hartmeyer ii.; 340.) They were transferred
by China (1926) to their present genera. Walker described two insects under
the name of Hurymela suffusa, one in, 1851 (= fenestrata Le. P. & S.), the other
in 1858 (Ins. Saund. Homopt. 83) ; the last-named description is vague and the
type is lost, consequently this species cannot be identified with any certainty. In
addition to the above, two other insects have at some time been referred to the
genus Eurymela; one is Olonia maura F. (Ent. Syst. iv.; 40, 1794), which
apparently both Signoret and Distant understood to be a Eurymela sp.; the other
is Dardus abbreviatus Guer., of which a synonym was described under the name

90

of Eurybrachys laeta White (Eyre Exped. 1; 433, 1845), and subsequently this
name was quoted by Kirkaldy (H.S.P.A. Exp. Sta. Bull. 1 (9); 356, 1906), as
being that of a Eurymela sp.

_ CONCLUSIONS.

This paper has dealt only with the Eurymelini, which is a natural tribe and
not an artificial grouping of unrelated genera. The Ipoini, on the other hand, will
probably have to be split up into three or four divisions, since as at present
defined, it contains a diverse assemblage of forms. Whilst as far as it is known,
the Eurymelini are confined to trees of the genus Eucalyptus, the Ipoini are found
on a wide range of trees and shrubs, including Casuarinas and Melaleucas, as well
as Eucalypts.

Below is given a chart showing the possible relationships of the three tribes
of the Eurymelinae, and the genera of the Eurymelini, The genera Eurymelita
and Eurymeloides, while resembling each other superficially, are not actually
closely related, hence in the chart, the former is shown as branching away from
the main stem before the Pogonoscopini. It is considered that the original stem
from which all three tribes arose, comprised insects with narrow sub-genital plates
without any development of a style. While on one hand Eurymelita terminalts
has developed styles arising from the dorsal edge of the sub-genital plates, the
rest of the Eurymelini and the Pogonoscopini bear styles that arise from the
ventral edge of the sub-genital plates.

Eurymelops Eurymela

Pauroeurymela
Platy eurymela

Eurymeloides Eurymelita

Eurymelessa

POGONOSCOPINI

EURYMELINI | IPOINI

For the purpose of comparison with the genitalia of the Eurymelini, figures
are given of the male genitalia of certain of the Pogonoscopini and the Ipoini.
Fig. C, figs. 11 and 12, show the acdeagus, sub-genital plates and parameres of
Eurymeloides rubrivenosus of Kirkaldy (= E. lentiginosus of Kirkaldy). Not
only is there no style, but the plate itself is narrow, and very dissimilar to those of
the Eurymelini.

Figures 14 and 15 (fig. C) represent the aedeagus, sub-genital plates and para-
meres of Ipo pellucida F, and figures 10 and 16 (fig. C,) are of the male genitalia
of Pogonoscopus myrmex China and Lasioscopus acmaeops Jacobi. With the two
last-named species, which both belong to the Pogonoscopini, while the sub-genital
plates are broad like those of Eurymela spp.; the style is shorter and the aedeagus
is a much simpler structure. The biology and getieral morphology of the Eury-
melinae have been dealt with in an earlier paper by the present author. (Proc.
Linn. Soc., N.S.W., 56 (3) ; 210-226, 1931.)

NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA-NO. 1
BY ERNEST H. ISING

Summary

During a trip to the Far North of our State and to Central Australia in August and September of
1931 and 1932, I collected specimens of native plants in various localities. The following places
were visited and collections made :- Central Australia: Horse Shoe Bend, August 22 to 25, 1931 ;
Rumbalara, August 25, 1931 ; Finke Railway Station, August 22 and 25, 1931 ; Coglin and Wall
Creeks, August 26, 1931 ; South Australia: Abminga, 9 miles from the border of Central Australia
and on the Abminga Creek, August 26 to 31, 1931; Pedirka, on the Hamilton River, August 22,
1931, and August 30, 1932, to September 6, 1932; Hamilton Bore, August 28, 1932; Snake Gully,
16 miles south of Pedirka, September 1, 1932 ; Stevenson River, September 2, 1932; Blood's Creek,
September 3, 1932; Dalhousie Springs, September 5 and 6, 1932; Macumba Head Station,
September 1 to 6, 1931 ; and Oodnadatta, August 6 to 8, 1931.

91

NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA—No, 1
(With a description of a new species)

By Ernest H. Istne.
[Read June 8, 1933.]

During a trip to the Far North of our State and to Central Australia in
August and September of 1931 and 1932, I collected specimens of native plants
in various localities. ‘The following places were visited and collections made :-—
Central Australia: Horse Shoe Bend, August 22 to 25, 1931; Rumbalara, August
25, 1931; Finke Railway Station, August 22 and 25, 1931; Coglin and Wall Creeks,
August 26, 1931; South Australia: Abminga, 9 miles from the border of Central
Australia and on the Abminga Creek, August 26 to 31, 1931; Pedirka, on the
Hamilton River, August 22, 1931, and August 30, 1932, to September 6, 1932;
Hamilton Bore, August 28, 1932; Snake Gully, 16 miles south of Pedirka, Sep-
tember 1, 1932; Stevenson River, September 2, 1932; Blood’s Creek, September 3,
1932; Dalhousie Springs, September 5 and 6, 1932; Macumba Head Station, Sep-
tember 1 to 6, 1931; and Oodnadatta, August 6 to 8, 1931.

The 1931 season was a very good one in the Far Notth, resulting in a pro-
fusion of wild flowers in most of the places visited; 1932 season was not so good
from a botanical point of view. Mr. J. M. Black is reporting on the grasses and
the species of Swainsona (Leguminosae) collected. A number of very interesting
specimens were gathered, including a new species of Bassia (B. Blackiana).
Additional information is given on a number of other species which are imperfectly

known.
CHENOPODIACEAE.

Bassia Blackiana, n. sp. Fruticulus ramosus, ramis rigidis albo-lanosis; folia
erecto-patentia, saepius incurva, subteretia, 3-10 mm. longa, 1 mm. lata, hirsuta;
flores solitarii in axillis superioribus conferti; perianthium fructiferum urceolatum,
tubo globoso glabro circ. 2 mm. dia., 5-costato, areola orbiculari, plana, omnino
basilari, limbo erecto puberulo 1 mm, longo, spinis 5, recurvatis, inaequalibus,
4-14 mm. longis glabris; semen oblique horizontale. (Figs. 1, 2 et 3, p. 92.)

Plant diffuse, 15 to 20 cm. high, branches ascending, numerous, woolly ; leaves
3 to 10 mm. long by 1 mm. wide, subcylindrical but flat at base, hirsute when young
and hairs tufted around the base; flowers solitary, axillary, densely placed; styles
2; fruiting perianth urceolate, glabrous, 2 mm. long x 2 mm, wide, often with
5 main longitudinal ribs formed by the decurrent bases of the spines and 5 other
ribs alternating with them; base circular, very slightly oblique, about 1 mm.
diameter ; limb erect, conical, 1 mm, long, pubescent, with 5 ridges opposite to and
extending to the spines; spines 5, irregular in length, the longest 14 mm., 3 about
1 mm. long, the fifth 4 mm. long, recurved, reddish and glabrous; seed obliquely
horizontal.

Oodnadatta, September 7, 1931. Type (No. 2,670) in author’s collection.

This species differs from all others in the shape of the fruiting perianth.
It appears to be nearest to B. recurvicuspis W. V. Fitzg., but this species only has
4 spines (occasionally 5, two of which are opposite one another) and the tube is
cylindrical and smooth. B. costdata R. H. Anderson has an obconical tube, as also
has B, parviflora R. H. Anderson, which has 6 straight spines.

Named in honour of Mr. J. M. Black, A.L.S., author of “The Flora of
South Australia” and “Naturalised Flora of South Australia.’ Mr. Black has been

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURE.
1, 2, 3. Bassia Blackiana, n. sp. 1. Fruiting branch; nat. size. 2. Fruiting perianth ;

x10. 3. View of fruiting perianth from above showing position of spines; x 10. Oodna-
datta, September, 1931. Collector, E. H. Ising, No. 2,670.

4, 5, 6. Kochia scleroptera J. M. Black. 4 and 5. View of a fruit from below after
removal of hairs; x 6. 6. Side view of No. 5; x 6. Coglin Creek, C. Aust., August, 1931.
Collector, E. H. Ising, No. 2,713.

93

a most energetic worker in systematic botany for many years and has named and
described 3 new genera, 170 new species and over 70 new varieties of the flora
of our State. Only one other plant has been named after Mr. Black and that is
a grass (Stipa Blackii), described by C. E. Hubbard of Kew Gardens, England.

B. ventricosa J. M. Black. The fruiting perianth sometimes has about 12
longitudinal ribs hidden by the vestiture, which is pilose to villous. The longest
spines are up to 6 mm. long,

B. lanicuspis F.v. M. The leaves are up to 24 mm. long in a specimen from
Abminga. The perianth is always densely hirsute and the base small and circular.
Far North and Coglin Creek, Central Australia.

B. uniflora (R. Br.) F. v. M. Additional localities are :—Central Australia:
Horse Shoe Bend and Coglin Creek.

B. intricata R. H. Anderson. The 5 spines, in a specimen (No. 2,663) from
Wangiana, are strongly recurved. One from Macumba (No. 2,672) has the
5 spines more or less recurved, while No. 2,671, from the same locality, has straight
spines which are practically horizontal,

B. eriacantha (F. v. M.) R. BH. Anderson. Specimens from Abminga some-
times have the hairs on the fruits and leaves of a rusty colour.

B. echinopsila F.v. M. The leaves and stems, in a specimen from Oodnadatta,
are sparsely pubescent while the perianth tube is glabrous, spines 6 with two of
them joined at the base and mostly spreading.

B. Tatei F. v. M. Some specimens collected at Oodnadatta now take the
known range of this species about 300 miles further north, The oblique base is
often produced as high as the limb. This is an endemic species.

B. bicornis (Lindl.) F. v. M. This species was collected at Wall Creek,
Central Australia, having fruits with 4 spines. The specimen collected had
38 fruits, 3 of which had 4 spines, 15 had 3 spines each and the remainder had the
normal 2 spines each. This is the first record of fruits being discovered with
4 spines.

B. convexula R. IH. Anderson. This species is now recorded from Central
Australia, having been found at Horse Shoe Bend.

Kochia scleroptera J. M. Black. As no illustration of this species has pre-
viously been published, one is given on p. 92, figs. 4 to 6. The horizontal wings
are completely hidden by the dense woolly vestiture of the fruit. The hairs have
been removed from the fruits illustrated. An examination of the fruits has
revealed a considerable variation in the size and shape of the individual wings
which are always hard and rigid. The base of the fruit has 10 prominent longi-
tudinal ribs. The species was described by Mr, Black in 1922 (These Trans.,
vol. xlvi., 568) and the localities given are all in our Far North. I have now to
record the species from Central Australia as it was collected by myself at Coglin
Creek close to our border,

DISTRIBUTION OF MYOPORACEAE IN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

BY T. T. COLQUHOUN, M. SC.

Summary

This list makes no claim to being a complete digest of the Myoporaceae, either in species occurring in this region or
their distribution, Professor J. B. Cleland, on his various trips to this area, collected many specimens of members of
this family and suggested that I should identify and catalogue them. The present paper is the outcome of that
suggestion. I wish to record my thanks to Professor Cleland for the use) of his specimens; to Mr. J. M. Black for his
help in establishing a new variety; and to the staff of the National Herbarium, Melbourne, for their aid and the
specimens they placed at my disposal.

94

DISTRIBUTION OF MYOPORACEAE IN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

By T. f. Cotguuoun, M. Sc., University of Adelaide.
{Read July 13, 1933.]

This list makes no claim to being a complete digest of the Myoporaceae, either
in species occurring in this region or their distribution. Professor J. B. Cleland,
on his various trips to this area, collected many specimens of members of this
family ard suggested that I should identify and catalogue them. The present
paper is the outcome of that suggestion. I wish to record my thanks to Pro-
fessor Cleland for the use of his specimens; to Mr. J. M. Black for his help in
establishing a new variety; and to the staff of the National Herbarium, Mel-
bourne, for their aid and the specimens they placed at my disposal.

The following is a list of species and their distribution :—

MYOPORACEAE Benth. et Hook.

I. Myororum Banks et Sol—M. montanum R. Br.: Mount Ultim, Brinkley’s
Bluff, Palm Valley (Finke River), Hermannsburg. MM. deserti A. Cunn.:
Glen Helen (McDonnell Ranges).

II. Eremopuira R, Br—E. Sturtii R. Br.: Cockatoo Creek. £&. Latrobei
F. v. M.: Railway bridge over Finke River, between Hann’s Range and
Prowse’s Gap, Cockatoo Creek, Mount Liebig. E. Giles F. v. M.:
North of Burt Well, north of Hann’s Range, Haast’s Bluff. E. longifolia
(R. Br.) F. v. M.: Bundey Creek, Fraser River, Hamilton Creek, Mount
Hay, Brooke’s Soak (30 miles east of Cockatoo Creek), Cockatoo Creek,
Mount Liebig. E. Battti™) F. vy. M. var. major J. M. B.: Railway
bridge over Finke River. E. Freelingi F. v. M.: Junctién of Bundey
Creek and Fraser River, Palm Valley, Hermannsburg, Mount Liebig.
E. Duttonit F. v. M.: Fraser River, Burt Well, north of Woodforde
Well, Brooke’s Soak. £. maculata (Ker.) F. v. M.: Kerr’s (on Bundey
Creek), Claraville, Burt Well. £. Dalyana F. v. M.: Fraser River.
E. Christophori F. v. M.: 40 milcs north of Arltunga. E, McDonnellit
F, v. M.: Rumbalare.

@) At the time of reading this paper, Mr. Black had not published a description of
E. Battii. var. major; but had intentions of doing so in the near future.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE ORCHIDOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA

BY R. S. ROGERS, M.A., M.D., F.LS.

Summary

Planta pusilla. Rhizoma repens breve, radicibus fibrosis. Pseudobulbi utriculiformes, lateribus vix compressi,

circa 9mm. longi, 5-6 in serie. Folium singulare, planiusculum, subsessile, oblongo-ellipticum, glabrum, coriaceum,
c. 1.5-2-5 cm. longum, 4-6 mm. latum, apice obtusum, marginibus integris, costa media prominente. Inflorescentiae
ad basin pseudobulborum, pedunculo brevi. Flos solitarius, majiusculus, pedicello gracili c. 1 cm. longo.

95

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE ORCHIDOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA,
By R, S. Rogers, M.A., M.D., F.L.S.
[Read August 10, 1933.]

Bulbophyllum Weinthalii, Rogers, sp. nov.

Planta pusilla. Rhizoma repens breve, radicibus fibrosis. Pseudobulbi
utriculiformes, lateribus vix compressi, circa 9 mm. longi, 5-6 in serie, Folium
singulare, planiusculum, subsessile, oblongo-ellipticum, glabrum, coriaceum, c. 1°5-
2°5 cm. longum, 4-6 mm. latum, apice obtusum, marginibus integris, costa media
prominente, Inflorescentiae ad basin pseudobulborum, pedunculo brevi. Flos
solitarius, majiusculus, pedicello gracili c. 1 cm. longo, Segmenta perianthii alba
vel subviridia, notationibus porphyreis vel purpureis instructa. Sepalum dorsale
late lanceolatum, erecto-incurvum, concavum, c. 9 mm. longum, 5 mm. latum,
apice acuta vel leviter apiculata. Sepala lateralia oblique falco-triangularia, semi-
patentia, sepalo dorsali aequantia vel paulum breviora, apice falcata, margine
anteriore lunato, basibus pede columnae adnatis cum eo saccum vel humilem fossam
formantibus. Petala erecta vel leviter divergentia oblongo-ovalia, apicibus
obtusissimis, 3-nervia, c. 6 mm, longa, 3 mm. lata, Labellum mobile, linguiforme,
magnum, conspicuum, carnosum, atropurpureum, cum apice pedis columnae
articulatum, inferne ad pedem columnae reflexum, deinde valderecurvum; trilo-
batum, lobis lateralibus minutissimis dentiformibus, lobo medio obtusissimo mar-
ginibus revolutis; lamina in medio concava, callis duo latis longitudinaliter
parallelis confluentibus prope apicem instructa. Columna brevis, alis membranaceis
quadratis. Pes gynostemii elongatus, c. 1 cm. longus, gracilis, linearis, basibus
sepalorum lateralium adnatus. Anthera opercularis; pollinia 4.

A diminutive plant with a short creeping rhizome and fibrous roots. Pseudo-
bulbs flask-shaped, wrinkled, scarcely compressed laterally, about 6 in a row,
9mm, high, Leaf apical on pseudobulb, single, rather flat, coriaceous, oblong-
elliptical, subsessile, glabrous, margins entire, about 1°5-2:°5 cm. long, 4-6 cm.
wide, obtuse at apex, with very conspicuous midrib. Flower single, relatively
large for size of plant; ovary-pedicel slender, about 1-0-1-1 cm. long; peduncle
short. Perianth segments white or pale greenish, dotted or splashed with reddish-
brown or magenta markings. Dorsal sepal rather widely lanceolate, erecto-
incurved over the column, concave, apex actite or slightly apiculate, about 9 mm.
long, 5 mm. wide; lateral sepals semi-patent, acutely falcate at the apex, obliquely
falco-triangular, about equal to or a little shorter than the dorsal sepal; anterior
margin crescentic; adnate throughout their entire base to the foot of the column
for a distance of about 1-0 cm., forming with it a shallow pouch or trough. Pctals
erect or slightly divergent, oblong-oval, apices very blunt, 3-nerved, about 6 mm.
long, 3mm. wide. Labellum movable, articulated to the apex of the column-foot,
large, linguiform, conspicuous, fleshy, dark purple, the lower part reflexed against
the column-foot, then markedly recurved upwards and forwards; trilobed; the
lateral lobes dentate, very minute; middle lobe very obtuse, with revolute margins;
lamina dotted, concave in the middle, traversed by two wide parallel longitudinal
calli coalescing near the apex. Column short and stout, with quadrate mem-
branous wings; produced at the base into an elongated slender linear foot about
10 cm. long, adnate to the bases of the lateral sepals. Anther opercular,
pollinia 4.

96

New South Wales. Dorrigo, Mr. F. A. Weinthal. Bloomed in cultivation,
April, 1932. It was found growing “on the high branches and tops of pine trees.”

This little plant would appear to be most closely related to B. Baileyi, F. v. M.,
which it nearly resembles in colour and shape of flowers. Miueller’s plant, how-
ever, is enormously larger in all its parts and with very differently shaped leaves.
The type description gives the measurements of the latter as 3-4 inches long
and 14-2 inches wide; the’ rhizome up to 6 feet long. Apart from the dis-
parities referred to, the new species has an extraordinary long, slender linear
column-foot. It is at least twice as long as the column proper, In Fitzgerald’s
drawing of B. Baileyi the foot is shown as rather stout and hardly as long as the
column. It has been suggested that the plant under consideration is the southerly
representative of the Queensland species, but the distinctions enunciated seem suff-
cient to dispose of this theory.

A PRELIMINARY ACCOUNT OF THE BDELLIDAE (SNOUT MITES) OF
AUSTRALIA

BY H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S.

Summary

While investigating the possibility of biological control of the Clover Springtail (Sminthurus viridis
L.) in Western Australia during 1931-32 on behalf of the Commonwealth Council for Scientific and
Industrial Research, the writer was successful in finding a species of Bdellid mite
(Biscirus lapidarius Kramer) which, while occuring locally in a few districts, was present in such
numbers as to be rapidly cleaning up the Sminthurids in those areas.

Besides this particular species of Bdellid many others were found in various parts, and while these
did not appear to have any controlling effect on the Collembola, yet the family as a whole is well
known to be predatory. The important discovery that at least one species may be of use in biological
control has led the author, therefore, to make a thorough systematic study of the Australian species.
In addition to his own captures he has had invaluable help from many other enthusiastic collectors
in other parts of the country. To all these, and in particular to Mr. L. J. Newman, Government
Entomologist of Western Australia. Mr. V. V. Hickman of the University of Tasmania, Hobart, and
to Mr. D. C. Swan of the Waite Institute, Adelaide, he tenders his deepest thanks.

The result of the study of Biscirus lapidarius and its practical effect in controlling Sminthurns has
been reported and discussed elsewhere (Jour. C.S.I.R., May, 1933). This paper deals with the
specific and generic characters of all species now known to occur in Australia, and is intended to
assist State Entomologists and others to recognise the individual species and so be able to
distinguish the useful one. It should be borne in mind, however, that all species are predatory, and
that under suitable conditions any of them may prove to be of value.

Hitherto, only Bdella (Scirus) hospita Banks has been recorded from Australia and described from
specimens found in ants’ nests in Victoria and Tasmania by Mr. A. M. Lea. Later on it is shown that
this species is synonymous with Biscirus symmetricus Kramer.

97

A PRELIMINARY ACCOUNT OF THE BDELLIDAE (SNOUT MITES)
OF AUSTRALIA.

By H. Womerstey, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., South Australian Museum.
[Read August 10, 1933]

INTRODUCTION,

While investigating the possibility of biological control of the Clover Spring-
tail (Sminthurus viridis L.) in Western Australia during 1931-32 on behalf of the
Commonwealth Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, the writer was
successful in finding a species of Bdellid mite (Biscirus lapidarius Kramer) which,
while occuring locally in a few districts, was present in such numbers as to be
rapidly cleaning up the Sminthurids in those areas. :

Besides this particular species of Bdellid many others were found in various
parts, and while these did not appear to have any controlling effect on the Collem-
bola, yet the family as a whole is well known to be predatory. The important
discovery that at least one species may be of use in biological control has led the
author, therefore, to make a thorough systematic study of the Australian species.
In addition to his own captures he has had invaluable help from many other
enthusiastic collectors in other parts of the country. To all these, and in par-
ticular to Mr. L. J. Newman, Government Entomologist of Western Australia,
Mr. V. V. Hickman of the University of Tasmania, Hobart, and to Mr. D. C.
Swan of the Waite Institute, Adelaide, he tenders his deepest thanks.

The result of the study of Biscirus lapidarius and its practical effect in con-
trolling Sminthurus has been reported and discussed elsewhere (Jour. C.S.LR.,
May, 1933). This paper deals with the specific and generic characters of all
species now known to occur in Australia, and 1s intended to assist State Entomo-
logists and others to recognise the individual species and so be able to distinguish
the useful one. It should be borne in mind, however, that all species are predatory,
and that under suitable conditions any of them may prove to be of value.

Hitherto, only Bdella (Scirus) hospita Banks has been recorded from Aus-
tralia and described from specimens found in ants’ nests in Victoria and Tasmania
by Mr. A. M. Lea. Later on it is shown that this species is synonymous with
Biscirus symimetricus Kramer.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION,

The mites belonging to this family of the Acarina are small, reddish to
blackish, elongate, pear-shaped creatures, with a very pronounced beak and the
body divided by a distinct separation into cephalothorax and abdomen. They are
placed-in the suborder Prostigmata because of the opening of the stigmata at the
base of the mandibles. The mouth-parts consist of a cone-shaped rostrum
furnished ventrally with a number of hairs, and a pair of dorsal mandibles, each
of which carries a terminal pair of shears and dorsally one or more long hairs.
The shears of the mandibles may or may not be armed internally with teeth.
Immediately below the base of the mandibles arises a pair of five-segmented palpi.
These are generally long and the second and fifth segments are usually much
longer than the rest. The fifth segment may be parallel-sided or may be widened
apically. At the apex of the terminal segment are to be found two or three long
hairs, possibly of a sensory nature. The cephalothorax is trapezoidal in shape and
dorsally carries 2, 4, or 5 eyes (seldom none), 4 characteristic long sensory hairs
(“Pseudostigmalorgane’”’), 0, 2 or 4 other hairs and often subcutaneous shields

98

or lines. Ventrally are attached the front two pairs of epimera, and there are a
few short hairs. The abdomen is approximately egg-shaped and is furnished
dorsally with several rows of from 2 to 4 hairs or setae. Ventrally it carries the
two posterior pairs of epimera, an anterior genital opening with hairs and three
pairs of discs (“inneren Genitalnapfen”), and a posterior anal opening.

There are four pairs (three in larva) of six-segmented legs, each tarsus being
furnished with two strong claws and a medial hairy empodial appendage. On the
tibia and tarsus are usually one or two long sensory setae, The hairs of the legs
are of two kinds, simple and feathered.

The colour of the animals is generally reddish but sometimes varies to
blackish. The pigment is entircly subcutaneous. The cuticle is very finely striated,
striations being generally transverse but sometimes circular or zig-zag. Cross
striations occur on the legs and palpi.

The sexes differ mainly in the structure of the genital organs, but occasionally
differences are to be found in the relative lengths of the palpal segments, etc.

The immature stages are but little known and have been described for only
a few species. The eggs are slightly elliptical and furnished with a number of
clavate chitinous spines. They are brownish and laid on the ground or decaying
vegetable fibres. ‘The larvae much resemble the adults, except that they have only
three pairs of legs and no genital organs. ‘he nymphs are even more like the
adults although still lacking the genitalia.

AUSTRALIAN SPECIES.

Of the many species known to science, mainly from the temperate parts of
the world, the following only have as yet been found in Australia :—

Cyta latirostris (Herman) ; Bdella hgnicola Can.; Scirus longirosiris Her-
man; Scirus dubitatus, n. sp.; Biscorus (Biscirus) lapidarius (Kramer) ; B. (B.)
sylvaticus (Kramer); B. (B.) intermedius Sig. Thor.; B. (B.) symmetricus
(Kramer); B. (B.) uncinnatus (Kramer); B. (B.) australicus, n. sp.; -B. (B.)

Descrretion oF Figure A.

Fig. 1. Cyta latisrostris (Herm.). Mandibles and palp (after Berlesc).
22 2 d 5 Dorsal view of animal (after Berlese).
, 3 Bdella lignicola Can. Rostrum, ventral view.

. RS » Palp.

» " rf i Dorsal view of entire animal.

» oO ” e $5 Mandible

ie = ” i Cephalothorax from above.

» 8 “i + »_ Tarsus.

» 9. Scirus longirostris Herm. Mandible.

” 10. ” ” ” Palp.

» il. bs 7 Z, Tibia and tarsus.

» 12. » dubitatus, 1. sp. Mandible.

y 13. = 4 » oy oubcutancous shield of cephalothorax.
” 14. ” ” ” ” Palp.

» Lb. , % » 9» ~©6Larsus.

» 16. Biscirus hickmani, mn. sp. Cephalothorax.

» LZ. by _ » 2 Mandible.

» 18. . ag no» =» Larsus.

” 19. ” ” moo” Palp,

» 20. + a » » Tip of tarsus and claw.

xy 2b , tapidarins (Kramer). Dorsal view.

nw 22. * ” ty Female genital organ, exserted.
” 23. ” a” ” ” ” ” withdrawn.
» 24. “ " sd Genital organ, male.

» 25. » a Ws Larva, dorsal view.

» 26. ” ‘s is Rostrum of larva.

9 2h: 48 i * Mandible of larva.

99

For description see opposite page.

Fig. A.

100

thori, n. sp.; B. (B.) hickmant, n. sp.; B. (Odontoscirus) virgulatus (Can. e
Fanz.).

Bi these 13 species, 4 are new to science, the remainder being indistinguish-
able from European forms. The genera Trachymolgus and Spinibdella are as yet
unknown from this continent, and the genus Bdella is only represented by one
species. The last genus, however, may be largely increased, both by native and
introduced forms.

In working up the systematics (as shown below) of this family, and especially
in the identifications, the writer has received invaluable help from Dr. Sig. Thor,
of Oslo, to whom he is deeply indebted.

Suborder PROSTIGMATA Kramer, 1877.

Family BDELLIDAE Koch, 1842.
Synopsis oF GENERA (after Sig. Thor).

1. Segment V. of palp shortened and apically broadened, with 2 or 3 long apical hairs.
Mandibles each with two dorsal hairs. Thorax with 2 pairs of hairs and usually 2 narrow
longitudinal chitinous shields, these seldom absent.

Segment V. of palp relatively long, cylindrical. Mandibular hairs 1, 2 or many. Thorax
with only 2 or 3 pairs of hairs. No chitinous shields on shoulders, seldom a broad chitinous
plate.

2. An unpaired median frontal eye and two pairs of lateral eyes. Rostrum and mandibles
short and thick. The two longitudinal shoulder shields bound anteriorly by a transverse
chitinous line.

Genus Cyta Heyden, 1826.
Only the lateral eyes present. Mandibles and rostrum long and narrow. Dorsal shields
separated, indistinct or absent.

3. Cuticle thick, patterned. No thoracic shields.
Genus Trachymolgus Berlese, 1923

Cuticle thin and finely striated. Thorax with longitudinal shields or shorter lines. 4

4. Two longitudinal, relatively distinct thoracic shields. Rostrum and mandibles of normal
width. Two long mandibular hairs, one more basal, the other in the middle.
Genus Bdella Latreille, 1795.

Two short chitinous stripes with a pair of humps. Rostrum and mandibles very narrow,
almost needle-like. Both mandibular hairs very small and placed beyond the middle.
Genus Spinibdella Sig. Thor, 1930.
5. Both apical hairs of fiith plalpal segment very long. Mandibles with 1 or 2 hairs. 6
Both apical hairs of fifth palpal segment not or only slightly lengthened. Mandibles with
many hairs (5-24). Three pairs of dorsal thoracic hairs.
Genus Molgus (Dujardin, 1842) Trouessart, 1894,
6. Each mandible with only one hair. No thoracic shields.
Genus Scirus Herman, 1804.

7. Each mandible with two hairs. Generally 2 (seldom 3) dorsal thoracic hairs. Distally

on thorax a very fine subcutancous line.
Genus Biscirus Sig. Thor, 1913.

Genus CyTa Heyden, 1826.
Cyta latirostris (Herman), 1804.
Fig. A, figs. 1-2.

This very small red species is widely distributed in Western Australia, It
oceurs under bark, etc., where it is probably predaceous on Psocids and other small
insects. Apart from its size it is easily recognised by its characteristic shape and
by its mandibles. It is a well-known species in Europe and has also been recorded
from Northern Africa. A second European species is known, C. coerulipes

101

(Dug.), which differs in having more elongate mandibles and blue legs. This
species has not yet been found in Australia.

Localities..—Perth, W. Aust., May 4, 1931 and onwards, (H. W.); Goose-
berry Hill, W. Aust., June 2, 1932 (G. E. N.); Donnybrook, W. Aust., June 29,
1932 (E. M.) ; Denmark, W. Aust., July 5, 1932 (H. W.) ; Glen Osmond, S. Aust.,
June, 1933 (H. W.).

Genus Boetza Latreille, 1795,
Bdella lignicola Can., 1885.
Fig. A, figs. 3-8,

Length to 900». Colour pinkish. Mandibles long and slender with two long
hairs; width 25 . at widest part; jaws small. Rostrum 200 ». with three pairs
of hairs on ventral surface, the basal pair much smaller and finer than the others.
Palpi reaching slightly beyond the tip of the mandible; ratio of lengths of seg-
ments I: If: WE: IV.: Vis iS. : 1604. : 30u. : 22h +: 35u., total
262 »., segment II. with 7 hairs, III. with 1, IV. with 4, and V. with 4, apical setae
of segment V. long, the longer one almost as long as the palp, the shorter one two-
thirds of the longer. Cephalothorax with the usual arrangement of hairs, Eyes.
two on each side almost touching, less than a diameter apart. Striation of thorax
as figured. Abdomen with five rows of hairs, 4, 2, 2, 2, 4, Legs normally haired,

Specimens of this species have been found by the writer at Glen Osmond,
South Australia, in March, 1933, and also in moss from the higher reaches of
Waterfall Gully, South Australia, May, 1933.

Genus Scirus Herman, 1804,

Sig. Thor (1931) gives only 3 valid and 3 incertain species as belonging to
this genus, Only one of the valid species has so far been found to occur in Aus-
tralia, but a new species, Scirus dubtlatus, n. sp., is here brought forward from.
Tasmania.

The four species may be separated by the following key :—

1. Palpi of moderate length, segments JII. and IV. subequal, V. at least thrice as long as.
IIT. and IV. together. 3.
Palpi very long, IV. much longer than III., V. at most twice as long as III. and IV.
together. 2

2. Palpi long (1,200 y.) and strong. Segment IV. of palp twice as long as IIL, V. one and
a half times as long as III. and IV. together, II. longer than two-thirds the rostrum.

Length to 1,800 y.
S. porrectus (Kramer).

Palpi extraordinarily long and thin (2,000 pw). Segment IV. half as long again as IIL,
V. twice as long as IIT. and IV. together. Length (without rostrum), 2,600 4.
S. exilicornis (Berlese).
3. Mandibles short and stout, width at widest part not less than one-third the length. Thorax
with a very distinct subcutaneous shield, widely bridged anteriorly. Length, 1,625 4.
S, dubitatus, n sp.
4. Mandibles more slender, at least four times longer than broad. No thoracic shield,
Palp V. slightly shorter than Il, apical setae about two-thirds the length of apical seg-.
ment, segment IT. with 10-15 hairs. Jaws of mandible with inner distal tooth, ~
S. longirostris Herman.
SCIRUS LONGIROsTRIS Herman, 1804,

Trig. A, figs. 9-11.

This common and widely distributed species has been on several occasions.
observed feeding upon Sminthurus viridis and other Collembola, but does not
appear to occur in the density necessary for effective biological control. It may
possibly be an introduction from Europe.

102

Localities —Rottnest Island, W. Aust., January 31, 1931 (H. W.); Perth,
W. Aust., May 4, 1931 (H. W.); Waite Institute, Adelaide, S. Aust., May 12,
1930 (?); Guildford, W. Aust., 1931 (H. W.); Busselton, W. Aust., 1931
(CH. W.); Waite Institute, Adelaide, S, Aust., June, 1931 (D. C. S.); Middle
Swan, W. Aust., June 5, 1932 (H. W.); Bridgewater, S. Aust., June 6, 1932
(D.C. S.)5 Crawley, W. Aust., June 30, 1932 (H. W.); Sassafras, Vict., Decem-
ber, 1931 (H. G. A.); Muresk, W. Aust., August 5, 1932 (H. G. A.).

Scirus dubitatus, n. sp.
Fig. A, figs. 12-15.

Diagnosis —Length 1,625». Rostrum 270 p. with 5 pairs of ventral hairs.
Mandibles 300 ». long, very broad basally, 95 4. wide with a single hair 135 p.
from apex and 78 p. long. Palpi 360 p. long, segments ll: Wl: We: VS
180 p, : 30p.: 25 p. + 157 p. with respectively 8 : 1: 3: 9 hairs, apical sctae
of segment V. subequal 157 p. and 152. long. Thorax with a very distinct sub-
cutaneous shield on each shoulder and broadly bridged anteriorly, with three pairs
of long sensory setae (cf. fig. A, fig. 13). Body setae normal, 65 p. long. Tarsus
as in figure.

Locality—Under stones on Mount Nelson, Tasmania, September 2Z, 1932
LV. V. FL). One specimen.

Remarks—This is a particularly interesting species in that it has such a
distinct thoracic shield and three pairs of thoracic hairs. These characters would
place it in the genus Molgus, but the single mandibular hair and the long apical
setae of the palpi are diagnostic of Scirus. In view of difficulties like this one
can be pardoned for questioning the justification of such generic characters.

Genus Biscrrus Sig. Thor, 1913.

‘This genus is divided by Sig. Thor into two subgenera Odontoscirus S. T. in
which the jaws of the mandibles are toothed, and Biscirus s. str. in which they are
without dentitions.

As no fewer than nine of the thirteen species of Bdellidae here listed for
Australia belong to this genus, the following key is given for all known valid
species based on that of Sig. Thor (1931) :—

1. Mandibles with teeth to jaws. Subgen. Odontoscirus Sig. Thor, 1913
Rostrum 300-420 p- Mandibles 6-7 times as long as bread, both hairs about 75 ». apart,
distal 180 ,. from tip, proximal 165 p. from base. Jaws of mandibles of equal length, fixed
arm with 2 small teeth, movable arm with 4-5 median teeth (3 in var. dentata Sig. Thor,
1931). Rostrum ventrally with 6 pairs of hairs. Palpal segments I. - If. ; ULL: IV. :
Ve a 25 yy : 300n. : 45. 2 38m + 250 yw.» 11. with 6 hairs, V. with 6-9 hairs. Apical
setae of V. 220y, Length of animal without rostrum, 2,000 p.

B, (O.) virgulatus (Can. et Fanz., 1876).

Mandibles without tecth. ;
Subgen. Biscirus s. str. Sig. Thor, 1913. 2

2. Both mandibular hairs in close proximity. 3
Mandibular hairs widely separated. 4
3. Large species 1,700-2,000 p.. Rostrum 660 ws ventrally with 5-7 pairs of hairs. Mandibles
600 y. with 2 adjacent hairs about the middle and 230-260 ». long. Palpi 1,000 y., segments
1: i: I: Tb: TV. : Ve = 25. 2 460m * BB yp. 2 135 me: 330 »., LU. with 4
hairs, III. with 1, IV. with 3, and V. with 7. Apical setac of palpi relatively short, 340 yu.
and 290 pw. B. (B.) norvegicus Sig. Thor, 1905 (Europe).

Small species 1,100 py. Rostrum 250 ps ventrally with 7 pairs of short hairs. Mandibles
220 ». long, 90 p. broad at base, as in preceding species but shorter. Hairs of mandibles
(65 and 75 pu.) close together in middle, Palpi more like those of lapidarius than norve-
gicus, segments I. : tL: WL: We: Ve= 2p 2 10, : 30m : 33 yp. + 105 ws II.
with 3 hairs, V. with 6 hairs with two others near to the apical setae and relatively long as
in norvegicus. B. (B.) meridionalis Sig. Thor, 1931 (N. Africa).

10.

11.

103

. The proximal mandibular hair very much reduced, distal hair normal. Rostrum 405 yw.

long with 5 pairs of ventral hairs. Mandibles 470 y,, proximal hair 145 , from
base, 24 y. long in female, 6-8 y. long in male, distal hair 160 y. from proximal and
the same distance from tip, 90-110 p. jong. Segments of palpi, I. : 11. : UL: Iv. : V.
= 30p. : 3704. : 65 p- : Oop, female, 85 y. male : 360 4. Apical setae of palpi 175 and
150 y. long.

B. (B.) intermedius Sig. Thor, 1928.

Both mandibular hairs normally developed. 5
Segment V. of palp only two-thirds the length of II. 6
Segment V. of palp equal to II. 7

Palp V. long and thin. Rostrum with 6-7 pairs of ventral hairs. Length of animal to
1,580 ». Mandibles 400 ys, proximal hair 178 ,. from distal, this 126 y, from tip. Palpi
580 ». long, segments I. : IL. : tl. : LV. : Ve = 30p. 2 258. : 40u. 2 32u.: 180
Il. with 5 hairs, IIL. with.1, [V. with 2, and V. with 9 hairs. Apical setae of V. 232 and
174». long. Mandibular hairs 90 and 120, long. B. (B.) australicus, n. sp.

Palp relatively shorter and thicker. Rostrum ventrally with only 2-3 pairs of hairs.
Length of animal to 2,000 long. Mandibles 500 y. long, proximal hair 155 yp. from base,
distal hair 120 ,. from tip, these hairs only 50-75, long. Palp V. with only 4 hairs,

IL. with only 2 hairs, one proximal and one distal. B. (B.) silvaticus (Kramer) 1881
Segment IV. of palps longer than Ill. 8
Segment IV. approximately equal to IIT. il
Segment IV. of palps only one and a half as long as IIL. 9
Segment IV. three times as long as Ill. . 10

Palpi and legs with numerous simple and fine short hairs. Length of body 3,000 ».
Mandibles 615, proximal hair 186 y,. from distal, this 186. from apex, these hairs
145 ». long. Palpi 2,430 ». long, segments Il: IL: Wl: 1V.: Vix 2l4y: 858 pn. :
1434, : 214: 1,000 »,, apical setae of V. 256 y. only a little longer than the rest.

B. (B.) hickmani, n. sp.

Palpi and legs normally haired. Length of body 1,400 p. Mandibles 500 y., hairs as in
B. (B.) lapidarius. Palpi 900 ». long, segments Il. : Wh: IV.: Vi = 350p. 2 70m :
110. : 3004. HU. with 2 (?) distal hairs, TV. with 4 distal and V. with 11 hairs. Apical
setae of V. long.

B. (B.) uncinnatus (Kramer), 1898.

Palp V. twice as long as IV. Serrated hairs for some distance along tarsi? Rostrum
420 ». long. Palp V. entirely over-reaching tip of rostrum, Il. : UL: IV. : V. = 2270p.
:40y. : 10. : 220 ». Length of body 1,250 yp.

B, (B.) anomalicornis (Berlese), 1916.

Palp V. only one-third as long again‘as IV. Tarsi with only 2-3 serrated setae at tip.

Rostrum 640 y, long. Palpi with the whole of V. and half of IV. over-reaching tip of
rostrum, II. ; IL: IV.: V.= 450 mn: 90 2 200 n° 350, I. with 2 hairs, one
distal and one basal, ITI. with 1 hair, TV. with 2 distal hairs and V. with 4. Apical setae
of palps equal, 270 ». long. Mandibles 670 y. long, proximal hair 239». from distal, distal
180». from tip, these hairs 92 and 120 y,. long, respectively. Rostrum ventrally with two

pairs of hairs. Length of body, 3,500 yp. B. (B.) thori, n. sp.

Palpi relatively short and thick, especially segment V. Rostrum 360%. long, ventrally
with 6 pairs of short hairs. Mandibles with long hairs, the distal one placed about the
middle, 120 ». long, the proximal one 108 y, long. Palpi 435 y. long, segments L. : Il. :
TIL : IV. : Ve = 24. + 180, 2 43 | 48 yp. 2 154y., IL with 5 hairs, V. with 8-10

hairs, apical setae 185 y. and 170 uy, B. (B.) lapidarius (Kramer), 1881.
Palpi comparatively longer and thinner. 12
Legs slender and sparsely haired. Claws very thick. Palp V. shorter than II. Length,
1,250 uw B. (B.) splendidus (Stoll), 1887.

Legs and claws normal. Palp V. equal to IL Rostrum 500 ., ventrally with 5 pairs of
hairs. Paipi 800 y. long, Il. : Tut. : IV. : V. = 340 : 60n. 260. : 340 y., IL, with
6-7 hairs, IV. with 3-4, and V. with 9-10, apical setae two-thirds the length of V.

B. (B.) symmetricus (Kramer), 1898.

104

Biscirus (ODONTOSCIRUS) VIRGULATUS (Can. et Fanz.), 1876,
Fig. B, figs. 29-31.

This species is very local and has only been taken in one locality in Western
Australia. It is well known in Europe, and the writer has also found it on the
Cape Flats, in South Africa, in 1930,

Locality —Pelican Point, Perth, W. Aust., June 2, 1932 (H. W.).,

Biscirus (Biscirus) iNTERMEDIUS Sig. Thor, 1928,
Fig. B, figs. 14-15,

This species, hitherto only known from Norway, is apparently widely dis-
tributed in Australia. Sig. Thor (1931 a) gives the length of ‘the proximal
mandibular hairs as from 15-25, In the Australian specimens this hair varies
in length according to the sex; in the female it is about 24 p. long corresponding
to Sig. Thor’s measurements, in the male it is much shorter only varying from
6-84. Segments III. and IV. of the palps also show a difference in the relative
lengths. In the female sex these two segments are subequal, in the male IV. is
one-third longer than IIT.

Localities—Beverley, W. Aust., June 4, 1931 (H. W.); Waroona, W. Aust..
August 6, 1931 (II. W.); Busselton, W. Aust., August 26, 1931 (H. W.);
Mullewa, W. Aust., September, 1931 (H. W.); Cascades, Tasm., June 11, 1932
(V. V. H.); St. Ronan’s Well, W. Aust., June 1, 1932 (G, E. N.); Denmark,
W. Aust., July 5, 1932 (H. W.); Muresk, W. Aust., August 4, 1932 (H. G. A.).

DEscriPTiIon oF FIcuRE B.

Fig. 1. Biscirus lapidarius (Kramer). Cephalothorax of adult,
a 2 3 3 ” Palp of adult.
ih. Be 54 ” " Mandible of adult,
» 4. a ” + Tibia and tarsus of adult.
ae OBS a " é A dorsal seta.
» 6. sy thori, n. sp. Rostrum,
ae *, » 9 9 Mandible.
» 8. 7 » oo» a» Palp.

4 » » » Tip of tarsus and claws.
» » 5 Mandibular shears.
_ australicus, n. sp. Mandible.
0 ” » x Palp.
¥ » » Rostrum, ventral.
intermedius Sig. Thor. Palp and mandible of male.
Base of female mandible.

[avail apolar oe ee Se Se
SON AM BRAN SE Oe

obs 3% ” MF a”

i . silvaticus (Kram.). Palp.

5 ” 5 PA Mandible,

r o 4 is Rostrum, ventral.

a a Pe . Tibia and tarsus,

» 20. is synumetricus (Kram.). Left eyes (from remounted co-types.).
» 2, A 3 4 Mandible a =:

» 22, 54 ‘, 5 Rostrum from side. (Ditto. )

» 23. 5 r is 3 ventral (from other specimens ),
» 24, “ 6 *y Mandible (from other specimens),

» 25. . i is Cephalothorax (from other specimens).
» 26, ” ” " Palp.

Wie eee +f uncinnatus (Kram.). Palp.

” 28. ” ” ” Mandible,

» 29, 9% (Odontoscirus) virgulaius (C. & F.). Palp.

» 30. +3 i Pr s , Mandible.

wood, 3 ” ” i a Tibia and tarsus.

105

106

Biscrrus (BIscirus) UNCINNATUS (Kramer), 1898,
, Fig. B, figs, 27-28.

This is apparently a rare species in Australia. The material examined agrees
entirely with the details given by Sig. Thor, except that in his figure of the palp
(after Kramer) he shows only two distal hairs on segment II. In the Australian
material there are at least 8 hairs more or less evenly distributed. This species
has previously been recorded from America.

Localities National Park, Tasm., August 22, 1932 (V. V. H.); Denmark;
W. Aust., July 5, 1932 (H. W.).

Biscrrus (Biscrrus) stLvaticus (Kramer), 1881,
Fig. B, figs, 16-19.
This well-known European species has only once been found in Western Aus-

tralia. The determination was confirmed by Dr. Sig. Thor.
Locality—Perth, W. Aust., May 5, 1931 (H. W.).

Biscirus (Biscirus) thori, n. sp.
Fig. B, figs. 6-10.

This is a large and local species the specific characters of which have been
given in the key. It is named after Dr. Sig. Thor as a slight mark of esteem.

Localities —Beverley, W. Aust., June 4, 1931 (H. W.); Muresk, W. Aust.,
June 6, 1932 (H. G. A.).

Biscrrus (Biscirus) LAPIDARTUS (Kramer), 1881,
Fig. A, figs. 21-27; Fig. B, figs. 1-5,

This is a well-known species in Europe and has also been recorded from
North Africa. In Western Australia it is widely distributed although rather local.
A full description of this species and its possible value as an agent of biological
control of the Lucerne Flea (Sminthurus viridis L.) have been given elsewhere
(J.C. 5.1. R., May, 1933). It can be distinguished from its allies by the above
key,

Localities. Waroona, W. Aust., 1931 onwards (H. W.); Denmark,
W. Aust., 1931 onwards (H. W.); Burekup, W. Aust., 1931 (H. W.); Benger,
W. Aust., 1932 (LE. M.); Donnybrook, W. Aust., 1932 (E. M.); Cannington,
W. Aust., 1932 (H. W.).

Biscrrus (Brscirus) syMMETRICUS (Kramer), 1898,
Fig. B, figs. 20-26.
A generally widespread species in Australia south of the Tropics but pre-

viously only known from South America. The identification of this species has
been confirmed by Dr. Sig. Thor,

In 1916 Banks described Bdella (Scirus) hospita from specimens taken in
ant nests in Victoria and Tasmania by the late Mr. A. M. Lea. In the South
Australian Museum are three co-types of Banks’ material. As these were mounted
in Canada Balsam it was not possible to make out details sufficient to verify the
diagnosis. The writer, however, has remounted the specimens and can now
state that they are identical with Biscirus Symmetricus (Kramer). All three
specimens, unfortunately, lack palpi, but the drawing given by Banks fits in
with Kramer’s species. Banks, however, describes them as having only one eye
on each side. ‘This is erroneous for there are distinctly two as shown in a figure
of the remounted material,

107

Whether the specimens were really myrmecophilous is extremely doubtful.
Their occurrence in the nests of ants was more probably accidental.

Localities —Lal Lal, Vict., date ?, A. M. Lea, with ? Polyrachis hexacantha;
Chudleigh, Tasm., date ?, A. M. Lea, with ? Iridomyrmex. In W. Aust. at
Muresk, Denmark, Busselton, Mullewa and Albany, 1931-2; Trevallyn, Tasm.,
August 17, 1929 (V. V. H.); Launceston, Tasm., June 27, 1931 (V. V. #H.);
National Park, Tasm., March 27, 1932 (V. V. H.); Brown Hill Creek, S. Aust.,
June 25, 1932 (D. C. S.).

Biscirus (Biscirus) hickmani, n. sp.
Fig. A, figs. 16-20.

This is a very large and striking form, of which only two specimens have so
far been collected. In the short terminal setae of the palpi it shows some relation-
ship to the genus Molgus. The details of specific value are fully given in the key
and amplified by the figures. It is named in honour of its discoverer.

Locality——Under stones, National Park, Tasm., March 27, 1932 (V. V. HL).

Biscirus (Biscirus) australicus, n. sp.
Fig. B, figs. 11-13.

This species is very closely related to B. (B.) silvaticus Kramer but is quite
distinct in the length of the palpi and the hairs on the ventral surface of the
rostrum, as well as the other characters given in the key.

It has only been found, so far, at Waroona, W. Aust., August 6, 1931
(H. W.), and at Waite Institute, Glen Osmond, S. Aust., June, 1933 (D. C. S.).

BIBLIOGRAPHY,
Banks, N. 22 .. 1915 The Acarina or Mites.
U.S. Dept. of Agric. Report No. 108.
* n A _. 1916 Acarians from Australian and Tasmanian Ants

and Ant Nests.
Proc. Roy. Soc. S.A. VIL, 224,

Oupemans, A. C. _. 1926 Acari von Svalbard (frither “Spitzbergen”).
Archiv. f. Naturges. A. 106-.
Sic. THor - .. 1931 Bdellidae.

Das Tierreich. 56.
Nordafrikanische Bdellidae und Cunaxidae.
Zool, Anz. 97, 62-79.
VirztHum, H. Grar .. 1929 Acari.
In “Die Tierwelt Mitteleuropas.” 3.

” ” Hee a ”

ON SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND SOUTH AFRICA

BY H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S.

Summary

South Africa, to study the occurrence there of the pest known in Western Australia as the
Red-legged Earth Mite, and which was the same as Black Sand Mite or "aardvloei" of the Cape.
In the district within about 30 miles of Cape Town this mite is a serious pest on the market garden
crops, but as the country is not given over to large pastures as in Australia the distribution and
abundance is not so large. As the mite had first been described from Cape Province several years
before it was noticed in Western Australia and not from elsewhere, it had been concluded that South
Africa was its home. The possibility, therefore, that in Cape Province, if anywhere, might be found
some natural control, led to the writer's visit under the auspices of the Commonwealth Council for
Scientific and Industrial Research.

The correct nomenclature of this species of mite, and also a closely related form, has hitherto been
somewhat uncertain to entomologists, and the aim of this paper is mainly to clear this up. In
addition, the opportunity is taken to record several other species of Acarina occurring in South
Africa and Australia.

108

ON SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND SOUTH AFRICA,
By H. Womerstey, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum.
[Read September 14, 1933.]

During September, 1930, the writer spent some weeks in Cape Province,
South Africa, to study the occurrence there of the pest known in Western Aus-
tralia as the Red-legged Earth Mite, and which was the same as Black Sand Mite
or “aardvloei” of the Cape. In the district within about 30 miles of Cape Town
this mite is a serious pest on the market garden crops, but as the country is not
given over to large pastures as in Australia the distribution and abundance is not
so large. As the mite had first been described from Cape Province several years
before it was noticed in Western Australia and not from elsewhere, it had been
concluded that South Africa was its home. The possibility, therefore, that in Cape
Province, if anywhere, might be found some natural control, led to the writer’s
visit under the auspices of the Commonwealth Council for Scientific and Industrial
Research.

The correct nomenclature of this species of mite, and also a closely related
form, has hitherto been somewhat uncertain to entomologists, and the aim of this
paper is mainly to clear this up. In addition, the opportunity is taken to record
several other species of Acarina occurring in South Africa and Australia.

Family PENTHALEIDAE Oudemans, 1931.

This family, as defined by Dr. A. C. Qudemans, contains only two genera,
Halotydeus, in which the anal opening is situated terminally, and Penthaleus with
a dorsal anus.

Genus Hatotypeus Berlese, 1903.
Syn. Penthaleus Koch, 1838 (in part).
HALOTYDEUS DESTRUCTOR (Jack), 1908.
Figs 1-6,

This mite was first recorded as the Black Sand Mite from Cape Province,
Seuth Africa, by Jack in 1908 under the name of Penthaleus destructor. Not
until 1925, however, was it described in detail, when R. E. Tucker published his
memoir. In 1923 it was recorded from Western Australia by L. J. Newman as
Notophallus bicolor Froggatt, a name given two years earlier to an allied species
occurring in New South Wales. Shortly after the publication of Tucker’s paper
the leaflet of the Western Australian Department of Agriculture was revised, the
name being changed to Penthaleus destructor.

As recorded by Jack and by Tucker, this mite is very abundant and a serious
pest in South Africa on market garden crops such as lettuce. In Western Aus-
tralia it is widely distributed in almost unbelievable numbers on Subterranean
Clover, Cape Weed and many other plants. It also occurs similarly in South
Australia, and the writer has had specimens for identification from Victoria,
New South Wales, Tasmania and Federal Territory.

In South Africa, in seeking a possible natural control, the writer paid par-
ticular attention to two localities. At the Marsh Memorial Homes, Rondebosch,
suspicions were directed to a predatious mite belonging to the Bdellidac (Odonto-
scirus virgulatus Can.) which was present in considerable numbers along with the
Sand Mite. In the field, observations failed to show any cases of the Bdellid

109

110

attacking the “Sand Mite, although various small Collembola and Psocids were
often attacked. In captivity no evidence could be obtained.

It is the writer’s considered opinion that as both this and the next species to
be discussed occur together in both countries, and that as one of them may possibly
be synonymous with a European species, they are probably introductions to both
continents. The European species, which may be the same as the next one to be
discussed, has been recorded occasionally to reach pest numbers in France, and it
would seem that France and the Southern Mediterranean Region may be their
native home and furnish some controlling agency.

The figures given in the plate illustrate the microscopic characters by which
this species can be distinguished from its ally. In the field it is not so globose
and does not have the dorsal red spot characteristic of the next form. It is entirely
black with red legs, which just after an ecdysis are whitish. Occasionally a form
is found in which the dorsum is uniformly brown and sharply marked off from
the black venter. No morphological differences could be found between this form
and the normal.

Genus PENTHALEUS Koch, 1838.
Syn. Notophallus R. M, Can., 1886.

PENTHALEUS BICOLOR Froggatt, 1921.

Syn. ? Penthaleus major (A. Duges, 1834).
? Penthaleus haematopus Koch, 1835.
? Penthaleus insulanus Thorell, 1872.

Figs. 7-11.

This species was first described in a very insufficient manner by Froggatt in
1921 as the Blue Oat Mite (Notophallus bicolor) from New South Wales. The
writer first met with it in South Africa, where it was previously unknown, in all
localities where the previous species was to be found. In Western Australia it is
similarly to be found, although not in such immense numbers, In certain parts of
South Australia it can be considered a minor pest, and in New South Wales has
been regarded as serious. It has also been received from Victoria and Federal
Territory.

Although no recent detailed descriptions of the European Penthaleus major
or haematopus have been published, it does appear to the writer that there is a
possibility that our Australian form may be the same.

Description.—Size to 1°0 mm, rather larger than the preceding species.
Colour black with a red dorsal patch surrounding the anus. Legs red, brighter
than in preceding. Venter and sometimes the back of the cephalothorax reddish.
The palpi are short, three segmented, and the segments relatively shorter and
broader than in H. destructor. The mandibles are short with the movable finger
of practically uniform width, whereas in the previous species it is truncate just
before the apex and ends in a fine point. Only the apical segment of the palpi
has serrated or feathered setae. The body is more globular than in Halotydeus
and has the anus situated dorsally. The genital organ on the venter has the usual
two pairs of suckers. The first and fourth pairs of legs are the longer and the
tarsi end in a pair of strong claws and median pulvillus. The setae on the body
and the legs are all strong and simple, except on the under-surface of the tarsi
where they are serrated. In H. destructor all the setae on the tarsi are serrated.

Neither in this nor the preceding species have males yet been discovered,
and both would appear to be largely parthenogenetic as suggested by Tucker for
fT. destructor,

111

Family BDELLIDAE Duges, 1834.
Genus Biscrrus Sig. Thor, 1913.
Subgenus OponTosciRus Sig. Thor, 1913.

OponToscrrus vircuLATuS Can. et Fanz.

“This species was abundant along with Halotydeus destructor (Jack) in many
market garden areas around Rondebosch and Stellenbosch, Cape Province, South
Africa, in 1930. It is almost world-wide in its distribution, and has recently been
recorded from Northern Africa and Australia. é

Genus Scrrus Herman, 1804.

Scirus hessei, n. sp.
Figs 19-21.

Description—Length, 2:1 mm. Rostrum with 5 pairs of ventral hairs.
Mandibles long, reaching tip of rostrum, 430 p., with a single hair 125 pw. from the
tip and 65. in length. Palpi 725 u., segments II. ; Ul. : IV. : V. = 300n. :
SO0p. : 50p. : 310.5; apical setae of V. 110. and 100 p.; segment IT. with 7-8
hairs, III. with 1, IV. with 4, and V. with 12 hairs. Jaws of mandibles dentate,
fixed finger with 2 teeth, movable finger with a strong apical tooth and four smaller
median teeth. Eyes, two on each side. Legs and body normally haired.

This species, which the writer has much pleasure in naming after his friend,
Dr. Hesse, of the Cape Town Museum, was present in small numbers in a tube
of Collembola collected by Dr. Hesse at Stellenbosch C.P., South Africa, August
28, 1927.

The species is very close to Odontoscirus virgulatus, but belongs definitely to
Scirus in having only a single mandibular hair. In its dentate mandibles it occupies
a similar position to typical species of Scirus that O. virgulatus does to typical
Biscirus.

Family CUNAXIDAE Sig. Thor, 1902.
Genus Cunaxa v. Heyden, 1826.

CUNAXA sETIROSTRIS (Herman, 1804).
Figs, 12-16, :

This is a very small scarlet mite found commonly under loose bark on fallen
twigs in many parts of Western Australia, from Perth southwards. It occurs
along with Cyéa latirostris but is very much smaller and more brilliant in colour.
It is easily distinguished by its shape and the extraordinary palpi. It is a well-
known species in Europe, and Dr. Sig. Thor has kindly confirmed my identifica-
tion of specimens from Perth. It also occurs in South Australia, in the Adelaide
district.

CUNAZA TAURUS.
Figs. 17-18.

This species occurred with the preceding in the Perth area during 1931-2.

It is also a European species, and can be distinguished by the palpal structure.

Family ANYSTIDAE Oudemans, 1902.
Genus Anystis v. Heyden, 1826.
Anystis BACCARUM (Linné, 1758).
Fig. 22.
This is a reddish mite of a characteristic square or trapezoidal shape which
often occurs in considerable numbers on low herbage. It is predatious in habit
and has been observed feeding upon Collembola, Thrips and other soft-bodied

112

insects. Its movements consist of a series of circles. It occurs commonly in the
country around Cape Town, South Africa, and the writer has identified it from
most areas in Western Australia, south of Geraldton, and from Victoria, South
Australia, and New South Wales. It is probably an introduction from Europe.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.
Banks, N. 4, .» 1915—The Acarina or Mites.
Report 108, U.S. Dept. Agric.
Froceatr, W. W. -. 1921—The Blue Oat Mite (Notophallus bicolor ).
‘New South Wales Agric. Gazette, No. 32,
Jack, R.W... -. 1908—The Earth Flea.
Cape of Good Hope Agric. Jour., No. 31.
MarcHaL, P. .. -» 1908—“Notophallus haematopus” (Koch), damaging

peas in Central France.
Bull. Soc. Entom. Fr., No. 3, pp. 41-2.
NEwMa\, L. J. .. 1923—Red-legged Velvet Earth Mite (Notophallus
bicolor) Froggatt.
West Australian Dept. of Agric. Bull. 106.
‘ wl) -. 1925?—The Red-legged Earth Mite (Penthaleus
destructor) (Jack).
West Australian Dept. of Agric. Bull. 106

(revised).
Tucker, R.W. E. .. 1925—The Black Sand Mite: Penthaleus destructor,
Nl. sp.
Entom. Meiioit: No. 3, Dept. of Agric., South
Africa,
Sic. THOR 1931—Bdellidae.
Das Tierreich, Lf. 56,
* iS Rs 4 ” Nordafrikanische Bdellidae und Cunaxidae.
4001, Anz., v. 97, pp. 62-79,
VitzTHuM, H. GraF .. 1929—Acari. Tierwelt Mitteleuropas. Bd. 3.

EXPLANATION OF FIGURE.

Halotydeus destructor (Jack). Entire mite, from below.
7 + Fa Mandible.
e sf s Tarsus.
Pe 42 Anus,
; Genital opening.
” »” ” Palp.
Penthaleus bicolor (Froggatt). Entire mite,
* " ~ Mandible
aS ‘i - Tarsus.
” 10. ” ” ” Palp.
” 11. ” ” ” Anus,
» 12. Cunaxa setirostris (Herman). Palp.

SOON DEB OOD os

» 213: Hs i 5 Segment of palp.
» 14, bp - 3 Dorsal seta.

» 15. B ” sh Tibia and tarsus.
» 16. a 54 5 Mandible.

jy » taurus, Entire mite.

y 18. ” ” Palp.

» 19. Scirus hessei, n. sp. Mandible.

» 20. 5 » 9 yw» Jaws of mandible.

» 2. » » _Palp.

” ” 4 .
» 22. Anystis baccarwm (Linné). Entire mite.

THE ECOLOGY OF THE ABORIGINES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA;
BOTANIC NOTES

BY PROFESSORS J. B. CLELAND AND T. HARVEY JOHNSTON

Summary

In August, 1932, an expedition organised by the Board for Anthropological Research of the
University of Adelaide, in conjunction with the South Australian Museum, and financed in great
part by a grant from the Rockefeller Foundation administered by the Australian National Research
Council, paid a visit to Mount Liebig, almost due west from Alice Springs and distant 200 miles by
road, though only about 142 miles as the crow flies. Mount Liebig is on the route to Ilbilla, some 47
miles further on, which latter place is about 78 miles from the Western Australian border. The
country passed through on the way to Mount Liebig, and the immediate surroundings of Mount
Liebig itself, give a good idea of the type of country in general and of the facilities for the natives to
obtain their various kinds of foods.

113

THE ECOLOGY OF THE ABORIGINES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA;
BOTANICAL NOTES.

By Proressors J. B. CLELAND and T. Harvey JOHNSTON,
University of Adelaide.

[Read September 14, 1933.]
PLaTE V.

In August, 1932, an expedition organised by the Board for Anthropological
Research of the University of Adelaide, in conjunction with the South Australian
Museum, and financed in great part by a grant from the Rockefeller Foundation
administered by the Australian National Research Council, paid a visit to Mount
Liebig, almost due west from Alice Springs and distant 200 miles by road, though
only about 142 miles as the crow flies. Mount Liebig is on the route to Ilbilla,
some 47 miles further on, which latter place is about 78 miles from the Western
Australian border. The country passed through on the way to Mount Liebig, and
the immediate surroundings of Mount Liebig itself, give a good idea of the type
of country in general and of the facilities for the natives to obtain their various
kinds of foods.

Mount Liebig is reached by travelling from Alice Springs 12 miles north
over the ranges and then westerly over extensive plains, following closely the
northern fringe of the MacDonnell Ranges and skirting outliers of these. The
MacDonnells form a series running more or less parallel with each other over a
strip of country some 20 or 30 miles wide. Some members of the series are for
many miles impassable barriers; others are more or less broken up into separate
groups. As one passes westward these separate mountain masses become more
prominent and spectacular; several show a striking bluff-like appearance at one
end, a mountain range stretching east or west behind this. These mountains and
hills extend as far as Mount Liebig, which is their western limit. From the latter
one can look in various directions over extensive plains, and observe at varying
distances further bold and isolated mountain masses. Ilbilla can be seen to the
west; Central Mount Wedge forms a prominent mass to the north-east, some
40 miles away, Between Mount Liebig and Mount Wedge are a series of red
sandhills of low elevation with flats between them. The appearance of these
parallel ridges running east and west, as viewed from the mountain summit, and as
remarked on by Gosse, resembles that of a ploughed field. The various mountain
masses are often exceedingly steep, very rocky, and most of them are covered by
porcupine grass (Triodia, sp.). Amongst these rocks wallabies are to be found, a
source of native food, and under their shelter, in some situations, a Nicotiana,
probably N. Gosset Domin, grows luxuriantly, and is much sought after for chew-
ing purposes as a narcotic.

The plains are covered by mulga to varying extents. Another common shrub
is known as witchetty bush (Acacia Kempeana), Various under-shrubs and herbs
grow between and under the mulga, especially where there are more open glades.
The sandhill country has a vegetation of its own; a striking feature, in places, is
the desert oak (Casuarina Decaisneana); while yams (Ipomoea) grow here, as
well as a porcupine grass used by the natives for obtaining gum.

In such surroundings the native has to find his food supplies. As regards the
larger animal foods, these at one time necessarily consisted of the native mammals,

114

birds, and lizards. The rabbit has now extended probably throughout Central
Australia and can supply the natives with an abundance of food without great
exertion on their part. They are readily dug out by the women by means of a
yam stick. This animal has probably solved one of the difficulties in connection
with the food supply of the natives on various reserves. As we passed along the
western fringes of the MacDonnell Ranges on our return to Alice Springs we
were able to observe towards evening how abundant the rabbits had become, the
various warrens passed being well populated by them, The native, when he has to
obtain his own food, is probably one of the greatest controlling influences on the
multiplication of the rabbit in Central Australia. The only other factors to be
considered, besides drought and disease, seem to be eagles and hawks, dingoes and
wild dogs, feral cats, and Varanus lizards. There have been good seasons
recently in Central Australia and the rabbit has multiplied correspondingly, Bad
years must be expected, and then rabbits may be serious competitors for the avail-
able grass and herbage. They will, under these circumstances, compete with the
marsupials, and both may suffer. In the settled parts the rabbits must also be
competitors with man’s cattle and horses. Unfortunately, in the case of the rabbit,
experience elsewhere shows that the harm does not stop here; when food is getting
scarce the rabbits turn to other sources than their ordinary food supplies; young
bushes and shrubs are eaten; finally the bark may be gnawed from the stems of
shrubs and trees to reduce the pangs of hunger, and then these perish as well as
the rabbits. As yet, in Central Australia, such destruction by these animals does
not seem to have occurred during the recent drought, though apparently rabbits
were very greatly reduced in many parts.

The fox is slowly spreading over Australia, following the dispersion of the
rabbit. It does not seem yet to have reached north of the MacDonnell Ranges.
Feral domestic cats have now wandered far from the immediate neighbourhood
of stations; a litter of kittens was found and eaten by the natives during our visit
to Cockatoo Creek in 1931. The cats often live in rabbit warrens and probably
exercise a considerable control, but doubtless they also destroy many native
animals and birds.

At Haast’s Bluff, about 50 miles east of Mount Liebig, wild horses were being
mustered. These animals do not seem to do much harm to the native pastures
and herbage. The skeleton of one that had wandered to the foot of Mount Liebig
was found during our stay. At Mount Liebig no cattle, camels, goats, horses or
donkeys were observed, except such as were in use for transport or food purposes.
As yet in the Mount Liebig district, then, with the exception of the rabbit and
perhaps some feral cats and dogs, there are no mammals other than those native
to the place. The only introduced animal that may be able to alter the
appearance of the country or which has modified to any extent the native food
supply is thus the rabbit, but the native himself is probably an important con-
troller of it.

The native also exercises a good effect upon the vegetation in his search for
witchetty grubs. Some of these are to be obtained in the branches of the gum
trees, while others tunnel in the roots of shrubs, such as Acacia Kempeana. In
both situations they do much damage, and the natives certainly reduce their
numbers and minimise their depredations.

A detailed consideration may now be made of the flora from the anthropo-
logical aspect. We are indebted more particularly to Mr. J. M. Black and to the
Director and staff of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney, for a number of identifica-
tions of plants in the following list, and to the Director of the Royal Botanic
Gardens, Kew, and Mr. C. E. Hubbard for the identifications of the grasses,

115

THE USES MADE OF BOTANICAL SUBSTANCES BY THE NATIVES.

Foop SUBSTANCES.
Grass Seeds.

When at Mount Liebig in August, 1932, most of the grasses were dead, as the
annuals come up after the summer rains. Doubtless, in suitable seasons, a number
of grasses with grain suitable for winnowing occur in its neighbourhood, though
the country cannot be considered as a good grass-bearing one. The only two
species pointed out as yielding grain for grinding and making into a kind of
damper were Panicum decompositum and Dactyloctentum radulans,

Other Seeds.

The minute but abundant seeds of Amarantus Mitchelli and A. mterruptus
are collected at Macdonald Downs, and probably here also, ground and eaten.
The seeds of Portulaca oleracea, known in some places as manjeru (munyeroo),
are also ground and made into a cake. The seeds of four species of Acacia,
namely A. notabilis, dead finish, the witchetty bush and mulga, are crushed and
eaten. The seeds of Sida corrugata, var. goniocarpa, are ground and cooked, and
those of a Heliotrope are also used.

Tubers and Roots.

These comprise the nut grass or jelka (yelka—a sedge, Cyperus rotundus),
of which the little rounded tubers are eaten; large yams (Jpomoea calobra) which
probably yield a considerable amount of starchy food; and the somewhat succulent
roots of Boerhavia, Erythrina, Tribulus and Clerodendron. During our stay at
Mount Liebig we heard that there were some parties of natives in the sandhills
many miles away busily engaged in digging up yams.

Fruits.

The small native fig is eaten raw, or when dried is ground between stones
and made into a paste. The black fruit of Santalwm lanceolatum is also eaten ;
the wood of this species, as found in Central Australia, lacks any sandalwood
scent. The little fleshy fruits of Enchylaena tomentosa, the ruby salt-bush, are also
used as food. The pulp and seed of the native orange, Capparis Mitchelli, are
eaten. Several Solanum berries are used as food for man, and others not used by
him are eaten by kangaroos and wallabies. Solanum ellipticum was quite abundant
under the mulga, and its fruit was just becoming ripe during our stay ; the berries
are greenish white and somewhat marbled and have rather a bitter taste; we cer-
tainly wondered how the natives could relish them as they apparently did. The
small currant-like fruits of Carissa Brownit are eaten.

Plants Eaten Green.

These included the parakilja (parakeelya), Calandrinia balonnensis, and
the two Asclepiads Cynanchum and Marsdenia, The leaves of Convolvulus
erubescens are cooked, or rather steamed.

Zygophyllum as a Source of Moisture for Steaming Purposes-—Under this
species will be found a description of an ingenious method of steaming vegetable
products, such as the cress Lepidium papilloswm and Convoluulus erubescens, by
means of hot stones and the juicy leaves of Zygophyllum ammophilum.

Gums.
The gums of Acacia ligulata, A, notabilis and A. Kempeana, as well as those
of Atalaya and Ventilago, are used as food.

116

Nectar,

The racemes of flowers of the corkwoods (Hakea) and of Grevillea juncifolia
contain much honey, which is extracted by drawing them sideways through the
mouth. Nectar is also obtained by sucking the red flowers of Eremophila Latrobei.
Sweet material is said to be sucked from the base of the old pods of Crotalaria
dissitiflora.

Grubs.

Witchety grubs, the larvae of beetles or of moths, are a valuable source of
food to the native. These crcamy-white creatures vary in size up to the thickness
and length of a large finger. Uncertainty will probably be experienced in identify-
ing the species of insect to which they belong owing to difficulties in breeding them
out. Witchetty grubs were sought for by the natives in the roots of Salsola kali,
of the native poplar (Codonocarpus), of the witchetty bush (Acacia Kempeana)
and of Atalaya. The large galls on the bloodwood, due to a brachyscelid coccid,
are broken open and the juicy insect eaten,

NARCOTICS,

Pitjuri (Pituri)—This is a term now employed by white people for the
narcotic used by the aborigines in Central Australia, and obtained from species of
Nicotiana. The Aranda name is ingulba. Two kinds are recognised at Mount
Liebig. The rock ingulba, which is obtained from N. Gossei (probably), and is
considered the better, grows as tall as four feet in protected positions on the sides
of mountains. A smaller Nicotiana, probably a new species, growing on the sand-
hill country, is also used but is considered inferior. The sticky Nicotiana
suaveolens, which is often common, coming up under the shelter of fallen mulga
branches, is not used. The leaves, stems and roots of ingulba are all used, being
dried and ground up on a stone. They are preferably mixed with the ashes of
the leaves and twigs of certain trees or shrubs, especially mulga (Acacia aneura)
and Acacia ligulata, after a preliminary moistening in the mouth, and then made
into a ball or roll, We also saw many natives using the greenish leaves themselves
without their having undergone a preliminary drying. These seemed still damp;
mulga ashes were mixed with them and the mass prepared for chewing. This quid
is usually carried behind the ear (when not being chewed). In other cases it
may be stuck under a head-band or hair string. Chewing ingulba is said to assist
the natives during long, dry marches, probably partly by causing salivation, When
two natives meet after having been separated, the first greeting, if one of them is
without any ingulba, is for the other to give him his quid to chew; it is after-
wards put back behind the owner’s ear, It may also be used as an overture in
love-making, the lover giving the woman some of his ingulba to chew.

Duboisia Hopwoodii (Aranda name, monunga) grows on the sandhill
country. It is not used as a narcotic by the natives, but is employed as an emu
poison, The leaves and branches are dried in the sun and then pounded with a
stone. The poison is then added to rock-holes containing about three or four
gallons of water where the emus drink. Some emus are said actually to die beside
the water, and others may wander away for a distance of two hundred yards.
Most accounts indicate that the birds are merely stupefied.

AROMAS USED FOR VARIOUS PURPOSES,

The burnt leaves and twigs of the native pine are used by some mothers, as
the fragrant smell is thought to be pleasant and good for babies. The somewhat
aromatic scent of a small blue-flowered Eremophila Freelingii is used as a pillow
for natives suffering from headache. The sticky aromatic plants Stemodia viscosa
and Pterocaulon are used as remedies for colds.

117

Woops USED FOR WEAPONS, IMPLEMENTS, ETC.

The best wood for making spears is considered to be that of Tecoma. Smaller
and rather heavier spears are made from the branches of Acacia Kempeana.
Those made from ordinary mulga are considered rather too heavy. Small spears
are made from the stem of the supple jack (Ventilago). The “spinifex” gum,
that is used for such purposes as fixing a stone into the end of an adze or a spear-
thrower, is obtained from a species of porcupine grass (Triodia, sp.) that grows
on rocky ground, Pitjis (pitchis), receptacles for carrying food or water, are
made from the light wood of the bean tree (Erythrina), while smaller ones, used
largely as implements for scooping and digging, are manufactured from red-gum.

PLANTS USED FOR DECORATIVE PURPOSES,

The red seeds of the bean tree (Erythrina) are used in necklaces. The
capsules of the bloodwood (Eucalyptus dimorphophloia) were seen threaded into
and hanging from the ends of the locks of hair of one woman, The pretty yellow
flowers of Cassia Sturtii and C. artemesoides, the blue flower of Eremophila
Freelingii, and the pink flowers of Helichrysum Cassinianum are used for sticking
under the hair-band or sometimes through the pierced septum of the nose—as the
natives say in pidgin English, “to make ’em flash.” The milky juice of Euphorbia
eremophila is used for dotting out designs on the body. The purple spores of the
stalked puff-ball Podaxon are used for smearing over the face. The milky juice
of Sarcostenuma is applied to the nipple to imitate milk when the breasts are well
developed, after puberty but before pregnancy has occurred.

VARIOUS PURPOSES
Kangaroo Grass (Themeda australis) is used to form break-winds, as also is
mulga. The grass, Pappophorum Lindleyanum, is placed in water that is being
carried in a coolamon to prevent the water spilling, or it may be used as a strainer
when the water is thick with scum or leaves and débris. ‘he aromatic Stemodia
is also used for this latter purpose.

PLANTS USED BY THE NATIVES, ARRANGED BOTANICALLY
ACCORDING TO THEIR FAMILIES, WITH NATIVE NAMES
AND USES.
(Abbreviations: A. = Aranda; L. = Luritja; P = Pintubi; N= Ngalia; Y = Yumu.)
[NotE—It is possible that some of the native names here given may mean not the par-

ticular name of a specias but a more genenal term (c.g., an equivalent of our ‘“weed’’?) or even
an attribute (e.g., “no good”).]

PINACEAE :—

Callitris robusta R. Br., var. microcarpa, (Native Pine) —Alknarda (A.).
Leaves and twigs used green or dried and burnt to make a pleasant odour
for babies.

GRAMINEAE :—

Themeda australis Stapf. (Kangaroo Grass).—Arara (A.). Seed not used.
Flower stalks used as a breakwind.

Tragus racemosus All—Seed not used.

Panicum decompositum R. Br—Eltjurta (A.). Seeds collected, rubbed by
hand (not with the feet), winnowed, ground and made into a damper.

Digitaria Brownei Hughes—Inama (A.). Seed not used,

Brachiaria distachya (L.) A. Camus.—lItuta (A.). Julumburu (P.).

Aristida arenaria Gaud.—Inturkara (A.). Tjipiri (P.).

Eriachne, sp.—Seed not used.

118

Pappophorum avenaceum Lindl.—Eratja’ratja (A.).

P, Lindleyanum Domin.—Unama kwatjanambelumba (A.). The plants are
used to prevent the spilling of water out of a coolamon or pitchi when
it is being carried, or as a strainer for débris, such as a scum or leaves,
before drinking.

Triodia, sp. (Aff. T, Mitchelli Benth. and T. Basedowii E. Pritzel). The
common “hill-spinifex” or porcupine grass-——Tjuta or tjurta (A.).
Undija (L.). Indolkantji (N.). The seed, ubalabala (A.) or opala-
pala (A.), is eaten by euros and kangaroos. This species does not yield
an adhesive gum.

Triodia, sp.—Tjalanga (A.). Leaves only of a Triodia, gathered from rocky
ground at Allala (the name of a district), were brought in. The species
could not be identified. On some of the leaves were small granular
masses of a “gummy” nature resembling fragments of brown sand glued
together or part of a termitarium. We were informed that these masses
were the materials which supplied the “gum” used for fixing “flints” to
the ends of womerahs and adzes. As coccids were present in the adjacent
in-rolled margins of the knitting-needle-like leaves, it seems possible that
the natural resinous secretion round the leaf sheaths may be increased
in amount by the activities of the coccids and so collect in these granular
masses loosely enveloping some of the leaf-blades. The plants are
collected and hit with a stick over hot sand. The gum is then separated,
and while warm mixed with the dung of euro, wallaby or kangaroo, or
with some grass, to act as a binding material, and made into flat cakes,

Triodia, sp. Used as a source of “gum.” Perhaps the same species as the
preceding. Tjalanga (A.). Kiti (L.).

Eragrostis laniflora Benth, Dehusked with the feet in a hole. Entjura (A.).
Nantjuri (L.). Wonguna (P.).

Dactyloctenium radulans P. Beauv.—Wanja wanja (A.). The heads
are placed in a pitchi, rubbed between the hands, and the seeds winnowed
and then ground up and made into a damper.

CYPERACEAE :—

Cyperus rotundus L. (Nut grass or yelka). The underground “tubers,”
found on the flooded land near the banks of water-courses, are dug up
and eaten, after removal of the husk-like covering.

Mariscus Cunninghamii C. B. Clarke (formerly placed under Cyperus Gunnii
Hook). Viscid.—Angurankura (A.). Ilarapilara (L.).

MoracEAE :-—

Ficus platypoda Cunn—Tjurka. The fruit tjurka an-nga, The fresh fruit
is eaten. raw. When the fig has dried, it is ground between stones, made
into a paste by adding water, and then eaten without being cooked.

PROTEACEAE :—

Hakea lorea R, Br. (Corkwood)—Indjuja (A.). Pirita (N.). The honey
(judja or tulada, N.) is sucked from the racemes of yellowish-white
flowers by drawing these sideways through the mouth.

Grevillea juncifolia Hook—Erolunga (A.), The large handsome orange-
coloured raceme of flowers, ngwala erolunga (A.), are similarly sucked
for the nectar.

G. Wickhami Meiss—Araljukaljukua.

SANTALACEAE :-— ;

Anthobolus exocarpoides ? F. v. M—Ankarankara (A.).. Urtawurta (L.).

Santalum lanceolatum R. Br.—lIlkulai-a (A.) or Arankia (A.). Arang-nurli
(L.). The fruit is soaked in water and then eaten and the water drunk.

119

LORANTHACEAE :-—

Loranthus Miquelii Lehm. (on Bloodwood, Eucalyptus dimorphophloia)—
Immalla (A.).

L. gibberulus Tate (on Grevillea)—Immara (A.). Niémkini (L.).

CHENOPODIACEAE :—

Chenopodium rhadinostachyum F, v. M. Not uncommon. The seeds are
probably gathered here as elsewhere, winnowed and made into damper.

Bassia converula R. H. Anders. Puka puka. The ancestral kangaroo man
dragged his penis through this prickly plant and then went into the
ground.

Salsola Kali (L.) (Rolly Poly, Buckbush)—Ilkala (A.) or Ikala. Tyilkalla
(L.) A grub, tjapa (A.); maku (L.), occurs in the stem and root of
dead full-grown plants and is eaten.

Enchylaena tomentosa R. Br. (Ruby Saltbush). — Iwurta-wurta or
i-wutti-wutta (A. and L.). The deep yellow fleshy “berry” is eaten fresh
when ripe. The fruits here were yellow, but elsewhere ruby red fruits
also occur.

AMARANTACEAE :—

Trichinium obovatum Gaudich—Wourra-wurra or woraka lilja (A.). Kon-
doltja (L.). Mungu-mungurba (N.). Inbai-inbai (N.). The flower-
head is used as an ornament.

T. obovatum, var. grandiflorum Benth—Agardagarda ((A.).. Talku-talku
(L.).

T. exaltatum (Nees) Bent, and T. sp., hairy near T. exaltatum.—Warakalilja
(A.). Albuda-buda (L.).

T. helipteroides F. v. M.—Kaputa-kaputa (A.). (This word itself means
“head.”) The flower-head is used as an ornament.

Amarantus Mitchelli Benth. and A. interruptus R. Br. are both found at
Mount Liebig. The seed is collected elsewhere, and probably here also,
and eaten.

Alternanthera nana R. Br—Seeds eaten by rock pigeons [Lophophaps plumi-
fera (Gould) ].

NYCTAGINACEAE :—
Boerhavia diffusa L.—Wai-ipi (A.). Wai-ipa (L.). Root eaten.

PHYTOLACCACEAE -——
Codonocarpus cotinifolius (Des.) F. v. M. (Native Poplar). —~Kalurta (A.).
A witchety grub from the root is eaten... The fruit is eaten by white
cockatoos.

PORTULACACEAE :—

Portulaca oleracea L. (Purslane, manjeru, munyeroo).—Ljana (A.).
Wagati (L. and P.). Wakati-ina-i (N.). The seed is shaken out into a
pitji, ground on a stone, soaked with water and eaten. The roots are
cooked and eaten and the leaves and stems are boiled and eaten in good
seasons, but not when rather dry.

Calandrinia balonnensis Lind]. (Paraki-lja.) Leaves eaten raw or cooked
on the embers. :

CAPPARIDACEAE :—
Capparis Mitchellit Lindl. (Native Orange.)—Mbultj-ada (A.). Pulp and
seed eaten.

120

CRUCIFERAE :—

Lepidium papillosum F. v. M—TInmurta or immota (A.). Eaten as a cress.
Stenopetalum nutans F. v. M.—Lei-glia or lei-klia (A.).

LEGUMINOSAE :—

Acacia ligulata A. Cunn—Idurka (A.) or atarkuka or ataruka. Wadarka
(L.) or wadruka (L.) or wadarika (L.). The dried leaf and twig are
burnt to obtain ash to mix with pituri. A witchety grub, found in the
root when dry, is eaten. The gum is used as food. The seeds are not
eaten.

A. notabilis F. v. M.—Ta-wa (A.). The gum is eaten. The seeds are ground
between stones and eaten raw.

A, tetragonophylla F. v. M. (Dead Finish) —Wakalbi. The seed is eaten.
A. strongylophylla F. v. M. (prickly) —Parapara (A.). Abérabara (L.).

A. Kempeana F. v. M. (Witchety Bush.) —Tnimma (A.). Eripilli or
marko (L.). The branches spread out fan-wise from the base and are
moderately straight; they are used for making the smaller and rather
heavy spears; south of Hermannsburg these were used for spearing fish.
The seeds are picked up from the ground, crushed between mill-stones,
freed from dirt by rocking in a pitji, mixed with water, made into a
damper and cooked in the fire. The gum that exudes is caten.
Witchety grubs occur in the roots and are much sought after by rabbit-
bandicoots, Thalacomys lagotis. These scratch the soil away from the
roots, but they may be disturbed or may find the root containing the
insects too difficult for their extraction. The natives, in searching for
these grubs, look for places where marsupials have been burrowing, If
they find the root has been gnawed through they proceed no further;
but if the root is still intact, then they wrench it out and frequently find
the insect. Apparently the rabbit-bandicoots know by the sense of smell
which roots contain grubs. Witchety grubs of any kind are known as
npi-anba (L.) and turata (P.).

A. aneura F. v. M. (Mulga). There are two varieties of mulga, one with
slightly broader and shorter phyllodes (5 cm. x 2:5 mm, as against
7 cm. x 1 mm.), which are not distinguished by the natives—Ititja (A.).
Windalko (L.). Wannari (P.). The seeds (ititja mina, A.; windalko
mi-i L.) of both kinds are eaten. Spears made from the wood are con-
sidered rather too heavy. The ash of the phyllodes and branchlets,
sometimes burnt on a stone, is used to mix with the quid of ingulba
(Nicotiana).

Cassia pleurocarpa F. v. M.—llelara (A.). The leaves and flowers are eaten
by emus.

C. Sturit R, Br—Inkutinkuta or ingodingoda (A.). Punti (P.). The
yellow flowers are used for decorating the hair or placing in the perfora-
tion in the nasal septum.

C. artemesioides Gaudich.—Ingut-inguta (A.). Punti (L.}. The flowers
are similarly used.

Crotalaria dissitifiora Benth.—Ngilta-ngilta (A.) Sweet material is sucked
from the base of the old pods.

Swaimsona, sp., near S. phacoides Benth. (probably new).—No native name.

S. flavicarinata J. M. Black —~Nakurta (N.). Eaten by emus and kangaroos.

Glycine sericea F. v. M.—Walatjiti (N.}. Not used.

121

Erythrina vespertilio Benth. (Bean-tree)—Innunda (A.). Inninti (L.)-.

-Innanti (N.). Young bean trees, only a foot high, have large thickened

tap roots descending often a foot or more in carrot fashion, These roots

are dug up, heated in a fire so as to loosen the bark which can then be

readily peeled off the swollen root, the latter being chewed and the fibre

eventually spat out. The seeds (munta-munta, N.)—a beautiful ver-

milion when fresh, though they soon fade—are used for necklets, and

several of these were seen round the necks of children. The wood of

the bean tree is very light and is readily worked and used for making
shields and larger dishes used for carrying food, water or babies.

Vigna lanceolata Benth—Alaitja (A.). Wapiti (L.). The long, swollen,
somewhat moniliform tap root is eaten raw or cooked.

ZYGOPHYLLACEAE ‘—

Zygophyllum ammophilum F. v. M. (probably) —Ilknwalja or ilknoilja (A.).
The Zygophyllum is used in cooking cress (Lepidium papillosum—
inmurta) and other food plants, ¢.g., Convolvulus erubescens (itnalja,
A.; unnilja, L.), but is not itself eaten. It is evidently employed for its
moisture content, acting as a kind of steamer. The method of cooking
is as follows:—A hole is made in the sand, then small sticks are placed
across the hole so as to assume a radiate appearance. Small stones are
arranged on the sticks and supported by them. The sticks are set alight,
and thus the stones are heated and hot ashes are produced, The hot
stones are transferred by the aid of two sticks to the side of the hole.
The unburnt sticks are then rejected and the hot stones replaced. A
layer of Zygophyllum is now placed on the hot stones, then the plants
to be cooked, then another layer of Zygophyllum, then hot stones again,
and finally all is covered with wet sand. When the sand shows a crack
the natives know that the plants are cooked. The sand is then brushed
aside with mulga leaves, the upper plants removed and the upper layer
of Zygophyllum thrown away. The cooked plants are now allowed to
become cold and are then eaten.

Tribulus occidentalis R. Br. (probably ).—Tjilka-tjilka (L.). Tjilkala (N.).
The swollen root is cooked and eaten by the natives. Kangaroos eat the
plant.

EUPHORBIACEAE :—

Euphorbia Drummondit Boiss —Murtera-murtera. Not utilised by the native.

£. Wheeleri Baill—Urtungata (N.). Not used by the natives.

E. eremophila A. Cunn.—Kwarika lilja (A.). Murtu-murtu or mota-mota
(N.). The milky juice is used to decorate the chest.

SAPINDACEAE :—

Atalaya hemiglauca F. v. M. (White-wood).—Ilbara (A.). The white
gum [tung-alba (A.), maku or mako (L.) ] is eaten. A witchety grub,
which lives in the roots and kills the Afalaya, is eaten. The wood is
used to obtain shavings, which are mixed with blood, for certain cere-
monial purposes.

Ventilago viminalis Hook. (Supple-Jack.)—Kneira (A.). Small spears are
made from the stem. The sweet gum is eaten.

MALVACEAE :-—

Hibiscus, sp., probably new (with cleistogamous flowers ).—Winga-winjamba

or winju-winjanimba (N.). Eaten by rabbits and euros.

122:

Sida corrugata Lindl., var. goniocarpa F. v. M.—Munta munta (N.), (The
same word is apparently used for the seed of the bean-tree, Erythrina.)
They grind the seeds of this small yellow-flowered mallow and make them
into damper.

MYRTACEAE -—

Melaleuca glomerata F. v. M. Mbilla. Presumably this plant grows in the
watercourse at the place called Ilbilla, about 95 miles due west of Mount
Liebig.

Eucalyptus dichromophloia F. v. M. (which seems to grade into E. terminalis
F, v. M. and E. pyrophora Benth.). (Bloodwood.)—Arkunga (A.).
Arkingi (L.). Many of the bloodwoods in Central Australia bear rough,
woody, apple-shaped galls an inch or more in diameter. These are pro-
duced by gall-making coccids of the sub-family Brachyscelinae. All
those examined during the last three expeditions have been old, and no
example of the female coccid inhabiting them has been obtained for
identification. It is either Apiomorpha pomiformis Froggatt, or else the
gall-making coccid, referred to as coming from Tennant’s Creek and
producing a large gall, which Froggatt (Australian Insects, p. 382) says
differs generically from Apiomorpha, These bloodwood galls are called
araka ngunba or aika ngumba or ngargumba (A.) ; ngantjeri (L. and P.).
The galls are collected, smashed open with a stone, and the grub-like
female coccid, tjalpa or tjapa (A.), extracted from inside and eaten raw.
The mistletoe (Loranthus Miquelii Lehm.) growing on the bloodwood
is called immalla (A.).

OLEACEAE !-—
Jasminum calcareum F. v. M.—Au-ulru au-ulru or olu-ulru-anulru. Not
used by the natives.
APOCYNACEAE :-—

Carissa lanceolata R. Br. (C. Brownii F. v. M.)—Inagitja (A.). Namun-
buru (L.). The fruit is cooked and eaten.
ASCLEPIADACEAE !—

Sarcostemma australe R. Br. (Milk Bush.)—lbatji-ibatji or ipatji-ipatji
(A.) (ibatja = breast or milk). Ibi-ibi (L.) (ipi, breast). The milk
is applied to the nipple (to imitate milk) when the breasts are well
developed (after puberty but before pregnancy).

Cynanchum floribundum R, Br.—The fruit and leaves are eaten.

Marsdenia australis (R. Br.) Black—Altjia (A.). Un-nala (L.). Ipalu
(P.). The flowers, fruit, leaves and roots, but not the stems, are eaten
raw or cooked.

CONVOLVULACEAE :-—

Ipomoea calobra Hill et F. v. M. ?—Jala (L. and N.), or yala (N.). Two
large sweet potatoes (yams) had been collected by Mr. T. Strehlow dur-
ing his wanderings in the adjacent region and brought to the camp at
Mount Liebig. They are probably the same as the yams at Macdonald
Downs, whose flowers, collected by Miss Jess Chalmers, were identified
by Mr. Bailey in the Botanic Gardens, Brisbane, as the above species.
Miss Chalmers gives the native name at Macdonald Downs as anitetjia.

Convolvulus erubescens Sims.—Knelja or itnalja (A.). Anilja or unnilja

(L.). The leaves are cooked along with Zygophyllum (which supplies
the moisture).

123

BorraGINACEAE :—
Heliotropium, near H. tenuifolium R. Br—Tjurdi-tjurdi (N.). Seeds made
into a damper.

VERBENACEAE :-—

Clerodendron floribundum R. Br—Eramata (A.). Irimati (L.). This
plant survives through the droughts, and hence its value in such times.
The root is cooked in hot sand which is then scraped off with a stick,
the root beaten on a stone, the central fibrous or woody part thrown
away, and the rest eaten.

SOLANACEAE !—

Solanum diversiflorum F. v. M. (apparently). (Undulate leaves, large, pale
yellowish-green fruit nearly one inch in diameter, on rocky ground.)—
Narkutja (A.). Kurra (L.). The outside of the fruits is eaten, the
pulp and seeds thrown away. ;

S., sp. (White fruit.) —Kaitjeri (A.). Fruit eaten.

S., sp. (Very prickly stem, large leaves, and yellowish-green then yellow
ovoid fruit).—-Warra-kalla-kalu. Not used by man but eaten by euros,
kangaroos and wallabies.

S. quadriloculatum F. v. M. (Yellow fruit.)—Uralpa-ralpa or walpa-ralpa
(A.). Eaten by kangaroos, but not by man.

S. ellipticum R. Br. (Fruit greyish-green when ripe.)—Randa or ranto
(A.). Wanji (L.). Walki (P. and Y.). Fruit eaten when ripe.
Nicotiana suaveolens Lehm.—Ngulbi-ngulga (A.) or ingulpi-ingulba. Re-
sembles “pitjuri,” but has sticky leaves and is not used.

N., sp—-What appears to be a new species of Nicotiana was brought
in from the sandhills and is used for chewing, but is not considered as
good as rock pitjuri (N. Gossei?). It is smaller than the latter.

N. Gossei Domin (probably ).—Ingulba (A.). Mangulba (L.). The leaves,
stem and roots are used fresh or dried in the sun (the flowers not being
used) and are ground up on a stone. They are moistened and then
mixed with ashes to make a kind of paste, and the quid so formed is
placed behind the ear, and chewed from time to time. The ash in which
the moist leaves are rolled is obtained by burning twigs of mulga or some
other small acacia, such as A. ligulata,

Duboisia Hopwoodu F. v. M——Monunga (A.). Grows as a bush on the
sandhills. Used as an emu poison (by being added to water) but not as
a narcotic by the natives.

SCROPHULARIACEAE :-—
Stemodia viscosa Roxb.—Kwatjinga unbunamba (A.) (kwatja = water,
4.e., water-drinking plant, probably from its growing in moist ground).
Pénja-pénja (A. and L.). Added in a bunch to water and used as a
strainer for leaves and débris to enable the water to be drunk. Bruised
on a stone as a remedy for colds (evidently suggested by the aromatic
odour).

BIGNONIACEAE :—

Tecoma doratoxylon J. M. Black—Yinbara (A.). Winberri (L.) or win-
beru (L.) or winperi (L.). Grows amongst the rocks on the hills. The
best wood for spears, being long and fairly light. The spears made from
it are used for fighting and for hunting euros, kangaroos, etc.

124

MYoroRAcEAE :—

Eremophila Latrobei F. v. M. (Red flowers. )—-Ngeling-a or njilinga-a (A.).
Minjunga (L.). Ja-njeling-a (N.). The nectar is sucked from the
flower.

E, Freelingii F. v. M. (A blue-flowered shrub about 6 ft. high.)—Rutta
(A.). On account of the somewhat aromatic scent, used as a pillow
for a native with a “sick head” (not one with a “sick belly’), Sometimes
placed in the perforation of the nasal septum.

EF. longifolia (R. Br.) F. v. M—Knurunga or narunga (A.). Toilpurpa
(P.). Eaten by emus, not by natives.

CUCURBITACEAE :—

Melothria maderaspatana (L.) Cogn.—lIlkurta-ilkurta. Eaten by emus, not

by natives.
COMPOSITAE :—

Calotis hispidula F. v. M. (Bindyi.)—Tankara (A.).

Pterocaulon glandulosum (F. v. M.) Benth. et Hook—Pénja-pénja (A. and
L.). Given the same name as Stemodia viscosa, which it resembles in
stickiness and in possessing an aromatic odour. Used, probably on the
latter account, for colds.

Helipterum floribundum DC—Albut albuta (N.),

Helichrysum Cassinianum Gaudich. (Pink.)—Tjinda-tjinda (A.). The
flower is worn in the hair by males as an ornament. ,

FuNGI-BASIDIOMYCETES :—

GASTROMYCETALES :—

Podaxon pistillaris L. (P. aegyptiacus Mont.) —Kopa kopa (A.). This
stalked puff-ball has a stem two or three inches long and an elongated
oval head which is covered by a shaggy cap which can be readily lifted
off, disclosing a mass of purplish-black spores, Holding the base of the
stalk in one hand, the cap is removed and the purplish powder is smeared
under the nose and across the cheeks and forehead in a thick mass for
decorative purposes, The puff-ball is drawn like a brush across the face
and is not rubbed backward and forward.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE V.

Fig. 1. Child wearing a necklace of beans from Erythrina vespertilio,

Fig. 2. Powdering the face with the dark spores of the puffball, Podaxon pistillaris.
The cap of the fungus is being held in the left hand.

ON MASTACOMYS FUSCUS (THOMAS).
BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

Since the original description” of this remarkable rodent, distinguished from all other Australian
murids by peculiarities of its molar crown pattern and their great breadth, there have been few
references to the genus in the literature.

125

ON MASTACOMYS FUSCUS (THOMAS).

By H. H. Fintayson,
Hon. Curator of Mammals, South Australian Museum.

[Read September 14, 1933.]
Pirates VI. anp VII.

Since the original description“) of this remarkable rodent, distinguished
from all other Australian murids by peculiarities of its molar crown pattern
and their great breadth, there have been few references to the genus in the
literature.

In 1885 Lyddeker ©) identified the remains of the type species in a collection
from the Wellington Caves of New South Wales. In 1896 Waite‘) recorded
what he considered to be another species of the genus from Central Australia,
but subsequently withdrew“) the record as a mistaken one, and Troughton‘)
has now shown that the material which misled Waite is referable to Pseudomys
(gyomys) desertor, a form of quite normal dentition.

In 1922 Professor Wood-Jones collected skull fragments from caves in the
South-East of South Australia, which in their molars exhibited Mastacomys
characters, but which proved to differ from the genotype and were subsequently
described by O. Thomas ® as a distinct species, M. mordicus, of inferior size to
fuscus. ©

The type of M. fuscus was obtained from an unspecified locality in Tasmania,
and was acquired by the British Museum in 1852, and in the 80 years which have
elapsed, no information has been forthcoming as to whether so remarkable a form
survived there. The later records, while extending the range of the genus to the
southern part of the mainland, have not been followed by any further information
as to whether either of the species survives as a living species on the Continent,
and fears have been expressed that Mastacomys has become extinct over the whole
of its range.

The purpose of the present notice is to record the fact that Mastacomys
fuscus is still extant in Tasmania, and to add some details of a series of specimens
taken by the writer in 1931.

These were obtained in Cradle Valley, North-west Tasmania, at an altitude
of about 3,000 feet. They were trapped in a complicated labyrinth of runaways
in a matted undergrowth of “wire” grass, so dense that in many places the well-
beaten pads were completely roofed over by the growth, forming tunnels of con-
siderable extent. Apart from the “wire” grass, the meagre Alpine vegetation of
the open heaths upon which the colonies are established, is chiefly comprised

© ©. Thomas, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. ix., p. 413 (1882).

@) Brit. Mus. Cat. Fossil Mammalia, i., p. 227 (1885).

() Report of the Horn Expedition, Zoology, p. 406 (1896).

() Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., pp. 127-128 (1898).

() Records Aust. Museum, p. 293 (1932).

©) Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. p. 550 (1922).

() The same paper contains a reference to an additional immature specimen of fuscus,
from Victoria, the history and present location of which is not given. Enquiry at the National
Museum, Melbourne, has not cleared the matter, but the search for the specimen has disclosed
the presence there of a series of Mastacomys, from a Victorian locality. These will be dealt
with later by Mr. Brazenor.

126

of two small boronias (B. rhomboidea and B. citriodora) and the well-known
“button grass” (Dactyloctenium aegyptium.) characteristic of the high glacial plains
of the western parts of the Island. The site ig an extraordinarily exposed and
shelterless one, the timber line being:a quarter of a mile away, and in winter the
whole area is frequently covered by,a snow-drift several feet deep. Even in mid-
summer the climate is capricious and often severe, and sleet and icy rains drive
up the valley from the west, so that the grass matt is always sodden and frequently
awash.

The chief rat colonies of these grassy areas appear to be mixed communities
of Mastacomys with a rufous heavy-coated highland race of Rattus lutreoja, The
two animals were trapped indifferently on the same. runaways, and they are so alike
that it was not until the whole series obtained was critically examined that it was
seen to be heterogeneous, and examination of the skulls of individuals presenting
external anomalies at once showed them to be identical with Mastacomys. Both
rats are probably quite numerous, but the labyrinths are the chosen hunting
grounds of Dasyurus vivverinus, and it was not until several days trapping had
got rid of the latter that rats began to be caught. Pseudomys higginsi is also
plentiful in the valley, but it frequents the beech and pine scrubs rather than the
open heaths, and its feeding habits, judging by the relative success of varying
baits, are quite different from those of the two larger rats.

The five specimens now available prove that the type, contrary to Thomas’s
statement, was immature, and in several respects the original description may be
amended and amplified.

EXTERNAL CHARACTERS,

The rat is a large one (Table I.), and of very stout build with short, strong
limbs and short tail.

The head is large and the profile strongly arched. The mysticial vibrissae are
moderately developed, the longest member being about 45 mm, They are variably
coloured, the smaller being wholly black or wholly white, while the larger are black
basally and white tipped.

The ear is larger, somewhat broader and more widely spread than in lvtreola.,
The marginal portions of both its surfaces are well clad with short adpressed,
rich brown hairs (about Ridgway’s Vandyke Brown), contrasting with the paler
fur of the occiput and nape.

The manus is much as in /wtreola but smaller, and its digits and palmar struc-
tures more delicate. It is clothed above with fine dusky grey-brown hairs, and
on the inferior surface of the carpus is a rather conspicuous patch of shining
greyish-white hairs. The palm is pinkish or slightly dark pigmented; lighter than
the sole.

The pes above is clothed like the manus, but the naked sole is pale lead
coloured, similar to, but lighter than, the sole in Iutreola. The foot, moreover,
is longer than in that species and more slender. Its length ranges up to 35 mm.
as a maximum, whereas the highest value for the same measurement in a series
of 20 lutreolas is only 30 mm. In M. fuscus, also, the outer interdigital sole pads
are duplicated (pl. vi., fig. J).

The tail is short and rather sparsely clothed above with dark blackish brown
hairs, and both colour and scutation are exactly as in lutreola, but below, contrary
to the original description, it is distinctly lighter, the individual hairs being greyish-
white. The degree of demarcation of the upper and lower surfaces varies in
different individuals but is always apparent, and the feature affords a good dis-
tinction from lutreola, in which the tail is uniformly dark all round.

The coat is very handsome; long, dense, soft and rather delicately coloured.
The general or composite dorsal colour, viewed from a little distance at right

127

angles, is a dark sooty brown, varying in different individuals from Ridgway’s
“Natal Brown” to “olive brown.” But the colour changes in a striking way with
the line of vision, and in an oblique front view it appears darker and in an oblique
rear view much brighter and yellower, the differences being due to the varying
degrees in which the black contour hairs obscure the fulvous tips of the under-fur

The pelage is made up of a dense silky under-fur averaging 22 mm. long on
the dorsum, where it is Ridgway’s Blackish Slate for three-quarters of its length
and then terminates in a bright yellowish tip, the colour of the terminal band
varying from rich “cinnamon buff” to “isabella.” The overlay of guard hairs is
uniform on the dorsum and is comparatively sparse; they average 32 mm. long,
the shaft for two-thirds its length being slate and then thickening to a shining
black, tapering point. The lateral surfaces are similar to the dorsal, except that
an increasing number of guard hairs are white tipped. The ventral surface is ashy
grey externally, obscurely and irregularly tinged with yellow, chiefly at the inser-
tion of the forelimb and on the midline. The ventral coat consists entirely of
under-fur much shorter (12 mm.) and coarser than on the back. Basally it is a
paler lead colour for two-thirds its length, and then terminates in an ashy grey
tip. The external aspects of the limbs are like the sides, and the internal like
the belly.

The immature example is more sombrely coloured, owing to the slight
development of the yellow tips of the under-fur allowing the basal slate
colour to show through. Thomas remarks on the very close similarity
of the type specimen, externally, to his Rattus velutinus. No specimen
of this has been available for comparison, but the immature example re-
ferred to above is indistinguishable by pelage characters from Pseudomys
higginsi, and, as noted, the more rufous adult examples of Mastacomys are very
close to the less rufous ones of R. lutreola. The coat of the latter, however, is
distinctly harsher to the touch and shows also some zoning in the distribution of
the colour, the head and shoulders being yellower and less rufous than the
posterior back, whereas the whole dorsum in Mastacomys is very uniform.

SKULL,

Three skulls have been examined, one at about the same dental stage as the
type and the others much more advanced, but still by no means aged, judging by
the condition of the molar crowns and the sutures. The younger skull, although
exhibiting all the dental features on which the genus was founded, shows only
imperfectly others which are quite marked and peculiar in the adults, and it is
satisfactory to. be able to add to the specialization of the molars some structural
features as well, which assist in distinguishing the skull from that of all other Aus-
tralian Muridae.

In proportion to the size of: the rat the skull is very large and powerful and
its substance dense, and the mandible is massive and strongly sculptured with
muscular impressions. In the dorsal view the most notable features are the very
large size of the lacrymals, the long parallel-sided and very strongly constricted
interorbital region, which is markedly concave above, and the brain case. This is
peculiarly shaped, being wide and globular with its anterior portion suddenly
expanded and without the gentle tapering forward to the olfactory fossa, general
in the Murinae. The temporal ridges are well developed but irregular, and they
are not carried forward into the interorbital area in the form of an under-
cut beading or flange. The temporal slopes of the brain case are rugose, and in
both the large examples distinct post-orbital crests are developed. The inter-
parietal is a large element, sharply angulated posteriorly, where it overhangs the
occiput as a lambdoid spur.

128

The general sculpturing of the interorbital and temporal regions is distinctly
reminiscent of such Microtine genera as Arvicola (pl. vi., fig. C), and is, no doubt,
a consequence of a similar enlargement of the masseteric musculature correlated
with the specialization of the molars, and the assumption, as in Arwicola, of a
coarse herbaceous diet of low nutritive value, tough consistence and large
volume.

The pterygoid region is generally similar to that of Rattus; the mesopterygoid
fossa is deep and narrow, the endopterygoid plates bounding it being without
curvature and diverging gently backwards. The parapterygoid fossae are wide and
shallow but distinctly delimited externally. Their greatest diameter is nearly three
times that of the mesopterygoid. The bullae are small, low, oval in outline and
very obliquely set to the cranial axis.

The characters of the slightly-worn molars of the smallest skull are exactly
as figured by Thomas. They are remarkable not only for their great breadth, but
also for the marked obliquity of their laminae and the strong differentiation of the
columns and of the cusps which surmount them. With progressive wear the
crown pattern of the molars changes considerably, however. The posterior enamel
margins of the cusps become less and less conspicuous and the anterior margins
more and more so, until at last the tubercular character of the cusps is lost and
the cutting structures of the crown partake increasingly of the character of sharp
transverse crescentic folds, quite different from the blunted crowns of Rattus,
Pseudomys, Notomys, etc., and making some approach to the condition in Micro-
tine and Cricitine forms.

The writer regrets his inability to add any intimate details of; the habits of
this interesting rat, which appears to be filling in the Australian animal economy
the niche occupied by the voles in the Holarctic lands. But even had its identity
been suspected when the series was taken, the obscure way of life of all the local
murids throws one back largely on conjecture. However, further information is
much to be desired, and for the convenience of those field naturalists whose excur-
sions may lead them into its habitat, the external features which serve best to
distinguish it from the two other rats which are most likely to accompany it, may
be thus summarised.

Immature examples resemble Pseudomys higginsi in coat colour, but are at
once distinguished by their much shorter tails (see dimensions). Adults resemble
Rattus lutreola in external characters, but are distinguished from that species by:
(1) their larger body size, (2) their longer feet, (3) the tail being distinctly
lighter below than above.

TaBLeE I.

Flesh dimensions of Mastacomys fuscus in mm., taken from
freshly-killed animals.

“Type” 9

1¢g 29 383 49 5Im. 3 Recal-

. culated
Head and body 182 182 180 170 136 142
Cail ah ata She 113 113 110 112 80 94.
Pes .. 0. ee 35 34 33°5 32 30 31

Bar gy ove, aa) 22neds 22x 14 22 x 14 20 x 14 20x14 | 17-3*(?)

Rhinarium to eye 24 22 22 — 18 po
Eye to ear ee 19 19 18 — 16 aan

*Doubtfully comparable.

©) Thomas has already drawn attention to the presence of an enlarged caecum,

129

TABLE II,

Comparison of flesh dimensions of Mastacomys fuscus, Rattus lutreola, and
Pseudomys higginsi, derived from largest individuals of both sexes obtained,
and expressed as a percentage of the head and body length.

Mastacomys _ , \ Pseudomys

‘ fuscus. ' Rattus lutreola, | higginst.
Head and body ae oe 100 : 100 100
Tail... ie ee en 62 66 120
eg hE 7 cal Mee of: h ca 19 18 25
Bate caectlege ck 0 tes 2x7 + A2Se65 | 179
Rhinarium to eye i ee 12°5 12 11-5
Eye to ear fue hy baseless 10 10 9

Tasce III.
Skull dimensions of Mastacomys fuscus in mm.
} (Recalculated)

1l¢ 34 5Im. ¢ Type 9
Great length .. .... 41-1 | 398 33-5 36'1
Basilar length — aac 3 32 ca. 31:7 26°6 =
Zygomatic breadth — a 23-0 21°9 — 21°3
Breadth of brain case .. 16 ca. 16°5 ca. — ~
Palatilar length .. = 21°5 20:0 — —
Palatal foramen .. .. _ 7°8 _ 7°6
Nasals .... 16°3 x 5:3 15°0x 5-0 12°1 12°9
Interorbital eotistriction= 4:0 4°5 4:5 4:3
Upper molar series... 9-9 9°8 8-6 9-9

EXPLANATION OF PLATES VI. AND VIL.

Pirate VI.
Figs. A, D, E. Views of skull of Mastacomys fuscus, Adult 2.
Fig. B. Dorsal view of skull of Rattus lutreola (Adult ¢ ) for comparison with Fig. A.

Fig. C. Dorsal view of skull of Arwvicola amphibius (after Hinton). For comparison
with Fig. A.

Figs. F, I, and J. Soft palate, right manus and pes, respectively, of Mastacomys fuscus.
Adult 9.

Figs. Gand H. Right manus and pes, respectively, of Rattus lutreola, Adult 2.

Puate VII.

Cradle Valley, North-west Tasmania. A view from the north, showing features of the
country in which Mastacomys fuscus still survives. Photo by H. H, F

TANTANOOLA CAVES, SOUTH-EAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA:
GEOLOGICAL AND PHYSIOGRAPHICAL NOTES.

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC.

Summary

During May, 1931, Messrs. H. M. Hale (Director of the S.A. Museum), H. Condon
(Museum Cadet), and the writer spent two weeks in an examination of the newly-opened scenic
cave near Tantanoola (140° 29' east long. X 37° 43' south lat.; fig. 1) , from which various odd
mammal bones had been recovered by previous visitors, notably by Dr. C. Fenner and
Dr. T. D. Campbell. The objects of the visit were to obtain series of the fossils for study and to
examine the field evidence as to the history of the site; the following account summarises the
physiographical and geological notes made. Messrs. V. A. Cram (Manager) and C. Lane
(Caretaker), of the caves, gave every assistance in the work of removing the fossil material, and we
thank them for their courtesy and co-operation. Several caves were examined in detail. They were
found to have been formed under widely varying conditions. Field symbols, A, B, etc., were
arbitrarily given to the sites as work proceeded, and owing to the numerous specimens obtained in
them, and so marked, it appears desirable to retain these indications.

130

TANTANOOLA CAVES, SOUTH-EAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA:
GEOLOGICAL AND PHYSIOGRAPHICAL NOTES.

By Norman B. Trnpace, B.Sc.
{Read September 14, 1933.]

INTRODUCTION,

During May, 1931, Messrs, H. M. Hale (Director of the S.A. Museum),
H. Condon (Museum Cadet), and the writer spent two weeks in an examination
of the newly-opened scenic cave near Tantanoola (140° 29’ east long. x 37° 43’
south lat.; fig. 1), from which various odd mammal bones had been recovered by
previous visitors, notably by Dr. C. Fenner and Dr. T. D. Campbell. The objects
of the visit were to obtain series of the fossils for study and to examine the
field evidence as to the history of the site; the following account summarises the
physiographical and geological notes made. Messrs. V. A. Cram (Manager)
and C. Lane (Caretaker), of the caves, gave every assistance in the work of
removing the fossil material, and we thank them for their courtesy and co-opera-
tion. Several caves were examined in detail. They were found to have been
formed under widely varying conditions. Field symbols, A, B, etc., were arbitrarily
given to the sites as work proceeded, and owing to the numerous specimens
obtained in them, and so marked, it appears desirable to retain these indications.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF CAVES,

Cave A, situated in the cliff at Up and Down Rocks (Section 213, Hundred
of Hindmarsh), is a solution cavity in Tertiary dolomite limestone, and is
abundantly supplied with stalactitic and stalagmitic deposits. The entrance to it
has been recently artificially enlarged to permit of its exploitation as a tourist
attraction. This solution cave is subsequent to and partly incorporates an earlier
cave, formerly present in the same cliff face. The earlier cave was excavated
horizontally by marine action and was then completely filled by a sequence of
marine and shore deposits together with various bones, after which the whole
became infiltrated with lime ta such a degree as to resist solution even more than
the surrounding dolomitic limestone.

The formation of the solution cave by the passage of waters from above is a
distinct event, and the new cave developed for a long time with only meagre direct
access to the atmosphere, thus pavement deposits beneath the stalagmitic floor
consist of broken stalactites, red cave earth, and a few fossils and flint pebbles
derived from the earlier bone deposits. Superficial traces of bats and opossums
indicate that direct communication with the exterior has only relatively recently
been established. This communication was, however, anterior to a period of
volcanic activity in the neighbourhood, for there was a talus of volcanic ash at
the entrance. The sketch section (fig. 2) summarizes the relationships between
these two series of deposits, the details of which are given in the following
paragraphs.

THe Martine AND Sore Deposits or CAvE A.

Fig. 4 is a diagrammatic representation of a natural section of the marine
and shore deposits revealed on the vertical south-western wall within cave A, It
represents a completely filled cave some six feet high in which the following con-
solidated deposits are represented :—(e) Fine cemented wind-blown shell sand
with numerous rodent and bat jaws; (d) Coarse wind-blown shell sand with

131

| | 4 : >
1! pias u fe noe Py on
ONTO . y, é ‘ i - net ons

l

RY DOLOMITE F ppPPPOLYZOAL Ls.

VOLCANIC ASH
ies I.

Sketch Map of portion of Hundred of Hindmarsh, South-East of South Australia.

132

occasional bones; (c) Bone breccia containing remains of giant kangaroos;
(6) Beach sand with some clay, occasional large, rounded flint pebbles, fine
gravel, shells, also teeth and other remains of seals; (a) Flint pebble bed.

The shell fauna represented includes identifiable examples of Patella ustulata
and Fusinus australis.

The mammalian remains have been identified by Mr. H. H. Finlayson, who
intends to give a further account of them in a separate paper. They are all
mineralized and cemented in shell limestone. They include recognisable remains
of -—Macropus raechus Owen, a giant kangaroo. Sarcophilus? Arctocephalus.
Phascolomys? Ulna and part of tibia of a very large species. The small mammal
fauna of the uppermost parts (e) of the bone breccia includes:—Rattus,
Hydromys, Trichosurus.

Ramifications of this system of marine caves survive in all stages of dissection
in various parts of the present cave, and have yielded much fragmentary bone
material for our collection.

Tue Sotution Cave Deposits or Cave A.

As already described, these consist of abundant stalagmitic floors containing
red cave earth and superficial remains of mammals.

The larger stalactitic columns, some of which are up to four feet in least
diameter, show healed fractures due to subsidence and to lateral movements of the
order of six inches. There was a talus near the small original entrance consisting
of volcanic ash, dust, guano, and the bones of small mammals, but this was largely
disturbed during the opening up of the cave and is now buried under an artificial
ramp and pavement which yields access to the floor of the main cave. A thorough
examination of all accessible ramifications of this cave brought to light many
examples of the recent fauna; in this search we were assisted by the caretaker’s
children, who nonchalantly crawled along low passages quite inaccessible to adults.
The principal remains, as identified by Mr. H. H. Finlayson, are:—Trichosurus,
Tsoodon, Phascolomys, Dasyurus, and a large unidentified rodent. Trichosurus,
Dasyurus, and Isoodon bones were also sieved from a part of the volcanic ash of
the talus which had remained relatively undisturbed during the excavation of the
artificial opening to the cave.

SITE B.

This is situated some 30 yards further south-east along the Up and Down
Cliff, approximately at the boundary of the Section. It consists of a small
weathered seaward face of a debris-filled marine cave, similar to the one revealed
in transverse section in cave A. A few fragments of fossil bone were recovered.

Sire C.

This is a superficial cavity in the face of the cliff situated some sixty yards
south-east of site A (on Section 200). It is a hole extending down for twelve or
fourteen feet at a steep angle. The entrance was artificially enlarged during a
search for further exhibition caves. When first located it was completely filled,
from floor to roof, with black voleanic ash, which, on sieving, has yielded a fair
percentage of recent animal bones. These consist of Sarcophilus, Phascolomys,
Pseudochirus, Isoodon, Phascogale, Canis familiaris, cf. dingo. In addition some
very recent bones of Macropus, Wallabia and Trichosurus were present near the
entrance. The bones were not confined to a particular layer but occurred at
intervals through the ash. The question of direct volcanic deposition versus
partial redeposition of the ash by waiter action is uncertain; probably both factors
were at work. Some of the animals found in the ash are of burrowing habit.

133

Site D.

This is a low hole extending into the cliff for approximately four yards, at a
point some fifty yards north-west of site A. It contained about a foot of dry dust,
some ashes and charcoal and-some mammalian remains, including dark-stained but
apparently recent bones of Canis familiaris dingo, Wallabia, Thylogale, Tricho-
surus, Pseudochirus, Dasyurus maculatus, Bettongia, Isoodon, and Phascolomys.
The site was evidently not suitable for native occupation, and the charcoal, etc.,
present may be the remains of fires employed in smoking out rock wallabies, etc.

NortH CAvE.

The only other site examined in the immediate vicinity of the main cave is
situated on the top of Up and Down Rocks. It is locally known as the North
Cave. The entrance is a small hole no larger than a wombat burrow, situated on
Section 204, within a few yards of the boundary with Section 213, At the surface
is a broad expanse of consolidated lime-sand beach with:rock shells overlain by
a variable thickness of black volcanic ash soil which in places is up to ten feet in
depth. A section of the ash beds is well shown in an excavated pit a few yards
further to the north-east.

SKETCH SECTION - %2 mile- UP & DOWN ROCKS ~ seer.a:3 nmpeanse

SHOWING viciniry or Tantanoo.a Caves,

Fig. 2.

The entrance slopes steeply down for some twenty feet, after which it opens
into a series of narrow chambers of great length and vertical height, containing
masses of broken stalagmite. Access to the base is gained by precariously descend-
ing over masses of loose limestone which have been shed from the roof, of the
cave. Rough estimations suggest that the cave is over one hundred feet in depth.
The walls, where sounded, proved to be composed of compact dolomitised lime-
stone, reddish above, yellowish near the base. No significant bone specimens were
secured, but the great local thickness of the dolomite was demonstrated.

Tue GLENCOE Roap SITES.

CAVE E.

This is a cave of relatively recent origin, excavated in a soft polyzoan lime-
stone which contains flints. It is situated on Section 272, Hundred of Hindmarsh,
within 20 yards of the main Glencoe Road (fig. 3). Although partly due to solu-
tion, the main ramifications run parallel to each other with rectangular connecting
passages, in such a manner as to suggest solution along definite fracture planes.
The present entrance is a circular trap hole two feet in diameter descending in
spiral fashion for some fifteen feet. Bones of numerous recent animals, including

134

those of sheep, are represented among the victims of the natural trap. The floor
of the lower parts of the cave is wet, and bones lying there are heavily impreg-
nated with carbonate of lime. Elsewhere the floor of the cave is covered with
limestone pebbles, the nucleus of each of which is an animal jaw or other bone.
The entrance is marked by a mound of black volcanic ash soil with fresh bones,
Stalactitic growths are abundant but are all of comparatively small dimensions,
confirming the general impression of youthfulness.

At the south-western extremity of the cave, where roots from trees on the
surface pass through the cave, the floor is higher and dryer than elsewhere. A
yellow sand talus exists here which has been derived from an entrance now sealed.
The bones present in this sand are fresh in appearance but are evidently somewhat
earlier in date than some of the others, because the talus includes no apparent
traces of the volcanic ash which occurs in the talus beneath the present-day
entrance. The remains in the earlier talus consist of Perameles, Isooden, Tricho-
surus, Dasyurus, a very large Rattus, Wallabia, Thylogale, and Macropus.

The floor was sounded to a small depth at a spot five or six yards south-west
of the present entrance, and bones of Macropus, Wallabia, Trichosurus, and
Thylogale were then found under two layers of floor travertine. On various
parts of the floor of the cave there were present Wallabia, Isoodon, a big rodent,

. Bettongia, Phascogale, Potorous, Rattus, Trichosurus, and Dasyurus, and remains
of the lizard Trachysaurus. Where the bones were on moist pavements they were
strongly impregnated with lime, elsewhere they were fresh-looking.

SKETCH SECTION - %mils- GLENCOE ROAD CAVES

SECTIONS 125.272 HINDMARSH. SOUTH-EAST OF S.AUSTRALIA -

Fig. 3.

Highly calcified and corroded bones and bones in rounded nodules of lime-
stone were found to include Phascolomys, Sthenurus (?), Trichosurus vulpecula,
Tsoodon, Wallabia, Macropus ruficollis, Thylogale billardieri, Pseudochirus,
Rattus, Petaurus (?), and the lizard Trachysaurus.

Very recent material included Dasyurus, Isoodon, Trichosurus, Bettongia (?),
Perameles, a large Rattus (predominant), a smaller rodent, Macropus giganteus,
Thylogale, Phascogale, and Weallabia. Most of these, including the bones of a
sheep, were found on the black soil talus at the entrance; other recently trapped
animals had evidently wandered some distance before expiring, and account for
fresh bones in places remote from the entrance.

OrHeER SITES.

Two other caves exist in the vicinity. The Three Sisters Cave, situated
alongside the road on Section 123, was not entered. It is a natural trap with
three mouths. Entrance can only be gained by a 40-foot clamber down a rope
ladder. One hundred yards further west there is a large circular pit, formed by
the collapse of a cave of large dimensions. This is situated near the margin of
the older seashore, and the breaking in of the cave has revealed sections of marine
caves filled with rock shells and shore debris. This material can be definitely

135

associated with the flint boulder beach with shells which occurs along the road-
way between Sections 123 and 335. The mode of origin is similar to. that of the
marine caves at Up and Down Rocks, and is discussed in some of the following
paragraphs.

GEOLOGICAL. NoTEs.

The interpretation of the history of the Tantanoola caves necessitates some
examination of the geology of the surrounding country. The attached sketch
map and sections (figs. 1-3) illustrate the principal features.

Up and Down Rocks is a scarp which appears to mark the position of an old
fault line traceable in a west of northerly direction for about one and a half miles
from the southern corner of Section 200 (Hundred of Hindmarsh), after which
it is lost beneath consolidated dunes of wind-blown lime-sand and the ash beds of
the basalt fow which forms the Mount Burr Range. The rocks down-thrown to
the west consist of polyzoal limestone of Tertiary age, containing irregular masses
of blue and grey flint. The up-thrown beds consist of massive pink- and yellow-
dolomites and dolomitised limestone, also of Tertiary age.

The fault scarp has been incidentally revealed by marine erosion. which has
removed some of the polyzoal limestone near the line of the fault, thus throwing
the dolomite into relief as a vertical wall and a slope standing about one hundred
feet above the broad Tantanoola Plain, which here lies to the south-west. The
Tertiary polyzoal limestone is present in a quarry near the foot of rocks at the
northern end of the Section and has been described by Jack.

The line of the fault scarp between Sections 200 and 211 and the line of the
road to Section 124 marks the position of an old marine terrace upan which are
still strewn the products of marine denudation and deposition in the form of beds
of shells containing rounded flint pebbles (up to 30 ‘lbs. in weight). These flints
have been derived from the polyzoal limestone, by erosion. This marine cycle was
apparently responsible for the cutting of the earlier cave A and for the deposition
of the marine debris in, it (fig. 2). Similar cave erosion and filling -was ‘carried
out at Section 123 (fig. 3), where caves now filled with rock shells and shore
debris may be seen in sections in the cavity formed by the collapse of a newer
solution cave. Estimations, based on the fact that the elevation of Tantanoola
Railway Station is 83 feet, suggest that this marine terrace is situated between
140 and 160 feet above present sea level. The immediate front of this shore line
is marked between Sections 209 and 124 by a line of swamps which further north
coalesce to form a long swamp lagoon. West of this line of swamps there are
many dune-like hills composed of fine quartz- and shell-sand, cemented with ‘lime,
forming a belt up to half a mile in width and ranging from 20 to 40 feet in eleva-
tion, These dunes represent the shoreward debris formed during a still more
recent period of marine stand-still at a height above sea level but little above that
of the Tantanoola Railway Station (83 feet). The margin of this newer marine
terrace can be traced north-west and south for some miles. Northward it appears
to be continuous with the line of consolidated dunes forming West Avenue Range.
At the level of the margin of the Tantanoola plain (c. 80 feet above sea level)
there are beds of estuarine limestone with lagoonal shells (Rissoa, sp., and
Calliostoma nobile Phillipi), above which there is the rich black soil, largely of
volcanic origin, of the swamp plain.

In order to further elucidate the history of this site an examination is
necessary of the wonderful series of successive sand ridges which mark the
positions of former shore lines of the South-East of our State. In the following
paragraphs a few general observations are given, derived partly from a study of
the extensive series of bench marks recorded in the maps made by the South-

C) Jack, R. L., Geological Survey of S. Aust., Bulletin 10, 1923, p. 45.

136

Eastern Drainage Commission, to a small degree from personal examination, and
otherwise from the extensive literature relating to the subject. A possible inter-
pretation of these facts will be given in a separate section of the paper.

This remarkable series of foreshores has been frequently described, e.9.,
Tenison Woods,@) Howchin,® and Fenner.(#)

The principal “ranges” and the relative heights of their probable foreshores
above present sea level are given below. In the case of the older terraces doubt
exists as to the exact level of the shoreline, the figures in brackets indicate the

Fig, 4.
Transverse Sections (natural) of filled Marine Cave in Dolomite, as seen on
wall of Cave A, Tantanoola.

absolute minimum as limited by the general level of the floor of the corresponding
planes of marine denudation. The uncertainty of these figures is chiefly due to
a lack in the records of the drainage survey; as a rule only the heights of the
depressions to be drained were recorded in detail. Two or even more dune ridges
may be present on the one foreshore. A: section from the vicinity of Beachport
north-eastward to the Naracoorte Range north of Glen Roy shows, in descending
order, the following principal terraces :—

Naracoorte Range‘) - - 250 feet (190 feet)
Cave Range - - - - 200 ,, (160 ,, )
East Avenue Range - = - 150. ,, (120 ,, )
West Avenue Range - - - 90, (80 ,, )
Reedy Creek Range - - - 65 ,, (50 ,, )
Woakwine Range - - ae «25, <5, (10 ,, )

@) Woods, J. Tenison, Geological Observations in South Australia, London, 1862.
@) Howchin, W., Geography of South Australia, revised ed., 1917, p. 106.
() Fenner, C., South Australia: A Geographical Study, Melbourne, 1931, p. 59, ct seq.

(*) The higher figure for the Naracoorte Range is given on the authority of a statement

by Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, vide Explanatory notes to . . . a new gedlogical map,
Sydney, 1932, p, 96.

137

The earliest of these marine terraces appears to be continued nurth-westward
in the Marmon Jabuk Range and to be cut across by the Murray River at Fromm
Landing (Section 50, Hundred of Ridley), where the section depicted in fig. 5
may be seen. At Fromm Landing the Post-Pliocene calcareous dunes containing
fragments of marine shells are met with at the elevation (measured by aneroid)
of between 200 and 240 feet above the river (which is here only a few feet above
sea level). They rest on a relatively great thickness of red clay, which itself lies
upon the characteristic “Ostrea Beds,” generally considered to be Lower Pliocene
in age.

Further to the north, e.g., at Swan Reach and Blanchetown, the Pliocene
“Ostrea Beds” are the uppermost marine horizon and appear on the surface of the

WIND SLOWN SANDY SOIL WITH MURRAY CLI FFS AT

MALLEE VEGETATION.

KUNKAR. FROMM LANDING 4

CLAY SOH, WITH MODULAR

CALCAREOUS CONCRETIONS. SECTION 50, HD. OF RIDLEY.

ARENACEOUS DUNE LIMESTONE
WITH MARINE SHELLS,

RED CLAY,

osTRcA Bes (PLIOCENE).

parnh bbend ents gene.

sa

Fig. 5.
Section of Murray Cliffs at Fromm Landing, Section 50, Hundred of Ridley.

plateau. They have been identified at many places between Swan Reach and
Morgan. The north-western extensions of marine terraces younger than the
Naracoorte have not yet been traced in detail. One of the youngest of them may
be represented approximately two miles north of Wellington, on the main road
to Tailem Bend.

DISCUSSION,

Before entering into a discussion of the significance of the marine deposits at
Tantanoola it seems desirable to briefly mention the problem of the nomenclature
of cherts, flints, and allied siliceous deposits, especially as it applies to the rocks
of the South-East.

According to a recent authority‘ there is very little beyond a nomienclatorial
difference between chert and flint. “The interior of a chert nodule is usually solid,

() Milner, H. B., Sedimentary Petrography, London, 1929, p. 320,

138

often a fossil shell nucleus or aggregate of. fossil particles; the interior of a flint
on the other hand may be quite hollow, and from it a siliceous powder, full of
‘sponge spicules, etc., may often beobtained.” Sponge spicule filled cavities are a
‘noteworthy feature of our Miocene siliceous boulders. The tendency to assume,
with weathering, a pale porcellanous aspect, and the distinct conchoidal fracture,
are other features which suggest that we are correct in using the term “flint” in
preference to any other,

Fenner“) records similar flint pebbles from the stratified tuffs of Mount
Gambier, and tentatively derives them from Tertiary limestone beds. Evidence
at Tantanoola indicates that these pebbles are derived by erosion from the polyzoal
limestones, in which the flint occurs as irregular masses. The polyzoal limestones
are of Miocenc age. It seems likely that some, if not all, of the worn flint pebble
beds were derived from the erosion of the limestone in Post-Tertiary times.

As a digression it may be remarked here that these flint boulders supply the
principal materials employed by the South-Eastern aborigines in the fashioning
of their stone weapons. Implements of superficial sites along the present-day
coast are deep blue or grey in colour; the flints found on the older sites, especially
those somewhat inland from the present coast, show differences in technique and
are frequently altered to a white colour by the solution of portion of the opaline
silica.

The presence in the South-East of caves with fossil bones has been known
for a long time, In the vicinity of Mount Gambier they were noted by Burr),
who states:—“There are . . . caverns which contain the bones and tceth of
animals of larger size than those which are at present living in this part of the
continent of New Holland. Some of them belong to gigantic kangaroos; others
apparently to species of dogs.” The “dog” bones referred to may belong to species
of seals. They were not critically examined and the specimens cannot now be
traced.

The presence in the earlier deposits of cave A, at Up and Down Rocks, of
what appears to be a Pleistocene fauna, characterised by the bones of the extinct
giant kangaroo, M. raechus, introduces an interesting problem in the correlation
of the coastal terraces of the South-East of our State, with one of which this
shoreline deposit is associated.

The formation of the series of coastal dunes in the South-East has been con-
sidered by some geologists to have taken place within a period loosely termed
“Recent.” On the basis of the new evidence available, it is suggested that this
period will more probably be shown to extend over a period embracing Pleistocene
and Recent times. There is remarkable correspondence between the successive
“Ranges” and the corresponding marine terraces of stable foreshores in other
lands.

From a study of the foreshores of various continents at places believed to be
relatively stable, it has been frequently deduced that during Pleistocene and Recent
times there have been marked variations in sea level. Cooke) has summarized
some recent references to this subject, and has given his results of the study of
the eastern coast of the United States.

In the accompanying diagram (fig. 6) an attempt has been made to
compare the principal terraces of the South-East of South Australia with the

(7) Fenner, C., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlv., 1921, p. 179.
(8) Burr, T., Remarks on the Geology and Mineralogy of South Australia, Adelaide,
1846, p. 18.

()Cooke, C. W., Correlation of Coastal Terraces, Journal of Geology, xxxviii., 1930,
pp. 557-589.

139

coastal terraces of the south-eastern United States, in the hope that it will serve as
a basis for more serious discussion of the problem.

The acceptance of a theory connecting the South-Eastern marine terraces
with Pleistocene variations of sea level would involve the assumption that the suc-
cessive “ranges” are not the result of a simple and orderly recession, perhaps
marked by “stand stills” during which the sand dunes were formed, but that there
have been successive advances and retreats of the sea. If the raised terraces attest
to the glacial high tides, there should be evidence for the corresponding low tides.

Chapman), in the records of the Sorrento Bore, has shown that for an
area to the south-east of the present one there have been downward movements of

Correlation o Coastal Terraces
—--~- U.S.A. (arTeR COOKE)
omen SOUTH EAST OF S.AUSTRALIA. II

~.| SUNDERLAND
EAST AVENUE |<

7
WEST [AVENUE teCCOMICO

REEDY GREEKS} CHOWAN

PLEISTOCENE ‘RECENT |

Fig. 6.
Correlation of Coastal Terraces, U.S.A., and South-East of South Australia.

the land in Tertiary time, but that this sinking has been relatively slow and there-
fore not very appreciable during the shorter interval of Pleistocene and Recent
times. This is indicated by the fact that at least four (probably five) low water
stages of sea level have occurred during the Pleistocene Period, permitting the
deposition of dune deposits alternately with the marine ones.

The evidence from bores along the coastal regions in the Murray Basin,
e.g., at Tintinara,“) also offers hints of such variations, but the facts have not
yet been fully marshalled. The present discussion serves merely to draw added
attention to a problem which will require much co-ordinated knowledge and
research before positive dicta can be made.

Factors leading to the formation of these extensive calcareous dunes along
our South-East coast may be:—(1) The presence of waters of the Murray heavily

@°) Chapman, F., Records of the Geological Survey of Victoria, v., 1928, pp. 1-195.
C) Tate, R., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxii, 1898, pp, 67-68.

140

laden with calcareous salts. (2) The impingement of great food-laden marine
currents from the west encouraging the development of a rich molluscan fauna to
utilize this calcareous waste. (3) The milling action of the open Antarctic Ocean
upon the abundant calcareous remains of animal life provided by these conditions.

Factors leading to the preservation of this remarkable series of dune ranges
are perhaps :—(1) The absence of erosion through lack of primary drainage (in
part due to the minor scale of crustal warpings in Pleistocene and Recent times).
(2) The absence of highlands. (3) The dominantly subterranean drainage due to
the underlying calcareous strata. (4) The calcareous nature of the dunes, which
has led to their rapid consolidation and consequent fixation.

These factors seem to have assisted in preserving a youthful aspect which
other facts belie, Pressing desiderata are the ascertaining of more detailed
information regarding the elevation above sea level of the earlier dune “ranges”
of the South-East and the collecting and study of the shell faunas both of the
ranges and of the plains between them. The artificial draining of the swamplands
has, in places, exposed excellent subsurface sections which show, by alterations
from estuarine to marine, followed by further estuarine and lagoonal conditions
that the detailed interpretation of the sequence of events may be complex.

One of the general results of the study of Pleistocene marine terrace faunas
is the indication that raised beaches on stable foreshores frequently bear evidence
of “warmer” climates than that at present existing in these places. Preliminary
studies in South Australia seem to indicate that the “Arca” raised beaches of the
northern portions of the coastline of South Australia are of early Recent or very
late Pleistocene date, and that it may be possible to compare them with the Pamlico
(Mid-Wisconsin) terrace of the eastern United States, with the London 20-feet
terrace, and the newer raised beaches of Spitzbergen, all of which give indications
of warmer climates than at present existing in the adjacent waters.

Howchin,“@2) who has described many occurrences of this “Arca” terrace in
South Australia, has already pointed out that the foraminifera associated with
the “Arca beds” are of “warmer” type. Studies of the fauna of the Woakwine
raised sea floor and terrace (15-25 feet) suggest that the degree of warming was
not sufficient there to enable the “Arca” fauna to become dominant, although
occasional examples may occur, The dominant forms of the terrace are Chione
(several species), Recent work on the climatic zoning of littoral shells has shown
(e.g., Elton and Baden Powell) “*) that many differences are to be expected when
marine terraces are traced from latitude to latitude. Bearing this in mind, it is
possible to suggest a relatively uniform 20-25-feet terrace extending along the
whole of the stable portions of the sea front of South Australia, disturbed only
by minor movements in the unstable down-faulted region of St. Vincent Gulf.
Fig. 7 (upper) suggests the distribution and zoning of the dominant forms of the
20-foot terrace.

With the onset of the cooler conditions characteristic of the present phase
(fig. 7, lower) a zone characterised by a great abundance of Donax deltoides has
moved north, replacing the Chione zone (as seen in sections in the Coorong),
while the Chione fauna, in turn, has moved north and now finds its climatic
equivalent in the warmer gulfs. The Arca zone has disappeared or doubtfully
survives north of Streaky Bay, where living Arca has been taken.

(2) Howchin, W., Geology of South Australia, 2nd ed., 192, p. 254 (also consult
bibliography).

(4) Elton, C. S. and Baden Powell, D. F. W., Geological Magazine, Ixviii., 1931,
pp. 385-405. ‘

141

PRESENT DAY

Fig. 7.

Maps of the Coastline of South Australia, showing distribution of Dominant Shells
of the present and “20-foot” Shore Lines.

142

Man must have entered Australia some time during the latter part of the
period when these dunes were being formed, The laws of mammalian dispersal
suggest that once he had attained the continent he would rapidly (from a geologi-
cal point of view, almost instantaneously) have spread to all parts of his extended
domain, Thus a careful scrutiny of the series of marine beaches from the most
recent backward is likely to eventually reveal to us an indication of the period of
man’s first advent in South Australia, and then enable us to snterpret it in terms
of physiographical changes. Hence the interest which the general problem may
prove to have for the anthropologist.

APPENDIX.
Shell fauna of the Woakwine Terrace, as identified by Mr. B. C. Cotton:—
Brachydontes crosus Lam. Capulus conicus Schuh.
Ostrea sinuata Lam. (angast). Polynices conicus Lam.
Pecten bifrons Lam. Coxiella gilesi Angas, a thassaloid shell.
Mytilus planulatus Lam. Bittium granarium Kiener, lagoonal
Cardium tenuicostatum Lam. shell.
Chione gallinula Lam. Bittium lawleyanum Crosse, lagoonal
Chione scalarina Lam. . shell.
Chione corrugata Lam. Nassarius pyrrhus Menke.
Tapes galactites Lam. Nassarius pauperatus Lam.
Nacella parva Angas. Pyrene austrina Gaskoin.
Astralium aurea Jonas. Cominella eburnea Reeve.
Phasianella australis Gmelin. Cominella lineolata Lam.
Clanculus dunkeri Koch. Fusinus australis Quoy.
Monodonta constricta Lam. Fasciolaria australasia Perry.
Monodonta odontis Wood. Conus anemone Lam.

Cantharidus lehkmanni Menke. = Bullaria botanica Hedley.
Cantharidus conicus Gray.

The absence of Donax and the dominance of individuals and species of
Chione is characteristic.

The above series was collected at a point 671 miles from Robe on the road to
Beachport, beside Section 187, Hundred of Waterhouse. The marine terrace
ranges from nine feet above sea level on the floor to 28 feet on the former beach;
above this the “Range” is composed exclusively of consolidated calcareous dune
sands.

SUMMARY.

This paper records the occurrence of mammal bones in several caves at Up
and Down Rocks, South Australia. In addition to several finds of recent animals,
the fossilized remains of Pleistocene mammals, including Macropus raechus and
a seal, were obtained in a cave on the foreshore of an old marine (160-ft.) terrace.

Evidence for the Pleistocene origin of the “Ranges” of the South-East of
South Australia is discussed and tentative comparisons made with the coastal
terraces of the south-eastern United States.

Some details relating to the fauna of one of the most recent (Woakwine)
terraces are discussed, and some general evidence is brought forward.

ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
NO. 31.

BY J. M. BLACK, A.L.S.

Summary

*Pennisetum macrourum, Trin. This stout ornamental South African grass was found by
Prof. Cleland growing along the River Onkaparinga, 6 miles above Clarendon.

*Lepturus pannonicus (Host) Kunth. Greenock (near Nuriootpa) .-Spain; lower Danubian States;
Southern Russia. Differs from other species of the genus in having 2-flowered spikelets. In general
appearance it resembles L. cylindricus.

Leptochloa digitata (R. Br.) Domin, in Bibl. Bot., Heft 85 : 379 (1915), instead of (R. Br.) J. M.
Black, Fl. S. Aust., 85 (1922).

Spinifex inermis, Banks et Sol. in Hook. f . Fl. Nov.-Zel. i., 292 (1853), in place of S. Airsutus,
Labill. (1806). The change is necessary because this grass was first named /xalum inerme by G.
Forster in his Prodromus, which was published in 1786.

143

ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
No. 31.

By J. M. Brack, A.L.S.
[Read October 12, 1933.]

Piates VIII, anp IX,

.
GRAMINEAE,

*Pennisetum macrourum, Trin. This stout ornamental South African grass
was found by Prof. Cleland growing along the River Onkaparinga, 6 miles above
Clarendon.

*Lepturus pannonicus (Host) Kunth. Greenock (near Nuriootpa).—Spain;
lower Danubian States; Southern Russia. Differs from other species of the genus
in having 2-flowered spikelets. In general appearance it resembles L. cylindricus.

Leptochloa digitata (R. Br.) Domin, in Bibl. Bot., Heft 85:379 (1915),
instead of (R. Br.) J. M. Black, Fl. S. Aust., 85 (1922).

Spinifex inermis, Banks et Sol. in Hook. f. Fl. Nov.-Zel. i., 292 (1853), in
place of S. hirsutus, Labill. (1806). The change is necessary because this grass
was first named Jvalum inerme by G. Forster in his Prodromus, which was pub-
lished in 1786,

Tseilema.

This genus, originally based by Andersson on Anthistiria membranacea,
Lindl. has been found by Dr. K. Domin to comprise 4 species, of which at least
3 grow in South Australia. The bracts, which at first enclose each raceme of
spikelets are here called spathes (“bracts” of Bentham, Fl. Aust. 7 : 543), while
the larger leaf-like bracts, whose sheaths subtend several racemes, are called
involucral bracts (“floral leaves or bracts” of Bentham).

Key TO THE SPECIES,

A. Sheaths of involucral bracts herbaceous, flattened, keeled,
10-15 mm. long, the 4 involucral spikelets with 2 glumes each.

B, Racemes more or less enclosed in the involucral sheaths; awn
20 mm. long .. ae By 4 - i ae ‘

B. Racemes quite exserted from involucral sheaths; awn
12-13 mm. long fh aks wr ho Pr ms :

A. Sheaths of involucral bracts coriaceous, hard, convex, 7-10 mm.

long; racemes closely surrounded by the sheaths; awns

17-20 mm. tong, the 4 involucral spikelets with only 1 glume

each hee xh 3x3 es a =< at ie .. J, vaginifiora 3

1. J. membranacea (Lindl.) Domin, in Bibl, Bot., Heft 95:280 (1915).
Leaf-blades flat, 4-5 mm. broad; involucral sheaths 12-15 mm. long, flattened,
keeled, herbaceous; racemes more or less exserted from the involucral sheaths;
the 4 involucral spikelets about 4 mm. long, each with 2 glumes, of which the outer
one is 7-9-nerved and minutely hairy or almost glabrous, all on short, stout pedicels
which are much exceeded by the tufts of hair at their base; fertile spikelet
5-54 mm. long, with a beard of long erect hairs at its base, and with a very short
pedicel scarcely $ mm. long, the outer glume 5-7-nerved, puberulent near summit,
the second glume of equal length, but glabrous and 3-nerved; the third glume
small, flat, hyaline; the awn (or fourth glume) about 20 mm. long; grain obovate,

I. membranacea 1

I. actinostachys 2

144

24-3 mm. long (pl. viii, fig. 2)—Anthistiria membranacea, Lindl. (1848),
Iseilema Mitchell, Anderss. (1856).

S, Australia. Peake Station, (Tate Herb,}; Snake Gully, Pedirka, E. H.
Ising —Central and N. Australia; Queensland.

2. I. actinostachys, Domin, 1.c. 282.—Leaf-blades flat, about 3 mm. broad;
involucral sheaths 10-12 mm. long, or sometimes rather longer, flattened, keeled,
herbaceous; racemes spreading-erect, conspicuous and quite exserted from the
involucral sheaths; the 4 involucral spikelets 34-4 mm, long, with 2 glumes each,
the outer glume 7-9-nerved and minutely scabrous-hairy, all on short pedicels
about as long or rather longer than the tufts of hair at their base; fertile spikelet
5 mm. long, bearded by a few long hairs at base and on a pedicel of about 1 mm.,
the outer glume 7-nerved, ciliate on margins and puberulent on lower part of back;
awn or fourth glume very slender, 12-13 mm. long; grain elliptic-oblong, 24 mm.
long (pl. viii., fig. 1) —-Anthistiria membranacea, Turner, Aust. Grasses, pl. xi.
(1895).

S. Australia. Near Oodnadatta, Miss Staer; Abminga Creek, J. B. Cleland;
Minnie Downs, L. Reese —Queensland.

3. I. vaginiflora, Domin, lc. 281. Leaf-blades flat, 3-5 mm, broad; involu-
cral sheaths 7-10 mm. long coriaceous, hard, rounded on back and scarcely keeled,
almost completely concealing the racemes and their spathes, with the exception of
the awns; 4 involucral spikelets consisting of only 1 glume each 34-4 mm. long,
5-11-nerved, glabrous except ciliation near summit, always without stamens, all
on short pedicels about as long or rather shorter than the tufts of hair at their
base ; fertile spikelets 6 mm. long, glabrous or with a few hairs at base, on a pedicel
of about 1 mm., the outer glume 7-nerved, glabrous except ciliation near margin;
awn slender 17-20 mm. long; grain elliptic-oblong, about 3 mm. long (pl. viii.
fig. 3).

S. Australia, Near Oodnadatta, Miss Staer; Swallow Creek (10 miles N. of
Oodnadatta), R. Tate; Marree, D. N. George; W. of Lake Torrens and Cordillo
Downs, J. B. Cleland.—North Australia; Queensland.

In our 3 species the outer or first glume of the fertile spikelet is always 2-
toothed at summit, the second glume is of about the same length, the third is
hyaline and about 4 as long; the long pedicels of the Z small upper male or barren
spikelets of each raceme are more or less hairy. The embryo occupies about 4 of
the compressed grain; the hilum is punctiform and basal.

Domin’s fourth species—/. macrathera, with awns 3 cm. long or more—
belongs to N.E. Queensland. All are known as “Flinders Grass.”

Aristida.

Much new light has been thrown on our species of Aristida by two recent
works of Dr. J. Th. Henrard, of Leiden—“A critical revision of the genus
Aristida,” published in the Mededeelingen van’s Rijks Herbarium (1926-28) and
“A monograph of the genus Aristida,” in the same periodical, vol. i. (1929), vol. ii,
(1932). These important publications describe the Aristidas of the whole world,
about 320 species. It should be observed that Henrard, in his descriptions, applies
the term “column or beak of the awn” to the straight, entire, usually twisted
portion, which in several species forms a prolongation of the flowering glume, and
reserves the term “awn” for the 3 long bristles which terminate the awn con-
sidered as a whole and which are always present in the genus, even when the sup-
porting column is absent. For purposes of examination the flowering glume must
be ripe, for in the early stages the characteristic clothing of hairs or bristles is
often insufficiently developed.

145

The following key deals with our South Australian and one Central Aus-
tralian species :—~

_ Section I, Arthratherum, Flowering glume articulate at summit, the long,

twisted column falling off at maturity; outer glumes very unequal; panicle narrow.

A, Stems rather stiff; panicle not half length of stem: flowering

glume 9-10 mm. long .. . - oP os de ae

A. Stem more slender; panicle half or more as long as stem;
flowering glume 6 mm. long .. 44 :

A, Browniana 1

A, arenaria 2

Section If. Chaetaria. Flowering glume not articulate at summit; column
absent, or if present, not articulate on the glume.

B, Awns sessile on flowering glume without any intervening
column or beak,
C, iy of flowering glume convolute (one overlapping the
other).

D. Panicle short (5-8 cm. long), dense, not interrupted,

nearly as broad as long; outer glumes very unequal;
flowering glume glabrous... ~ - - «+ A, Behriana 3

D. Panicle long (10-20 cm.), narrow, interrupted towards

base; outer glumes subequal; flowering glume hristly in

upper half.
#, Panicle very narrow; awns to 18 mm. .. ~ .- 4. echinata 4
E. Panicle rather broader and looser; awns to 25 mm... 4. murtcata 5

C. Margins of flowering glume involute, thus forming a
furrow on the ventral side.

F. Panicle narrow, interrupted, to 35 cm. long; awns

unequal, 25-35 mm. long .. aa nt x! yt

F,. Panicle oblong, dense, 3-7 cm. long; awns equal,

10-12 mm, long * me! 6 + od ~~

B. Awns supported by a twisted column or beak, as in the. sec-

tion Arihratherum, but the column shorter and not articulate

on the flowering glume (sub-section Schocnatheron). Leaves

flat, often twisted; panicle narrow; column 5-6 mm. long .. A. latifolia 8

1. A. Browniana, Henr. Rev. 63 (1926). Stems erect, rather stiff, 15-40 em.
high; leaf-blades convolute-filiform, 8-20 cm. long; panicle 8-15 cm. long (with
the awns), very narrow; outer glumes 1-nerved, very unequal, at first purplish,
later straw-coloured, the lower 8-12 mm. long, the upper 15-22 mm. long; flower-
ing glume 9-10 mm. long (including bearded callus of about 2 mm.), smooth
except for minute tubercles near summit; column 25-38 mm. long, rarely longer,
twisted; awns subequal, slender, 35-65 mm. or rarely longer (pl. viii., fig. 8)—
A. stipoides, R. Br. (1810) non Lamk. (1791).

S. Australia. From the Flinders Range, near Lake Torrens, northwards.
There is also one record from as far S, as Angaston.—Central and N. Australia;
N.S. Wales; Queensland and (according to Henrard) W. Australia.

Henrard considers it probable that A, Browniana is a hybrid between his
new tropical species A. Muelleri and A. arenaria, He distinguishes A. Muelleri
from A. Browntana as having “column of awns about 4 cm. long; upper glume
more than Z cm. long.”” We have, however, specimens with awns to 4 cm. long
and short outer glumes, and others where the reverse is the case, The length of
the combined flowering glume and callus, together with the habit of the plant,
appear to yield the best distinguishing characters for A. Browniana and
A. arenaria, but they leave no satisfactory place for A. Muelleri. A specimen
from the Adelaide River, N.A., preserved in the Tate Herbarium, has the lower
glume 11 mm., the upper 25 mm., the column 35-38 mm. and the awns 7-84 cm.
From Cockatoo Creek, in the northern part of Central Australia, I have a specimen
with the column 36-43 mm, and the awns 54-64 cm. Both have the long flowering
glume of A. Browniana,

A. biglandulosa 6

A. anthoxanthoides 7

146

2. <A. arenaria, Gaudich. Stems slender, densely tufted, 8-30 cm, high;
leaf-blades filiform, glabrous, 3-8 cm. long, often curved; panicle 5-20 cm. long,
narrow, always occupying half or more of the plant; outer glumes very unequal,
i-nerved, dark-purple, withering to straw-colour, the lower 9-12 mm, long, the
upper 15-26 mm. long; flowering glume 5-6, rarely 7 mm. long (including callus
of 2 mm.), glabrous except for minute tubercles towards summit; column
18-26 mm.; awns subequal, slender, 34-7 cm. long.

All the Australian States, but usually in dry country.

Var. firsuta, Henr. Leaves hairy.— Mount Lyndhurst; Lake Frome
(Flinders Range).

4, A. echinata, Henr. Monogr. 284 (1932). Stems erect, rather stiff,
20-50 cm. high, about 1 mm. thick; leaves almost glabrous except hairs at orifice
of sheath, the blades convolute-filiform, rather stiff; panicle 10-20 cm. long,
narrow, spike-like, usually straw-coloured, the branches erect, rather distant
towards base; outer glumes strongly 1-nerved, subequal, mucronate, scabrous on
keel, about 8-9 mm. long; flowering glume 8-9 mm. long (including the bearded
callus), bristly with short glassy conical hairs in its upper half, sometimes mottled
with purple; awns rather broad and flat at base, about equal, 12-18 mm. long
(pl. vili., fig. 7).

S. Australia. Flinders Range (Mount Parry Gap, Mount Lyndhurst, Aroona
Range, Moolooloo) ; Cordillo Downs.—N. 5, Wales; Queensland.

Var. nitidula, Henr. Only differs from the type in the outer glumes glabrous
or almost so; the first outer glume is sometimes slightly longer than the second
and may reach 10 mm. or a little more.

S. Australia. Finniss Springs (near Lake Eyre); Mount Goolwa (S. of
Musgrave Ranges).—Central Australia (near Mount Thomas); N. S. Wales;
Queensland; W. Australia (Victoria Desert; Fraser Range, R. Helms).

5. A. muricata, Henr., lic. 285. Stems rigid, 50-70 cm. high, 2-25 mm.
thick; nodes glabrous, leaf-blades minutely scabrous, long, flat but convolute and
acute in the upper part or almost all the way; orifice of sheath hairy; panicle
12-26 cm. long, straw-coloured, narrow and compact above, rather loose below,
the branches erect and the lower ones distant; outer glumes 1-nerved, rather
unequal, the lower one 8-10 mm. long, scabrous on keel, the upper 10-12 mm. long,
scabrous on keel only near summit, both with a mucro usually inserted between
2 small terminal teeth; flowering glume (including the bearded callus) 9-11 mm.
long, becoming purplish, more or less bristly in upper half with small glassy erect
hairs: awns subequal, slender, 15-25 mm. long.

S. Australia. Swallow’s Waterhole (called “Swallow Creek” by Tate),
about 10 miles N. of Oodnadatta, May 5, 1894, R. Tate; Arkaringa Creek,
R. Helms.

Central Australia. Horseshoe Bend, Finke River, EZ. H. Ising—N. 5S. Wales.

6. A. biglandulosa, nov. sp. Culmi caespitosi, rigidi, saepe plus quam
metrales; foliorum laminae superiores filiformes, inferiores planiusculae, vaginis
orificio pilosis; panicula 20-35 cm. longa, angusta, superne compacta, purpur-
ascens, ramis ercctis, inferioribus distantibus, 8-10 cm. longis, plerisque ad basin
glandulis binis instructis; glumae exteriores subaequales, mucronatae, purpur-
ascentes, fere glabrae, 14-16 mm. longae, prima sub-3-nervi, secunda 1-nervi;
gluma florifera (cum callo barbato) 11-12 mm. longa, glabra, punctulata, purpurea,
marginibus involutis sulcum denticulatum efformantibus; aristae inaequales, sub-
erectae, centralis circa 30-35 mm. longa, laterales circa 25-30 mm. longae.
(pl. viii., fig. 9).

Central Australia. Glen Helen, June, 1894, R. Tate; Alice Springs, August,
1931, J. B. Cleland,

b47

7, A. anthoxanthoides (Domin) Henr. Rev. 29 (1926). Stems 8-30 em.
high; leaves subulate, 3-5 cm. long, somewhat rigid, minutely scabrous; panicle
oblong, dense, 3-7 cm. long, 1-14 em. broad; outer glumes somewhat unequal, 1-
nerved, mucronate, the lower 5-6 mm., the upper 6-7 mm. long; flowering glume
about 6 mm. long (including bearded callus of 1 mm.), very scabrous or almost
bristly in upper half, furrowed on the ventral side by the involute margins; awns
equal, 10-12 mm. long, divergent when ripe (pl. viii., fig. 5) —A. Adscensionis
var. anthoxanthoides, Domin (1915); A. depressa, Benth. and others partly, not
Retz; A. Adscensionis of other Australian authors partly, not of L.

S. Australia. Mount Lyndhurst; Mount Parry; Calanna Station; Anda-
mooka Station; Musgrave Ranges; Diamentina River; Cordillo Downs.—Western
N. S. Wales. I

8. A. latifolia, Domin, in Bibl. Bot., Heft 85 : 339 (1915), nov. var. minor.
Stems erect, rigid but rather slender, 40-50 cm. high, 1-14 mm. thick; leaf-blades
long, flat except towards the summit, 2-3 mm. broad, striate, minutely scabrous
above, glabrous below, becoming twisted ; orifice of sheath almost glabrous; panicle
12-15 cm. long, narrow, pale-coloured, branches erect, the lower ones rather
distant ; outer glumes subequal, 1-nerved, mucronate, about 10 mm. long, the lower
one scabrous on keel, otherwise both glabrous; flowering glume (including the
bearded callus) 5-6 mm. long, scabrous towards summit and surmounted by a
slender continuous twisted scabrous column of 5-7 mm., or about 12 mm. long in
all; awns subequal, very slender, 15-18 mm. long (pl. viii., fig. 6).

Var. minor differt a typo praccipue panicula aristisque valde brevioribus.

S. Australia, Near Oodnadatta, Miss Staer; Snake Gully, near Pedirka,
E. H. Ising.

The type occurs in N. Australia, N. S. Wales, Queensland and W. Australia.
According to Domin’s description it has the panicle up to 50 cm. long and the
awns 20-30 mm. long, although the drawing on plate 112 of the monograph shows
the awns only 19-21 mm. long. : ;

A, ramosa, R. Br., and A. calycina, R. Br. belong to Eastern N. S. Wales
and Queensland. Their names have been applied to many 5S. Australian specimens,
but apparently they are not natives of this State,

Eragrostis elongata (Willd.) Jacq. Eclog. Gram. 3, t. 3 (1813). Stems
slender, erect, 20-40 cm. high; leaves glabrous, the basal sheaths broad, the orifice
usually with a few silky hairs, the blades 4-20 cm. long, filiform or flattish in
lower part and then 2-3 mm. broad; panicle very loose, 8-15 cm. long, the lower
branches distant, sometimes shortly again branched near base, finally spreading,
2-6 cm. long; spikelets linear, greenish to lead-coloured, 6-10 mm, long, about
2 mm. broad, 8-18-flowered, 1-furrowed down the centre, on capillary pedicels
3-4 mm. long, solitary or twin, the terminal pedicel sometimes 10-15 mm. long;
flowering glumes 2 mm. long, conspicuously 3-nerved ; palea about # as long,
curved, strongly ciliate on the 2 nerves; rhachilla finally disarticulating down-
wards; grain globular to ovoid, 4-2 mm. long, pale or reddish (pl. viii., fig. 10).
—E. Brownit (Kunth) Nees (1841) partly; Poa elongata, Willd. (1809);
P. polymorpha, R. Br. (1810) non Koenig (1803).

S. Australia. Bridgewater; Blumberg; Square Waterhole; Mount Compass;
Onkaparinga Gorge; Inman Valley; Myponga (all in Mount Lofty Range) —
Victoria; N. S. Wales; Queensland; North Australia; tropical Asia; New
Caledonia.

Dr. Domin points out that E., Brownii, as described by Bentham in the
Fl. Aust., is a mixture of E, elongata, Jacq., E. diandra (R. Br.) Steud. and
E. pubescens (R. Br.) Steud. Forms of £. diandra with the spikelets few in the
clusters or in short dense spikes and sometimes very shortly pedicellate, such as

148

we have from Sevenhills, Bordertown and Naracoorte, were placed by Bentham
under E, Brownii. E. pubescens belongs to tropical Australia.

Eragrostis xerophila, Domin in Journ. Linn. Soc. 41 : 281, t. 12 (1912),
Densely tufted perennial, with numerous slender but rigid stems, 25-40 cm. high,
rising from hard bulbous bases arranged along the shortly woolly rhizome, which
is covered by short, scarious, deltoid, striate scales, as in E. laniflora; leaf-sheaths
tight, minutely hairy on margins near orifice; blades short, more or less spreading,
striate, subdistichous, rather stiff but not pungent, 14-5 cm. long, flat near base
and 2-3 mm. broad, scaberulous above, glabrous below, often breaking off abruptly
from the sheath; panicle narrow, spike-like, 5-14 cm. long, 6-10 mm. broad, the
lower branches alternate, short, erect, 2-7-spiculate; spikelets linear, subsessile,
6-14 mm. long, 1-2 mm. broad, 10-30-flowered, longitudinally 1-furrowed,
brownish-purple, later straw-coloured, suberect ; flowering glumes 2-24 mm. long,
the lateral nerves faint; palea nearly as long, ciliolate on nerves; grain ovoid-
oblong, 1-14 mm. long.

S. Australia, Finniss Springs, F. D. Warren; Snake Gully, Pedirka, E. H.
Ising; Calanna Station, J. P. H. Fabian; Peake River, Chandler —Central Aus-
tralia; W. Australia.

Differs in minor particulars from the type: the leaf-blades are stiff and acute,
but not pungent, rather broader (1-15 mm. broad in Domin’s description), the
panicle sometimes slightly longer and the branches occasionally with more
numerous spikelets. “Che type was collected by Dr. E. Clement between the
Ashburton and De Gray Rivers, W.A. The species is distinguished from
E. eriopoda, laniflora and setifolia chiefly by the short broad leaves and cylindrical
panicle.

Mr. Warren, of Finniss Springs, writes:—“A very tough grass, growing in
clay and stony places; never dies out; stock eat it readily.”

Eragrostis Kennedyae F. Turner. Specimens collected by E, H. Ising at
Wall Creek, C.A., just beyond our border, have the panicle 5-12 cm. long, purplish
and looser than usual, so that, when fully out, it is 10-15 mm. broad at the base.
The upper branches are more erect than in E. japonica, the panicle of which has
a much looser appearance, not only on account of the spreading-erect branches,
but because the lateral pedicels of the spikelets are 1-14 mm. long, while in
E, Kennedyae and E. confertiflora they are only 4-4 mm. long.

Eriachne Isingiana, nov. sp. Gramen annuum, 10-15 cm. altum, culmis
supra basin ramosis, geniculatis, gracilibus, ad basin et divisionem ramorum
foliatis; folia pilis e tuberculis ortis instructa, vaginis laxis, striatis, brevibus,
laminis lineari-lanceolatis, planis, 10-25 mm. longis, circa 2 mm. latis; folium
supremum fere ad vaginam 15-20 mm. longam, glabrescentem, basin rhacheos
florentis arcte amplexantem redactum ; panicula valde exserta, angusta, spiciformis,
12-25 mm. longa, 5-6 mm. lata; spiculae 4 mm. longae, biflorae, pedicellatae ;
glumae exteriores glabrae, purpurascentes, circa 34 mm. longae, acutae, 7-nerves ;
gluma florifera 34-4 mm. longa, acuminata sed non aristata, dorso inferne villosa,
superne glabra et 5-nervi; palea paulo brevior, dorso villosa, apice biaristulata;
semen obovatum, rubellum, 14 mm. longum (pl. ix., fig. 6).

Pedirka, September, 1932. Part of the valuable collection made in the Far
North by Mr. E. H. Ising, to whom the species is dedicated. Near E. pulchella
Domin, of Western Australia, differing in the more leafy stems, longer spikelets
and glumes, and in the palea tapering to a fine point which is not entire, but
consists of 2 small erect parallel awns. Both species agree in the uppermost leaf
of each stem being almost reduced to a long sheath which embraces the base of
the panicle-axis and is surmounted by a very short inconspicuous blade.

149

Dactyloctenium radulans (R. Br.) Beauv. Agrost. 72 (1812) instead of
D, aegyptium (L.) Richt. Appears to be specifically distinguished from the
Asiatic and African plant by its shorter and more numerous spikes (6-12 mm.
long and usually 4-10 in number, instead of 12-25 mm. long or more and 2-5 in
number, as in D. aegyptium) and by the glumes with ciliolate keels, not glabrous.
—Eleusine radulans, R, Br. Prodr. 186 (1810).

S. Australia. All our northern districts ——-North and Central Australia;
Queensland; N. S. Wales; N.E. Victoria. Said also to occur in Abyssinia,
Sokotra and S.E. Arabia.

Our plant, popularly known as Button Grass, provides good feed, which is
said not to be the case with D, aegyptiunm. The spikes of D. radulans sometimes
spread horizontally when in fruit.

Stipa nitida, Summerh. et Hubbard. This shining grass is common at
Mount Ferguson, near Port Pirie, which is its most southerly locality near the
Flinders Range and the only maritime station yet discovered. The outer glumes
may be only 8-9 mm. long.

Stipa acrociliata, Reader, Ardrossan, November, 1932, E. C. Black. A new
locality for this handsome grass. These specimens from Yorke Peninsula have
a ring of short white appressed hairs below each glabrous node of the stem.

*“Schismus barbatus (L.) Juel. This small Mediterranean and South
African grass, which was first collected along the Broken Hill railway, has now
appeared in our Murray lands and Far North. It has also extended to New
South Wales and Victoria, and is said by some observers to be good fodder.

*Psilurus aristatus (L.) Duval-Jouve (1866). In scrub near Saddleworth,
Worsley C. Johnston; cliffs S. of Hallett’s Cove, J. B. Cleland. A very slender
annual Mediterranean grass, not previously recorded.—Nardus aristata, L.
(1763) ; Psilurus nardoides, Trin. (1820).

Astrebla lappacea (Lindl.) Domin in Bibl. Bot. 85 : 372 (1915). This
name must replace that of A. triticoides (Lindl.) F. v. M. As shown by C. E.
Hubbard in Kew Bull., 1928, Danthonia lappacea, Lindl, (1839) and D. triti-
coides, Lindl. (1848) are conspecific. Bentham considered, mistakenly, that
D, lappacea was the form of Mitchell Grass with hooked awns, which he named
A, iriticoides var. lappacea. ‘This has now been described as A. squarrosa, Hub-
bard. It has not so far been found in South Australia,

Elytrophorus spicatus (Willd.) A. Camus in Lecomte, FI. gén. Indo-Chine
7: 547 (1923). Abminga Creek, August 2, 1931; E. H. Ising. This small plant,
which looks more like a Juncus than a grass, has not been recorded in South
Australia for some 80 years, In the Fl. Aust. it is noted for “Murray River, S.A.,
F, Mueller; Charlotte Waters, C. A. Giles”’ It has recently been found in the
Wimmera, Vict. The flowering glume in our specimens is 4-5 mm. long, including
the narrow point, which can scarcely be described as an awn, as it is open almost
to the summit. It has 3 nerves, but the 2 lateral ones ascend only as far as the
base of the point and are not excurrent. The broad dorsal (abaxial) denticulate
wings of the palea embrace the base of the adjoining flower in the spikelet, while
the Z inner (abaxial) wings are very narrow and embrace the grain in the usual
manner. The grain is 1 mm. long, ovoid-oblong, slightly compressed, brown, the
embryo acute and extending 3 of its length, the hilum basal and punctiform. The
outer glumes are I-nerved and distinctly shorter than the 3-5 flowers of the
spikelet (pl. viii., fig. 4).

The chief synonyms are: Dactylis spicata, Willd. in Ges. Naturf. Fr. N. Schr.
3 : 416 (1801) ; Elytrophorus articulatus, Beauv. Agrost. 67 (1812). Hitherto
the latter specific name has been generally used, but has to give place to Will-
denow’s under the law of priority. This grass is a native of Southern Asia as
well as of Australia.

150 .

CYPERACEAE.

Cyperus aristatus, Rottb. Descr. et icon. 23, t. 6, fig. 1 (1773) instead of
C. squarrosus, L. p.p. Linnaeus confused 2 species in his descriptions of
C. squarrosus. C. aristatus, which occurs in Australia, India, tropical Africa and
America, has the glumes conspicuously 5-7-nerved, with 2-3 nerves on each side,
besides the keel-nerve, and the rhachilla is persistent, so that the plant belongs to
the section Eucyperus. C. squarrosus is a native of India, Cochin-China and Africa.
Its glumes are 3-5-nerved on the keel only, and the rhachilla disarticulates at its
base and falls off when ripe. It belongs to the section M ariscus. C. aristatus has
been found at Alberga Creek, Macumba River, Minnie Downs and other places
in the Far North; also in Central Australia, North Australia and Queensland.

LILIACEAE.

Bulbine semibarbata (R. Br.) Haw. A curious form was collected at
Callana, 9 miles north of Marree, by Professor Cleland. Only 4-8 cm. high, it has
all the filaments bearded at some distance under the anther and not close below
it, as in B. bulbosa. Moreover it has the fibrous roots, the ovules, the trigonous
and wrinkled seeds and the smaller flowers of the typical semibarbata. B. semi-
barbata has only 2 ovules in each cell of the ovary, or 6 in all, while B. bulbosa
has about 4 ovules in each cell or about 12 in all. Both species have the upper
part of the perianth-segments slightly twisted in a deciduous calyptra which
covers the young capsule.

TRIDACEAE.

*Gladiolus cuspidatus, Jacq. This South African plant, originally an escape
from gardens, has been found growing, usually near creeks, at Mount Lofty,
Morialta Gully, Nairne, Normanville, and Kersbrook; also Koppio, E.P. In some
of these places it is abundant, and should, therefore, be considered an established
alien. It is also common in parts of Victoria.

*Moraeca xerospatha, MacOwan var. monophylla, J. M. Black, was collected
by Pastor Hoff at Koonibba Mission Station, near the Great Right, in September,
1928,

SANTALACEAE.

Santalum lanceolatum, R. Br. Granite hills 24 miles east of Oparinna, at the
western end of the Musgrave Ranges; H. H. Finlayson, December, 1932. This
appears to be the first time that the typical form, with ovate or oblong, acute,
thick and rigid leaves, 2-3 cm. broad, has been found in South Australia. The
locality is near the border of Central Australia. The plant-is a shrub or small
tree 4-6 m. high and is fairly numerous. By the white inhabitants it is‘ called
“Plum Bush,” on account of the juicy dark-blue fruit, which is eaten by the
natives. The wood is aromatic. Our ordinary form is the narrow-leaved var.
angustifolium, Benth.

CHENOPODIACEAE.

Bassia articulata, nov. sp. Fruticulus glaber absque lana densa in axillis
foliorum; folia 3-10 mm. longa, 1 mm. diam., plano-convexa, subclavata;
perianthia fructifera in ramulis brevibus ad basin attenuatis articulatisque dense
aggregata, quasi imbricata, tubo lineari-oblongo, 4-5 mm. longo, areola longa
obliquissima quasi laterali ad ramulum affhixo, limbo scarioso, erecto, ciliato, 14 mm,
longo, spinis 3, gracilibus, patentibus vel recurvis, 5-8 mm, longis, saepe rubris;
semen verticale (pl. ix., fig. 2).

Pedirka railway station (Far North), August, 1932, J. B. Cleland.

Differs from B. intricata in the spines always 3; the perianths are crowded,
as in that species, on short branches, but these branches are narrowed, almost

151

pointed, articulate at base and finally separate without tearing; from B. divaricata
it differs in the fewer and shorter spines, often recurved, and in the erect limb
of the perianth; from B. tricuspis in the perianth-tube linear-oblong, not swollen
at base and more obliquely adnate to the branch; from both it differs in the articu-
late branchlets.

NYCTAGINACEAE,

Boerhavia diffusa, L. Specimens with almost glabrous leaves and others
with the whole plant glandular-viscid occur in the Musgrave Ranges. Concerning
the latter form Mr. Allan Brumby, of Ernabella, informed Mr. H. H. Finlayson
that the plant often becomes a dense sticky mass lying prostrate on the ground,
and that small insectivorous birds are trapped in it. The native children then
collect and cook the birds. ,

AIZOACEAE,

Carpobrotus aequilaterus (Haw.) N. E. Br. in Journ, Bot. 66 : 324 (1928),
instead of C. aequilateralis, J. M. Black in Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 56 : 41
(1932). The form of the specific name is due to the fact that the species was
first published by Haworth (in 1794) as Mesembryanthemum aequilaterum, and
only later (in 1803) as M. aequilaterale. Mr. N. E. Brown remarks :—“In modern
books all Australian members of this genus (Carpobrotus ) are referred to
M, aequilaterale, Haw., but from the very scanty material at Kew, I believe that
when properly examined and when the character of the ripe fruit (which has
never been noted) is taken into consideration, at least 4 or 5 well-marked species
will be found to exist there. None of the material I have seen belongs to the
true C. aequilaterus, which has slender stems and the smallest leaves of all known
species. I have never seen it, but from an original drawing of the type at Kew,
it is evident that Salm Dyck’s figure correctly represents this species. It is
unknown in which part of Australia it grows.”

*Cryophytum nodiflorum (L.) L. Bolus, instead of the names C. caducum
(Ait.) L. Bolus, used in these Trans. 56 : 41 (1932) and Mesembryanthemum
caducum, Ait., used in FI, S. A., 219 (1924). M. caducwm appears to have been
misunderstood by earlier botanists, and this correction has been kindly made by
Mr. N. E. Brown on specimens collected near Port Germein,

PAPAVERACEAE.

In view of the question sometimes raised as to the identity of the South
African Papaver aculeatum, Thunb. and the P. horridum, DC. (described from
Australian specimens), Sir Arthur Hill, Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens,
Kew, was good enough to have the material in the Kew Herbarium examined by
Messrs. V. S. Summerhayes and R. A. Dyer. They consider that the specimens
passing under these two names are conspecific, stating that “there do not seem
to be any recognisable differences between them.” The earlier name, P. aculea-
tum, will therefore continue as that of our Australian plant, which, at least in
South Australia, seems to be rapidly approaching extinction, As the references
were wrongly given by Bentham, Fl. Aust, 1 : 63, they are here quoted as supplied
by Messrs. Summerhayes and Dyer :—Papaver aculeatum, Thunb. Prodr, FI.
Cap. 2 : 92 (1800); Fl. Cap. ed. Schultes 431 (1823). P. horridum, DC, Syst.
Veg. 2: 79 (1821). P. gariepinum, Burchell ex DC. Syst. Veg. 2 : 79 (1821).

*Papaver somniferum, L. var, setigerum (DC.) Boiss. This Mediterranean
variety, distinguished by its bristly peduncles and smaller capsules with usually
only 7-8 stigmatic rays, has been found near Mile End, J. Crocker, and near
Roseworthy Agricultural College, G. H. Clarke.

F

152

CRUCIFERAE,

*Neslia paniculata (L.) Desv. This European and West-Asiatic weed has
established itself of recent years at Roseworthy, Wasleys, Reeves Plains and
Gawler River, It is distinguished by its small globular 1-celled and 1-seeded pods
and by its oblong auricled and stem-clasping leaves.

LEGUMINOSAE.

*Trigonella monspeliaca, L. Outer Harbour, October, 1932, coll. J. B.
Cleland; Barabba (6 miles west of Hamley Bridge), per Department of Agricul-
ture. This Mediterranean species has not hitherto been recorded. It is easily
recognised by its clusters of 5-10 sessile slender curved pods, about 10 mm. long,
nerved transversely and spreading radiately from the stem.

Swainsona tephrotricha, F. v. M. Specimens collected at Terowie by Dr.
E. C. Black, in September, 1932, show that the number of leaflets varies from
7 to 21 and the number of flowers in the raceme from 15 to 28. The plants were
growing in the corner of a cultivated field, where they were safe from the plough.
This is much the same class of country as that in which Mueller collected the type
about 1850 (from near Spalding to the Burra Mines). The true S. tephrotricha
can at once be recognised by its ashy-white obovate-oblong leaflets 4-12 mm. long,
2-4 mm. broad, the terminal one no longer than its neighbours, all concave above
and sometimes folded, rather obtuse, but with a small recurved mucro. The style
has a minute tuft of hairs behind the stigma.

Swainsona uniflora, nov. sp. Planta pumila, probabiliter annua, 5-6 cm.
alta, pilis densis adpressis centrifixis omnino (absque petalis) cinerea, caule
10-15 mm. longo; foliola 3-7, prope basin plantae interdum solitaria, plana vel
supra concava, ovato-lanceolata, recurvo-mucronata, 8-15 mm, longa, 3-6 mm.
lata, terminale longius quam lateralia; stipulis lineari-lanceolatis; pedunculus
uniflorus, 2-3 cm. longus, folium subaequans vel paulo brevior; pedicellus brac-
teatus, calyce brevior; calyx 7 mm. longus, dentibus lanceolatis paulo longioribus
quam tubus; bracteae bracteolaeque minutae, flores purpurascentes, siccitate
flavescentes ; vexillum 11 mm. longum, 12 mm. latum, callis duobus confluentibus
decurrentibusque praeditus; carina obtusa, 10 mm. longa, bisacculata, vexillo
brevior, alis longior; stylus tenuis, supra curvaturam rectus, fere tota longitudine
barbatus, pilis basin versus longioribus ; legumen non visum (pl. ix., fig. 4).

Horseshoe Bend, Finke River, C.A., E. H. Ising, August, 1931. Apparently
a small annual; differs from all other species in its 1-flowered peduncles scarcely
exceeding the leaves. In the style and the 2 calli on the standard it approaches
S. phacoides.

Swainsona adenophylla has been found by Prof, Cleland between Wirrulla
and Yardea, a locality much further west than any previously recorded.

Acacia salicina, Lindl. In our northern districts this is often only a shrub
2-3 m. high, and when growing on the bank and not close to the creek or other
water, the branches sometimes scarcely droop, It is always distinguishable from
A, ligulata by its loose racemes or panicles, its thick straight-edged pod and its
partiality for moist situations.

Acacia spinescens, Benth. Specimens have been found on the roads near
Roseworthy Agricultural College with the flowerheads not sessile, but on peduncles
3-6 mm. long.

Acacia obliqua, A. Cunn. Mr. G. H. Clarke, botanist at the Roseworthy
Agricultural College, has also discovered, near that institution, a form of this
species with pubescent phyllodes. Some specimens from the same locality show
the transition between this hairy form and the typical one with glabrous phyllodes.

153

Acacia mollissima, Willd., instead of A. decurrens (Wendl.) Willd. var.
mols, Lindl. This handsome wattle, found only in our South-Eastern district,
deserves specific rank, as it differs from the typical 4. decurrens, in shorter
pubescent leaflets, larger flowerheads and a narrower pod, as well as in the time
of flowering. A. decurrens, which is confined to New South Wales, although
often grown here and in Victoria as an ornamental tree, flowers usually from
July to September, while A. mollissima, which inhabits the Eastern States and
Tasmania, as well as our South-East, has its ordinary flowering season in
November and December.

Pultenaea scabra, R. Br. This species, hitherto only known in South Aus-
tralia by one specimen, in leaf only, from Birchman Lagoon, K.I., has been found
fruiting near Rocky River, K.I., by Prof. Cleland. Calyx very shortly peduncu-
late, about 4 mm. long, the lobes lanceolate, the 2 upper ones united to middle;
pod obovate, pubescent, nearly twice as long as calyx, usually drooping.

*Trifolium arvense, L. var. glabrum, Vis. has been found growing on a farm
near Kapunda since 1931, but does not appear to make much progress. This form
of Hare’s-foot Clover is quite glabrous, even on the calyx-teeth. It has been
placed by some botanists under var. gracile (Thuill.) Ser., which is somewhat
glabrous, has the calyx-teeth merely ciliate, not plumose, and inhabits France,
Italy and Spain. Var. glabrum belongs to the Balkan Peninsula and probably
to other countries of the eastern Mediterranean.

Lotus australis, Andr. var. nov. exstipulatus. Variat foliis 3-foliolatis
sessilibus (foliolis basilaribus stipularibus deficientibus) ; bracteis 1-foliolatis.

Horseshoe Bend, Finke River, CA., E. H. Ising. Agrees with ordinary
specimens except in the omission of the 2 lower stipular leaflets; it has a single
leaflet at the base of each umbel.

Indigofera enneaphylla, L. This species, hitherto only known (in our State)
from Cordillo Downs, has been found by E. H. Ising at Pedirka railway station,
near the Hamilton River, Far North.

Templetonia egena (F. v. M.) Benth. Sandhills near Pedirka on the Hamil-
ton River, a station much further north than any previous record. Coll. E. H.
Ising.

Medicago reticulata, Benth. (M. hispida, Gaertn, var. inermis, Urb.) has
appeared on the slopes of the Torrens, near Kintore Avenue.

OX ALIDACEAE,

*Oxalis compressa, Thunb. Has appeared for some years in a field at Rose-
worthy Agricultural College, Near O. cernua (“Soursob”), from which it differs
in the woolly calyx, the leaflets woolly on the lower face, and the broad, flattish,
ciliate petioles-—S. Africa.

RosacEAg,

*Potertum Sanguisorba, L. “Sheep’s Burnet.” Hill between Beaumont and
Waterfall Gully, November, 1931, This is the form most common in Mediter-
ranean countries, the fruits with 4 narrow sinuate wings and rather deeply pitted,
sometimes distinguished as P, muricatum, Spach.

EUPHORBIACEAE.

Euphorbia Steventi, ¥. M. Bailey in Old. Agric. Journ., 1910, p. 288, t. 30,
in place of E. Murrayana, J. M. Black in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 56 : 42, t. 1,
fig. 5 (1932). Bailey’s type came from the claypans of the Georgina River, in the
dry districts of Western Queensland. On meeting with his description and figure,
published 23 years ago, I sent a South Australian specimen of E. Murrayana to
Mr. C. T.. White, Government Botanist of Queensland, who, after comparison

154

with the type of E. Stevenii, agreed with me that they are conspecific.
E. Murrayana is, therefore, reduced to a synonym.

*Euphorbia Cyparissias, L., a Spurge with a creeping rootstock and a native
of most countries of continental Europe, has appeared along roadsides in
Sefton Park.

MALVACEAE.

Hibiscus crassicalyx, nov. sp. Fruticulus omnino stellato-tomentosus ; folia
patentia, ovata vel ovato-oblonga, late crenulata, crassa, velutina, 3-7 cm. longa,
2-3 cm. lata; stipulae lineares, caducae ; petioli crassi, circa 2 cm. longi; flores
solitarii, axillares, in pedunculis crassis petiolos subaequantibus vel superantibus
sub flore incrassatis et articulatis; involucrum velutinum, 2-24 cm. longum, lobis
5 lanceolatis, tubum late cyathiformem subaequantibus; calyx involucro paulo
longior, lobis lanceolato-acuminatis extus stellato-velutinis, intus pilis simplicibus
instructis; petala minuta (circa 3 mm. longa), orbicularia, imbricata, alba, base
purpurea, exteriora dorso stellato-tomentosa, omnia deorsum in cyathum inversum
scariosum ipsis petalis aequilongum et parti inferiore columnae staminalis adnatum
productae (an forma cleistogama hiemalis?) ; capsula ovoidea, circa 12 mm. longa,
pilosa, 5-locularis ; semina 20-25, dense lanata, 4 mm. longa (pl. ix., fig. 5).

Mount Liebig, C. Aust., August, 1932, J. B. Cleland.

Differs from LH. Sturtii in the much greater length of the calyx and involucre
(24--3 em. long), a corresponding increase in thickness, and in the fewer lobes of
the involucre; from H. Farragei in the same particulars, also in the pointed, not
clavate, lobes of the involucre and in the free style-branches. The minute petals
here described are probably those of a winter-flowering cleistogamous form of
the species, such as has been also observed in H, Sturtia.

FRANKENIACEAE.

Frankenia granulata, n. sp. Fruticulus 30-45 cm. altus; ramuli folia et
calyces granulis albo-cinereis dense obtecti; folia pseudo-verticillatim congregata,
teretia, rigida, 6-10 mm. longa, 14 mm. diam., breviter petiolatis marginibus
revolutis nervum medianum omnino occludentibus; internodia 5-14 mm. longa,
flores in cymas corymbosas foliatas dispositi; calyx oblongo-ovoideus, 7 mm.
longus; petala 5, rosea, 10 mm. longa, laminis circa 4 mm. latis; stamina 6;
antherae roseae, 14 mm. longae; styli rami 3, 2 mm. longi (cum stigmatibus
clavatis) ; ovarii placentae 3, parietales; ovula 7-9 pro placenta; capsula 4 mm.
longa; semina 10-14, oblongo-ovoidea, 1 mm. longa, minute tuberculata (pl. ix.,
fig. 3).

Witchellina, in the Willouran Hills, S.W. of Marree, H, H. Finlayson,
February, 19353.

Near F. foliosa, of which it had the habit, but is a stouter and taller plant,
distinguished by its ashy-white, densely granular clothing, its longer, terete,
shortly petiolate leaves, with margins so revolute as to hide the lower surface
entirely, the larger calyx and petals and the fewer ovules and seeds. It is a hand-
some Frankenia, the white, tuberculate leaves contrasting well with the com-
paratively large pink flowers.

OENOTHERACEAE,

The following changes must be made in the names of our 2 introduced
Oenotheras from temperate South America. The new and more correct deter-
minations are due to the courtesy of Professor P. A. Munz, of Pomona College,
Claremont, California, who is preparing a monograph of the genus and to whom
specimens from South Australia were submitted.

*Oenothera stricta, Ledeb., instead of Oe. odorata, Jacq. The 2 species are
closely allied, but Oe. odorata has larger flowers, is glaucous, more villous and
has the leaves more strongly crisped-undulate.

155

*Oe. affinis, Cambess., instead of Oe. longiflora, Jacq. Both these species
of Evening Primrose have a very long beak to the receptacle, but Oe. longiflora
has oblong, rather obtuse leaves more or less rounded at base and is covered with
a much coarser pubescence, whereas Oe. affinis has lanceolate acute leaves nar-
rowed at base and is covered with a soft velvety pubescence,

MYRTACEAE.

Eucalyptus diversifolia, Bonpl. Wilpena Pound, November, 1928, J. B.
Cleland, This is the most northerly record of the species.

Eucalyptus viminalis, Labill. Wilpena Pound, November, 1930, J. B. Cleland.
First record for the Flinders Range.

Eucalyptus incrassata, Labill. var. protrusa, J. M. Black. Between Whyalla
and Iron Knob, E.P., A. Morris, The fruits in these specimens are comparatively
small—5-6 mm. long, a trifle broader and slightly contracted at summit.

UMBELLIFERAE.
Hydrocotyle tripartita, R. Br. Rocky River, K.L, J. B. Cleland.

GENTIANACEAE.

*Microcala quadrangularis, Griseb. This little yellow-flowered South
American annual, only 2-4 cm. high, with quadrangular calyx and opposite ovate-
oblong leaves, is now well established along the foothills near Adelaide. First
discovered on a road near Knightsbridge in 1912, it was supposed to have dis-
appeared, but this impression was probably due to the fact that the plant is only
apparent during its few weeks of flowering in September and October.

BorRRAGINACEAE,

Heliotropium tenuifolium, R. Br. nov. var. parviflorum. Variat corolla
calycem tantum aequante vel eo paulo breviore, intus glabra vel fere glabra.

Mount Liebig, C.A., August 16, 1932, J. B. Cleland. This appears to differ
from the type only in the shorter corolla and its complete or almost complete lack
of pubescence inside the tube. The glabrous interior of the corolla is one of the
characters of the section Euheliotropium, but it may occur exceptionally in the
section Orthostachys, to which H. tenuifolium belongs. De Candolle, in defining
Orthostachys, says:—‘‘Corollae tubus sub fauce vel fauce pubescens, rarissime
glaber.” The cohering anthers, which occur in the variety and the type, indicate
Orthostachys. The calyx is the same in the variety and the type (34-4 mm. long),
but the corolla of var. parviflorum is only 2-4 mm. long, while in the typical form
it is about 7 mm. long and conspicuous above the calyx. The typical H. tenut-
folitwm was also collected in the same locality by Professor Cleland.

SOLANACEAE.

Nicotiana Gossei, Domin in Bibl. Bot., Heft 89 : 1,146 (1929). Plant
30-50 cm. high, green but woolly all over with short silky spreading hairs; stems
‘6-9 mm. thick below the inflorescence; stem-leaves undulate, sessile, clasping the
stem with rounded auricles, the upper ones ovate-lanceolate, acute, 4-14 cm. long,
2-9 cm. broad near base, the lower ones tapering towards the clasping base and
sometimes broadly ovate and 20 cm. long by 12 cm. broad; bracts lanceolate;
flowers in racemes which are sometimes corymbose, on thick woolly pedicels
5-10 mm. long; calyx green, woolly-pubescent, 5-ribbed, 17-24 mm. long, about
6mm. diam., the lobes lanceolate, about as long as tube; corolla woolly outside,
30-40 mm. long in ail, the tube oblong, purplish, 22-30 mm. long, about 4 mm.
diam. and from 4 longer to almost twice as long as calyx, the limb about 25 mm.

156

across, white, its lobes rounded; 4 anthers on filaments of 1-2 mm., the fifth
lower down on a filament 6-7 mm. long, affixed 8-12 mm. above base of tube;
capsule oblong-conical, smooth, brown, reticulate, 12-15 mm, long, exceeding the
calyx-tube, opening in 4 valves; seeds wrinkled, 1 mm. long.

Near Ernabella in the Musgrave Ranges, J. B. Cleland, August, 1933. Leaves
chewed by the natives as a narcotic.

The type was collected by W. C. Gosse, “in the centre of S. Australia,” on
his journey of 1873, when he traversed what is now the southern part of Central
Australia returning through the Musgrave Ranges, His collection of plants was
sent to Baron von Mueller, but his type of N. Gosset is at present in Leningrad,
on loan from the National Herbarium of Victoria. However, our plant accords
well with Domin’s description. The species is chiefly distinguished by its soft,
woolly, broad, sessile, stem-clasping leaves.

Nicotiana ingulba, nov, sp. Caules erecti, glabri, 30-50 cm. alti, graciles
sed rigidi, circa 2 mm. diam. ; folia omnia in petiolum angustata, caulina lanceolata,
distantia, glabra, undulata, 4-9 cm. longa (petiolo incluso) 1-2 cm. lata, suprema
linearia, radicalia, late lanceolata vel ovata, plerumque 6-11 cm. longa, 3-5 cm.
lata, omnino vel fere glabra; bracteae parvae, caducae; flores racemoso-paniculati,
pedicellis gracilibus, 5-10 mm, longis, puberulis; calyx 12-17 mm. longus,
5-costatus, ptuberulus, lobis lineari-lanceolatis, tubo quasi aequilongis; corolla
saepius 4-5 cm. longa, tubo gracili, virescente, puberulo, 3-4 cm, longo, 24 mm.
diam., limbo albo, transverse 25 mm, lato, lobis obtusis; 4 de antheris in filamentis
circa 4 mm. longis innixi, quintum inferius in filamento circa 5 mm. longo et
20 mm. supra basin tubi affixo; capsula oblonga, 10-13 mm. longa, 4-fida, tubum
calycis paulo vel multo superans, basin versus transverse rugosa; semina reni-
formia, rubella, rugulosa, 1 mm, longa (pl. ix., fig. 1).

Central Australia. Harper’s Spring, E. Kramer.

Distinguished from other species by the leaves all petiolate, and from
N. Gosset and suaveolens by its almost glabrous character. Ingulba (ingoolba)
is the name applied by the natives to this and other species whose leaves they chew
as a narcotic. During winter-flowering the corolla-tube may be only 2-3 cm. long.

Nicotiana excelsior. Specimens from Ernabella, Musgrave Ranges, collected
by Prof. J. B. Cleland, authorise the following additions to previous descriptions :—
Stems about 15 mm. diam. near base; stem-leaves rather fleshy, sessile, green,
glabrous, ovate-lanceolate, acute, 10-30 cm. long, 2-10 cm. broad, including the
decurrent tapering wings, which are 2-12 cm. long; calyx 20-30 mm. long,
10-ribbed, with scattered glands, the lobes rather shorter than tube, lanceolate,
channelled inside and glandular-denticulate along the margins; corolla-tube
35-50 mm. long, purplish, minutely pubescent, the limb white, 30-35 mm. across,
the lobes very shallow and obtuse; 4 anthers on filaments about 1 mm. long, the
fifth lower down, on a filament 10-15 mm. long, affixed 20-30 mm. above base of
tube. Flowering specimens are sometimes less than 1 m. high. Mr. H. H. Fin-
layson also collected specimens at Walthaljalkana, in the northern Everards, where
the plant is called “mingle” by the natives, The slightly perfumed flowers open
before sunset,

N. macrocalyx, Domin in Bibl. Bot., Heft 89 : 1,147 (1929) is a synonym
of N, excelsior, which was published by me in 1926. The type of N. macrocalyx
was collected by R. Ielms in the Birksgate Range, S.A., in 1891, and a co-type,
which agrees exactly with N. excelsior, is in the Tate Herbarium.

ScROPHULARIACEAE.

Peplidium maritimum (L.f.) Wettst. (1891). This species, distinguished
from P. Muelleri chiefly by its sessile or subsessile flowers and fruits, was
recorded by Tate for Central Australia, but had not been found in our State until

157

it was collected near the Abminga Creek, August 6, 1932, by Prof. J. B. Cleland.
It also inhabits North Australia, Queensland, northern New South Wales, Egypt,
and India. Synonyms :—Hedyotis maritima, L. . Suppl. 119 (1781); Peplidium
humifusum, Delile, Fl. aegypt. illustr. 148 (1813).

MvyororacEAE,

Eremophila Batti F. v. M. n. var, major, Variat foliis floribusque majoribus
quam in typo. Folia usque 2 cm. longa; calyx circa 12 mm. longus; corolla 30 mm.
longa.

Finke River, C.A., August, 1931; coll. J. B. Cleland.

Eremophila Willsii, F. v. M. var integrifolia, Ewart, Fl. N. Terr. 254 (1917).
On granite hills at Ernabella, Musgrave Ranges, January, 1933, H. H. Finlayson.
“Straggling shrub 60 cm.-lm. high; flowers pale-blue.” All the leaves on the
2 specimens are entire ; the sepals are about 10 mm. long the corolla under 20 mm.
and the peduncles 3-4 mm. long.

RUBIACEAE,

Messrs. H. K, A. Shaw and W. B. Turrill revised the Australian Asperulas
in the Kew Bulletin of 1928, replacing Galium geminifolium, F. v. M. by a new
name :—

Asperula gemella, Shaw et Turrill. Flaccid plant; leaves in pairs, linear,
5-30 mm. long, glabrous, the margins more or less recurved, the interpetiolar
Stipules usually minute or absent, rarely leaflike; flowers in irregular cymes; male
corolla about 14 mm. long, the lobes more than 3 times as long as the tube;
female corolla about 14 mm. long, the lobes 4 times as long as the minute tube,
and spreading, so that the corolla appears rotate; fruit rugose, 2-3 mm. diam.

In swamps and floodwaters near rivers in South Australia, Victoria, New
South Wales and S.W. Queensland. It was originally described as Galium
geminifolium by Mueller in Trans. Vict. Inst., 1 : 147 (1855), and by Bentham,
Fl. Aust, 3: 445 (1866), and was illustrated (as Asperula geminifolia) in Key
Vict. Pl. t. 75 and Pl. Vict. t. 31. The true Asperula geminifolia, F. v. M. Fragm.
5: 147 (1866) ; Benth. Fl. Aust. 3 : 443 (1866), with the tube rather longer than
the corolla-lobes, is, as far as is known, confined to the eastern coast of Queensland.

Shaw and Turrill distinguish their new species 4. euryphylla from A. Gunnii,
Hook. f. chiefly by the fact that the leaves of euryphylla dry green, while those of
Gunnit dry black. They therefore transfer our Kangaroo Island plant from
A. Gunnii to A. euryphylla var tetraphylla, Shaw et Turrill. Our specimens have
the small ovate or elliptical leaves usually in 4’s, rarely in 3’s or 5’s, glabrous
except for short cilia on the margins and along the midrib below.

CAMPANULACEAE,

Isotoma petraca, F. v. M. Walthajalkana Soak, Everard Range; Ernabella
Waterhole, Musgrave Ranges. Found round soaks and more widely spread on
the sandhills, Mr. H. H. Finlayson reports that this plant is often fatal to camels
which eat it.

GOODENIACEAE.

Goodenia unilobata, J. M. Black. This species, hitherto only known by a
scrap in the Tate Herbarium, labelled “Ooldea,” without date or name of col-
lector, has been found by Prof. J. B. Cleland at Rumbalara, S. of Horseshoe Bend,
River Finke, C.A. Some particulars can, therefore, be added to the description in
Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51 : 383 (1927) and in Fl. S.A., 554. Stems several,
prostrate or ascending, 10-15 cm. long, pubescent in all their length or glabrous
near base; leaves usually irregularly, broadly and obtusely lobed towards the base

158

(the stem-leaves often conspicuously 1-lobed), minutely and distantly toothed in
upper part, rarely entire, the radical ones 3-4 cm. long, about 10 mm. broad,
tapering into a petiole 12-15 mm. long, all the leaves nearly glabrous except for
short cilia along the margin; peduncles always 1-flowered and rising from the
axils of the radical, as well as from those of the stem-leaves.

Near G. heterophylla, Sm., of Eastern Australia, but differs in the stem-
leaves often prominently 1-lobed, the long petioles of the radical leaves, the larger
corolla, the longer dissepiment and the arid habitat. The capsule and seeds have
not been seen.

COMPOSITAE.

*va axillaris, Pursh. This scabrous perennial, about 30 em. high, has estab-
lished itself in a vineyard near Sevenhills for about 8 years past. It belongs to the
tribe Heliantheae, subtribe Ambrostinae, and has racemes of small pedunculate
drooping heads, one in each of the upper axils. A native of North America, from
the Saskatchewan to New Mexico and California. This appears to be its first
record in Australia. I received an excellent specimen through Mr. Worsley C.
Johnston,

*Centaurca nigra, L. Knapweed. Encounter Bay, September, 1928, J. B.
Cleland. First record for South Australia; recorded for Victoria in 1925,—
Europe.

Pterocaulon sphacelatum (Labill.) Benth. et Hook. Witchellina, S.W. of
Marree. H. H. Finlayson reports that this plant is known as “Apple Bush” on
account of its pleasant odour of apple.

Dimorphocoma minutula, F. v. M. et Tate has been found by Prof. Cleland
at Curdiemurka, N. of Marree. It has hitherto only been collected in the Flinders
Range near Lake Torrens.

Minuria mtegerrima (DC.) Benth. and M. denticulata (DC.) Benth. have

frequently, in at least some of the heads, female ligulate flowers only, the bisexual
disk-flowers being absent.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

Prate VIII.
Fig. 1. Jseilema actinostachys:—A, raceme of spikelets; B, grain.
Fig. 2. Isetlema membranacea:—C, raceme of spikelets; D, grain.

Tig. 3. Isetlema vaginiflora:—E, involucral bracts enclosing spathes and racemes; F,
raceme of spikelets; G, solitary glume of involucral spikelets; H, grain.

Fig. 4. Elytrophorus spicatus:—I, flowering glume and palea.
Fig 5. Aristida anthoxanthoides:—J, spikclet.

Fig. 6. Aristida latifolia var. minar:—K, spikelet; L, leaf.
Fig. 7. Aristida echinata:—M, spikelet; N, flowering glume.
Fig. 8. Aristida Browniana. 7

Fig. 9. Aristida biglandulosa:—O, spikelet; P, flowering glume; Q, base of panicle-
branch showing glands.

Fig. 10. Eragrostis elongata:—R, portion of panicle; S, spikelet; T, flowering glume;
U, palea; V’, grain.

Pate [X.

Fig. 1. Nicotiana ingulba;—A, limb of corolla; B, calyx; C, capsule.

Fig. 2. Bassia articulata,

Fig. 3. Frankenia granulata:—-D, one valve of capsula; E, cross section of leaf; F, leaf.

Fig. 4. Swainsona uniflora:—G, pistil; H, standard.

Fig. 5. Hibiscus crassicalyx:—tI, flower; J, imbricate petals and large base of same;
K, pistil. :

Fig. 6. Eriachne Isingiana:—L, back of flowering glume; M, palea and grain; N

spikelet.

NEW AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA.
BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S.

Summary

Head grey-whitish; face brownish; fillet white. Palpi under 1; brown-whitish. Antennae whitish.
Thorax dull bluish-green. Abdomen dull bluish-green ; apex whitish ; underside pale grey, Legs
pale fuscous ; posterior pair whitish. Forewings triangular, costa moderately arched, apex pointed,
termen nearly straight, moderately oblique; dull bluish-green with white markings; costal edge grey
throughout ; antemedian line from "; costa to 4/< dorsum, slightly curved outwards, slender,
indistinct towards costa ; postmedian from 7/3 costa to */g dorsum, stronger, slightly outwardly
curved, becoming sinuate towards dorsum ; cilia pale grey. Hindwings with termen strongly
rounded ; as forewings but lines more approximated.

159

NEW AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA.
By A. Jerrerts Turner, M.D., F.E.S.
[Read October 12, 1933.]
Family LARENTIADAE.

Poecilasthena cisseres, n. sp.
KigonpyS, ivy-green.

9,28 mm, Head grey-whitish; face brownish; fillet white. Palpi under 1;
brown-whitish. Antennae whitish. Thorax dull bluish-green. Abdomen dull
bluish-green; apex whitish; underside pale grey, Legs pale fuscous; posterior
pair whitish. Forewings triangular, costa moderately arched, apex pointed,
termen nearly straight, moderately oblique; dull bluish-green with white mark-
ings; costal edge grey throughout; antemedian line from 4 costa to 3 dorsum,
slightly curved outwards, slender, indistinct towards costa; postmedian from 4
costa to § dorsum, stronger, slightly outwardly curved, becoming sinuate towards
dorsum; cilia pale grey. Hindwings with termen strongly rounded; as forewings
but lines more approximated.

Very distinct, but nearest P. euphylla Meyr.

Victoria: Moe, in February; one specimen.

Family OENOCHROMIDAE.,

Taxeotis limbosa, n. sp.
limbosus, fringed.

@, 22mm. Head and thorax dark grey. Palpi 2; pale ferruginous-brown
with a sharply defined white basal area. Antennae fuscous. Abdomen and legs
fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa straight, apex rectangular, termen almost
straight, scarcely oblique, crenulate; dark grey slightly tinged with brownish;
some whitish costal strigulae; fuscous dots on costa at 4 and #; a brownish discal
dot slightly beyond middle; a subterminal series of blackish streaks on veins
ending in terminal dots, each interrupted by a white dot; a very fine blackish
terminal line; cilia grey sprinkled with fuscous, apices and a postmedian line grey-
whitish. Hindwings with termen gently rounded, crenulate; dark grey, a terminal
series of dark fuscous dots; cilia as forewings.

Very distinct but probably nearest 7. exsectaria Wk.

Western Australia: Perth; one specimen received from Mr. W. H. Matthews.

Tapinogyna oxypeuces, n. sp.
éguTrevkys, sharp-pointed.

8, 30-35 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen grey. Palpi slightly over 1;
dark fuscous. Antennae grey; pectinations in male 3. Legs fuscous. Forewings
triangular, costa slightly arched, apex acute, termen straight, slightly oblique;
grey with a few fuscous scales; lines fuscous, variably developed; antemedian
from beneath $ costa to 4 dorsum, slightly curved, often obsolete; postmedian
from beneath % costa to # dorsum, slightly sinuate, pale-edged posteriorly; it may
be obsolete leaving only a pale line; a pale dentate subterminal line immediately
preceded by a series of fuscous dots; a dark fuscous discal dot beneath midcosta;

160

an interrupted terminal line; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen gently rounded ;
as forewings but without antemedian line.

2,35 mm. Similar but wings darker and all markings obsolete.

Structurally a Tapinogyna, this species looks like a Nearcha, It is larger
than T. perichroa Low., the sexes of equal size, and the apex of the forewings
much more acute. In both sexes 6 and 7 of hindwings are separate, 7 arising
before angle.

Queensland: Milmerran, in September; four specimens.

Family SYNTOMIDAE.

Eressa stenothyris, n. sp.
orevofupis, narrowly transparent.

3,28 mm. Head orange. Palpi fuscous. Antennae dark fuscous; pectina-
tions in male 14. Thorax fuscous with anterior and posterior orange spots.
Abdomen orange, bases of segments fuscous. Legs dark fuscous; posterior pair
pale ochreous, Forewings broadly triangular, costa straight to near apex; apex
rounded. termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; fuscous with pale ochreous
spots; a sub-basal spot at 4 with a long, narrow posterior process; two median
spots placed transversely, the lower smaller; a subcostal spot at 3; twin spots
placed transversely before midtermen; cilia fuscous. Hindwings moderate,
emarginate beyond tornus; fuscous; a long, narrow spindle devoid of scales,
narrowly edged with ochreous on anal vein; a pale ochreous sub-basal dot; a
small subapical spot with a dot just beneath; cilia fuscous.

Queensland: Yeppoon, in December; one specimen received from Mr. E. J.
Dumigan.

Family NOCTUIDAE.

Gen, Hedymiges, nov.
Houpeyys, sweetly blended,

I substitute this name for Cycloprora (Turn., P.L.S.N.S., 1931, p. 338),
which I had previously used in this family in a different sense. Type H. aridoxa
Turn. The type of Cycloprora is C. nodyna Turn.

Cycloprora symprepes, n. sp.
cuprperys, decorous.

?, 38 mm. Head white; a blackish dot between antennae, and a blackish
transverse line across middle of face. Palpi 14; white, second joint except apex
blackish. Thorax white; lateral and posterior margins blackish. Abdomen white
sprinkled with fuscous, appearing pale grey. Iegs blackish with white rings.
Forewings elongate-triangular, costa slightly arched, apex rectangular, termen
straight, not oblique, rounded beneath; white with fuscous irroration, appearing
grey ; markings blackish; two slender transverse lines from costa near base, suc-
ceeded by a small costal blotch; a round white sub-basal dorsal spot, containing
a blackish dot before middle; a slender dentate transverse line at 4; orbictular a
small circular ring slenderly outlined; reniform larger, broadly bilobed; between
these a suffused median line bent outwards in middle; two dentate lines follow
reniform; a white terminal band containing three blackish spots and a fine broken
dentate line; cilia blackish with white bars. Tlindwings with termen wavy;
fuscous, paler towards base; a curved dentate postmedian line; two whitish tornal
spots; cilia white with fuscous bars.

Queensland: Yeppoon, in December; one specimen received from Mr. E. J.
Dumigan.

161

Namangana fulvescens, n. Sp.
fulvescens, partly yellowish-brown.

8, 36-39 mm. Head fuscous-brown. Palpi 1; fuscous-brown. Antennae
grey; ciliations in male minute. Thorax fuscous; anterior and posterior crests
whitish. Abdomen brown. Legs brown; tarsi fuscous with whitish rings. Fore-
wings elongate-triangular, Gosta almost straight, apex rectangular, termen
strongly rounded, crenulate; dark fuscous; orbicular obscurely ringed; reniform
pale outlined with blackish; between them a blackish suffusion; postmedian
line double, slender, wavy, strongly angled above middle; a blackish triangular
subapical costal spot containing two pale marginal dots; terminal area whitish-
grey with some grey suffusion; within this a short series of fuscous dots from
dorsum; cilia fuscous, apices partly whitish. Hindwings with a termen rounded,
wavy; pale orange-brown; a broad fuscous terminal band; cilia as forewings.

Queensland: Yeppoon, in December ; two specimens received from Mr. E. J.
Dumigan.

Gen. AMPHIPYRA Ochs,

Peripyra Hmps. is not, I think, distinguishable from this genus.

Amphopyra rubripuncta, n. sp.
rubripunctus, with red dots.

é, 42mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi fuscous; terminal joint and
apex of second joint whitish. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 4. Abdomen
fuscous; apices of tuft whitish. Legs fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular,
costa straight to near apex, apex rounded, termen rounded, slightly oblique; grey
with dark fuscous markings and red dots; three transverse striae from costa near
base, the middle one ending in a red dot; antemedian line strongly dentate, from
x costa to mid-dorsum; orbicular and reniform small, dark fuscous with red
centre, an additional similar spot posterior to reniform; postmedian line double,
finely dentate, outwardly curved from 3 costa, below middle, more strongly dentate
to $ dorsum; a subterminal shade, posterior margin sharply defined with minute
red dots; a terminal series of dark fuscous dots; cilia grey. Hindwings with
termen rounded, slightly waved; pale fuscous; cilia pale fuscous.

South Australia: Mount Lofty (1,500 feet), in February; one specimen.

Araeoptera imbecilla, n. sp.

imbecillus, weak.

é, 10mm. Head, thorax and antennae white. Palpi fuscous. Forewings
elongate-triangular, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded,
strongly oblique; white with some fuscous suffusion towards apex; a costal dot
at $; a median dark fuscous fascia from midcosta, obsolete towards dorsum ;
some terminal dark fuscous dots; cilia white with a few fuscous points. Hind-
wings triangular, apex pointed, termen straight; white with some fuscous
suffusion ; a blackish discal dot before middle, and another on mid-dorsum; cilia
as forewings.

North Queensland: Babinda, near Innisfail, in September, one specimen.

Eublemma amphidasys, n. sp.
éupidacvs, fringed all round.

?,16mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous. Palpi 14; ochreous. Antennae
grey. Abdomen dark fuscous; apex and underside ochreous, Legs fuscous;
posterior pair mostly pale ochreous. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight,

162

apex subrectangular, termen rounded, scarcely oblique; purple-fuscous with
broadly suffused transverse lines partly confluent; five minute ochreous—white
costal dots between middle and apex; cilia ochreous-white with a median fuscous
bar. Hindwings with termen rounded; fuscous; cilia ochreous-white.

Nearest E. iophaénna Turn.
Queensland: Brisbane, in January; one specimen.

Oruza megalospila, n. sp.
peyaAcaTiA0s, large-spotted.

@, 26mm. Head, palpi, antennae, thorax, abdomen, and legs grey. Fore-
wings elongate-triangular, costa almost straight, apex obtusely pointed, termen
gently rounded, moderately oblique; grey; a fuscous sub-dorsal dot near base;
two or three similar dots in disc at $; a small fuscous spot at 4 representing
orbicular; reniform oval, fuscous; just posterior to reniform a large circular
ferruginous spot edged with fuscous; a suffused fuscous spot between this and
costa; another similar on dorsum before tornus; a series of dark fuscous dots
near termen; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded; grey; two
fine median lines angled posteriorly in middle; a subterminal series of dark
fuscous dots; submarginal dots and cilia as forewings.

North Queensland: Kuranda, in March; one specimen received from Mr.
F. P. Dodd.
Stictoptera aequisecta, n. sp.

aequisectus, equally divided.

6, 50 mm. Head ochreous-whitish. Palpi grey, anterior surface brown.
Antennae grey; a fan-shaped internal tuft of scales on basal joint; ciliations in
male 4. Thorax with high erect tufts of scales from inner surfaces of patagia
meeting in middle line, and a small posterior tuft; grey-brown, anteriorly
ochreous-whitish. Abdomen pale grey, posteriorly darker. Legs grey-brown;
posterior pair mostly ochreous-whitish. Forewings narrow, only slightly dilated,
costa almost straight, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, strongly oblique,
crenulate; pale grey suffused with brown on costa before middle, and more
broadly in tornal area; two irregularly crenulate transverse lines at 4; orbicular
circular, pale with fuscous centre, posteriorly edged with blackish; claviform a
blackish V-shaped mark with apex posterior; a blackish line from midcosta to 3
dorsum; very slightly waved; reniform broad, pale with fuscous centre and edged
with blackish except beneath; postmedian line double, from % costa outwardly
curved and then inwardly to before tornus, three blackish spots on its outer edge
below middle; a pale dentate subterminal line; a brownish subapical costal spot
containing two blackish streaks; three blackish streaks before subterminal below
middle; a fine blackish line from subterminal to termen beneath apex, and others
similar between veins; cilia pale grey. Hindwings ample, termen rounded,
bisinuate; without scales and translucent, except veins and a terminal band not
reaching tornus, which are blackish ; cilia whitish.

Queensland: Yeppoon, in December ; one specimen received from Mr. E. J.
Dumigan.
Gen. Cryphimaea, nov.
xpudysatos, hidden.

Tongue present. Palpi porrect; second joint broadly dilated, laterally com-
pressed; terminal joint very short, obtuse. Abdomen with dorsal tufts on first
three segments. Forewings without areole, 2 from %, 3 from before angle, 4 and 5
approximated at origin, 6 from upper angle, 7 and 8 stalked, 9 and 10 absent.

163

Hindwings with 2 from %, 3 and 4 coincident, 5 well separate, 6 and 7 stalked,
12 anastomosing with cell to 4.
Nearest Microthripa, distinguished by the loss of two veins in the forewing.

Cryphimaea poliophasma, n. sp.

mrokwopacpa, a grey phantom.

¢, 20 mm. Tlead grey-whitish. Palpi 3; pale grey. Antennae pale grey.
Thorax grey; patagia grey-whitish with a small anterior median brownish spot.
Abdomen grey. J.egs fuscous; posterior pair pale grey. Forewings suboblong,
costa strongly arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen rounded, not oblique;
pale grey; markings fuscous, obscure; a suffused irregular line from +4 costa to
4 dorsum; a slender sinuate line from # costa to 3 dorsum; an imperfect dentate
subterminal line; cilia pale grey. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

Queensland: Yeppoon, in December; one specimen received from Mr. E. J.
Dumigan.

Gen. Dumigania, nov.

Tongue strong. Palpi short, ascending, not reaching vertex. Thorax with
a posterior crest. Abdomen with a crest on basal segment. Forewings with a
strong tooth of scales on tornus; 2 from 3, 3 from angle, 4 and 5 well separate,
6 from upper angle, areole very small, 7, 8, 9 stalked from areole, 10 separate.
Hindwings with 2 from 3, 3 and 4 approximated from angle, 5 well separate,
strongly devcloped, curved towards 4 near base, 6 and 7 connate, 12 anastomosing
shortly with cell at 4.

I have much pleasure in dedicating this genus to its discoverer. Although
the male is unknown, it is probably one of the Acontianae.

Dumigania iochlora, n. sp.

ioxAwpos, purple-green.

9, 32 mm. Head reddish-purple. Palpi 1; fuscous. Antennae grey.
Thorax reddish-purple. Abdomen pale grey; basal crest purple. Legs dark
fuscous with whitish rings; posterior pair mostly whitish. Forewings triangular,
costa straight to 2, thence bisinuate, apex round-pointed, termen angled on vein 4,.
slightly crenulate; reddish-purple; base and costa to middle suffused with white;
costa with some dark fuscous irroration before middle; a fine blackish line from
2 costa to # dorsum; acutely angled outwards on fold; a similar line from ¢ costa,
gently curved inwards to fold, where it is connected to the antemedian line, thence
outwardly curved to # dorsum; a white terminal band, edged anteriorly with
grey-green suffusion; a grey-green terminal line; cilia fuscous, apices white.
Hindwings with termen rounded, bisinuate; whitish, towards termen grey; a fine
fuscous postmedian line; cilia whitish with several fuscous bars.

Queensland: Mount Tambourine, in March; one specimen received from
Mr. E. J. Dumigan.

Plusia didymospila, n. sp.
didupoomAos, twin-spotted.

g, 34 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax fuscous-brown. Antennae fuscous.
Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular with a strong
scale-tuft at tornus, costa slightly arched, apex pointed, termen rounded, slightly
oblique; grey partly suffused with fuscous-brown; a short pinkish-white
interrupted sub-basal transverse line; a similar line from 4 costa to + dorsum,
slightly curved outwards; a pale dentate line from % costa to # dorsum, toothed
inwards on fold; orbicular obsolete ; reniform indistinctly darker, with two silvery
dots, one on anterior and one on posterior margin below middle; an oblique oval

164

silvery spot immediately after midpoint of antemedian line, and a similar spot
below and posterior, nearly touching postmedian line on fold; a subterminal
dark shade, well defined posteriorly, with a large posterior tooth beneath costa; a
dark terminal lunule on midtermen and three smaller lunules above it; cilia grey,
tornal tuft fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded, slightly wavy; grey, paler
towards base; cilia grey with a dark sub-basal line,

North Queensland: Kuranda; one specimen received from Mr. F. P, Dodd.

Nyctipao phaea, n. sp.
gatos, dusky.

$, 2, 104-146 mm. Head, thorax, abdomen, and legs fuscous. Palpi with
second joint scarcely reaching vertex, terminal joint $;fuscous. Antennae fuscous ;
ciliations in male minute, bristles 4. Forewings triangular, broader in female,
costa slightly arched, more strongly towards apex, termen nearly straight, scarcely
oblique, strongly crenulate; fuscous; a darker sub-basal line, in female gently
rounded, in male strongly waved; a large round antemedian ocellus edged by a
dark fuscous. line except on costal side, outside this a pale line on lower and outer
side, running to midcosta, sometimes white as it approaches costa; ocellus con-
tains on its inner side a brown blackish-edged lunate area with a bidentate process
below middle, lower part, of edge doubly defined by bluish-white scales; a dark
fuscous line from ocellus, commencing with a posterior tooth, in female wavy to
4 dorsum, in male straight to 4 dorsum; a line from 2 costa to 4 dorsum, ivearly
straight, being the anterior edge of a slightly paler area; a large triangular dark
fuscous subapical blotch containing a pale or white subapical spot; from this blotch
a strongly crenate line to ? dorsum, interrupted in middle, dark fuscous edged
anteriorly with a narrow pale or white line; a small dark fuscous blotch opposite
the gap in postmedian line, containing a small posterior pale or white spot; cilia
fuscous. Hindwings as forewings but without sub-basal line. Underside with
posterior white marks larger and better defined.

Nearest N. leucotaenia Clerck, but without its white fascia.

North Queensland: Cairns; Palm Island, in June; Ingham, in April; five
specimens.
ATTATHA REGALIS Moore,

Proc. Zool. Soc., 1872, p. 575, Lep. Ceyl. iii., pl. 212, fig. 4. Hmps, Lep, Phal,
xiii, p, 8.

@, 46 mm. Head pale ochreous-grey, pinkish-tinged; upper half of face
blackish. Palpi blackish; lower surface and base of second joint reddish.
Antennae grey. Thorax pale ochreous grey with anterior, median, and posterior
blackish lines. Abdomen otange-brown; beneath reddish. Legs blackish; coxae
and posterior tibiae red. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed,
termen straight, not oblique, rounded beneath; pale ochreous-grey with blackish
markings; a very short median streak from base; a dorsal streak from near base
to beyond middle; a triangular median costal blotch with a long oblique process
towards tornus; a triangular subapical costal blotch; two terminal spots below
middle; a suffused reddish tornal spot; cilia pale ochreous-grey. Hindwings with
termen rounded; bright red; several minute fuscous terminal dots; cilia reddish-
grey. Underside reddish with a sutfused oblique median mark on forewing, and
a series of terminal dots on hindwing, blackish,

North Queensland: Banks Island (Australian Museum).

Queensland: Yeppoon, in December; one specimen received from Mr, E. J.
Dumigan.

165

Erceia spilophracta, n. sp.
omAogpaxros, with spotted edge.

8, 38-43 mm. Head and thorax fuscous with a few whitish points. Palpi
ascending, appressed to face; second joint rough on anterior edge only, reaching
vertex; terminal joint %, stout, obtuse; fuscous, apices of second and terminal
joints whitish, Antennae fuscous; in male bipectinate, pectinations slender, 14,
each with a long terminal bristle. Abdomen and legs fuscous. Forewings.
triangular, costa almost straight, apex rectangular, termen rounded, not oblique;
fuscous; markings pale ferruginous; a wavy transverse line at $+; orbicular and
reniform obscurely indicated; a whitish spot on % costa, from which proceeds a
sinuate line of dots to a spot on # dorsum; a faint subterminal line; a series of
terminal dots on veins; cilia fuscous; Hindwings as forewings but without sub-
basal line.

In the type the areole has been lost by the failure of the basal part of vein 9
to chitinise, leaving 10 separate and 7, 8, 9 stalked. In a second example the
structure is that typical of the genus, a small areole from the apex of which
8, 9, 10 arise by a common stalk, 7 being connate with them.

Queensland: Yeppoon, in December; Brisbane, in January; two specimens.

Gen. Brachycyttara, nov.
Bpaxveutrapos, with short cell.

Tongue strong. Palpi ascending, not reaching vertex; second joint densely
hairy; terminal joint moderate, smooth, obtuse. Antennae of male with tufts of
short cilia. Head with loose-haired crest on vertex. Thorax with rounded
anterior but no posterior crest. Abdomen with well-developed crests on first three
segments. Femora and tibiae densely hairy. Forewings with normal neuration.
Hindwings with cell short (4) ; 3 and 4 short-stalked, 5 well developed from near
above angle (4), 6 and 7 connate, 12 anastomosing with cell near base.

Brachycyttara crypsipyrrha, n. sp.
Kpufuruppos, with hidden red.

é,40 mm. Head and thorax fuscous with a few whitish hairs. Palpi with
terminal joint %; fuscous sprinkled with whitish. Antennae whitish-brown; cilia-
tions in male #7. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous with some whitish hairs. Fore-
wings elongate-triangular, costa almost straight but slightly sinuate, apex pointed,
termen long, moderately rounded, wavy, oblique; fuscous; several minute dots
ferruginous-red, one in middle near base, one at and another beneath end of cell,,
fourth and fifth above and below middle preceding postmedian line; ill-defined
antemedian and median dark fuscous transverse lines; stigmata obsolete; post-
median line double, finely waved, outwardly curved, from } costa to 2 dorsum,
edged posteriorly by a pale line; a fine pale dentate subterminal line; fine dark
fuscous submarginal and terminal lines; cilia fuscous-whitish with dark median
and terminal lines. Hindwings with termen rounded, crenulate, whitish; towards
termen sprinkled with fuscous, especially on veins; a fuscous terminal line ; cilia.
whitish with fuscous bars.

New South Wales: Bourke (Helms); two specimens received from Mr.
G. M. Goldfinch, who has the type.

Fodina miranda, n. sp.
mirandus, wonderful.
2,45 mm. Head brown; fillet whitish. Palpi 35; second joint red sprinkled
with fuscous on outer surface; terminal joint 3; fuscous, apex whitish. Antennae

166

grey. Thorax brown with antemedian and postmedian whitish transverse lines.
Abdomen grey-brown. Legs reddish; tarsi and anterior tibiae pale {uscous.
Forewings triangular, costa slightly arched, more strongly towards apex, apex
rectangular, termen nearly straight, slightly oblique; grey; costal edge reddish; a
small subcostal subquadrate brown basal blotch; a large dark brown blotch extend-
ing on dorsum from near base to 4, its costal edged curved to 2, thence abruptly
angled towards dorsum, but soon deeply excavated, angled again sharply above
dorsum, edged in disc with whitish; a similar large apical blotch, but paler on
costa, on which it extends from % to apex, triangular, ending obtusely above
tornus, narrowly separated from termen; cilia grey, apices whitish. Hindwings
with termen rounded, crenulate; orange; a terminal band, straight-edged, broad
at apex, not reaching tornus; cilia fuscous, on tornus and dorsum orange.

North Queensland: Kuranda, in November; one specimen received from
Mr. F. P. Dodd.

Fodina pergrata, n. sp.
pergratus, delightful.

8,42 mm. Head reddish-white; face red. Palpi 24; red, outer surface
sprinkled with fuscous; terminal joint 3. Antennae pale grey; in male shortly
ciliated (4) with a pair of bristles (4) on each segment, Thorax reddish-brown ;
crest dark fuscous. Abdomen pale ochreous; tuft reddish-tinged. Legs reddish ;
tarsi pale fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight (apex broken),
termen rounded, not oblique; reddish-grey; an irregular dark fuscous blotch
commencing as a sub-basal fascia from dorsum, upper edge oblique to beneath 4
costa, longitudinal to near middle, bent at a right angle towards dorsum, then
curved outwards to a sharp-toothed projection, lower edge sinuate, ending on
4 dorsum, whitish-edged; a whitish line from beneath costa before apex to apex
of discal blotch, with a strong anterior tooth above middle, posteriorly edged with
dark fuscous, more broadly opposite supramedian tooth; terminal area greyer;
cilia grey. Hindwings with termen rounded; yellow ; a moderate fuscous terminal
band; cilia fuscous, on dorsum yellow.

North Queensland: Cape York, in October; one specimen received from
Mr. E. J. Dumigan.

‘a Pantydia dochmosticha, n. sp.

Soxpoorixos, with oblique line.

3, 56 mm. Head grey-brown. Palpi 1}, terminal joint 4; dark fuscous,
terminal joint grey-brown. Antennae grey-brown; in male minutely ciliated with
a pair of short bristles (3) on each segment. Thorax grey-brown; tegulae paler;
patagia dark fuscous. Abdomen grey-brown. Legs fuscous. Forewings elongate-
triangular, costa straight to near apex, apcx rectangular, termen rounded, slightly
oblique ; grey-brown with sparsely scattered dark fuscous scales; an oblique brown
line from % costa to mid-dorsum, becoming indistinct towards costa; three brown
dots, one above and two below middle, representing sttbterminal line; cilia grey-
brown. Hindwings with termen gently rounded; fuscous-brown with some dark
fuscous irroration towards dorsum and termen; cilia grey-brown.

North Queensland: Kuranda; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd,

Anomis microphrica, n. sp.
yexpoppixos, minutely rippled.
@, 32mm. Head and thorax pale reddish-grey. Palpi 14; whitish sprinkled
with reddish-grey. Antennae whitish-grey. Abdomen and legs pale grey. Fore-

wings elongate-triangular, costa straight almost to apex, apex subrectangular,
termen sinuate, scarcely oblique; pale reddish-grey with numerous very fine trans-

167

verse strigulae; a white discal dot beneath 4 costa, and another beyond middle
nearer mid-disc; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen rounded; pale reddish-

grey ; cilia pale grey.
North Australia: Darwin; one specimen received from Mr. G. F, Fill.

Gen. Baryphanes, nov.

Bapvpavys, heavy-looking.

Tongue strong. Palpi long, obliquely ascending; second joint thickened with
loose hairs; terminal joint short, porrect, obtuse. Thorax and abdomen without
crests. Femora and tibiae densely hairy. Forewings with 2 from 3, 3 from well
before angle, 4 from angle, 5 approximated, 6 from upper angle, areole long, 7 and
10 arising from it separately, 11 from about middle. Hindwings with 2 from
middle, 3 from well before angle, 4, 5 connate from angle, 6 and 7 approximated
from angle.

BARYPHANES NIPHOSEMA
Monoctenia wiphosema Low. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Aust., 1908, p. 114.

9,52 mm. Head and thorax pale reddish-brown. Palpi 3; grey; towards
base sprinkled with red. Antennae grey, towards base pale reddish. Abdomen
grey. Legs grey sprinkled with red. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly
straight, slightly sinuate, apex pointed, slightly produced, termen strongly rounded,
oblique; pale reddish-brown ; a fuscous sub-basal dot beneath costa; a small white
spot outlined with fuscous beneath 4 costa; a transversely oval grey spot outlined
with fuscous beneath midcosta; a faint wavy transverse line from # costa to +
dorsum; a parallel series of fuscous dots between this and termen; cilia reddish,
apices grey. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; cilia grey.

Western Australia: Perth; one specimen received from Mr. L. J. Newman.

AVITTA QUADRILINEA WIk.
Journ. Lin. Soc., vii., p. 171 (1864). Hmps., Moths, India, iii., p. 29.
Bocana quadrilinealis Moore, Proc. Zool, Soc., 1867, p. 88.

¢, 50mm, Head and thorax fuscous-brown. Palpi erect, exceding vertex,
second joint much thickened, slightly rough, terminal joint 3, smooth, obtusely
pointed; pale fuscous-brown. Antennae $; fuscous; in male with bilateral tufts
of short cilia (4) on each segment. Abdomen and legs fuscous. Forewings
elongate, suboblong, apex round-pointed, termen rounded, oblique; fuscous-
brown; four nearly straight oblique dark fuscous transverse lines; first from
1 costa to dorsum near base; second from midcosta to # dorsum; third from 2
costa to 2 dorsum; fourth from costa near apex to dorsum before tornus; a
slender fuscous irregularly dentate subterminal line; cilia fuscous with a pale
basal line. Hindwings with termen strongly rounded; fuscous; cilia fuscous,
apices paler.

North Queensland: Kuranda; one specimen received from Mr. F. P. Dodd.

Gen. Orthozancla, nov.
épbofayxAos, with erect sickles.

Tongue strong. Palpi very long, ascending, appressed to face; second joint
exceeding vertex, thickened with smoothly appressed hairs, but with rough hairs
posteriorly towards apex ; terminal joint long, stout, obtusely pointed, with a small
posterior tuft at apex. Antennae in male bipectinate, pectinations long, not quite
reaching apex. Thorax and abdomen without crests. Forewings with 2 from %,

3 from angle, 4 and 5 separate, 6 from upper angle, areole present, from it 7

168

connate with stalk of 8, 9, 10 arising separately from areole, 11 from 3. Hind-
wings with cell about 2, 2 from #, 3 and 4 stalked from angle, 5 well developed
from above angle (4), 6 and 7 connate, 12 anastomosing with cell near base.

Orthozancla rhythmotypa, n. sp.
prOnorv7os, with symmetrical markings.

8,26 mm. Ilead, thorax, and abdomen fuscous. Palpi 34; second joint
much exceeding vertex, terminal joint 4; fuscous. Antennae fuscous; pectina-
tions in male 4, each ending in a long bristle, extreme apex simple. Legs fuscous.
Forewings triangular, costa bisinuate, apex very obtusely pointed, termen bowed
on vein 4; brownish-fuscous with some whitish irroration ; a small elongate
triangular white area on costa from middle to $; three darker transverse lines ;
antemedian from 4 costa obliquely outwards, interrupted by orbicular, with a’
small tooth beneath this, then inwardly oblique to 4 dorsum, edged anteriorly by
a pale line; median more suffused, oblique, passing beyond reniform, there
rounded inwards and oblique to } dorsum; postmedian from % costa, outwardly
oblique, traversing white area, then rounded inwards and sinuate to before tornus,
edged posteriorly by a pale line; orbicular small, circular, pale with brown centre;
reniform pale, small, lunate; a wavy subterminal line faintly indicated; cilia
fuscous, on costa before apex white. Hindwings subquadrate, termen rounded;
as forewings, but without first line; a fuscous discal dot at 4.

Queensland: Montville (1,500 feet), near ‘Nambour, in February; one speci-
men received from Mr. E. J. Dumigan.

Tamba grandis, n. Sp.
grandis, large.

?,48 mm. Head brown, face whitish. Palpi 3, erect, second joint exceed-
ing vertex, terminal joint 2, stout, obtuse, whitish-grey. Antennae grey. Thorax
pale grey; patagia brown. Abdomen whitish-grey with brown suffusion. Legs
brown ; posterior pair pale grey. Forewings triangular, costa straight except near
base and apex, termen angled on vein 4, concave above, oblique below, wavy;
brown with a few blackish scales; markings whitish-grey; a basal patch, its
posterior edge outwardly oblique from costa to a sharp tooth, thence inwardly
oblique, a moderately oblique fascia containing a brown costal spot and another
in disc before and beneath; anterior edge irregular from 4 costa to 4 dorsum,
posterior edge nearly straight from % costa to mid-dorsum; a small spot beyond
this below middle; a large roundish apical blotch; three small blackish spots
between this and tornus; cilia brown with a whitish basal line, on apical blotch
whitish-grey, Hindwings angled and toothed on vein 4, crenulate; colour and
cilia as forewings; a whitish-grey basal patch, posterior edge straight; a narrow
marginal blotch from tornus to mid-dorsum, containing a brown spot; a whitish
line from # costa to tornal blotch.

North Queensland: Kuranda; one specimen received from Mr, F. P. Dodd.

Adrapsa tapinostola, n. sp.
tarevootodos, plainly clothed.

é, 34 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen pale brownish-grey. Palpi
ochreous-whitish sprinkled with fuscous. Antennae pale grey; in male uni-
pectinate, pectinations short (4), slender, a pair of long bristles (4) from base
of each pectination. Forewings triangular, costa straight, apex pointed, termen
sinuate beneath apex, strongly bowed on vein 4; pale brownish-grey sparsely
sprinkled with fuscous ; markings fuscous; a wavy line from 4 costa to 4 dorsum;

169

another from costa beyond middle to dorsum before middle; a crenulate line from
3 costa to 2 dorsum, curved outwards beneath costa; a subterminal series of dots;
a terminal line; cilia fuscous, bases paler. Hindwings subquadrate, termen angled
on vein 4; as forewings but without antemedian line.

Queensland: Mount Tambourine, in March; one specimen received from
Mr. E. J. Dumigan. :
Hypenodes mesoscia, n. sp.

pecorxios, with median shade.

2,17 mm. Head and thorax whitish. Palpi 4; whitish with a few fuscous
scales. Antennae grey. Abdomen grey; apices of segments and tuft whitish.
Legs whitish sprinkled with fuscous; anterior and middle tarsi fuscous. Fore-
wings elongate-triangular, costa almost straight, apex acute, slightly produced,
termen strongly angled on vein 4, concave above angle, straight and oblique below;
whitish with some pale fuscous irroration and suffusion; three fuscous dots form-
ing an oblique sub-basal line; antemedian line oblique, wavy, indistinct, from
4 costa to 4 dorsum; a median shade, its anterior edge defined, straight, from
midcosta to 4 dorsum; postmedian from midcosta strongly curved outwards, then
straight to mid-dorsum; the area between this and median shade pale fuscous;
blackish dots on costa at 4, middle, and three between middle and apex; a blackish
dot in disc at 2 before postmedian line; a subterminal line of blackish dots; a
strong blackish median bar from subterminal line to termen and through cilia;
fine submarginal and terminal blackish lines; cilia grey-whitish with a postmedian
fuscous line. Hindwings with termen strongly toothed on veins 4 and 7; not
rounded; colour, marginal lines, and cilia as forewings; a narrow fuscous and
blackish bar from mid-dorsum, and a sinuate dotted line from 4 dorsum, both
ending about mid-disc.

North Queensland: Mackay, in August; one specimen.

HyPENA CAERULEALIS WI1k.
Cat. Brit. Mus., xxxiv., p. 1,142.

I am indebted to Miss A. E. Prout for pointing out that this is distinct from
H. masurialis Gn, In that species there is a marked difference between the sexes,
the male being larger and with the apices of the forewings more acute, The
females of the two species are very similar. H. caerulealis has a suffused whitish
subcostal streak running into the apex of the forewing, but this varies and may
be absent; also the postmedian line is more or less irregularly waved or rippled;
that in Hl. masurialts is almost straight, not rippled, and edged posteriorly by a
pale line. I am informed that the two species can be separated by their genitalia.

North Queensland: Cairns: Dunk Island; Nerberton. Queensland: Brisbane.

Family LIMACODIDAE.
DoRATIFERA OCHROPTILA Turn,

Through the kindness of Mr. Geo. Lyell I have seen four examples of this
species, two of each sex, expanding in the male 32-34 mm., in the female
42-44 mm., from Mount Guide Station 25 miles south of Mount Isa, North
Queensland. They were obtained by Mr. J. G. Mackellar from cup-shaped
cocoons similar to those of D. vulnerans attached to twigs. This is an interesting
discovery, and adds another species to those common to North-west Australia
and West Queensland. Species attached to the dry districts of the interior
frequently have a wide range.

Antennal pectinations in male 2, ceasing rather abruptly at 4.

170

Family PYRALIDAE.

Gen. Hypermeces, nov.

trepuneys, very long.

Tongue strong. Labial palpi rather long, porrect; second joint thickened
with appressed scales; terminal joint short, curved downwards. Maxillary palpi
obsolete. Forewings with 2 from 4, 3,4, 5, approximated from angle, 6 from upper
angle, 7, 8, 9, stalked, 10 from end of cell sey approximated to 9, 11 from #.
Hindwings with cell short (about 4), 2 from #, 3, 4, 5, approximated from angle,
6, 7, connate from upper angle, 7 anastomosing strongly with 12.

Hypermeces xanthochyta, n. sp.
gavoxvros, yellow-stained.

2,45 mm. Palpi 14; pale ochreous. Antennae fuscous, Thorax orange
with two anterior fuscous dots; tegulae with blackish basal and antemedian spots.
Abdomen ochreous with interrupted fuscous dorsal bars. Legs pale ochreous;
anterior pair mostly dark fuscous. Forewings narrow, elongate-triangular, costa
straight to %, thence arched, apex rounded, termen very obliquely rounded;
whitish partly suffused with yellow between veins; markings blackish; a basal
costal spot; three sub-basal spots arranged transversely ; an interrupted curved
transverse line at 4; a broad transverse median subcostal bar; a sinuate post-
median fascia-composed of broad interneural bars; a line of interneural dots
closely following; cilia whitish-yellow. Hindwings with termen gently rounded;
whitish suffused with yellow near termen and dorsum; a slight postmedian fuscous
mark; cilia as forewings.

North Queensland: Meringa, near Cairns, in December; one specimen. Type
in Coll. Lyell.

Epipaschia nephelodes, n. sp.
vepedwdys, cloudy.

¢, 32 mm. Head and thorax fuscous-brown mixed with whitish. Palpi
fuscous. Antennae fuscous; in male with a short, stout basal process reaching
mid-thorax, ciliations 1. Abdomen pale grey partly tinged with ferruginous.
Legs dark fuscous with whitish rings; posterior tibiae mostly whitish. Forewings
elongate-triangular, costa slightly arched, apex rectangular, termen slightly
rounded, not oblique; fuscous partly suffused with whitish; a basal suffusion; an
ill-defined dark antemedian fascia partly ferruginous, containing a blackish line
from # costa, angled inwards beneath costa, and sharply downwards in middle,
to mid-dorsum before tornus; a broad whitish suffusion beyond middle; a wavy
line edged with whitish posteriorly from 4 costa obliquely outwards, sharply
angled in middle, ending on dorsum before tornus; terminal area darker; a
terminal series of blackish dots; cilia white with fuscous bars, on tornus ferru-
ginous. Hindwings with termen gently rounded; pale fuscous; a faint whitish
subterminal line; cilia whitish.
Queensland: Yeppoon, in December; one specimen received from Mr, E. J.
Dumigan.
Tamily PY RAUSTIDAEL.
Noorda hemileuca, n. sp.
EptAevKos, half-white.

4,27 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi 2; blackish, sharply white beneath
towards base. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male minute. Abdomen white;
tuft fuscous above, white beneath. Legs white; anterior pair dark fuscous with
white rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight for #, arched before

171

apex, apex rounded, termen rounded, scarcely oblique; white; a costal line and
a broad terminal band, its anterior edged curved, fuscous; cilia fuscous. Hind-
wings white; a narrow fuscous terminal band not reaching tornus; cilia fuscous,
on tornus and dorsum white. ;

New South Wales: Acacia Plateau (3,000 feet), near Killarney (Queens-
land), in January; one specimen received from Mr. E, J. Dumigan.

Family COSSIDAE.
Dudgeona polyastra, n. sp.

moAvacrpos, many-starred.

3, 54 mm.; 2, 65 mm. Head brown; face pale yellow. Palpi brown;
anterior surface pale yellow. Antennae fuscous-brown, basal joint whitish;
unipectinate in both sexes, pectinations 14. Thorax with a posterior crest; brown
with a posterior pair of white dots, tegulae shining white. Abdomen orange-
brown. Legs brown with white and yellowish rings; posterior tibiae whitish-
yellow. Forewings elongate-oblong, costa slightly arched, more strongly in female,
apex rounded, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; brown with numerous
circular spots, some of which are shining white, others whitish with brown
strigulae; a costal series of five strigulated spots; a cluster of seven shining white
spots on dorsal % of basal third; a subapical cluster of shining white spots, six in
disc and six on termen, between these are numerous whitish spots, as also in costal
and basal areas; cilia brown with several pale yellow bars. Hindwings with
termen rounded, slightly sinuate ; fuscous-brown ; base and dorsum orange-brown ;
some paler spots near apex; cilia whitish.

Larger than D. actinias Turn., thoracic crest smaller, hindwings darker,
forewings with more numerous spots, and antennae unipectinate.

Queensland: Yeppoon, in December ; two specimens received from Mr, E. J.
Dumigan.

Family TORTRICIDAE.
ACROPOLITIS HEDISTA Turn.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1916, p. 504.

I took the type of this species 40 years ago in Brisbane and erroneously
referred it to the genus Catamacta, the thoracic crest being denuded. Mr. W. B.
Barnard took 7 examples in the Bunya Mountains in November, 1931. It is
probably nearest A. lichenica Turn.

TorTRIX EURYSTROPHA Turn.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1926, p. 135.
Tortrix hemiphoena Turn., Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1926, p. 126.
The former name has two months priority.
Queensland: National Park (3-3,500 feet), Tasmania; Russell Falls;
Zeehan.
Arotrophora neanthes, n. sp.

veavOys, freshly blooming.

3, 22 mm.; ¢@ 24 mm. Head ochreous-grey. Palpi 5; ochreous-grey.
Antennae in male dentate and very shortly ciliated; white sharply barred with
blackish, terminal half wholly dark fuscous. Thorax ochreous-grey tinged with
greenish. Abdomen grey; tuft reddish-brown. Legs fuscous; tibiae and tarsi
with whitish rings; posterior pair almost wholly whitish. Forewings broadly
triangular, costa slightly arched, apex subrectangular, termen straight, not oblique ;

172

grey-green, dorsal area more or less suffused with brown; a reddish-brown sub-
costal streak from base to apex, where it expands and is suffusedly produced
along termen to tornus; a fuscous-brown costal streak from base to 3; a scattered
sparse irroration of fugitive white scales, most abundant on costa, where they
form strigulae; cilia dark fuscous, bases and a spot beneath apex reddish-brown.
Hindwings broad, termen not sinuate; pale brown becoming grey towards base;
cilia pale brown, on tornus and dorsum grey.

Handsome and conspicuously distinct.

Queensland: National Park (25-3,000 feet), in February and March;
Bunya Mountains (3,500 feet), in March; four specimens,

Family EUCOSMIDAE.
EucoSMA PERPLEXA Turn.
Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1916, p. 526.

Sciaphila absconditana Whk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxviii, p. 351. Meyr. Proc.
Lin. Soc. N.S.W., 1911, p. 248, nec Laharpe (1860).

Argyroploce angustifascia Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1925, p. 58.

Queensland: Toowoomba; Bunya Mountains; Killarney; National Park.
New South Wales: Sydney.

Argyroploce microlychna, n. sp.
pixpodvyxvos, with tiny lights.

@,2Z mm. Head grey-brown. Palpi 24; dark fuscous, Antennae grey.
Thorax dark fuscous. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous, with ochreous-whitish
rings. Forewings suboblong, costa strongly arched, apex rectangular, termen
gently rounded, not oblique; dark fuscous; a series of whitish costal dots, of
which those in basal half give rise to short grey-metallic transverse streaks; in
disc are numerous shining white dots irregularly arranged, of these some are
larger, for instance one beneath costa at 4, two on fold towards base, and a spot
in disc at $; cilia fuscous barred with brown-whitish, Hindwings with termen
sinuate; grey; cilia grey-whitish with basal and median grey lines.

Queensland: National Park (4,000 feet), in March; one specimen. Type in
Coll. Barnard.
Family COSMOPTERYGIDAE,

Labdia chalcoplecta, n. sp.
xadxomAektos, brassy.

9, 12mm. Head and thorax brown-brassy ; face whitish, Palpi blackish;
second joint with a broad whitish ring before apex. Antennae dark fuscous with
five whitish rings, two close together at 2, two equally spaced between these and
apex, fifth just before apex. Abdomen blackish; apices of segments and under-
side whitish. Legs whitish with blackish rings. Forewings narrow, apex obtusely
pointed; brown-brassy; a very oblique short slender white streak from 4 costa;
a triangular white spot on midcosta, its apex prolonged to fold, edged anteriorly
with blackish; a white spot on 4 costa, outlined with blackish, connected by an
interrupted longitudinal blackish streak with apex; a similar dot above tornus; a
white apical dot; cilia grey, bases blackish, and also apices opposite apex of wing,
Hindwings narrowly lanceolate; grey; cilia 4, grey with brassy reflections.

The convergent white costal markings together with the peculiar dots in disc
should be sufficient for recognition.

Queensland: National Park (2,500 feet), in November ; one specimen,

173

Family GELECHIADAE.

Apatetris dinota, n. sp.
éwuros, rounded.

, 13 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi with second joint somewhat
dilated with loose scales towards apex, terminal joint about 4; white sprinkled
with fuscous except apices of joints. Antennae whitish. Abdomen grey-whitish.
Legs whitish sprinkled with fuscous; anterior pair mostly fuscous. Forewings
narrow, costa strongly arched, more so towards apex, apex acute, termen and
dorsum continuous, sinuate; white with fine scanty fuscous irroration; markings
dark fuscous; subcostal dots at 4 and 2; a spot above mid-dorsum, obliquely
placed, followed by a median dot; a subapical dot; cilia whitish with a few fuscous

oints. Hindwings narrow, emargination obtuse, apical process about 4; whitish ;
cilia 4, whitish.

Queensland: National Park (2,500 feet), in open forest in November; one
specimen.

Aristotelia ochrostephana, n. sp.

xpoorepavos, with pale crown.

$,9mm, Head grey-whitish. Palpi grey-whitish ; second joint except apex,
and a subapical ring on terminal joint, dark fuscous. Antennae fuscous. Thorax
and abdomen grey. Legs fuscous with whitish rings. Forewings narrow, costa
slightly arched, apex pointed, termen and dorsum continuous; 7 and 8 out of 6;
grey with dark fuscous irroration and markings; costal dots at § and 4; a fine
streak on fold from near base, just continuous with a broad oblique streak from
fold nearly to midcosta; a discal dot in middle touching this streak, and another
discal dot a 3; apical area mostly dark fuscous; cilia whitish-ochreous, with dark
fuscous basal bars. Hindwings narrow, apical process short, acute; pale, grey;
cilia 3, pale grey.

Near A furtiva Meyr. The head is paler than in that species, and the mark-
ing of forewings different.

Queensland: National Park (3,500 feet), in December; one specimen.

Gen. Leurozancla, nov.
Aevpo€ayxAos, with smooth sickles.

Tongue present. Palpi long, slender, smooth-scaled ; second joint exceeding
base of antennae, only slightly thickened ; terminal joint longer than second, very
slender, acute. Antennae with basal joint long and somewhat thickened towards
apex, without pecten; in male simple. Forewings broadly lanceolate; 2 from #
widely separate from 3, which is from near angle, 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to costa.
Hindwings ovate-lanceolate ; 2 from near angle, 3 and 4 stalked, 5, 6, 7, separate,
equidistant, parallel.

Allied to Phthorimaea, but with different palpi.

Leurozancla humilis, n. sp.

humilis, humble, insignificant.

$, 20 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax dark fuscous. Antennae ochreous-
whitish; basal joint fuscous on dorsum. Abdomen fuscous; tuft pale ochreous.
Legs fuscous with obscure whitish rings. Forewings broadly lanceolate, apex
obtusely pointed; fuscous; an obscure darker discal dot at 3; cilia ochreous-grey-
whitish, on apex fuscous. Hindwings ovate-lanceolate, termen slightly sinuate ;
pale grey, towards base whitish; cilia 1, ochreous-whitish, on apex and costa
tinged with grey.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in November; one specimen.

174

Gen. Tanycyttara, nov.
ravuxuTrapos, long-celled.

Tongue present. Palpi moderately long, recurved ascending, slender, smooth ;
second joint not reaching base of antennae; terminal joint 4. Antennae about 4;
without pecten; in male simple. Forewings with 2 and 3 stalked from angle,
connate with 4, 6 to apex, 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to costa. Hindwings with cell very
long (3), 3 and 4 separate, 5 curved from below middle, 6 and 7 connate, 12
anastomosing at a point with cell at 4.

‘Tanycyttara xanthomochla, n. sp.
favOopoxdos, yellow-barred.

8,15 mm. Head and thorax brassy-fuscous. Palpi and antennae fuscous.
Abdomen grey. Legs pale fuscous; posterior pair grey-whitish. Forewings
narrow, costa slightly arched, apex rounded, termen very oblique; pale yellow;
dorsal area suffused with fuscous;a fuscous streak from base along fold to tornus ;
a fuscous costal streak from base to middle, its apex connected by an oblique
streak with a dark fuscous V-shaped mark resting on tornus; a broad dark
fuscous marginal line on posterior 4 of costa and tornus; cilia dark fuscous, on
costa and apex pale yellow. Hindwings elongate-ovate, termen not sinuate; pale
grey ; cilia 4, pale grey.

Queensland: Crow’s Nest, near Toowoomba, in September ; one specimen.

Hemiarcha metableta, n. sp.
peraBAnros, variable.

@,18 mm. Head fuscous; sides of crown and face ochreous-whitish. Palpi
dark fuscous; apex and inner surface of second joint ochreous-whitish, Antennae
grey. Thorax fuscous; tegulae whitish-ochreous. Abdomen grey; tuft ochreous-
whitish. Legs fuscous with whitish rings; posterior pair mostly whitish, Fore-
wings posteriorly dilated, costa rather strongly arched, apex pointed, termen
obliquely rounded; whitish-ochreous suffused with grey and sprinkled with
fuscous; a pale ochreous costal streak throughout, broader towards base; blackish
costal dots at and near base, connected on costal edge; fuscous dots at base and
in disc beneath costal streak at 4, 4, and beyond middle, a plical dot between and
beneath the first two; a fuscous line on termen and fuscous dots on apical 2 of
costa; cilia fuscous-grey, with a postmedian ochreous-whitish line. Hindwings
14, termen scarcely sinuate; pale grey becoming whitish towards base; cilia
whitish with a pale grey basal line.

A second male example differs as follows:—Head and tegulae ochrcous-
brown. Forewings ochreous-brown with less grey suffusion; costal streak un-
defined; terminal line preceded by a darker line, between them four whitish-
ochreous spots; plical dot large and connected with second discal dot. Hindwings
and cilia pale grey. The two specimens are so different that I would not have
referred them to one species, if I had not taken both at the same place and nearly
at the same date.

Queensland: National Park (2,500 feet), in open forest in November; two
specimens.

Hemiarcha basipercna, n. sp.

Bavurepxvos, dark at the base.

4, 20 mm. Head brown-whitish. Palpi with second joint reaching base of
antennae, terminal joint 4, stout; fuscous. Antennae fuscous. Thorax fus-
cous; tegulae paler. Abdomen fuscous. Legs fuscous with whitish rings. Fore-

175

wings moderate, costa almost straight, apex rounded, termen rounded, slightly
oblique; pale brownish densely sprinkled with fuscous, more so in terminal area;
a dark fuscous basal fascia; stigmata fuscous, first discal at 4, obscure, plical
before it, second discal before %, more distinct; cilia pale fuscous, Hindwings
4, termen not sinuate; whitish; cilia whitish.

Queensland: Rockhampton, in October; one specimen.

Gen. Lophozancla, nov.
Aodofayxdos, with tufted sickles.

Tongue present. Palpi very long, ascending, recurved; second joint long,
thickened with appressed scales; terminal joint as long as second, moderately
stout, acute, with a tuft of scales on posterior surface extending from middle to
near apex. Antennae in male simple. Posterior tibiae with long hairs on dorsum ;
inner spurs twice as long as outer. Forewings with all veins present, 2 and 3
stalked, 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to costa. Hindwings broader than forewings; all veins
present, 3 and 4 connate, 5 approximated at origin, 6 and 7 widely separate
gradually diverging.

Lophozancla stenochorda, n. sp.

orevoxopdos, narrowly streaked.

&, 2, 19-21 mm. Head brown-whitish. Palpi brown-whitish sprinkled
with fuscous. Antennae brown-whitish. Thorax brown-whitish ; lateral streaks and
tegulae fuscous-brown. Abdomen whitish-grey; tuft whitish-ochreous. Legs
ochreous-whitish sprinkled, except posterior pair, with fuscous; anterior pair
except coxae fuscous. Forewings suboblong, costa gently arched, apex rounded,
termen obliquely rounded; brown-whitish sprinkled and suffused with fuscous-
brown; fuscous dots on costa at base, 4, middle, and three or four between this
and apex; a narrow fuscous-brown bar from base along fold to #; two suffused
fuscous-brown spots beneath costa beyond middle, and a third at apex, these may
be confluent; cilia brown-whitish, towards tornus with a fuscous median line,
on apex fuscous. Hindwings with termen slightly sinuate; pale grey; cilia whitish
with a fuscous median line not extending to tornus.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in December and January; four
specimens.

Gen. Oncerozancla, nov.

éyxepofayxAos, with swollen sickles.

Tongue present. Palpi long, recurved; second joint exceeding base of
antennae, thickened with appressed scales, slightly rough anteriorly; terminal joint
over 4, laterally compressed, swollen anteroposteriorly so as to be as broad as
second joint, anterior surface rough towards apex, which is obtusely pointed.
Antennae without pecten. Forewings with 2 and 3 stalked, 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to
costa. Hindwings 2, subquadrate ; 3 and 4 connate, 5 approximated to 4 at origin,
6 and 7 widely separate.

This and the preceding genus are derivatives of Protolechia.

Oncerozancla euopa, n. sp.
eiwzos, good-looking.
9, 24 mm. Head ochreous-whitish; sides of face fuscous. Palpi dark
fuscous ; apex and inner surface of second joint, and terminal joint except apex,
ochreous-whitish. Antennae grey becoming ochreous-whitish towards base.

Thorax ochreous-whitish with some fuscous and brownish scales towards
anterior margin. Abdomen whitish-ochreous; tuft except apex dark fuscous.

176

Legs ochreous-whitish irrorated, and tibiae banded with dark fuscous; anterior
pair wholly dark fuscous except for narrow tibial and tarsal whitish rings. Fore-
wings narrow, elongate, posteriorly slightly dilated, costa slightly arched, apex
rounded-rectangular, termen obliquely rounded ; ochreous-whitish largely suffused
with brown, which forms a costal streak from base to #, a large suffused post-
median blotch, and a slighter dorsal suffusion; five dark fuscous costal dots, the
first two elongate; a subcostal mark in dise below the first; a large quadrangular
spot in disc at +, and another triangular at apex, fuscous; an interrupted whitish
terminal line; a fuscous dorsal mark at 4, followed by dots before and on tornus ;
cilia grey with an imperfect fuscous median line. Hindwings whitish-ochreous ;
a large fuscous apical blotch produced along termen; cilia whitish-ochreous, a
fuscous median line not reaching tornus.
Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in November; one specimen.

Protolechia trichroma, n. sp.
tptxpwos, three-coloured.

2,15 mm. Head and thorax reddish. Palpi with terminal joint as long as
second ; whitish-ochreous, external surface of second and anterior edge of terminal
joint fuscous. Antennae pale reddish annulated with blackish. Abdomen fus-
cous; underside pale ochreous. Legs fuscous with pale ochreous rings; posterior
pair wholly pale ochreous. Forewings elongate, suboblong, costa rather strongly
arched, apex rectangular, termen, nearly straight, not oblique; 2 and 3 stalked;
reddish with some tendency to darker red streaks on veins; a whitish terminal
line edged anteriorly and posteriorly with fuscous; cilia reddish. Hindwings 14;
pale yellow; apical half grey; cilia grey, on tornus and dorsum pale yellow.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in March; one specimen.

Protolechia polioxysta, n. sp.
modko£veros, polished grey.

¢,18mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi with second joint much exceeding
base of antennae, terminal joint 3, slender; fuscous, apex of second joint, base
and extreme apex of terminal joint, whitish. Antennae dark grey. Abdomen
grey. Legs fuscous; posterior tibiae mostly whitish. Forewings narrow, costa
slightly arched, apex subrectangular, termen slightly rounded, scarcely oblique;
2 and 3 stalked; pale shining grey with fuscous irroration and markings; costal
edge whitish, beyond middle ochreous-tinged; a dark fuscous dot on base of
costa; stigmata indistinct, first discal at 4, plical beyond it, second discal at 2;
several other dots irregularly distributed; a subterminal series of dots; cilia grey-
whitish with a dark grey antemedian line. Hindwings over 1, termen not sinuate;
whitish becoming grey towards apex; whitish with a grey antemedian line.

Queensland: Springbrook (3,000 feet), Macpherson Range, in November;
one specimen.

Protolechia tyroessa, n. sp.
tupoets, cheese-coloured.

é,18mm. Head and thorax ochreous-orange. (Palpi missing.) Antennae
ochreous-orange with fuscous annulations. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous;
posterior pair whitish-ochreous. Forewings with costa gently arched, apex
rounded, termen very obliquely rounded; 2 and 3 stalked; ochreous-orange with
sparse dark fuscous irroration, mostly in terminal third, and markings; a broad
outwardly oblique mark at 4 representing conjoined first discal and plical, second
discal about 3; a costal dot at 4, another at #, and four smaller between this and

177

apex ; a fine interrupted terminal line; cilia ochreous. Hindwings 14, termen not
sinuate; grey, paler towards base; cilia grey, apices whitish.
Queensland: National Park (3,500 feet), in December; one specimen,

Protolechia neurosticha, n, sp.
veupoorixos, with lines on nerves.

é, 23 mm. Head and thorax brown. Palpi with second joint exceeding
base of antennae, terminal joint %; pale brownish, sprinkled with fuscous.
Antennae brown. Abdomen brownish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair brown-
whitish. Forewings elongate-oblong, costa gently arched, apex rectangular,
termen nearly straight, slightly oblique; brown; cel! and all veins outlined by pale
streaks; two obscure fuscous dots at posterior angles of cell; cilia brown with
two fuscous lines. Hindwings 13, termen very sinuate; pale grey; cilia whitish
with two grey lines,

Queensland: Brisbane; one specimen.

Protolechia ochrobathra, n. sp.

axpoBabpes, pale at the base.

2,20 mm. Head grey-brown. Palpi with second joint exceeding base of
antennae, terminal joint #, stout; grey, apex of second joint whitish, terminal joint
dark fuscous. Antennae dark fuscous. Thorax pale brownish with a large central
dark fuscous spot. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous with whitish rings. Forewings
with costa moderately arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen slightly rounded,
slightly oblique ; 2 and 3 stalked; brown mostly suffused with dark fuscous; a pale
brownish basal area bounded by a straight line from 4 costa to near base of
dorsum, containing two fuscous costal dots; first discal and plical lost in dark
fuscous suffusion, second discal slightly beyond middle, oval, transverse, whitish
with fuscous centre; apical half of costa with alternate dark and pale bars; tornal
area less suffused and more brownish; cilia brownish with two faint fuscous lines.
Hindwings 14, termen not sinuate; grey; cilia grey,

Queensland: Bunya Mountains (3,500 feet), in February; one specimen.

Protolechia obscura, n. sp.
obcurus, dark.

$, 2, 22-24 mm. Head, antennae, thorax, and abdomen fuscous. Palpi
stout, terminal joint 2, slender; fuscous, extreme apex of second joint whitish.
Legs dark fuscous with whitish-ochreous rings; posterior pair whitish-ochreous.
Forewings slightly dilated, costa gently arched, apex subrectangular, termen
straight, slightly oblique; 2 and 3 stalked; fuscous; markings and some sparse
irroration dark fuscous; five discal dots at 4, on fold beyond this, at %, and
immediately below this; the three posterior dots circular, pale centred; a series
of minute costal dots; a subterminal series of dots near margin; cilia fuscous,
apices paler. Hindwings 14; grey; cilia grey.

Recognisable by the comparatively large size, uniform fuscous colouring, and
ring-like posterior costal dots.

Queensland: National Park (2-2,500 feet), in December and January; four
specimens.

Protolechia euprepta, n. sp.
eirpeTTos, conspicuous.
é,18mm. Head grey. Palpi with second joint long, thickened with smooth

appressed scales, terminal joint #; fuscous, terminal joint whitish except anterior
edge. Antennae fuscous; in male simple. Thorax white with a broad central

178

fuscous stripe. Abdomen ochreous-whitish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair
ochreous-whitish. Forewings suboblong, costa strongly and evenly arched, apex
rounded, termen obliquely rounded; 2 and 3 stalked; white; markings fuscous;
four costal dots, sub-basal, at 4, middle, and 3; a broad streak on dorsum from
near base to beyond middle; a large oval outwardly oblique spot in dise before
middle, its lower and outer end confluent with dorsal streak; a large tornal blotch,
connected with costa at 2; a suffused spot on midtermen; a blackish terminal line;
cilia grey, on costa whitish-ochreous. Hindwings broader than forewings, termen
scarcely sinuate; whitish-ochreous; a large pale fuscous apical blotch; cilia
whitish-ochreous, on apical blotch bases grey.

One of the chiradia group, but very distinct.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in January; one specimen.

Protolechia emmeles, n. sp.
éupedys, elegant, harmonious.

§, 14-16 mm. Head whitish-brown. Palpi stout; terminal joint 3; fuscous
sprinkled with whitish-brown, apices of second and terminal joints and base of
terminal joint whitish-brown. Antennae fuscous. Thorax brown. Abdomen
whitish-grey. Legs dark fuscous partly suffused and tarsi annulated with whitish-
brown; posterior pair mostly whitish-brown. Forewings narrow, suboblong, not
dilated, costa slightly arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen not oblique.
rounded beneath; 2 and 3 stalked; pale brown partly suffused with darker brown;
dark fuscous costal dots at base and 4, and on dorsum at 4 preceded by a sub-
dorsal dot; five oblique fuscous marks on costa from 4 to apex their apices run-
ning into a subcostal fuscous suffusion, which is cut by an oblique white line,
partly fuscous in centre from % costa to middle of disc; a short blackish streak
from apex separated from subcostal suffusion by a white dot; an interrupted
white terminal line doubly edged with fuscous; cilia brown, apices paler, with a
fine fuscous median line. Hindwings 14; grey-whitish; cila whitish with a sub-
basal grey line.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in November, January, and March.
New South Wales: Lismore, in October. Four specimens.

Protolechia arenaria, n. sp.
arenarius, sand-coloured.

3, 17-18 mm. Head brown or brown-whitish. Palpi fuscous; apex of
second joint, base and extreme apex of terminal joint, whitish. Antennae grey.
Thorax brown or brown-whitish; if the former, bases of patagia brown-whitish ;
extreme basal edge of patagia dark fuscous. Abdomen whitish-grey tuft whitish-
ochreous. Legs fuscous with whitish ochreous rings; posterior pair whitish-
ochreous. Forewings suboblong, costa strongly arched, apex round-pointed,
termen obliquely rounded; 2 and 3 stalked; brown or brown-whitish; costa
broadly and suffusedly whitish from base to beyond middle; basal § of costal edge
dark fuscous; fuscous costal dots at 4, middle, and four between this and apex;
stigmata fuscous, first discal at 4, plical beyond it, second discal at #, and a dot
beneath it, both within a transverse whitish suffusion; a dot between and above
discals; a narrow fuscous apical suffusion containing a series of pale marginal
dots; cilia pale brownish with a fuscous median line. Hindwings broad, termen
not sinuate; whitish-ochreous; extreme apex pale fuscous; cilia whitish, bases
grey.

Nearest P. selenia Meyr.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in October and November; three
specimens.

179

Crocanthes venustula, n. sp.
venustulus, exquisite.

é, 10 mm. Head and thorax whitish-yellow. Palpi in male with second
joint short, reaching middle of face, terminal joint 3, recurved, expanded from
before middle to apex, laterally compressed; whitish. Antennae whitish, towards
apex grey. Abdomen pale grey. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior pair and apices
of middle tibiae fuscous. Forewings narrow, costa slightly arched, apex rect-
angular, termen nearly straight, slightly oblique; orange-yellow, two blackish
transverse lines at 4 and 3; a minute subapical blackish dot; cilia orange-
yellow. Hindwings whitish-yellow; a fuscous discal dot and a faint transverse
line from tornus; cilia yellow.

North Queensland: Cape York, in June; one specimen received from Mr.
W. B. Barnard.

Crocanthes thiomorpha, n. sp.
detopoppos, sulphur-yellow.

6, 2, 15-17 mm. Head and thorax whitish. Palpi with second joint ex-
ceeding base of antennae, terminal joint in male 1/,,, in female 3; whitish,
terminal joint pale fuscous. Antennae grey. Abdomen ochreous-fuscous. Legs
whitish-ochreous; anterior pair pale fuscous; apices of middle and posterior
tibiae fuscous. Forewings narrow, costa straight, apex obtusely pointed, termen
very obliquely rounded ; 10 separate; pale yellow ; sometimes a small fuscous basal
fascia; terminal area, bounded by a straight line from 2 costa to mid-dorsum, pale
fuscous, but this may be more or less suffused with pale yellow on costa and
before termen; cilia grey, bases yellowish. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

North Queensland: Eungella, in October; three specimens.

Family HELIODINIDAE.

Stathmopoda xanthocrana, n. sp.
EavOoxpavos, with yellow head.

9, 10mm. Head yellow; fillet and face paler and glossy. Palpi fuscous;
internal surface whitish. Antennae fuscous. Thorax and abdomen fuscous.
Legs fuscous; ventral surfaces partly whitish. Forewings lanceolate; yellow;
markings fuscous ; a small suffused basal patch; a broadly suffused median fascia ;
apical third of wing fuscous, leaving only a narrow yellow band beyond median
fascia; cilia fuscous. Hindwings linear-lanceolate; fuscous; cilia 8, fuscous.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in March; one specimen.

Family CARPOSINIDAEL.

Gen. Epicopistis, nov.
émtxomeotis, cut short.

Palpi comparatively short, porrect or subascending, smooth-scaled, cylindri-
cal; terminal joint very short. Antennae of male with long ciliations. Posterior
tibiae clothed with long hairs. Forewings with all veins present and separate,
2, 3,4, approximated from angle, 7 to termen. Hindwings without cubital pecten ;
3 and 4 stalked, 5 absent, 6 obsolete but represented by a membranous fold well
separate from and nearly parallel to 7.

Near Paramorpha Meyr., but with different palpi.

180

Epicopistis pleurospila, n. sp.
mAevpoomaAos, with costal spot.

8, 18 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi 14; fuscous, apex white.
Antennae grey; basal joint white; ciliations in male 3. Abdomen grey; male
genitalia with two pairs of long tufts, dorsal and lateral. J.egs fuscous ; posterior
pair whitish. Forewings narrow, suboblong, costa gently arched, apex round-
pointed, termen straight, oblique; white; markings dark fuscous; a triangular spot
on base of costa; a costal dot at 4; a rather large subtriangular spot on # costa,
pale fuscous containing three darker costal dots and a darker apical portiom; two
costal dots between this and apex; a very slender dentate subterminal line; a
terminal series of dots; cilia white.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in March; two specimens received
from Mr. W. B. Barnard, who has the type.

Family TINEIDAE.

Gen. Gongylodes, nov.
yoryvAwdys, rounded.

Head and face rough-haired. Tongue and maxillary palpi absent. Palpi
ascending, exceeding vertex; second joint long, shortly rough-haired; terminal
joint minute. Antennae about 3. Posterior tibiae with long hairs on dorsum.
Forewings with all veins present and separate, 2 from 3, 3 from , 7 to costa.

Hindwings with cell long (2), 2 from 3, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 separate, parallel.

Gongylodes centroscia, n. sp.
kevtporxos, with central shade.

?,17 mm. Head and thorax brown. Palpi 34; brownish. Antennae pale
grey, darker towards base. Abdomen grey. Legs ochreous-whitish ; anterior pair
fuscous. Forewings rather narrow, suboval, costa strongly and uniformly arched,
apex pointed, termen very oblique, continuous with dorsum; whitish-ochreous;
an ill-defined basal patch; a suffused brown median streak from this, expanding
in disc, and broadly suffused over terminal area; cilia whitish-ochreous, on apex
brown. Hindwings elongate, termen gently rounded; grey, cilia pale grey.

Queensland: National Park, in March; one specimen received from Mr, W.
B. Barnard.

Narycia commatica, n. sp.
kowpaticos, stamped, impressed.

é, 30-33 mm.; 9,42 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen dark brown. Palpi
1; dark brown. Antennae dark brown; in male dentate, ciliations 1. Legs dark
brown ; anterior and middle tarsi dark fuscous. Forewings suboval, costa strongly
arched, at base very strongly, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded,
oblique; 7 and 8 stalked; dark brown finely reticulated with fuscous; costa with
fine short fuscous strigulae; a somewhat darker basal patch; sometimes a darker
fascia, its anterior edge from 4 costa to mid-dorsum, posterior edge undefined,
comtnonly this is reduced to ill-defined costal and dorsal dark spots; cilia brownish.
Hindwings with termen gently rounded; pale grey reticulated with darker; cilia
pale grey.
In wing-shape this resembles N. euryptera Meyr, but with very different
colouring.
’ Queensland: National Park (3-3,500 feet), in March; a series taken, but
including only one female.

181

Gen. Dinocrana, nov.
dwvoxpavos, with rounded head.

Head shortly rough-scaled; face projecting in a strong rounded prominence
between eyes. Tongue and maxillary palpi absent. Labial palpi moderate, por-
rect; second joint shortly rough-haired beneath towards apex; terminal joint
short, acute. Antennae about 4; in male moderately and evenly ciliated. Posterior
tibiae smooth. Forewings with all veins present and separate, 2 from near angle,
7 to termen. Hindwings with cell about 2, all veins present and separate, 4, 5, 6,
7, equidistant, parallel.

One of the Narycia-Ardiosteres group, but not closely related to either.

Dinocrana chrysomitra, n. sp.
Xpvoopitpos, with golden girdle.

@, 14 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen fuscous. Palpi fuscous, towards
base whitish-ochreous. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male 1. Legs whitish-
ochreous partly suffused with fuscous leaving pale tibial and tarsal rings. Fore-
wings oval, costa rather strongly arched, apex rounded, termen very obliquely
rounded; fuscous; an antemedian subtriangular yellow fascia, narrow on costa
at 4, anterior edge inwardly oblique to dorsum near base, posterior edge trans-
verse; cilia fuscous, a pale yellow dot opposite midtermen. Hindwings elongate-
ovate, apex rounded; fuscous; cilia fuscous.

Queensland: National Park (3,500 feet), in March; one specimen.

Gen. Baeophylia, nov.
BaodvdAdos, slight-winged.

Head and face hairy. Maxillary palpi long, folded. Labial palpi rather long,
smooth, slender, drooping. Antennae about 1. Posterior tibiae with a few long
hairs from basal half of dorsum, otherwise smooth. Forewings with 4 absent,
7 and 8 by a common stalk from 6, 7 to costa. Hindwings almost linear; 2, 3, and
6 absent, 4 and 5 stalked.

Probably a development of Tinea.

Baeophylla eupasta, n. sp.
eixagros, well sprinkled.

9,89 mm. Head ochreous-fuscous; face whitish. Thorax pale ochreous
with some fuscous irroration. Antennae whitish. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous
with whitish rings; posterior pair whitish. Forewings very narrow, costa gently
arched, apex pointed; ochreous-whitish partly suffused with ochreous-brown with
a few dark fuscous scales; costa ochreous-brown becoming fuscous towards base,
interrupted by whitish-ochreous dots; a similar median series of pale and dark
dots, and a dorsal series, the last continued along termen to an apical whitish dot;
cilia ochreous with a subapical dark fuscous line, becoming uniformly grey on
lower half of termen, tornus, and dorsum. Hindwings almost linear, grey;
cilia 20, grey.

Queensland: National Park (25-500 feet), in December and January; two
specimens.

Gen. Ptyssoptera, nov.

arvocortepos, with crumpled wing.

Head and face rough-haired. Maxillary palpi long, folded. Labial palpi
moderate, drooping, smooth-scaled ; second joint with a pencil of short divergent

182

hairs from external surface near apex. Antennae less than 4; in female slender;
in male much thickened almost to apex. Posterior tibiae clothed in long, dense
hairs. Forewings with all veins present and separate, 7 to costa. Hindwings
elongate-ovate; 5 and 6 stalked; in male with disc crumpled beneath, on upper
surface with a very strong ridge of long hairs from near dorsum in basal third,
bent over costally, and partly concealing a subcostal ridge of shorter hairs.

Type Tinea phaeochrysa Turn. (These Proceedings, 1926, p. 135.) I have
taken two examples of the male in the National Park (3,000 feet), in November.

Tinea mesoporphyra, n. sp.
Herotoppupes, purple in the middle.

¢,10mm. Head, thorax, abdomen, and legs brownish-fuscous. Antennae
about 1; pale ochreous annulated with fuscous. Forewings rather narrow, costa
nearly straight, apex pointed; ochreous-fuscous; the whole median area suffused
with purple-fuscous, undefined, but leaving moderate basal and apical areas free;
cilia grey sprinkled with fuscous. Hindwings lanceolate; grey; cilia 2, grey.

Queensland: National Park (3,500 feet), in March; one specimen.

Tinea sulfurata, n. sp.
sulfuratus, sulphur-yellow.

@, 24mm. Head yellow. Palpi 4; fuscous, extreme apex yellowish. An-
tennae 8 fuscous. Thorax fuscous; tegulae except bases yellow. Abdomen
fuscous; tuft yellowish. Legs yellowish; anterior pair dark fuscous. Forewings
elongate, narrow, suboval, costa moderately arched, apex pointed, termen straight,
very oblique; all veins separate; yellow with fuscous markings more or less
developed; a fuscous costal streak from base to beyond middle; a darker dot on
fold beneath this, connected with dorsum by some fuscous suffusion; a rather
broad transverse mark in disc at 4; terminal area beyond this more or less suffused
with fuscous; cilia yellow, bases sometimes fuscous. Hindwings with termen
gently rounded; grey; cilia grey, partly yellowish-tinged.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet), in March; two specimens received
from Mr. W. B. Barnard, who has the type.

NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
NO. 2.

BY ERNEST H. ISING

Summary

Marsilia hirsuta R. Br. In a number of specimens collected in the Far North. Nos. 2,430, 2,431,
2,432, 2,433, 2,788, and 2,789, further details can now be given to aid in the identification of this
difficult group. Leaflets from obovate to cuneate, 2-12 mm. long hairy when young and often
becoming glabrous with age, usually woolly at the base; sporocarps 2-7 mm. long- and 2+-5 mm.
wide, usually swollen (but not globular), regularly transversely corrugated and covered with dense
appressed hairs, stalks 1-5 mn1. long, apparently rarely sessile.

183

NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
No, 2.
CWith Descriptions of New Species.)

By Erxnesr H. Isinc,
[Read October 12, 1933. ]

MARSILIACEAE,

Marsilia hirsuta R. Br. Ina number of specimens collected in the Far North.
Nos. 2,430, 2,431, 2,432, 2,433, 2,788, and 2,789, further details can now be given
to aid in the identification of this difficult group. Leaflets from obovate to cuneate,
2-12 mm, long hairy when young and often becoming glabrous with age, usually
woolly at the base; sporocarps 2-7 mm. long and 24-5 mm. wide, usually swollen
(but not globular), regularly transversely corrugated and covered with dense
appressed hairs, stalks 1-5 mm. long, apparently rarely sessile.

SCHEUCHZERIACEAE,

Triglochin elongata, n. sp. Annua, erecta, 6-10 cm. alta; folia filiformia,
scapis aequilonga vel longiora, vagina membraneéa, ligulis capillaribus; racemi
2 em. longi, 8-13-flori; fructus 4-54 mm. longus, oblongus, apice angustatus, base
14 mm. latus; calcaria basilaria conspicua, 14-2 mm. longa, sursum curvata, duo
breviora, 1 mm. longa, a basi cujusque carpelli inferius producta et inter se lamina
membranea conjuncta; pedicelli 2-34 mm. longi, divergentes s. 6-9, p. '

b juncta; pedicelli 2-34 longi, divergentes (figs. 6-9, p. 184

Erect annual, 6-10 cm. high; leaves filiform, as long or longer than the scapes,
base with membranous sheaths and two hairlike ligules; scapes bearing 8-13
racemose flowers, raceme 2 cm. long; fruits 4-54 mm. long, oblong and contracted
at the summit, 14 mm. wide at the base, spurs on the base of 3 carpels, con-
spicuous 14-2 mm. long, curved upwards, also 2 spurs each 1 mm. long are produced
from the base of and extended below the carpels, and are joined by a mem-
branous plate; pedicels 2-35 mm. long, divergent.

Differs from all other species in having extra basal spurs produced below
the carpels with a connecting plate between them.

Central Australia, Coglin Creek, August 26, 1931, No. 2,409. Type in

author’s collection.

A specimen in the ‘ate Herbarium, Adelaide University, from near Mount
Squires, collected by R. Helms, August 26, 1891, on the Elder Exploring Expedi-
tion, is labelled 7. calcitrapa, but belongs ta the new species.

LILIACEAE.

Bulbine semibarbata (R. Br.) Haw. var. depilata J. M. Black. Two
specimens were collected at Callana, August 21, 1931, which is in the same district
from which the type of the variety came. I can confirm Black’s observations
on this new variety with regard to the filaments being scantily hairy dnd in the
number and disposition of the seeds. My specimen, No. 2,394, has only one flower
open but a number of ripe capsules. Three of the anthers are beardless, and the
threc longer ones have very few and very short hairs, which are easily observed
by the aid of a hand lens. Three ripe capsules were examined, and the rule is

©) These Trans, val, Ivi, (1932), 39.

184

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES.

Fig. 1. Bassia Andersonii, n. sp. Fruiting branch, nat. size. Fig. 2. Fruit of same show-
ing posterior face, x 5. Fig. 3. Fruit of same showing anterior face, x 5. Fig. 4. Showing
vertical section of fruit with vertical seed. x 5

Fig. 5. Bulbine semibarbate var. depilata., Seed showing transverse ridges, x 7.

Vig. 6. Triglechin elongata, n. sp. Part of scape showing raceme, x 2. Fig, 7. Side view
of one carpel, x 5. Fig. 8. Back (anterior) view of one carpel, x 5. Fig. 9. Base of leaf
showing sheath and ligules, x 2.

185

two superposed seeds in each cell; sometimes a cell has only one seed developed,
in which case it is larger than usual and tapering both ends. The seeds are
triangular in shape (fig. 5, p. 184), 3 mm. long, the anterior face is flat while the
other faces form a rugose pyramid, the transverse ridges of which are dark and
prominent and stand out in contrast to the lighter grooves between. The flowers
are yellowish. Further research seems neccssary to determine the ovarian
character in this genus.
LORANTILACEAE,

Loranthus Maidenu Blakely. First record for Central Australia, Horse Shoe
Bend, August 24, 1931, No. 2,434, on Acacia tetragonophylla,

L. quandang Lindl. var. Bancroft Bail. Abminga, August 27, 1931,
No. 2403, on Acacia Cambagei. ‘This record now takes the known range some
hundred of miles further north; in fact, it extends it almost to the border of
Central Australia.

L. Murrayi F. v. M. et Tate. Pedirka, August 29, 1932, No. 2,804, on Acacia
cyperophylla.

CHENOPODIACEAE,

Bassia Andersonii, n. sp. Fruticulus glaber, 20-30 cm. altus; folia sessilia,
obtusa, 6-18 mm. longa 1 mm. lata, base anguste alata, in axillis barbata: flores
solitarii, axillares; perianthium fructiferum oblongum, subcomplanatum, 3 mm.
longum, 14 mm. latum, limbo juventute erecto et tomentoso, maturitate saepe
procurvato et glabro, dimidio longitudinis ad ramulum affixo; spinae saepius 4,
2 divergentes, 5-7 mm. longae, glabrae, patentes, tertia uncinata, 14 mm. longa,
quarta (dum adsit) minuta, ambae inferius collocatae; semen verticale (figs. 1, 2,
3. 4, p. 184).

An erect undershrub of 20 to 30 cm. in height, glabrous. Leaves 6 to 18 mm.
long x 1 mm. wide, flat, glabrous (dried specimens are beset with numerous fine
longitudinal ridges), point obtuse; sessile, base broad and expanded into narrow
membranous wings, a tuft of hairs situated at the point of attachment. Flowers
solitary, axillary. Fruiting perianth 3 mm. long x 14 mm wide, oblong and some-
what flattened, usually 1 or 2 longitudinal ribs on anterior face; limb short, erect
and tomentose when young, often curved forward and glabrous when mature;
base oblique, areole attached by about half the length of the perianth and hollow;
spines usually 4, two divergent and 5 to 7 mm. long straight and glabrous,
spreading towards the horizontal, one hooked horizontal either turned in a clock-
wise or anti-clockwise direction 14 mm. long, one (sometimes wanting) minute
and situated at the base of the former; these two smaller spines are situated below
either of the divergent ones; seed vertical.

The nearest affinity is with B. divaricata but differs in its shorter spines, erect
limb, mode of attachment of fruits, ribbing of perianth and the caducous fruits.
From B&B. intricata it differs in its stouter spines, mode of attachment of fruits,
ribbed perianth, tapering base and caducous fruits.

Pedirka, No. 2,681, type in author’s collection. Named in honour of Mr.
R. H. Anderson, B.Sc. (Agr.), Botanical Assistant, Botanic Gardens, Sydney,
who revised the genus Bassia in the Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., vol. xlviii.
(1923), 317. Collected August 22, 1931.

Specimen No. 2,686, collected at Abminga, is close to the type, and the only
difference appears to be that the spines are shorter, the longest being only 4 mm.
long, the two smallest spines are much less developed. Collected August 28, 1931.

Kochia tomentosa (Moq.) F. v. M. var. platyphylla, n. var. Differt a typo
foliis oblanceolatis et tubo obconico; a var, appressa foliis oblanceolatis usque
9 mm. longis.

186

Differs from the type in the oblanceolate leaves and obconical tube; from
yar. appressa in the leaves oblanceolate and up to 9 mm, long.

The slender open nature of this shrub, with leaves unusually wide for a
Kochia, give it a distinct aspect, but there does not appear to be justification for
more than a varietal name, particularly as only one shrub of it was seen. Snake

Gully, No. 2,839, September 1, 1932.

Kochia tomentosa (Moq.) F. v. M. var appressa (Benth.) J. M. Black.
A specimen, No. 2,814, from Snake Gully, has fruits up to 13 mm. diameter and
the conical tube sometimes only has one distinct rib with several faint ones or it
may be rugose. This specimen also has an unbroken horizontal wing.

K. Georgei Diels. A specimen from Abminga, No. 2,821, has the horizontal
wing of the fruit with a slit having the ends imbricate, the tube is longitudinally
ribbed or rugose.

K. eriantha F. v. M. The drawing of this species in Mueller’s Icon. Salsol.
PL, plate 57, gives the seed as horizontally placed. In a specimen, No. 2,824,
from Pedirka, the seed is obliquely placed, although, at first sight, it appears to be
horizontal. The seed is placed at an angle of about 60°, and the radicle is pointing
downwards. I have not seen fruils with seeds in a vertical position as recorded
by Black (Fl. S.A., p. 197). The soft lobes to the wing are not always regular
as shown in the above plate, but are decidedly irregular in size and outline.

AMARANTHACEAE.

Trichinium helipteroides F. v. M. var. minor J. M. Black. Additional
localities are:—Central Australia, Coglin Creck, No. 2,425, August 26, 1931;
South Australia, Abminga, Nos. 2,413, 2,419, 2,435, August 28, 1931.

T. semilanatum Lindl, Additional localities for our Far North are:—
Macumba, No. 2,438, September 2, 1931; Pedirka, No. 2,439, August 22, 1931;
Abminga, No. 2,437, August 30, 1931.

Amaranthus Mitchellii Benth. var. grandiflorus J. M. Black. First record for
Central Australia, Horse Shoe Bend, No. 2,453, August 23, 1931.

AIZOACEAE,
Trianthema crystallina Vahl. var. clavata J. M. Black. First record for
Central Australia, Horse Shoe Bend, No. 2,467, August 24, 1931.

PoRTULACACEAE,

Calandrinia pumila F. v. M. New locality for our Far North; Abminga,
August 27, 1931, Nos. @475 and 2,477,

CRUCIFERAE,

Stenopetalum nutans F. v. M. New locality for our Far North; Abminga,
August 27, 1931, No. 2,497,

Blennodia pterosperma J. M. Black. New records are:—Central Australia,
Iorse Shoe Bend, August 24, 1931, No. 2,503; Far North, Macumba, September
3, 1931, No. 2,504.

Lepidium papillosum F. v. M. Macumba, September 3, 1931, No. 2,494. The
previous furthest north record was Flinders Range, so that the above locality
extends its range by another 300 miles.

AUSTRALIAN FUNGI: NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS. — NO. 9

BY J. BURTON CLELAND, M.D.

Summary

187

AUSTRALIAN FUNGI: NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS.—No. 9
By J. Burron Ciet.anp, M.D.

[Read October 12, 1933. ]

534, Amanita cinereo-annulosa, n. sp.—Pileus 5 ad 8:2 cm., subplanus, inter-
dum subumbonatus vel subumbilicatus, nitidus, interdum veli fragmentis mem-
branaceis, cinereus vel pallidior. Lamellae ad stipem subattingentes, subconfertae,
latae ad 1 cm., albae vel cremaceo-albae. Stipes 8°7-13°7 cm., crassus (1:5-2 cm.),
subcavus, sub-bulbosus, radicatus, striatus, supra subcinercus, infra albidus et
fibrillosus. Volva larga, vaginata. Sporae ellipticae, 8-10 6-7». S.A—
Encounter Bay.

535. Lepiota cervicolor, n. sp.—Pileus ad 4 cm., usitate ad 2 cm., planus, sub-
umbonatus, tomento fibrilloso deinde squamis fibrillosis vel floccosis, cervicoloratus
vel “mikado brown,” ad peripherem carneo-cinnamoneus. Lamellae non annec-
tatae, cremaceo-albae. Stipes substriatus, fibrillosus, albidus, supra subcarneus.
Sporae ellipticae, 6°4-7 * 3°88. S.A— Adelaide.

536. Hygrophorus fuligineo-squamosus, n. sp.—Pileus 3-1-6°8 cm., irregu-
lariter convexus et planus, subtiliter squamosus vel fibrilloso-floccosus, caryo-
phyllo-brunneus vel cinereo-subniger. Lameliae adnato-arcuatae, adnexae vel
fere subsinuatac, subconfertae, angusto-triangulares, subcrassae, glauco-cinereae.
Stipes ad 5 cm., infra attenuatus, conico-radicatus, fibrillosus vel fibrilloso-
squamulosus, fere araneo-fibrillis subnigris, subcinereo-albidus, fere punctis
fuliginosis. Sporae ellipticae, obliquae, 7°5-9 & 4°5-5:5y. In terra. S.A—
Mount Lofty, Kinchina, MacDonnell Bay.

537. Collybia tortipes, n. sp—Pileus 1°2-3-7 cm., convexus, subumbilicatus,
fibrilloso-laceratus, subniger, luteo-brunneus vel caryophyllo-brunneus, Lamellae
sinuatac, ventricosae, subdistantes, albae, in senecttute luteo-brunneo-albidae.
Stipes 3-1-4-4 cm., subtenuis, tortus, non-radicatus, subnitidus vel subfibrillosus,
subcavus, cartilagineus, albidus. Sporae angustae, albae, 8-11 * 4-4-5. In terra
arenosa. S.A—Willunga Hill, Summertown.

538. C. penetrans, n. sp—Pileus 2°5-3-1 cm., e convexo irregulariter planus,
iterdum repandus, interdum subumbonatus vel subumbilicatus, innato-fibrillosus,
interdum radiato-rugosus, russus vel ochraceo-fulvus vel aurantiaco-cinnamoneus.
Lamellae subsinuato-adnexae, subconfertae, cinnamoneo-luteae, deinde ochraceo-
fulvae. Stipes superans terram 1°8-3-1 cm., tenuis (4 cm.), cavus, pervelutinatus,
'“argus brown” et “Sudan brown,” radice longa (5-7:5 cm.). Caro stibio-flava.
Sporae obliquae, angusto-pyriformes, 7:5-8 * 4-4-5. In terra arenosa. S.A—
Encounter Bay.

539. C. percava, n. sp.—Pileus 3-7-5 cm., perconvexus, deinde convexus,
deinde irregulariter expansus, interdum umbonatus, “Mars brown” deinde russus
vel subfulvus, Lamellac sinuato-adnexae, angustae (5 mm.), subconfertac,
pallido- ochraceo-luteae, Stipes ad 5 cm., infra inflatus, supra attenuatus, nitidus,
percavus, “Sayal brown” vel russus, supra pallidus. Sporae pyriformes, 5 & 3-7 p.
[In terra. S.A—National Park.

540. C. elegans, n. sp-—Pileus 1-8-3 cm., campanulato-convexus deinde per-
convexus et obtuso-umbonatus, deinde subplanus, subrivulosus, cinnamonco-
rufus, fulvus vel aurantiaco-luteus, exsiccatus “burnt-sienna.” Lamellae adnato-
adnexae ad adnatae, confertae, angustae, cremaceae. Stipes 3-7-6°5 cm., tenuis

188

(2-5 mm.), aequalis, nitidus, cartilagineus, solidus, ad basim interdum inflatus,
concoloratus. Sporae angustae, 9-11 & 4°5-5-5y. In terra inter folia et lignum
cariosum. S.A—National Park, Mount Lofty.

541. C. fusca, n. sp.—Pileus 3-9-3 cm., convexus, subumbonatus, fuscus vel
fusco-niger. JLamellac sinuatae, vel interdum adnatae, ad 1 cm, latae, sub-
confertae, pallido-subcinereae. Stipes 3-9°3 cm. > 5-8 mm., supra farinaceus,
infra subfibrillosus, aequalis, farctus, subcinereo-pallidus vel subfusco-pallidus.
Sporac ovales, subirregulares, 7-9 &4-5:-5 yp. S.A-—Eagle-on-the-Hill, National
Park.

542. Mycena subnigra, n. sp-—Pileus ad 1°8 cm. altus et latus, campanulatus
ad conico-campanulatus, glaber, substriatus, subniger ad “Mummy brown.”
Lamellae adnatae vel sinuato-adnatae, dentibus subdecurrentibus, subconfertae,
ventricosae, subcinereae. Stipes 5 cm. vel major, sursum subattenuatus, supra
concoloratus, infra pallidus et perstrigosus. Sporae 7°5-9 * 4°5-5-5, Plantae
ad truncos caespitosae, S.A—Mount Lofty, Caroline State Forest.

543. M. eucalyptorum, n. sp—Pileus 2°5-3-1 cm., lato-conicus vel conico-
convexus, deinde convexus et obtuso-umbonatus, glaber, ad marginem substriatus
et pallidus, subnigro-cinereus. Lamellae sinuato-adnexae interdum ad_ collare,
subconfertae, angustae, subcinereae. Stipes ad 6°2 cm., tenuis, cavus, ad basim
substrigosus, supra pallidus, deinde pallido-brunneus, ad basim subnigro-cinereus.
Sporae 9°3> 5:5. Plantae in truncis prostratis caespitosae. S.A—Secound
Valley Forest Reserve, Mount Lofty, National Park, Baker’s Gully.

544. M. Cunninghaniana, n. sp.—Pileus ad 4-3 cm., convexus, subumbonatus,
irregulariter rugosus, flavo-avellaneus, ad apicem brunnior deinde subniger.
Lamellae adnatae, subconfertae, subangustac, pallido-vinaceo-luteae. Stipes
7°5 cm., supra glaber, cavus, ad basim perstrigosus et “Verona brown,” supra
pallidior. Sporae-8-8°5 & 5°5,. Plantae in truncis caespitosae. S.A—Mount
Lofty.

545. M. fusca, n. sp—Pileus 1:2-1-8 cm. vel maior, conico-campanulatus
vel lato-conicus vel convexus, deinde umbone subacuta subplanus, striatus, ad
marginem cinereus vel pallido-cinnamoneco-cincreus vel “wood brown,” in medio
fuscus vel fusco-subniger vel “bone brown,” hygrophanus deinde pallido-brunneus.
Lamellae dentibus subdecurrentibus adnatae, subconfertae, cinereo-pallidae. Stipes
3°7-5 cm., tenuis, subfragilis, glaber, cavus, infra pallido-olivaceo-brunneus vel
vinaceo-luteus vel “bone brown,” supra pallidior, ad basim substrigosus vel sub-
myccliosus. Odor subnitrosus. Sporae 7°5-11 * 3:5-5 4 Plantae in terra humida
vel in foliis putrescentibus solitariae. S.A.—Waterfall Gully, National Park.

546. M. subcapillaris, n. sp—Pileus 3-5 mm., altus 2-5 mm., umbilicatus,
sulcatus, albus ad pallido-brunneus. Lamellae adnatae, subdistantes, circa 14,
eystidiis horridae, albae. Stipes 2°5-3 em., pertenuis, subpcllucido-albidus,
crinibus dispersis, in matricem abrupte penctrans. Sporae subangustae, 7:5 &
3-7. In virgis, frondibus mortuis, ete. S.A—Mount Lofty.

547. M. albido-fusca, n. sp.—Pileus 10 mm., convexo-hemisphericus, umbon-
atus, substriatus, umbone albido fuscus. Lamellae dentibus decurrentibus adnatae,
subdistantes, subcinereae. Stipes 5 cm., pertenuis, ad basim fibrillis paucis, infra
brunneus, supra pallidus. Sporae ellipticae, 8><5°5y. Plantae foliis putrescen-
tibus adhaerentes. S.A.—Mount Lofty.

548. Omphalia paludicola, n. sp—Pileus ad 10 mm., campanulatus, deinde
convexus, subumbilicatus, rugoso-striatus, subcinereo-carneo-luteus. Lamellae
perdecurrentes, distantes, albae. Stipes 19 mm., tenuis, concoloratus. In palude.
S.A.—Mount Lofty.

549. O. olearis, n. sp.—-Plantae albae vel in pileo creamaceo-albae, Puileus
8 mm., conico-convexus, deinde convexus et interdum subumbonatus, glaber.

189

Lamellae decurrentes, confertae. Stipes ad 3 cm., undosus, glaber. Plantae ad
bases olearum. S.A—Beaumont.

550. Pleurotus malleeanus, n. sp—Pileus ad 11-2 cm., convexus, margine
incurvato, glaber vel nodosus et irregularis, cinnamoneo-luteus. Lamellae decur-
rentes, confertae, 6 mm. latus, carneo-luteae. Stipes 3-1-10 cm., centralis vel
excentricus vel lateralis, supra 2°5 cm. latus, aequalis vel deorsum attenuatus,
durus, solidus, albus. Caro crassa vel 1-2 cm. Sporae elongatae, 8-10 « 4 p. Ad
bases mallee-truncorum senum. S.A—Monarto South.

551. Entolomea reticulata, n. sp.—Pileus 2-5-5 cm., convexus, subumbilicatus,
lincis concentricatis et interdum rimosis reticulatus vel adversum marginem
portionibus irregularibus clevatis et fissuris pallidioribus, cinereus. Lamellae
dentibus subdecurrentibus subsinuatae, confertae, angustae, cinereo-carneo-luteae.
Stipes 1‘8 cm., subtenuis, infra striatus, infarctus vel interdum cavus, particulis
pallido-fumoso-cinereis, subter subniger. Caro tenuis, albida. Sporae sub-
spherico-pyriformes, subangulatac, subcoloratae, 4°5-5-5p. Ad terram. S.A—
Mount Lofty.

532. E. muscorunt, n. sp—Pileus ad 3 em., irregulariter convexus, subumbon-
atus, luteo-brunneus. Lamellae profundo-sinuato-adnexae, subconfertae, ventri-
cosae, avellaneae. Stipes 3°7 cm., subtenuis, tortus, cavus, corneo-subcinereus.
Caro corneo-subcinerea. Sporae irregulariter ellipticae, subcoloratae, 8-8-5 «
6°54. Inter muscos. S.A.—Greenhill Road.

553. E. serrata, n. sp—Pileus 2°5 em., perconvexus, irregularis, glaber, albus,
in centrum subluteus. Tamellae adnexae, paene disjunctae, subascendentes, con-
fertae, angustae, marginibus serratis, subfusco-carneae. Stipes 3-1 cm. X 6 mm.,
aequalis, substriatus, solidus, subluteo-albidus. Sporae obliquae, 10-11 K 5p. In
terra paludosa. S.A—Mount Compass.

554.—Clitopilus australiana, n. sp.—-Pileus 3 cm., convexus, umbilicatus,
pallido-brunneus. Lamellae subdecurrentes, confertae, pallido-brunneae. Stipes

2°5 cm., fibrillosus, pallidus. Sporae pyriformes, subangulatae, subcoloratae,
6°5-7 X 5:5. S.A.—National Park.

955. Leptonia albida, n. sp—Pileus ad 1-8 cm., subirregulariter convexus,
deinde planus vel subconcavus, subumbonatus, albus. Lamellae adnatae vel sub-
sinuatae, subconfertae, albidae. Stipes 1°8 cm., tenuis, infra subattenuatus,
infarctus vel subcavus, infra fuscus, supra albidus. Sporae subspericales, angu-
latae, subcoloratae, 6°5 K 3:24, 4-8. S.A—Kinchina.

556. L. macrospora, n. sp—Pileus ad 2-5 cm., convexus, irregulariter
umbilicatus, margine crenato, pallido-subcarneo-brunneus. Lamellae adnatae vel
adnato-decurrentes, subconfertac, subtriangulares, pallido-salmoneo-carneae.
Stipes ad 2-5 cm., tenuis vel subcrassus, subsericeus, interdum torsus, subcavus,
albidus, ad basem mycelio. Sporae carneae, angulatae, 11-16 8p. Apud
muscos. S.A.—Port Lincoln.

537. L. tabacina, n. sp—Pileus 1°8-2:5 cm., convexus, umbilicatus, sub-
fibrillosus, substriatus, tabacinus. Lamellae adnexae, subconfertae, ventricosae,
pallido-carneo-cinnamoneae. Stipes 3-7 cm., tenuis, sursum attenuatus, nitidus,
subcavus, “bistre” vel luteo-brunneus, supra pallidior. Sporae angulatae, 6:5 p,
7°5-8 X 5'Sp. S.A.—Stirling West, Mount Lofty, Eagle-on-the-Hill,

598. L. radicata n. sp.—Pileus ad 2°5 cm., irregulariter convexus, umbilic-
atus, subfibrillosus, subfusco-cinereus. Tamellae subdecurrentes, marginibus sub-
crassis, salmoneo-cinereae, Stipes 1-8 cm., subtenuis, fibrillosus, supra farinaceus,
solidus, pileo pallidior, radice longa attenuata. Sporae pyriformes, subirregulares,
subcoloratae, 7°5-8 & 5-5°5 yu. S.A—Kinchina.

190

559. L. fusco-marginata, n, sp.—Pileus 2°5-3:7 cm., subconvexus vel sub-
planus, umbilicatus, subfibrillosus, striato-rugosus, margine interdum crenulato,
stbniger. Lamellae sinuato-adnexae. confertae, angustae, pallido-cinnamoneo-
cinereae, marginibus fuscis. Stipes 3:7 cm., tenuis, nitidus, ad basim sub-
bulbosus et albidus, violaceo-subniger. Caro tenuis. Sporae angulatae, 9°5 &
7p. S.A—Back Valley (Encounter Bay).

560.—Pholiota subtogularis, n. sp—Pileus 1°5 cm., convexus, interdum sub-
umbonatus, striatus, subviscidus, ochraceo-luteus vel antimoneo-flavus. Lamellae
adnatae, subconfertae, pallido-fulvac, demde ferrugineo-cinnamoneae. Stipes
3-4 em., tenuis, subflexuosus, fibrillosus, subcavus, pallido-brunneus. Annulus
superior fulvus. Caro tenuis, sub-brunnea. Sporae ellipticae, fulvae, 8-8°5 X
5-5. Interra, S.A—Mount Burr (S.E.).

561. Ph. serrulata, n. sp.—Pileus 1-8-4°3 cm., conico-convexus vel convexus.
interdum umbilicatus, interdum umbonatus, hygrophanus, ad marginem striatus,
“Verona brown,” “Argus brown,” fulvus vel ochraceo-fulvus, exsiccatus carneo-
luteus vel ochraceo-luteus. Lamellae adnatae vel subdecurrentes, subconfertae,
angustae, marginibus scrratis, ochraceo-fulvae, “Argus brown” vel “Kaiser
brown.” Stipes 1-8-3-7 cm., tenuis (ad 3-5 mm.), subaequalis, solidus, albido-
fibrillosus, subter fibrillis similiter Jamellis coloratis, ad basim albidus. Annulus
albidus, praetenuis, subdistans. Sporae ellipticae, flavo-brunneae, 6°5-9 «4-6 p.
In terra. S.A.—National Park, Mount Lofty, Mylor.

562.—Ph. graminum, n. sp—Pileus 1-2-1°8 cm., convexus vel subhemisphert-
cus vel subplanus, non-striatus, interdum subumbonatus, hygrophanus, rufo-
brunneus deinde pallidus. T.amellae adnatae vel dentibus decurrentibus, confertac,
ferrugineae, primo pallidiores. Stipes 3-7-4°3 ecm., striatus, sub-bulbosus, cavus,
pallido-brunneus, ad basim mycelio albido, Annulus subsuperior, membranaceus.
Inter gramina. Sporae obliquae, 6°5-8 & 4-5. S.A—Kinchina, Adelaide.

563. Ph. imperfecta, n. sp—Pileus 1:2-1°8 cm., convexus deinde subplanus,
usitate subumbonatus, interdum ad marginem striatus, hygrophanus, ceraceo-flavo-
brunneus, exsiccatus “Sayal brown.” Lamellae adnatae, subconfertae, rufo-
brunneus vel ferrugineo-cinnamoneus. Stipes 2°5 cm., tenuis, solidus vel cavus,
fibrillosus, pallidus vel rufo-brunneus. Annulus superior vel subdistans, imper-
fectus, albidus. Sporae obliquae, subangustae, 7°5-9-5 & 4:5-5y, In terra.
S.A.—Second Valley Forest Reserve, Beaumont Common, McLaren Vale.

564. Ph, squarrosipes, n. sp—Plantae in terra apud truncos Eucalyptos per-
caespitosae vel interdum solitariae. Pilei 1-8-7-5 cm., perconvexi, saepe irregu-
lares, interdum wumbonati, subviscidi, subglabri vel interdum fibrillosi, ochraceo-
fulvi, fulvi, antimoneo-flavi, vel “Empire yellow.” Lamellae adnatae vel dentibus
decurrentibus, subconfertae, subangustae, fuscae, flavo-ochraceae, “buckthorn
brown” vel isabellinae. Stipites 3°7-8 cm., tenues vel subcrassi, deorsum, sub-
attenuati, perfibrilloso-squamosi, solidi, “deep colonial buff” vel antimoneo-flavi.
Sporae ellipticae, obliquae, fusco-brunneae, 6°5-8 & 4-4°5 4. S.A—Encounter
Bay, Upper Tunkalilla Creek.

565. Cortinarius (Phlegmacium?) llacino-fulvus, 1. sp—Pileus 6°2-8°7 cm.,
irregulariter convexus, in medio interdum concavus, denique subrepandus, vis-
cidus, subfibrillosus, argillaceo-coloratus, in locis pallidior vel brunnews, interdum
flavo-ochraceus. Lamellae adnatae vel sinuatae, subconfertae, subventricosae,
pallido-brunneae deinde fulvo-olivaceae. Stipes 5-6-2 cm., tenuis vel crassus (ad
1-8 cm. Jatus), aequalis vel attenuatus infra vel supra, fibrillosus, interdum sub-
cavus, sub-bulbosus, ochraceo-fulvus vestigiis lilacinis. Caro sub-brunneus
vestigiis lilacinis. Sporae obliquae, 9-11 % 5:5-7-5y. S.A-—Stirling West,
Mount Lofty.

191

566. C. (Ph.) vinaceo-lamellatus, n. sp.—Puileus 5 cm., subconico-convexus
deinde convexus, usitate umbonatus, denique irregulariter convexus, subviscidus,
subfibrillosus, cinnamoneo-luteus vel “Sayal Brown.” Lamellae sinuatae dentibus
subdecurrentibus, subconfertae, 5 mm, latae, vinaceo-cinereac. Stipes 7-5 cm.,
crassus (1-1°5 cm.), bulbosus (2°5-3-5 cm.), supra attenuatus, non-viscidus,
sericeo-fibrillosus, solidus, brunneo-pallidus. Velum albidum. Caro subviolacea.
Sporae obliquae, 9-11 X 4°5-5 pp. S.A—Mount Lofty.

S67. C. (Ph.) ochraceo-fulvus, n. sp.—Pileus 4°3-6°2 cm., subconvexus,
irregularis, subumbonatus, subtiliter fibrillosus, fulvo-olivaceus vel ochraceo-
fulvus. Lamellae subsinuatae, subconfertae, subventricosae, fulvo-olivaceae.
Stipes 6°2 X 0-6-1 cm., subaequalis, ad basim sub-bulbosus, fibrillosus, infarctus,
sub-brunneus. Caro pallido-brunnea. Sporae obliquae, fulvo-brunneae, 9-11 <
5-65, S.A-—Stirling West,

568. C. (Ph.) fragilipes, n, sp—Pileus 2-5-8-7 cm., convexus, deinde sub-
convexus vel irregulariter planus vel repandus, usitate subumbonatus, radiato-
fibrillosus, subviscidus, ochraceo-fulvus, fulvus, russus vel aureo-fulvus. Lamellae
adnatae dentibus subdecurrentibus, subconfertae, ad 1 em. latae, carneo-lutaceae
deinde fulvo-olivaceae, Stipes 7+5-10 cm., subtenuis, sacpe flexuosus, aequalis,
fragilis, sericeo-fibrillosus, subcavus, concolorus, Sporae obliquae, flavo-brunneae,
9°3-13-15°5 X 6-7». Plantae subcaespitosae. $.A.—National Park, Mount
Lofty, Kuitpo, Second Valley.

969, C. (Ph.) radicatus, n. sp—Pileus 8-7 em., irregulariter convexus, usitate
subgibbosus, deinde irregulariter expansus, viscidus, ad marginem subfibrilloso-
striatus, pallidus vestigiis flavo-cinnamoneis, in sencctute flavo-cinnamoneus vel
deusto-brunneus. lamellae adnatae vel adnato-subdecurrentes, ad 6 mm. latae,
subconfertae, non ventricosae, albidae deinde cinnamoneae. Stipes supra terram
1-2-3-7 cm., bulbosus, radice conica longa (5 em.), crassus (1°2-2-3 em.), solidus,
albidus, in senectute vestigiis sublilacinis. Caro alba, vestigiis sublilacinis. Velum
albidum. Sporae obliquo-ellipticae, 9-13 5+5-7 p. S.A— Willunga Elill, Wait-
pinga, Mount Compass, Mount Lofty, Kinchina.

570. C, (Myxamicium) sinapicolor, n. sp—Pileus 5-7-5 cm., subconvexus,
subumbonatus, glutinosus, ad marginem sinapicolor, in media succino-brunneus.
ILamellae sinuato-adnexae, subconfertae, 7 mm. latae, “Buckthorn Brown.” Stipes
6°2 cm., suberassus (1 cm.), supra fibrillosus, sub-bulbosus, subflavus. Vellum
pallido-flavum. Sporae obliquo-ellipticae, subasperae, 7-5 < 4n. S.A-—National
Park.

a71. C. (M.) microarcheri, n. sp—Pileus 1-8-6:2 cm., convexus vel sub-
planus, substriatus, glutinosus, perviolaceus vel violaceo-brunneus, exsiceatus-
tabacino-brunneus vel succino-brunneus. Lamellae subsinuatae vel adnexae, sub-
confertae, pallido-violaceae vel violaceo-brunneac, deinde tabacino-brunneae.
Stipes 3-1-5 cm., subtenuis, ad basim subcrassus, fibrillosus, subcavus vel solidus,
pallidus vel pallido-violaceus. Caro subviolacea vel albida. Sporae obliquae,
subglobosae, glabrae, 5:5-8:-4 & 4°5-5 4. S.A——Mount Lofty, Eagle-on-the-Hill.

972. C. (M.) albidus, n. sp—Pileus 3-7-6:2 em., convexus, deinde planus,
subumbonatus, glutinosus, glaber, deinde subfibrillosus, albidus, deinde pallido-
luteus, Lamellae sinuato-adnexae, ventricosae, 9 mm, latae, subconfertae, pallido-
ochraceo-luteae vel ochraceo-luteae. Stipes 6-2 em., subcrassus (1-2 cm.),
aequalis vel sub-bulbosus, fibrillosus, albidus vestigiis subviolaceis. Caro tenuis,
albida vestigiis subviolaceis. Velum sub-brunneum, Odor “of curry powder.”
Sporae obliquae, flavo-brunneae, 9°5-13 xX 6p. S.A—National Park.

573. C. (Inoloma) areolato-imbricatus, n. sp.—Pileus 7°5-15 cm., percon-
vexus, subirregularis, siccus, squamis subfibrillosis subcarneo-luteis vel pallidis

192

(in medio subareolatis, ad marginem imbricatis), ochraceo-luteus vel cinnamoneo-
luteus. Lamellae adnatae vel adnexae, interdum subsinuatae, subconfertae, ad
1 cm. latae, ochraceo-luteae vel cinnamoneo-luteae et ochraceo-fulvae. Stipes
5*6-6°2 cm., crassus (1°8-3-1 cm.), subaequalis vel in medio inflatus, ad basim
attenuatus, fibrillosus, approxime “Warm Buff.” Caro firma, in medio 1 cm. lata,
alba. Velum albidum. Sporae obliquae, flavo-brunneae, 9 xX 4:54, Plantae
caespitosae. S.A.—Willunga Hill.

574. Inocybe serrata, n. sp.—Pileus 1:2 cm., convexus, fibrillosus, Verona-
brunneus vel pallido-brunneus. Lamellae adnatae, marginibus serratis et interdum
pallidioribus, tabacino-brunneae vel ligno-brunneae. Stipes 1*8-3 cm., tenis,
attenuatus, fibrillosus, approxime “Warm Buff.” Caro firma, in medio 1 cm. lata,
farinaceus, pallido-brunneus. Sporae glabrae, obliquae, pallido-flavo-brunneae,
7-5-9 4-5-5 y, Cystidia fusiformes vel ampulliformes, 27-56 X 11-13 4. Plantae
gregariosae vel subcaespitosae, basibus villosis, S.A.—Mount Lofty, Upper
Tunkalilla Creek.

575. 1. fulvo-olivaceae, n. sp-—Pileus 1°2 cm., perconvexus (magis minusve),
subfibrillosus, fulvo-olivaceus, Lamellae adnatae, ascendentes, stbconfertae,
pallidiores quam “Saccardo’s Umber.” Stipes 2°5 cm., tenuis, granulosus, sub-
cavus, pallido-brunneus, saepe supra subroseus. Sporae subtriangulares, perob-
liquae, 6°5-7 X 4. Cystidia subventricosa, 45 15,65 & 17», S.A—Belair.

576. I. granulosipes, n. sp—Tileus 1-2-1°8 cm., convexus, umbonatus, fibril-
losus, tabacino-brunneus ad “Bister.’? Lamellae adnatac, subconfertae, sub-
ventricosae, tabacino-brunneae. Stipes 1-8-2°5 cm., subtenuis, e farcto subcavus,
aequalis, sub-bulbosus, “Bister” granulis albidis farinaceis vel fibrillosis. Caro
pertenuis. Sporae obliquae, 85x 5p. Cystidia inflata ad angusto-fusiformia,
45X19, 509. Plantae gregariosae. S.A.—Stirling West, Mount Lofty.

577. I. Murrayana, n. sp-——Pileus ad 1°6 cm., conicus, deinde expansus,
umbonatus magis minusve, subtili-fibrillosus vel fibrilloso-squamosus, sericeo-
nitidus, cinnamoneo-brunnets vel “Buckthorn Brown” vel “Dresden Brown’? vel
russus. Lamellae adnatae vel adnexac, subconfertae, marginibus subserratis,
tabacino-brunneus vel avellaneus. Stipes 2°5 cm., aequalis, subtili-striatus vel
fibrillosus vel farinaceus, solidus, tabacino-brunneus vel brunneo-pallidus. Sporae
obliquae, pallido-brunneae, 9-11-13 5-2-5:5. Cystidia acuminata basi inflata
vel ventricosa, 85 X ll». S.A—Kinchina.

578. Astrosporina emergens, n. sp.—Pileus ad 3 cm., ad 1:5 cm. procerus,
irregulariter lato-conicus, subfibrillosus vel subglaber, pallido-luteus. Lamellae
adnatae vel adnexae, confertae, pallido-brunneae. Stipes ad 2°5 cm., subcrassus,
ad basim sub-bulbosus, albus, deinde sub-brunneo-albidus. Sporac angulatae,
pallido-brunneae, 7°5 X 4p. Cystidia ampullaformia apicibus asperis, 25-37 &
13. S,A—Kinchina.

579. A. exigua, n. sp—Pileus ad 1-2 cm., convexus vel campanulatus, sub-.
fibrillosus, cinnamoneo-brunneus. Lamellae adnatae, subconfertae, subcinna~
moneae. Stipes 1°2 cm., subfibrillosus, albidus. Sporae nodosae, 8-8°5 p. Cystidia
pauca ampullaformia apicibus glabris. S.A—Hope Valley.

580. A. discissa, n. sp—Pileus 2°5 cm., convexus, umbonatus, perfibrillosus,
discissus, brunneus. Lamellae liberae, yentricosae, brunneae. Stipes 2°5 cm., sub-
tenuis, primitus subpruinosus deinde glaber, aequalis, ad basim sub-bulbosus,
albidus vel pallido-brunneus. Sporae nodosae, brunneae, 9X 6». S.A—Upper
Tunkalilla Creek.

581. A. imbricata, n. sp—Pileus ad 16 mm., convexus vel subconico-
campanulatus, fibritlis adpressis umbricatis, fusco-brunneus. Lamellae adnatae,
deinde secedentes, subconfertae, stibventricosae, fusco-brunneae. Stipes 16 mm.,

193

subtenuis, aequalis, infarctus, fibrillosus, pallido-brunneus. Caro pilei pallida,
stipis sub-brunnea. Sporae angulatae, 9-11 < 5-5 uw. S.A.—Kinchina.

582. Flammula punctata, n. sp.—Pileus 2 cm., convexus, interdum sub-
umbonatus, dum humido viscidus, rubro-fulvo-brunneus. Lamellae adnatae vel
emarginato-adnatae, subconfertae, _pallido-cinnamoneae. Stipes 1°8-2°-5 cm,
tenuis, solidus, pallidus squamoso-fibrillis fuscis, carne subcartilaginea. Sporae
obliquo-ellipticae, pallido-flavo-brunneae, 75X46. S.A—Back Valley, off
Inman Valley.

583. F. cincta, n. sp.—Pileus 1:2-3-1 cm., convexus, deinde planus, denique
repandus, dum humidus viscidus et ceraceo-brunneus, hygrophanus, exsiccatus
carneo-lutaceus, primitus ex velo albo-farinaceus. Lamellae adnatae vel adnato-
decurrentes, subconfertae, subangustae, primitus minute serratae, pallido-cinna-
moneae deinde brunneo-cinnamoneac. Stipes 2:5-3-1 cm., subtenuis, aequalis vel
infra attenuatus, sub-bulbosus, subfarinaceo-fibrillasus, subcavus, albidus deinde
sub-brunneo-albidus. Primitus velo universali albido farinaceo. Sporae ellip-
ticae, pallido-brunneae, 8-8°5 x 4:5 uw. In ligno carioso cum mycelio albido agelu-
tinante. S,A—Back Valley, off Inman Valley.

584, F. brevipes, n. sp—Pileus, 5-6-7 cm., irregulariter convexus, repandus,
ochraceo-fulvus vel fulvus. Tamellae adnatae, stbconfertae, ventricosae, 10 mm.
latae, ochraceo-fulvae vel fulvae. Stipes perbrevis, 18 mm., striatus, brunneo-
fibrillosus, pallido-flavus. Sporae obliquae, flavo-brunneae, 9 X 5°5 py, rariter
11-5 7-5. In terra. S.A.—Kalangadoo,

985. Naucoria arenacolens, n. sp,—Pileus 2°5-4-4 cm., convexus, deinde
expansus, subirregularis, innato-fibrillosus, “Sayal Brown.” Lamellae sinuatae,
subconfertae, perventricosae, 3-5 mm, latae, marginibus pallidioribus et minute
serratis, tabacino-brunneae. Stipes 2°5-3+7 cm., subcrassus (8-10 mm.), aequalis,
fibrillosus, solidus, subcarneo-alutaceo-pallidus. Sporae pallido-brunneac, elon-
gatae, 9°5-13 & 44. S.A—Encounter Bay.

586. Psalliota vinacea, n. sp-—Pileus ad 10 em,, € conico-hemispherico con-
vexus, deinde expandens, fibrillis vel fibrilloso-squamis adpressis, cinnamoneo-
cinereus vel vinaceo-brunneus. Lamellae liberae, subconfertae, primitus pallidae,
deinde pallido-vinaceo-cervinae, Stipes 7°5-8°7 cm., crassus (1-2 cm.), fibrillis
floccosis, interdum ad basim sub-bulbosus, solidus vel subcavus, albidus. Velum
album. Annulus amplus, subdistans, Caro sub-brunnea. Sporae purpureo-
brunnea, 5°5 & 3-5. Sub Eucalyptus. S.A —National Park.

987, Panaeolus paludosus, n, sp—Pileus 4:3 cm.,, conico-hemisphericus,
deinde convexus, glaber, subrivulosus, fuscus, medio exsiccato pallidiore ad peri-
pherem zonatus. Lamellae adnexac, subconfertae, ventricosae, nubilo-cinereae,
Stipes ad 10 cm., tenuis, subflexuosus, subpruinosus, subfibrillosus, subcavus,
infra fuscus, supra pallidior, Sporae limoniformes, subnigrae, 10-11 X75. In
terra paludosa. S.A—Mount Compass.

588, Russula persanguinea, n. sp.—Pileus 3-10 cm., subconvexus medio con-
cavo, denique interdum subrepandus, usitate ad peripherem substriatus vel
tuberculo-rugosus, viscidus, sanguineus, Lamellae adnexae, ad stipem attenuatae,
aequales, raro furcatae, subangustae (6 mm.), confertae, albae. Stipes 3°7-5 cm.,
crassus, glaber vel substriatus vel subrugosus, solidus vel cavus, albus. Caro
tenuis, fragilis, Sapor mitis vel sub-piperatus. Sporae verrucosae, albae, 7-5-
Ilp,9X 75 py. Cystidia in pileo acuminata basibus latis, 19-38 & 7S. S.A—
Mount Lofty, Morialta.

589. R. viridis, n. sp.—Pileus 5-6°2 em., convexus medio subdepresso, non-

striatus, pelle separabili, subviscidus, viridis. Lamellae aequales, ad stipem
attenuatae, subconfertae, angustae, interdum proxime stipem furcatae, cremaceo-

194

albae. Stipes 3-7-4°4 x 1-6 cm., subrugosus, infra inflatus, supra attenuatus vel
aequalis, solidus albus. Caro fragilis, alba. Sapor mitis. Sporae spherico-
pyriformes, subtiliter verrucosae, albae vel subcremaceo-alhae. 7°5-9 X 5°5-6°5 p.
Cystidia in pileo nulla. S.A—Mount Lofty.

590. Coprinus arenacolens, n. sp.—Pileus 4:4 cm., subhemisphericus, deinde
convexus, striatus, pallido-brunneus. Lamellae adscendentes, subadnexae, latae,
cinereae, Stipes 3-7-15 cm., crassus, stirsum attenuatus, substriatus, fibrosus,
solidus, annulo aspero elevato distante, albidus deinde substramineo-albidus.
Sporae ellipticae, nigrae, 13-17 X75». In arena pura, 5S.A—Davenport
Creek (E.P.). ,

591. C. virgulacolens, n. sp.—Pileus 1°2-2°5 em., 16 mm. altus, cylindrico-
conicus ad lato-conicus, deinde se expandens, membranaceus, disco glabro sub-
convexo fusco, striato-plicatus, pallido-furfuraceo-granulosus, cinereo-brunneus.
Lamellae subadnexae vel adnatae, primum adscendentes, confertae, angustae,
albidae, deinde purpureo-brunneae. Stipes 3°7-6°2 cm., granulosus et striatus,
deinde glaber, concavus, sub-bulbosus, albus. Caro pertenuis, brunnea. Sporae
obliquae, fuscae, 7°5-9 », interdum 11 4-5,. Plantae in terra virgulis appli-
catae. S.A.—Mount Lofty.

592. Dictyolus australis, n. sp.-—Planta alutaceo-brunnea. Pileus spathu-
latus vel flabelliformis, 6 mm. latus et longus, glaber, interdum subsulcatus.
Lamellae decurrentes, subdistantes, furcatae, marginibus crassis. Stipes 6 mm.,
lateralis, deorsum subattenuatus, glaber. In terra muscosa. S.A—Kuinchina.

593. Paxillus psammophilus, n. sp.—Pileus 8°7 cm., flabelliforme-dimidiatus,
subfibrillosus, deinde rimosus, brunneus. Lamellae decurrentes, confertae, ad
stipem reticulatae, sub-brunneae. Stipes brevis (2°5 cm.), sublateralis, tenuis,
radice longa angusta. Sporae elongatae, albae, 13-13°5 X 4p. Inarena. S.A.—
Elliston.

ON MAMMALS FROM THE LAKE EYRE BASIN
PART I - THE DASYURIDAE

BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

The reappearance, of Caloprymnus campestris, in 1931 in the eastern portions of the Lake Eyre
Basin, was not an isolated episode in the history of the local mammals, but was rather the outcome
of causes largely connected with the passing of drought conditions, which by restoring herbage over
large denuded areas, led to a sudden marked increase in the numbers of most of the smaller
mammals and culminated in one of the now familiar migratory rodent plagues.

195

ON MAMMALS FROM THE LAKE EYRE BASIN.
PART L—THE DASYURIDAE.

By H. H. Frniayson,
Hon, Curator of Mammals, South Australian Museum.

[Read October 12, 1933.]

The reappearance of Caloprymnus campestris, in 1931, in the eastern
portions of the Lake Eyre Basin, was not an isolated episode in the history of the
local mammals, but was rather the outcome of causes largely connected with the
passing of drought conditions, which by restoring herbage over large denuded
areas, led to a sudden marked increase in the numbers of most of the smaller
mammals and culminated in one of the now familiar migratory rodent plagues.

While matters appertaining to Caloprymnus were the chief pre-occupation
of the writer while there, no opportunities were lost of obtaining a representative
collection of all the local mammals, and since my departure, several generous
correspondents have made important additions both of material and data.
For services in this connection I am particularly indebted to Mr. L. Reese,
to Mr. H. R. Adamson of Elder, Smith & Co., to Mr. Shelton, of Cordillo,
Master Dick Scobie, Constable John Finn, Mr. George Aiston and Mr. D. N.
Gcorge.

While the collections so formed fall far short of that necessary for an
adequate survey of the mammals of this remarkable area, they have brought to
light several new forms, and in other cases adequate scries of specimens have
enabled me to add to knowledge of animals, formerly obscure, owing to their
rarity in collections.

The area from which most of the data and specimens herein recorded were
derived, comprises the extreme north-eastern corner of the State of South Aus-
tralia, and may be approximately defined by producing the western and southern
boundaries of Queensland into South Australian territory until they meet, near
the south-eastern corner of Lake Eyre North. Within this square, again, work
was concentrated largely on the tracts between the Barcoo and Diamantina, which
for various reasons are more suitable for collecting.

Hitherto, collecting here has been of a desultory and incidental character and,
owing to the insignificance numerically, of its mammal population in normal years,
to the decline of the blacks and consequent loss of expert aid, and the rigours of
climate, the country is not one of many attractions to the mammalogist. It is,
nevertheless, an area of great interest ecologically and, on the rare occasions of
a resurgence of life, well repays the considerable amount of energy which one
must spend upon it in order to get results.

The Physical features of the area are highly characteristic, and together con-
stitute a type of environment distinct from other parts of the centre. Four main
physiographical units may be recognised which, to a slight extent, are valid also
as zones of distribution.

(1) Parallel sand ridges, usually north and south in direction and frequently
of great linear extent, but disposed in narrow belts seldom more than a mile or
so wide and frequently limited to a single ridge, which may extend unbroken for
20 or 30 miles. These long ridges are permanent and are, indeed, not sandhills

@) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol Ivi. (1932), pp. 148-167,

196

proper, but loamy elevations blanketed to varying depths with loose sand. Near
the east shores of the Lake, however, and south of the Barcoo, are true drifting
dunes with no firmer core,

(2) Loamy flats. These may take the form of long strips constituting the

-interspaces of the sand ridge belts or may be more extensive depressed areas or
basins, like Goyder’s lagoon. In the former case the surface supports small
herbaceous plants only, but in the latter there is usually a fairly dense growth of
the so-called lignum (Muehlenbeckia Cunninghanui), which sometimes attains
10 feet in height, and then constitutes the nearest approach to a thicket to be found
in the district.

(3) The gibber plains. In their surfaces these vary in texture from a loose
rubble, which may support a small bush flora, to closely arranged pavements from
which are excluded all but the grasses, which, however, are only in evidence after
heavy rains. In extent, they may range from a few acres, to huge expanses like
Sturt’s Stony Desert, extending 120 miles north and south and width up to 35
miles.

(4) The river channels, Although the first three types of country alternate
with one another so as to account for the greater part of the land surface, the river
channels of the Diamantina and Barcoo, while involving but trifling areas in their
normal courses, are, nevertheless, of interest as affording the only permanent
waters of the area and the only considerable belts of timber, their banks being
lined with Coolibah and Bauhinia, From the point of view of distribution these
features [orm a minor but sharply defined habitat zone, to which the single
aquatic and the single arboreal mammal of the area are exclusively restricted.

Away from the river channels, the whole surface, sandhills, flats and gibber
plains is characterised by excessive aridity and high temperatures throughout the
greater part of the year. The vegetation, which has been dealt with in detail by
Cleland, Black, and Reese, is sparse, made up almost entirely of very small
species, and so scattered as to leave the ground surface nearly naked. In spite of
this quantitative deficiency, however, there is a large percentage of good fodder
plants, and nominally the whole area is taken up for pastoral purposes, but this
enterprise is not carried on with sufficient concentration to affect the flora and
fauna appreciably, except in a few restricted localities.

The almost complete absence, away from the channels, of arborescent plants
or of species forming moderately compact communities, is a striking feature, and
the resulting absence of shade and shelter is, no doubt, largely responsible for the
elimination from the mammals, of almost all but strictly fossorial forms.

The conditions mentioned impose upon the arca a strongly developed eremian
character, which, however, is curiously modified in certain parts from time to
time, by the flooding of tha Diamantina and Barcoo by rains in the Queensland
hills, 700 miles away. At such times large areas of the loamy flats contiguous to
the channels are inundated, and may remain so for weeks at a time. When the
water is absorbed herbage is quickly restored on a scale of unwonted lavishness,
which leads in turn to a corresponding increase in animal life, similar (if more
localized) to that which follows a general rain.

In the portions of the district remote from these influences, the prevailing
colour of the gibbers and the sand alike-is a rich ferruginous brown, but in the
flooded areas this becomes bleached to a pale drab. The flooded country is but a
small fraction of the total area of the Basin, but is, nevertheless, its chiet mamma!
station, and the colour change mentioned is a significant one in local bionomies,
since there is little doubt that the curious ochraceous pallor which distinguishes

@ Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., vol, xlix. (1925), p. 103.

197

the colouration of nearly all its small mammals, is a character adapted to the pre-
vailing tone of the landscapes.

The rivers have a further interest in that they tend in some measure to break
down the geographic isolation of the Basin, and they are, potentially at least, inter-
mittent lines of communication linking this portion of the Eremian Sub-region
with the Torresian half of the Euronotian belt. Although they are no longer
regular lines of migration so far as the mammals are concerned, it is probable that
two species of rodents gained access to the Lake Eyre Basin hy this route at no
very distant time.

SMINTHOPSIS CRASSICAUDATA CENTRALIS (Thomas),
“Nilee” of the Wonkonguroo.()

Ordinarily, apparently, an uncommon or even rare animal in the district, but
multiplying to an extraordinary extent during the mouse plagues of 1930-1932 and
following the migratory waves of Mus musculus from north to south throughout
the area. At the same time local increases in the numbers of the typical variety
took place in the settled districts, as for example at Mildura and Renmark on the
Murray.

There seems no reason for doubt that at these times it forsakes its ordinary
insectivorous habit and becomes truly carnivorous and predatory. Though I can-
not vouch personally for any instances of its killing mice, stories of its enterprise
and ferocity in so doing are admiringly told by blacks and whites alike. At the
height of the plague in 1931, Mr, Reese took scores of Nilees inadvertently in
improvised kerosene tin mouse traps, and when so catight it at once proclaims its
presence by its remarkably loud shrill hissing cry,

Throughout the summer of 1931 it lived in shallow burrows on all types of
country, but Mr. Aiston tells me that in the early part of 1932, at Mulka, while
breeding freely, it was found in nests on the surface. With the subsidence of the
mouse plagues it disappeared as suddenly as its prey, but the taking of specimens
from holes in the following winter, in a sluggish condition very different from its
usual vivacity, suggests that a partial hibernation may partly explain the mystery,
though attempts to induce hibernation in this and allied species, in captivity, have
met with no success.

The general colour of the type of the variety centralis, which came from
Killalpannina on the Barcoo, was stated by Thomas, to be a pale isabella finely
grizzled with brown, but the ground colour of the dorsum, in the present series
of 22, is remarkably inconstant, and varies from a curious brassy “olive buft”
through several shades of buffy grey to a rich vinaceous cinnamon. The differ-
ences do not appear altogether capriciously, however, but represent to some extent
at least, adaptations to the prevailing colour of the environment during periods
when the Swunthopsis population is stationary, The paler forms appear in the
bleached sandhill-claypan country near the channels, and the richer pink forms
in the red gibber plains.

From S. crassicaudata, as it occurs in the South-Eastern district of South
Australia (where it is more plentiful, normally, than elsewhere in the State), the
variety centralis differs markedly, not only in its brighter colouration but in some
structural features as well.

The bodily size is very variable in both localities, but the central form is
lighter in build and with longer limbs and appendages. The ear is not only pro-

(@) The aboriginal names quoted are, in most cases, those used by Wonkonguroo
hunters, but in many cases are not original to that people but have been borrowed from
the Yalliyandas, Yaurorkas and Dieries.

198

portionately much longer“ but is broader as well, and the total area of the pinna
is thus greatly increased. ‘he tip, moreover, is more sharply pointed and the
whole feature more prominent than in the south. The curious trizoned pigmenta-
tion of the epidermis of the ear, apparently characteristic of the species over the
whole of its range, is on the same pattern as in true crassicaudata but is much
more marked, as are also the similar pigmented areas on the mystical sites of the
muzzle. The tail is from 50-60% longer. Its incrassation in this species, in all
parts of South and Central Australia, is so variable as to render it useless as a
diagnostic feature, but in centralis its maximum development is greater than in the
southern form. In life the epidermis of the tail is pigmented a dark slate, but in
aleahol this fades rather quickly.

The manus shows little change, but the pes is larger; its naked granular
portion extends obliquely as a wedge-shaped strip from a point just proximal to
the hallux, to the bases of the nails. A feebly developed hallucal pad is some-
times present. The main interdigital pads are granular, but there is a distinct
tendency for the midline of their surfaces to be occupied by a single longitudinal
series of enlarged granules, whereas in the southern form the pads are more finely
granulated and without any regular arrangement of granules.©)

It has not been expedient to extract skulls from the whole series, but 6 have
been examined, and these would appear to indicate that in centralis the canine is
slightly longer, the disproportion in size of the premolars less, and the posterior
margins of the nasals more sharply angulated, than in the southern crassicaudata,
These differences are slight, however, and the chief skull measurements may be
merged with those of the southern animal,

The skull of one of the largest males gives:—Basal length, 23-3; zygomatic
breadth, 13:3; nasals length, 9-9; intertemporal, 4°7; palate length, 12°8; M*"®,
4:5,

In the series examined (22), males outnumber females by 2 to 1.

Mammae either 8 or 10.

The form of S. crassicaudata, which occurs in the south-east of South Aus-
tralia, may apparently be reconciled with the typical variety of Gould’s original
description. ‘The differences which separate it from centralis, over 1,000 miles
north in a very different environment, are so marked as to suggest the propriety of
separating the latter specifically from the earlier known animal,

In testing the grounds on which such a step might be taken, I have been led
to examine all the specimens in the South Australian Muscum (some 50 in all),
which come from intermediate and still more northerly localities. While there is
a considerable individual variation which is responsible for the occasional appear-
ance of similar individuals at widely sundered places, the chief result of this
analysis has been to reveal a steady change in colouration, and in the length of tail
and ear, as one proceeds from south to north, together with the retention, almost
unmodified, of skull characters, foot structure and pattern of markings.

The intergrading of the variable features is so complete as to leave little doubt
as to the derivative relations of the whole series, and anything more than sub-
specific distinctions are thus unjustified.

©) The form from the southern parts of the State was stated by Wood-Joncs to be
longer eared than that from more arid Northern districts (Mammals of S. Aust. vol. i,
p. 114). Iam unable to confirm this, however, by reference to the series preseryed here,
and the specimens from the Adelaide district, of which measurements are given, have a
proportionately much shorter ear than the form now under consideration (in the ratio of
14: 20:4).

©) Occasionally a single large granule may occur on the surface of the pad, but the
disproportion between it and its fellows is usually not great and it does not always occur
on the point of contact of the pad with the ground—it is an aberration, rather than a
functional specialization such as occurs in 5S. larapinta.

199

Beginning in the south-eastern district with a cold, ashy grey, short eared
and very short tailed form, there is, on coming north, a steady increase both of
the fulvous colours of the coat and of the length of ear and tail. In the northern
mallee, and on Yorke and Eyre Peninsula, distinctly yellowish forms are already
met with which, at Kooringa, Kingoonya, Copley and Farina, on saltbush table-
lands, change to a bright tan, noticeably long-tailed form, and the trend culminates
in the Macdonnell Range with the production of a brilliant ferruginous phase,“
with distinctly yellowish ventral fur and dimensions identical with those of the
Diamantina specimens.

In point of colour the pallid buff and vinaceous tones of the latter stand
somewhat apart from this sequence, and have obviously been developed in response
to the peculiar conditions of the Basin. If, therefore, the name centralis is retained
for the pallid form of this area, it will be necessary to accord an equal degree of
distinction to the richly-coloured variety which diffuses south from the Macdon-
nells and which is equally distinct from the true crassicaudata of' the south.

It may be called, provisionally, Sminthopsis crassicaudata ferruginea, but a
detailed diagnosis is deferred pending furthér investigation.

Mr. Troughton has recently called attention to the doubts which may arise
as to the specific uniformity of some small mammals which in the past have been
accorded very wide ranges in Australia. No doubt there is room for close scrutiny
sn all such cases, but it would be regrettable if an over-free use of specific names
were allowed to obscure the fact that several adaptable marsupials have succcss-
fully colonised huge tracts presenting a wide range of ecological conditions, with-
out undergoing important structural changes in so doing. That 5. crassicaudata
is one such, I hold to be certain.

Dimensions of S. crassicaudata centralis, in mm.
Mean of 13 g. Meanof7 9. Largest ¢. Largest 9.

Head and bod - - 70:9 74:0 83 83
Tail - - - - 70-1 67°3 66 64
Pes - - = - 16:0 15:3 16 15
Ear - - - - 2074 20°4 21 21

SMINTIOPSIS LARAPINTA (Spencer) (var. ?)
“Melatjhante.”

This species appears to be much less numerous than the “Nilee,” from which,
however, it does not seem to be distinguished by any important features of habits
or distribution, though it should be observed that such matters tend to be obscured
in a time of general increase. It was stated by Mr. Byrne that at Charlotte Waters
larapinta lives on the stony tablelands, and crassicaudata on the sandhills and
creeks.

In a superficial view it comes rather close to crassicaudata centralis, and
dorsal colour, face and ear-markings are almost exactly as in the intermediate
specimens of the latter. From this animal, however, it is sharply separated at all
stages of growth by its much longer tail, which exceeds the head and body by
25-30%, by the shorter, more rounded ear, and especially by the interdigital pads
of the pes which are always surmounted by a large oval tubercle, exceeding the
granules which surround it by 3 or 4 diameters. They are smooth or very
obscurely striate.

Mammae 8.

©) Co-existing, however, with duller individuals.

200

On comparing it with the typical larapinta described by Sir Baldwin Spencer
from Charlotte Waters, I have been able to support his description by examination
of a series of six in the South Australian Museum from an unknown locality,
and of four from the type locality, kindly made available by Mr. Brazenor, of the
National Museum, Melbourne. In the chief structural features, the correspon-
dence with the animal from the Lake Eyre Basin is close. The incrassation of
the tail and its resulting shape, however, are much less characteristic than Spencer
stipposed. In two examples from the Diamantina the tail is as slender as it is in
murina and in two others in which it is incrassated, it is not very differently
shaped from that of crassicaudata.

The hallucal pad of Spencer’s animal is not a prominent feature in the present
series, and the V-shaped smooth elevation surmounting the basal pad of the manus
is less sharply sculptured, and its arms tend to coalesce across the intervening
space. The differences in colouration between the two series are much the same
as those separating the forms of crassicaudata from the same localities ; i.¢., those
from the Lake Eyre Basin are paler, with a pure white rather than cream belly,
and the brown and tan shades of Spencer’s animal are here replaced by pinker
hues of ocraceous buff.

The skull of the Lake Eyre animal does not differ in any! constant way from
that from Charlotte Waters; it is strongly built and more denscly ossified than in
crassicaudata and in old specimens develops distinct crests; the disparity in size
of the premolars is also more marked, than in crassicaudata,

Dimensions of the largest g and @ examined:—Head and body, 90, 83;
tail, 110, 105; pes, 18-5, 17; ear, 18, 17.

The skull of the largest male gives :—basal length, 26°5; width, 25-2; nasals,
10-0; palate, 14-1; Ms13, 4-6,

Five specimens examined.

So little is known of the range of S.larapinta, and the few specimens examined
have come from such restricted areas, that I do not feel justified at present in
claiming the animal as a definite variety, though it is quite probable that such is
the case.

The probability of its occurrence in South Australia was pointed out by
Wood-Jones,‘*) but the above notice is the first definite record of the animal in
this State.

CHAETOCERCUS CRISTICAUDA HILLIERI (Thomas).
“Mudagoora.”

This beautiful dasyurid, which until now has been known from a single skin
in the British Museum, is apparently widely distributed in the arca, but during my
time there, was not plentiful. It makes its rather shallaw burrows chiefly in the
sandhill country, and although many were excavated, most af them proved to be
deserted, and only a single specimen was then obtained (at Cooncherie). Some
few months later, however, its numbers had greatly increased, and seven more
examples were forwarded by Mr. G. Aiston, from Mulka, and Mr. D.N, George,
from Puttaburra. Moreover, examination of the entire chaetocercus collection of
the South Australian Museum has brought to light further specimens taken in the
same district in 1905, so that altogether 16 have been available for examination.

In their pallid buff colouration, these agree very well with Thomas’ hillieri,
except that the under-surface of the tail is jet black for two-thirds its length and

These were probably obtained (together with some other Dasyurids) from Sir B,
Spencer, by exchange, by the late Mr, Zictz, and they probably represent part of the
original collection from Charlotte Waters.

() Mammals of S. Aust., vol. i, p. 111.

201

not simply “indistinctly darker,” as stated. In estimating its relation to the typical
cristicauda of the more westerly districts of the Centre, I have had an excellent
series of 104 examples of the latter from as far north as Tennant’s Creek, south to
Ooldea, and west to about 124 E. longitude, in Gibson’s Desert. Examination of
the whole of this material shows definitely that (1) all specimens reliably localised
in the Lake Eyre Basin show the hilliert pelage characters very constantly; (2)
west of the Basin, cristicauda is very variable, but is nearly always much darker
and more grizzled, and even its palest phases are more richly coloured and have a
more strongly contrasted tail base than in hillieri; (3) the two colour types do
not co-exist in any part of the range of the species as at present ascertained.

These results leave little doubt, therefore, that Thomas’ animal constitutes a
valid geographical race of constant pelage characters within the limited area to
the east of Lake, Eyre, from which it has so far been taken.

Structurally, the present form seems to be practically identical with the
western animal, or at least it presents a range of variation in structural features
which can be merged in that of the latter. When the skulls of the four largest
examples of hillieri, taken in the winter of 1932, are compared statistically with
a long series of adults of the western form, some small proportional differences
emerge; thus (1) the degree of intertemporal constriction is greater; (2) the
palatal vacuities are larger ; (3) the canine is longer; and (4) the molar dentition
is slightly weaker, than in typica. The differences are slight, however, and do not
afford sufficient grounds for founding specific distinctions upon, and the animal is
best regarded as a well-marked variety of Krefit’s species.

It does not seem to have been noted previously that the unworn canine of
chaetocercus usually carries a small but distinct cusp upon its posterior carinate
margin. The feature is reminiscent of that seen in some bats, and is present in
both sub-species.

With regard to dimensions, it is unfortunate that the almost incredible varia-
tion in adult size and to a lesser extent in proportions, which is especially charac-
teristic of Chaetocercus amongst the Central mammals, largely stultifies any
attempt to define the two forms by mensuration. The series of 7 males, taken
during the winter of 1932, are far larger and bulkier than any which I have
examined from the western areas, but that superior size is not a distingttishing
character of hillieri is proved, on the one hand by the fact that adults taken in 1905
are very much smaller than 1932 examples, and on the other by the existence of
Spencer’s record of a giant typica male from Charlotte Waters with a head and
body length of 220 mm., which greatly exceeds the largest of my hillerts.

Flesh Dimensions —Range of 8 4, taken in 1933: Head and body, 164-190;
tail, 113-130; pes, 34-37; ear, 26'5-28. Range of 4 8, taken in 1905 <®) Head
and body, 123-141; tail, 85-109; pes, 29-31; ear, 22-25.

Skull Dimensions——Range of 4 @ taken in 1932, followed by two @ taken
in 1905 :—

Basal length: 39°5-42:2, 35:3-37°1; zygomatic breadth: 28°2-30°3, 25°2-
25-8: nasals length: 14°3-16°0, 13-2-14; nasals breadth: 5°6-6°7, 4°5-5°0; con-
striction: 7*0-7°5, 7*1-7°2; palate length: 21°2-23-2, 20°0-20°5; palate breadth
outside M8: 14°1-15-0, 13-3-13-6; palatal foramina: 2°5-3-0, 2°5-2°8; palatal
vacuities: 6°5-7'0, 5°5; height of canine: 4-7-6°8, 45; Mst3; 8°2-8°8; 8°2-8°5;
Max. breadth of M®: 3-5-3'6, 3°5-3°6.

©) Although no females were taken in 1932, it is almost certain that differences in
dimensions shown are seasonal rather than sexual, In the western race sexual differences,
though present, are not very marked.

202

Sir Baldwin Spencer states“! that females of chaetocercus cristicanda ty pica
were much more plentiful than males, but this is not borne out by the results of
my own observation on this race, and in Aillieri the position is reversed, as of the
17 specimens now known, 12 are males, and, as mentioned, during the last period
of their plenty, only males were taken. Without more detailed knowledge of the
life histories and habits than is at present available, however, the determination of
sex ratios by simple examination of series of wild, caught specimens is not very
satisfactory.

During the rodent plagues, the animal appears to be almost entirely carnivor-
ous, and the stomach contents of all those examined consisted: largely of finely
comminuted fleshy matter with only a sparse representation of insect debris. Like
its larger relative Sarcophilus it crushes and ingests large quantities of bone, but
the fur which is commonly found in large quantitics in the stomach of the latter,
is conspicuously absent.)

DASYUROIDES BYRNEI PALLIDOR ( Thomas).
“Kaudri.”

Well known to both the settlers and blacks, but apparently a comparatively
rare form which has not participated in the general increase in numbers. No
specimen was taken, and the single example of the species in the South Australian
Muscum represents the darker typical race,

The Dieries, on the Barcoo, speak of a spotted animal, the Yikaura, which
was a rare form when they were boys, and which has not been seen for many
years; it was, no doubt, a Dasyurus species. With this exception no definite
accounts could be obtained of any other members of the family, though it is
probable that Antechinomys occurs here.

(9) Horn Expedition Reports, Mammalia, p. 25.
) Cf. Wood-Jones Mammals of S, Aust., pt. i., p. 108.

ON THE EREMIAN REPRESENTATIVE OF MYRMECOBIUS FASCIATUS
(WATERHOUSE).

BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

The status of Myrmecobius fasciatus beyond the south-western districts of Western Australia, which
until now have been considered to be its chief stronghold, has long been a matter of uncertainty. Its
presence in the centre was first established by the work of the Elder Expedition” but that it formerly
exended very much further south, almost, in fact, to the coastal districts of the State of South
Australia, is attested by the statements of Sir George Grey and the early settlers here, and confirmed
by the presence of specimens from the southern part of this State, in the British and South
Australian Museums. No definite records of the animal from the southeastern portions of its range
have been obtained for many years, and since most of this area is more or less closely settled, it is
also unlikely (as Wood-Jones has opined) that it still survives here.

203

ON THE EREMIAN REPRESENTATIVE OF MYRMECOBIUS FASCIATUS
(WATERHOUSE).

By H. H, Finzayson.
Hon. Curator of Mammals, South Australian Museum.

[Read October 12, 1933.]

The status of Myrmecobius fasciatus beyond the south-western districts of
Western Australia, which until now have been considered to be its chief strong-
hold, has long been a matter of uncertainty.

Its presence in the centre was first established by the work of the Elder
Expedition,“ but that it formerly exended very much further south, almost, in
fact, to the coastal districts of the State of South Australia, is attested by the
statements of Sir George Grey and the early settlers here, and confirmed by the
presence of specimens from the southern part of this State, in the British and
South Australian Museums. No definite records of the animal from the south-
eastern portions of its range have been obtained for many years, and since most of
this area is more or less closely settled, it is also unlikely (as Wood-Jones has
opined) that it still survives here.

Recent field work, by the writer, in the far north-west of this State (in a
typical eremian environment) has shown, however, that Myrmecobius still has a
wide distribution in the south-west parts of the centre beyond the limits of
pastoral settlement, and in some localities is by no means uncommon. It is
possible that these colonies actually link up with the far south-western ones in
Western Australia in a continuous band of distribution,@) and enquiry into these
and related matters is proceeding and will be dealt with later in a general account
of the LLuritja mammals.

But for the present, as an excellent series of the central animal is now avail-
able, comparisons have at once been made with a series from south-west Western
Australia, and these show that the former, while structurally identical with the
typical race, constitutes a distinct colour variety, which I propose to separate under
the name

MYRMECOBIUS FASCIATUS vat, RUFUS.

Size, apparently averaging slightly less than in the typical race, with which,
however, it agrees closely in all essential structural features, both external and
cranial. As the subspecies is founded entirely on pelage characters, it may be
sufficiently defined by listing the points in which it differs from the better-known
animal.

(1) The whole of the dorsum is more strongly suffused with rufous. This
is particularly noticeable on the crown of the head and the fore-part of the back,
where the colouration is constantly a rich uniform brick red (about Ridgway’s

© Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. xvi. (1892-1896), p. 154.

@) This is implied by le Souef (Wild Animals of Australia), who gives the range of
the animal as extending from “Port August to about the latitude of Perth.” But as no
detailed records of the species in the intermediate tracts seem to have been published, and
as much of the country is quite untouched so far as systematic collecting goes, I presume
that Mr. Je Souef, in this statement, is estimating the probabilities of the case, rather than

stating an ascertained fact.

204

orange rufous to Sanford brown) sparsely pencilled with pure white, but with-
out black hairs and presenting a very different appearance to the same areas in
the typical variety, where (even in the most richly-coloured specimens) these
parts are grizzled with white, red, and black,

(2) The transverse light bands of the posterior back may be either pure white
or cream and, as regard number, breadth and spacing, they show about the same
range of variation as in typicus, but in adults there is a constant difference in the
colour of the areas which they enclose. In the western form these areas culminate
in broad rump bands which are either dark grey or jet black, but in variety rufus
they are constantly a rich brown (about Ridgway’s Mars brown to bay). ‘This
colour is subject to marked change on long preservation in alcohol, and in the
longest kept examples (taken in 1903) the brown has faded to a ferruginous red,
scarcely differentiated from the colour of the foreback. Such examples show the
white bands traversing an almost uniform red field, and are strikingly different
from fresh examples of either race.

(3) In rufus, even in midwinter, the coat shows a much scantier under-
fur and, as a result, seems more adpressed and somewhat coarser.

(4) The outer surface of the ear is clothed with bright rufous hairs, from
base to tip, whereas in typicus the ear at the base has a fine grizzle of yellow and
black, grading out to pure black at the tip. A good distinction at all stages.

(5) The ventral surface is more variable than the dorsum, but is always
some shade of ochraccous tawny and never white as it frequently is in the typical
form.)

The colour is richer in young animals than in old.

(6) Colouration in the var. rufus is much more constant than in typicus.
All the examples obtained were almost exactly alike dorsally, whereas in the
south-west, even in much more restricted localities, scarcely two examples of
typicus can be got which are closely matched.

Sexual differences in colour and size are negligible.
Skull and dentition as is the typical form.

Dimensions —Range in apparently adult specimens of both sexes; head and
body, 200-270; tail, 130-170: pes, 44-47; ear, 25-29,

Skull Dimensions of the co-type M. 3061, 9 ; basal length, 53°8; greatest
breadth, 29-9; nasals length, 22:8; nasals greatest breadth, 12:5: nasals least
breadth, 3:2; intertemporal breadth, 18-0; interorbital breadth, 14-8; palate
length, 41-5; palate breadth outside M?#, 11-6; anterior palatal foramen, 3-0;
height of canine, 2-7; length of M® (worn), 1-7.

Co-types of Subspecies~—-Adult 9, South Australian Museum; registered
number, M. 3061 (skin and skull); and adult 9, South Australian Museum;
registered number, M. 3759 (alcohol),

Lype Locality—Mulga sand dunes, south and south-west of the Everard
Range, far north-west of State of South Australia.

Kange——-At present apparently not north of about 25° S. lat., nor east
of 132° 30’ E, long. To the south and west as yet undetermined. Formerly as
far south as Adelaide, and probably ranging east into the Victorian and New
South Wales mallee areas,

Seventcen individuals examined.

©) This was attributed by Thomas to fading, but is not necessarily so,

205

Although it is very likely that it intergrades with the typical variety in the
western portions of its range, this beautiful animal, the most brilliantly coloured
of all the marsupials, is so distinct in the type locality that it undoubtedly merits
recognition as a subspecies. Knowledge that the eastern forms of M yrmecobiuts
are redder than the western, seems to be due primarily to Major Thomas Mitchell,
upon whose meagre accounts Waterhouse“) founded the nomen nudum, Myrme-
cobius rufus.

The name was ignored by Thomas in the catalogue of 1888, although a
South Australian specimen was included in the British Museum collection at that
time, but was reintroduced by Wood-Jones, who in 1923 published a preliminary
description with figures of the skull, of South Australian specimens, from the
Murray and from near Adelaide.

In estimating the relation of the central animal to the south-eastern one
described by Professor Wood-Jones, I have had to rely for external characters
on a single mounted specimen taken in the Murray Scrubs in 1863, and for cranial
characters, on two very immature skulls. This material, though insufficient for a
proper comparison, seerns to me to indicate strongly that in this State the South-
eastern and north-western animals are one and the same, and that this form is not
specifically separable from that of the karri, jarra and wandoo belts of Western
Australia.

The three districts from which specimens have now been examined are widely
sundered and show considerable differences in climate and vegetation, but Myrme-
cobius, like its Ornithodelphian analogue Echidna, is apparently too strongly
committed to a specialized diet, which it finds almost unaltered over the whole
of its range, to make any structural response to such changes in physical
conditions.

My thanks are due to Professor Wood-Jones and Mr. L. G. Glauert for
valuable data and the loan of specimens.

@) Jardine’s Naturalists’ Library, Gol, ey (1855), p. 149.

GEOLOGICAL NOTES ON THE COCKATOO CREEK AND MOUNT
LIEBIG COUNTRY, CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC.

Summary

During the fourth and fifth Adelaide University and South Australian Museum Anthropological
Expeditions to Central Australia in August of 1931 and 1932, opportunities arose for making brief
geological and physiographical notes on the country traversed.

Apart from the work of the members of the Horn Expedition at Haast Bluff Range, the principal
geological observers who have made records of the areas discussed herein are Dr. Chas. Chewings
(1), who mapped the country from Ellery Creek to Mount Liebig, in 1885, and visited it on three
other occasions, and Mr. C. T. Madigan (2), who flew over the country south of Haast Bluff during
the course of his extensive researches in the country further east in the MacDonnell Ranges.
The country along the Overland Telegraph Line, which we also traversed, has been visited by many
geologists and has, therefore, not been referred to in much detail.

Acknowledgments are made of the assistance rendered by the various members of the Expedition,
especially to Dr. H. K. Fry, who discussed many of the problems in the field. Dr. Chewings
courteously supplied all possible information concerning his observations. The officials of the
Property and Survey Branch, Department of the Interior, Canberra (under the supervision of Mr. P.
Hossfeld), compiled a map from the then available records for the use of the 1932 Expedition.

We are indebted to Sir Douglas Mawson, Professor of Geology, Adelaide University, and to
Mr. C. T. Madigan, for advice and criticism and for the loan of some equipment for the use of the
Expeditions. Examination of, and comparative work on, the materials gathered was partly carried
out in the Geological Laboratory of the University.

The anthropological researches of the University and Museum were assisted by a grant from the
Australian National Research Council.

As in previous accounts the native names have been used, wherever possible, for unnamed physcial
features.

206
GEOLOGICAL NOTES ON THE COCKATOO CREEK AND

MOUNT LIEBIG COUNTRY, CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

By Norman B. Tinpate, B.Sc.

[Read April 13, 1933.]

PLATE UX.

Page
I]. Istropuctrion a 43 ra fap a i 206
II. Hann RANGE To Ceanhnoa Cae, 1931 Ne 7 206

III, Nores on THE ForMATIONS oF THE HANN Rawr: Cosiearon "Canis
AREA % .. ae , 7 a 210
TV. Partsnta SPRINGS TO Sguait ‘tiene? 1932 ae . oz, on 211
V. Notes on THE Formations oF Mountr LieEBIG AND Vtereriy 3 “ts 215

Tr. INTRODUCTION,

During the fourth and fifth Adelaide University and South Australian
Museum Anthropological Expeditions to Central Australia in August of 1931
and 1932, opportunities arose for making brief geological and physiographical
notes on the country traversed.

Apart from the work of the members of the Horn Expedition at Haast Bluff
Range, the principal geological observers who have made records of the areas
discussed herein are Dr. Chas. Chewings (1), who mapped the country from
Ellery Creck to Mount Liebig, in 1885, and visited it on three other occasions,
and Mr. C. T. Madigan (2), who flew over the country south of Haast Bluff
during the course of his extensive researches in the country further east in the
MacDonnell Ranges. The country along the Overland Telegraph Line, which we
also traversed, has been visited by many geologists and has, therefore, not been
referred to in much detail.

Acknowledgments are made of the assistance rendered by the various
members of the Expedition, especially to Dr. H. K. Fry, who discussed many of
the problems in the field. Dr. Chewings courteously supplied all possible informa-
tion concerning his observations. The officials of the Property and Survey Branch,
Department of the Interior, Canberra (under the supervision of Mr. P. Hoss-
feld), compiled a map from the then available records for the use of the 1932
Expedition.

We are indebted to Sir Douglas Mawson, Professor of Geology, Adelaide
University, and to Mr. C. T. Madigan, for advice and criticism and for the loan
of some equipment for the use of the Expeditions. Lxamination of, and com-
parative work on, the materials gathered was partly carried out in the Geological
Laboratory of the University.

The anthropological researches of the University and Museum were assisted
by a grant from the Australian National Research Council.

As in previous accounts the native names have been used, wherever possible,
for unnamed physcial features.

[f. HANN RANGE TO COCKATOO CREEK, 1931.

The Expedition left Alice Springs early in August and travelled along the
main “Darwin track” to Hann Range. The geology of this strip of country, and,

207

to some extent, of the Reynolds Range, is known, and need not be considered in
any great detail. Some particulars that were gathered are noteworthy. Boulders
of ilmenitic grit are present on the plain about one quarter of a mile south of
Hann Range, and these apparently indicate a junction of the Hann Range con-
glomerate beds with the underlying Archaean granite gneisses and schists. Dr.
Chewings mforms me that “greenish-blue slates underlie the Hann Range sand-
stones, grits, etc. A well was sunk in these slates, 50 or more fect deep, on the
south side of and close to the Native Well Gap. One mile south of this Gap is a
large area of granite with a waterhole.” Specimens have been examined which
indicate that this junction extends along the south side of Hann Range and its
continuation westward in the Stuart Bluff Range, to beyond West Bluff, and
suggests that these hills are the southern marginal beds which form a shallow
synclinal fold, the Ngalia Syncline, which varies from eight miles in width at the
place where we crossed it to thirty miles further west, and which may extend
east and west for some 120 miles, namely, from Hann Range nearly to Mount
Davenport. The conglomerate beds at Hann Range consist of a fine arkose sand-
stone, containing quartz pebbles, up to 10 mm. in diameter. Capping the con-
glomerate is a medium-grained white sandstone, somewhat felspathic, which is
deeply ferruginised where it has been exposed to weathering. Beyond Ryan Well
there are three alternative routes to Cockatoo Creek. The particular one followed
turns westward along the southern flank of Mount Boothby (Iritjapunja), and
then northward to the Woodforde Well, on the Woodforde Creek. at a soakage
water called Ilyawa. During the return journcy a track passing along the north
and east sides of Mount Boothby was followed. The debris in Woodforde Creek,
coming down from the north-eastern face of the Reynolds Range, consists of
mica-schists and quartz-schist.

From Ilyawa the track goes west for fifteen miles, skirting along the northern
flank of the Reynolds Range. This range extends in an almost unbroken line
from Mount Airy in the south-east to Mount Gardiner in the north-west. A
parallel range running from east of Mount Finnis to beyond Mount Stafford
forms the northern side of an almost straight valley, which continues for fifty
miles in a north-westerly direction between these two ranges. The Mount Finnis
Range is composed of mica-schist, hornblende-schist, and highly metamorphosed
quartzite (or quariz schist), whose planes of schistosity dip at a high angle (70°)
to the north-east.

Isolated outcrops of gneissic granite are present on the headwaters of the
Hanson, which we crossed as we travelled in a north-westerly direction to Rembi
Soak, near the southern face of Mount Finnis. A few miles further north-west
the track winds up and around schistose outcrops and granite rises to the top of
a low divide, the Lander-Hanson divide, which leads across to the head-
waters of the Lander Creek. On the return journey a brief opportunity enabled
a visit to be made nearly to the crest of the Mount Finnis Range.

The Lander Valley is occttpied by a portion of a granite batholith, of which
the Mount Finnis Range metamorphic series marks the north-eastern margin.
Roof-pendants of schist and augen-gneiss occur. ‘She intruded rocks are
apparently highly altered sediments. Quartzites or grits appear to have been
ironed out into flat laminae; mica-schist, amphibolites and augen-gneisses are
also present, and these are intruded by coarse pegmatite and microgranite dykes.
Similar aplites, microgranites and pegmatites occur as dykes in the granite a few
miles west, near Lokatja Soak,

Some fifteen miles north-west of Lokatja the track leaves the western bank
of the Lander and turns W. 10° S. towards a two-mile-wide wind-gap which
appears in the Giles Range. Passing through this a broad vista is obtained of

208

the headwaters of the Warburton Creek. To the south-east the Mount Reynolds-
Mount Thomas Ridge is seen to terminate rather abruptly in Mount Gardiner.
A low range, decreasing in importance to the south-cast, laps against the north-
eastern face of the main Mount Thomas Ridge. To the west of the wind-gap
this low range becomes higher and, as the Giles Range, continues W. 30° N. for
at least twenty miles. The Warburton Creek cuts through the Giles Range some
ten miles to the west.

The beds forming Giles Range are micaceous shales, laminated gritty shales,
micaceous sandstones, and coarse quartzites, probably aggregating several thousand
fect in thickness. They dip N. 30° E. at an angle of approximately 60°, and
maintain a similar strike and dip for at least 15 miles to the north-west. They
also extend south-castwards as far as Mount Thomas. The base of these beds
is obscured by alluvium where we crossed them, but a quarter of a mile south-
west of the Gap gneissic granite, containing large porphyritic crystals of ortho-
clase, is present as a peneplaned pavement, and these conditions were noted to
continue at intervals thereafter nearly to Coniston Station.

During the return journey the following section of beds, listed in descending
order, was examined while climbing to the top of the Giles Range at the Wind-
gap, and the thicknesses were then estimated :-—

Feet.
Purple shales with some thin quartzites, etc. .. .. 500+
Hard quartzite (forms crest of range) .. on .. 20
Sandstone ee Ay v4 oe “ ut .. 80
Hard quartzite é. "3 sb 5: = .. 10
Coarse sandstone ai on os Pi .. 90
Indurated micaceous sandstone .. | r .. 100
Gritty sandstone et A a of: a .. 100
Micaceous shales es 4. a a b .. 400
Finely laminated gritty shale +2 “5 7 .. 30
Shale .. or es rr - 50+
Uncontormity

Gneissic granite

To the north of the main ridge the purple shales gradually die away into the
Lander Plain, being supported by some minor harder quartzite beds which were
not examined.

The Giles Range Series appears to be a narrow down-faulted block of some-
what metamorphosed sediments younger than the highly metamorphic Archaean
rocks intruded by the granite. The course of the Lander down to the Warburton
junction appears to mark a fault-line, for everywhere to the north of the line
are gneisses and schists of the Archaean metamorphic series.

From the top of the Giles Range, Mounts Denison, Leichhardt, and Stafford
appear as massive blocks to the north. Mount Stafford marks the western
extremity of the Mount Finnis Range just before it dies away opposite the Lander-
Warburton junction.

Coniston Station is situated at the Mamba soakage water on Warburton
Creek, in the centre of a wide peneplane. The creek is half a mile wide at the
station and the banks are some forty feet high, composed of consolidated river-
wash conglomerate and alluvium. The junction of Tower Creek with the main
stream is about a mile up-stream from Coniston. The tributary is bringing down
dark-blue quartz-schist, muscovite-granite and hard sugary-quartzite boulders and
pebbles from the region immediately to the south of the Mount Gardiner-Mount
Thomas Range. The contributions of the Warburton, which flows from the south

209

and south-west, are largely granitic in character, with some quartzites of the type
found at Hann Range.

Some six miles south-west of Mamba is Crown Hill, an isolated table-topped
hill with a massive horizontally bedded quartzite capping. Crown Hill stands
460 feet above the plain and is an outlier of the Uldirra (or Sliding Hill) Range
further south, where the same beds dip, at an angle of 40° southward, beneath
the plain. Beyond Crown Iill, on the far southern horizon, is the long line of
bluffs that constitute the Stuart Bluff Range. Stuart Bluff Range is cut across
at remarkably regular intervals by wide consequent valleys. The Sliding Hill
Range (Uldirra) marks the present watershed-divide of the two inland drainage
basins represented by the Lander and Lake Bennett depressions.

From Coniston the track goes west to Brooke Soak, crossing Crown Creek
after five miles. Debris in this creek consists of pebbles of gneiss, quartzite and
sandstone. Low granite outcrops appear at intervals on the plain, and elsewhere
that rock is evidently only thinly covered by a mantle of alluvium. Four miles
east of Brooke Soak there is a small hill about 100 feet in height composed of
vertically-bedded white quartzite and green amphibolite, striking east and west.
This appears to be an indurated roof pendant of Archaean metamorphosed sedi-
ments. Just west of Brooke Soak are the twin peaks of Mount ‘treachery, stand-
ing about 1,000 feet above the plain (this mount is locally known as Naval
Action). The southern side of Mount Treachery is composed of highly meta-
morphosed sericitic schists; five miles further west similar beds strike a little
south of west, and dip northward at 60°. Para-gneiss and highly altered
quartzites are present. To the south there is a low massive granite dome, barely
denuded of sedimentary covering, which extends for ten miles east and west and
is probably at least five miles wide. The track follows a low, narrow plain (cut
in schistose rocks), which lies between the granite and the Mount Treachery beds.
An unnamed consequent creek drains the northern side of the granite and cuts
its way northward through the Mount Treachery Range near this point.

After crossing Inga Creek, which also drains the northern side of this granite
region, the track passes a gigantic highly altered white quartzite outcrop, forming
an oval hill two hundred feet high and a quarter of a mile long. Soon afterwards
it reaches Aknatalya Soakage, on Cockatoo Creek (22° 10’ south lat. x 132° 5’
cast long.). A well had just been sunk here, near the site of the native soakage.
The Expedition Base-camp was placed on the banks of the creek a hundred yards
south-east of a low hill, composed of kyanite schist, which, to the native mind,
represents the petrified ancestral kangaroo man of Aknatalya, A hill (situated a
mile west of the camp) which is some 400 feet in height is also composed of
kyanite schist, striking a little south of west. A mile south of the camp, across
a red-soil plain, porphyritic granite, somewhat gneissic in character, outcrops in
low domes; further north the plain is composed of schists and para-gneisses.
Granite extends beneath the plain and is exposed at intervals to Ponjina, north-
west of Quartz Ilill (Yaluwa), where futile effort has been made by a prospective
station-owner in blasting out a well through 40 feet of it. Rather fresh examples
of biotite-granite were secured here. Large black tourmalines are present in
quartz-pegmatites in the vicinity, but were not found in situ.

The country immediately south of Quartz Hill was visited by one of the
Expedition members, who reported that there were low granite outcrops on the
plain and that some five miles further south there was a low range with a
northern scarp. Viewed from the top at Aknatalya, this ridge was seen to trend
away west towards the Treuer Range, and it is evidently identical with the Mount
Eclipse Range of Warburton. The granitic country extends westward to beyond
Rock Hill. A visit to the low hills five miles north-west of the Base-camp revealed
a ridge of para-gneiss, flanked by schists, on the adjacent plain.

210

Ill. NOTES ON THE FORMATIONS OF THE HANN RANGE-
COCKATOO CREEK AREA.
The following geological series appear to be represented in the areca between
Hann Range and Cockatoo Creek :—

A. Metamorphic series, of Archacan age.

8. Granites intruded into the Archaean rocks.

C. Giles Range series. These are tentatively considered to be of Older
Proterozoic Age, and may represent the northern equivalents of
the Pertaknurra series as defined by Mawson and Madigan (3)
and by Madigan (4).

D. Hann Range-Uldirra Hill-Crown Hill series of tmmetamorphosed
quartzites, arkose grits and conglomerate.

E. Consolidated grits and recent fluvial deposits of Mamba plain, Ngalia
plain, and the Lander Valley.

The grain of the country runs south-east to north-west from Mount Boothby
to Mount Thomas, after which it swings around gradually to the west until at
Cockatoo Creek the axis is approximately W. 5° 5. Ona previous journey it was
observed that east of the Velegraph Line the trend of the tectonic axis 1s south-east

GEOLOGICAL INFORMATION + — A Wi, B SS ¢ ANY D

TRACK OF EXPEGITIDN e-em eee

MILES
senine o 5s 0 15
a 1 O

2
KILOMETRES

irinvsa
+ huauaa

through the country near, and to the north of, the Strangways Ranges, where it
turns eastward again along the trend of the Hart Range. In a previous paper (5)
mention was made of the occurrence of granite stocks and granite-porphyry
dykes, on the Archaean plateau of the Waite, Fraser, and Bundey Creeks.

‘Phe Archaean metamorphic rocks in the vicinity of the granite intrusions in
the Cockatoo Creek area appear to have developed marked peripheral schistosity.

The granite intrusions preceded the formation of the Giles Range beds, for
these were laid down on a peneplaned surface of granites, gneisses and schists, in
a similar manner to the basal beds of the Mopunja Range 170 miles further east.

211

Few lithological similarities can be traced between the Giles Range sediments
and the Pertaknurra series as seen at Heavitree Gap, but there are similarities
with the basal beds of the Mopunja Range, namely, in the presence in both of
freely alternating beds of shale, gritty sandstones and quartzites, and in the
presence of purplish shales, but they differ in the comparative absence of the
felspathic grits in the case of the Giles Range series,

The Hann Range series is less metamorphosed and has been less intensely
folded and faulted than the Giles Range series. It may therefore be tentatively
suggested that they are younger than the Giles Range and the earliest beds of the
Mopunja Range,

IV, PAINTA SPRINGS TO MOUNT LIEBIG, 1932.

Leaving the Telegraph Line at the top of Alice Springs Pass, we turned
westward and skirted along the northern side of the MacDonnell Range. Archaean
rocks of the Aruntan complex here rise almost vertically from the level pene-
planed Burt Plain, and run due east and west for over a hundred miles. In places
where granite forms the northern face of the range the red soil extends right up
to the steep face without a very appreciable slope, so that it is possible to drive
for miles within a few feet of the rock-face or even to stand with one foot on -
the flat plain and the other on an almost vertical granite wall. Gneissic granites,
intruding hornblende schists, are the predominating rock types. An association
of a greenish epidotised siliceous rock (probably an altered sediment) with horn-
blende-schist is characteristic of the vicinity of Painta Springs, and the two types
reappear together over one hundred and fifty miles to the westward, on the
northern slopes of Mount Liebig. The schists occur as planed-off surface out-
crops on the plain, and in that form extend northward from the steep walls of
the main range for many miles. In places they form ridges as in the low Adla
Range, which runs parallel to the main range and joints with the Mount Hay
Range further west.

A bore recently put down by the Works Department indicates that a con-
siderable thickness of unconsolidated sediments may exist in the eastern portion
of the Burt Plain, for, on a site about a mile north of the range, opposite Mount
Everard, subartesian water has been obtained, without reaching bed-rock, at a
depth of 678 feet. This bore passed through about twenty feet of surface lime-
stone, beneath which were only unconsolidated sands and silts, A bed of argilla-
ceous lignite was met with near the bottom of the well. Dr. Chewing’ states that
the Lower Manson is a similar valley-like depression, filled with sediments.

After skirting the head-waters of the Charley Creek the track passes north-
west across a wide alluvial plain to the Mount Hay Well (and Dam), on Hamilton
Downs Station. Here again a depth of about 100 feet of soft sediments, prin-
cipally arkose sand and silt has been proved. Mount Hay Range is 800 feet
above the plain, and runs east and west for more than 25 miles. A low flat-
topped shelf, about 50 feet in height, skirts its south-western flank where it is
truncated by the wide channel of the Charley Creek. According to Dr. C.
Chewings the shelf is composed principally of white calcareous sandstone and
limestone and is evidently of fluviatile origin. It is, geologically, quite young—
perhaps Pleistocene or Pliocetie. IL may represent the uppermost portion of the
sediments that fill the ancient depressions, or valleys, in which freshwater wells
are obtainable over the schist area of the Arunta shield.

West of Mount Hay Well the road crosses a broad flood-plain, swampy in
parts, and then returns to the foot of the main range. Near Redbank Station,
due south of the Mount Chapple Range, there is a low divide of Archacan schists
separating the watersheds of the Charley and Halleem Creeks. Mount Chapple
Range strikes west for fifteen miles from the western side of the Charley Creek,

212

oc #2 vuseHOY

|
ee ; NAA,

AY
;
a

| HSuvVld LIvg

NIVId JHNG

Ssuvo Lyasad

any XAZINIgS

ay

>;

(390324 ‘LW)
VaVANINWH

Piwiosan ‘LW

CO
Mi) a ;

i Mi eee
[LES NN SS en ae

bi
ue

i
Uy

(ada L1ys)
LLINNIGD

ot 5 °

(GaLVDIGNI LON) G

“sy Ez]3 mad Wo Yyv
W3Ad dA

ne 7 hima SYOLLVIWHOINI 1¥9190103D

ion, where a brief

ite Redbank Stati

Oppos
the rocks were Archaean gneisse

and then veers away to the north-west.

Mount
After cross-

d schists.

5S an

200 feet above the plateau.

+

ble
standing probably some l,

possi

examination was
Chapple is high,

213

ing the Halleem, the track continues west-north-west for many miles over a
featureless plain, largely covered with dense mulga scrub. The north side of
Mount Zeil appears from a distance as a solid mass of gneiss or gneissic-granite,
rising abruptly from the flat sandy plain. The Dashwood Creek comes out of the
Mount Zeil Range from the south-west as a considerable gum-creek carrying
gneiss and schist pebbles and coarse arkose sand, After leaving the Dashwood
the track passes closely along the northern face of the Mount Heughlin Range,
which also rises steeply from the plain. A noteworthy feature here and at Mount
Zeil is the absence of defined drainage from the steep northern slopes. To the
north is a vast level mulga-covered plain, extending without a break to central
Mount Wedge, forty miles north-west.

A low wind-gap near the western extremity of the Mount Heughlin Range
yields a passage to the south side; the paragneiss of this range strikes west and
has a plane of schistosity 80° north.

Across the wide detritus filled valley of the Darwent Creek the high Haast
Bluff Range stands over 2,000 feet above the plain. It runs east and west and has
three principal peaks. Colonel Warburton (6, 7), on May 2, 1873, supposed the
eastern one of these peaks to be Haast Bluff, and on July 2, 1873, W. C. Gosse (8)
saw the western one and identified it as the mountain which Giles had named.
Giles himself seems to have seen the western portion of the range from Mount
Tate on September 15, 1872, and named it the Liebig Mountains, Ever since
Warburton’s and Gosse’s time the range has been known as the Haast Bluff
Range, the western mountain as Gosse’s Haast Bluff and the eastern as Warbur-
ton’s Haast Bluff. The western summit is the highest and is marked as Haast
Bluff on the latest small-scale map (North and Central Australia Pastoral Map,
December 11, 1930). In the present account the native names Injala and Ulam-
baura are used, respectively, for the eastern and central peaks. This is the Belt
Range of the Horn Expedition, in which account the three peaks are named, respec-
tively, as Mounts Edward, William, and Francis, but the old name holds sway.
From the Mount Heughlin wind-gap the track leads southward for six miles to
the Darwent, crossing where low banks and a bar of gneissic rock, with a plane of
schistosity 80° N. facilitates a passage across the Darwent Creek, Further down
stream the creek flows: between vertical walls of alluvium up to thirty feet in
height. At the crossing a small tributary from the east brings down gneiss and
schist pebbles from the low ranges to the east and south-east. The main creek
is loaded with debris, which includes para-gneiss, schist, purplish felspathic grits,
fine-grained quartzites, and quartzites containing fragments of undetermined
fossil Pelecypods.

An examination of the talus at the base of Injala Bluff, and an ascent of
the front of the range to a height of some 800 feet above the plain, showed that
the cap on the Injala mountain of the Haast Bluff Range is composed of a con-
siderable thickness (some 500-600 feet) of purplish laminated felspathic
quartzite. The quartzite beds dip north at about 30°. Tate and Watt (9)
described this considerable and relatively horizontal capping of sandstone and
quartzite, and considered it to be of Ordovician age. Chewings (10) regards. it
as much older. It rests on a massive pedestal of para-gneiss and schists whose
plane of schistosity is 65° N. A six feet wide snow-white quartz-felspar
pegmatite dyke is a conspicuous feature in the gneisses at the eastern extremity of
Injala. The view to the south from this point shows the continuous line of the
Mount Musgrave Ridge, or ranges, across the horizon. Viewed from this direc-
tion the vertical northern scarp of these steeply dipping Larapintine quartzites,
as described by Madigan, closely resembles a vast flat-topped tableland, and it is
so described on a recent map. Nearer at hand is Yanyali Ridge, the capping of
which, as indicated by Chewings, is a detached segment of the Pertaknurra

214

quartzite. Beyond Halcomb Creek there appears to be, a broad and low shelf
about one hundred feet high, which extends nearly to the foot of the Mount
Musgrave Ridge. From Injala the track goes north for six miles across clay-
pans and flood-flats of the Darwent Creek, and then turns west-north-west over
a wide, shallow sand-plain, studded here and there with low ridges of para-gneiss
and schist, with westerly trend, The dip of the plane of schistosity here is less.
approximating to 45° N. at the places examined. After crossing the Ulambaura,
Hunter, and Bean-tree Crecks (which drain the northern scarp of Haast Bluff
Range and spread out and lose themselves on the northern plain), the track skirts
the relatively low but extensive Mount Larrie Range, which is principally com-
posed of granitic gneiss. Here the track follows along the crest of the first of
a series of sand dunes which run parallel to, and north of, the range.

These low east and west running sandhills are a characteristic physiographical
feature of the country for many miles north and for over one hundred miles in an
east to west direction. They are approximately one mile apart, and from thirty
to fifty feet high, covered with spinifex and low mallce scrub, with desert oaks
(Casuarina Decaesniana) in patches. ‘The ascent on to the sand ridges is usually
gradual; there may or may not be a moving crest of loose sand, The country
between them is densely covered with mulga scrub. The dunes form a belt from
15 to 20 miles wide and are succeeded on the northern side by claypans, broken
limestone flats, and terraces, indicating a former extension of the terminal drainage
basin (Lake Bennett). At its maximum this dry salt lake must have been over
one hundred miles long and not less than fifteen wide. At present the drainage
into it from the higher country is insufficient to maintain defined channels across
the sand barriers. Yaya Creek, which we now approached, is typical of numbers
of these flood channels, which fan out and lose themselves in the dunes soon after
they leave the schist platforms at the foot of the ranges. The Yaya flows from
the northern side of the eastern extension of Amunurunga Range and travels
across the northern plain between walls of red soil from twenty to thirty feet
high. The bed is choked with coarse sand containing large pebbles and gravel in
abundance. Close-grained quartzite pebbles predominate; all are worn and well
rounded; pebbles and boulders of gnciss are also present, together with irregular
pieces of red limestone-conglomerate.

West of the crossing at Yaya Creek there is a broad red-soil plain covered
with mulga scrub. Four or five miles west of Yaya Creek there is an isolated
low hill composed of coarse-grained quartz-schist dipping 60° N. This is the
northernmost visible extension of the Archaean rocks in the vicinity. The track
now veers to the south-west with Mount Licbig forming a prominent teature
directly ahead. Low hills of gneissic character become more common but their
presence does not seem to impair the regularity, or general direction, of the
parallel dunes. The southernmost of these dunes is passed about six miles north
of the main Liebig Range. Approaching Mount Liebig the track traverses some
six miles of rising ground thinly covered in alluvium; this slope affords excellent
exposures for a typical section of the Aruntan metamorphic rocks in this region.

The camp of the Expedition was placed under the shadow of the eastern end
of Mount Liebig, on an old native camp, situated about three-quarters of a mile
north of the main water on Amunurunga (Mount Liebig Pass) Ridge, and just
north of the junction between the Arunta complex and Pertaknurra sedimentary
series.

A. geological examination of the district proceeded as opportunity offered
during intervals in anthropological work. Through the co-operation of various
members of the Expedition preliminary samples were brought in from all neigh-
bouring places visited.

215

V. NOTES ON THE FORMATIONS OF MOUNT LIEBIG
AND VICINITY.

Four principal series of rocks were observed in the Mount Liebig district
and during the journey from the vicinity of Painta Springs.

A. Arunita Complex of Archaean Age—These rocks consist largely of para-
gneisses, amphibolites and quartz schists. An extensive suite of specimens was
collected and are available for study. Quartz schists are common: epidotised
siliceous sediments, amphibolites, and augen-gneisses are represented in consider-
able variety.

B. Grates and associated pegmatite dykes intruded into the rocks of the
Arunta Complex. The granite of the Mount Liebig area is not well developed,
appearing in isolated stocks at wide intervals. The tectonic axes are due east
and west from the vicinity of Mount Zeil to beyond Mount Liebig. A few aplitic
dykes and acid pegmatites are present.

C. The Amunurunga Range Series-—This series consists of quartzites,
sandstones, conglomerates and highly altered shales, approximately 10,000 feet in
thickness (estimated). As first indicated by Chewings, they are downfolded into
the Aruntan rocks and occupy a synclinal basin overfolded towards the south.
West of Mount Liebig the limbs of this fold diverge slightly and gradually dip
beneath the plain. To the castward they converge and the northern limb
approaches the southern.

An examination of the sediments of Amunurunga Range was made at the
Amunurunga Pass, five miles east of Mount Liebig summit. The last-named
summit is situated on a much higher range which runs parallel to the Amunurunga
Range some two miles further north.

The principal beds noted at Amunurunga Pass and the thicknesses estimated

after rough pacing were, in descending order :-— Feet.

Yellow sandstone .. aa a La 7 .. 2,500
Upper (white) quartzite .. ck ils .. 2,600
Lower (fine-grained grey) quartzite #5 sss .. 1,900
Metamorphosed shale 7 6d <! x, .. 700
Grit Beds... P a .. 800
Basal conglomerates and conglomeratic grits bs .. 1,500
Unconformity

Arunta Complex

The basal conglomerate contains rolled-out quartz pebbles up to 20 cm. in
diameter. The conglomerate is succeeded by grit beds containing occasional
pebbles. These beds have all been metamorphosed and are penetrated by a net-
work of quartz veins from 1-5 mm. wide.

The metamorphosed shales which succeed them weather out as a trough along
the northern face of the quartzite ridge, the trough being due to the differential
erosion between the grits and shales, and the intensely hard lower quartzite, here
overfolded to such an extent as to form a protective capping to the sandstones
which are stratigraphically above them. Watercourses have cut narrow and deep
gorges at regular intervals across this hard quartzite, and it is in these narrow
clefts that the changing dip is best seen. In addition to the major folds individual
beds are intenscly folded, the weathering of these has revealed remarkable
examples of multiple overfolding. Wave ripple-marks are a feature of the fine-
grained quartzite ; owing to the over-turning of the beds they are present as moulds
on the faces of the rocks.

The upper quartzites are slightly less compact than the lower ones and are
succeeded by a great thickness of reddish-yellow sandstone composed of well-
rounded grains of remarkably even grade.

H

216

Limestones are conspicuous by their absence, but some may be concealed
under the wide alluvium-filled valley immediately to the south. On the ground
of the lithological resemblances between these Amunurunga beds and the Heavi-
tree Gap beds (notably the presence of the dense white quartzite and associated
beds, which resemble the quartzite of Heavitree Gap) they are equated with the
Pertaknurra Series (Madigan’s Older Proterozoic),

D. Mount Liebig Capping Beds——The beds capping Mount Liebig dip
N, 5° W. at an angle of approximately 20 to 30° from the horizon; they rest
unconformably on the upturned edges of para-gneiss, amphibolites, and quartz
schists, of which the northern foothills are composed.

The explorer Gosse (8) apparently noticed these capping beds when he
climbed Mount Liebig in 1873. He described the Mount as composed of basalt
and gneiss, and sandstone, with strike E. and dip 14° S. It seems likely that
14° S, is an error for 14° N, in the dip of the capping beds only. Chewings did
not have the opportunity of examining them.

At a point a quarter of a mile east of the summit cairn, erected by Gosse, the
capping beds, in descending order, are estimated as follows :—

Feet.
Felspathic quartzite .. i, ey x. AD 204
Finely laminated sandstone .. 2 ss its .. 80
Laminated felspathic purple grit .. es 7 .. 200
Gritty conglomerate .. ay = és 200
Unconformity

Arunta complex

The basal conglomerate is not a strong feature. It shows undeformed quartz
pebbles up to 4 cm. in diameter imbedded in a coarse grit composed of quartz and
kaolinised felspar. Some pebbles, apparently weathered out of this basal bed,
which were picked up on the scree below the junction with the metamorphic
rocks, are composed of quartz schist.

The conglomerate beds merge upwards into a purplish-coloured, laminated,
felspathic grit. The laminae consist of regular varve-like alternations of coarser
purplish grits and fine-grained light-coloured sand, almost of silt grade. The
coarse bands have an average thickness of 7 mm., the usual range being from
4to 15 mm. The finer-grained laminae are more variable and show minor band-
ing of very fine-grained constituents. They range from 3-20 mm. in thickness
with an average of 10 mm.; the minor banding is of the order of 1 mm.

The possibility should be borne in mind that the presence of these varved
sediments may indicate fluvio-glacial conditions during the formation of these
beds.

The series, as a whole, shows no sign of deformation or metamorphism; a
few thin quartz veins are apparent, these frequently bear minute crystals of iron
pyrites. In this they are in strong contrast with the Amunurunga Range beds,
the basal beds of which are honeycombed by a network of such veins.

The purple grits merge almost insensibly into fine-grained sandstones of a
lighter purplish colour. ‘he varve-like banding continues but the coarser bands
are narrow, ranging from 1-4 mm, in thickness. The finer bands are definitely
of silt grade and range from 3-15 mm. in thickness. They also show traces of
the above-mentioned minor lamination,

Near the summit of Mount Liebig the beds are of white quartzite, super-
ficially hardened by secondary silicification,

The purple-coloured capping-beds of the eastern end of Haast Bluff Range
are similar in character to the Mount Liebig ones and show identical lamination.
Their strike and dip is also similar. It is evident at Mount Liebig that marks of
greater disturbance, higher state of metamorphism, and nearly vertical disposition

217

of the (Older Proterozoic) sediments that form the southern half of the Liebig
mountain-mass (Amunurunga Range) as compared with the capping beds, show
such strong lithological and structural contrasts and the beds of each present
such a wide angle of discordance that they must belong to two different series,
separated by a vast hiatus in geological time.

South of Berry Pass similar beds to the Liebig capping beds have been
described by Chewings as forming Mounts Palmer, Crawford, Peculiar, and
Blanche Tower, At these places they are practically horizontally bedded. They
stand on Archaean rock in a similar manner to the Mount Liebig and Injala Blutf
occurrences,

These mountains and the Liebig capping are survivors of an extensive series,
of which further traces may be expected when the table-topped hills west and
north-west of Mount Liebig are examined.

E. Tertiary to Recent—Under this somewhat indefinite classification may
be placed the sand dunes of Burt Plain and the limestones now forming in the
occasional waterholes through the agency of lime-depositing Chara-like algae.
The red limestone conglomerate washed down Yaya Creek may also be tentatively
classified here. Extensive calcareous silt deposits are present on the former
terraces of Lake Bennett. Transported fragments of this white argillaceous lime-
stone are plentiful in native camps. According to Mr. T. Strehlow, the present
shores of Lake Bennett are covered with salt deposits and sun-baked mud.

REFERENCES CITED.
1. CuHewines, C-—Sources of the Finke River, pamphlet, Adelaide, 1886.
Maonican, C. ‘T——Geographical Journal, vol. Ixxviii., 1931, pp. 417-433.
3. Mawson, Sir Douctas, and C. T. MaprcAn—Quart. Journ. Geolog. Soc.,
vol. Ixxxvi., 1930, pp. 415-428.

4. Mapiean, C. T.—Geology of the Western MacDonnell Ranges, Central
Australia. Quart. Journ. Geolog. Soc., vol. Ixxxvili., 1932, pp. 672-711.

5. Trnpate, N. B——Trans. Roy. Soc. South Aust., vol. lv., 1931, pp. 31-38.

6. Warpurton, P. E.—Journey Across the Western Interior of Australia.
London, 1875.

7. Waregurton, P. E.—South Australia :—Parliamentary Paper, 28, 1875, map.

& Gosse, W. C—South Australia:—Parliamentary Paper, 48, 1874, pp. 1-23,
and map.

9. Tate, R., and J. A. Warr—Report on . . . Horn Scientific Expedi-
tion. General Geology, Part 3. London, 1896.

10. CHEwincs, C.—Trans. Roy. Soc. South Aust., vol. lii., 1928, pp. 62-81.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.

Fig. 1. View north-west from the summit of Mount Liebig: The northern foothills
composed of Aruntan gneisses and schists with the sandhill-covered Burt Piain beyond.

Fig. 2. Amunurunga Range, looking south-west from the summit of Mount Liebig. Basal
grey quartzite of the Amunurunga Range Series appears as wall in middle distance. The
junction with the Aruntan gneisses is at about the middle of the low foreground. Mounts
Palmer and Peculiar on the skyline; Mount Liebig Capping Beds in extreme right foreground.

Fig. 3. Mount Liebig from the south-east: Vertical southern scarp of Capping Beds
resting on Aruntan gneiss and schist platform. Junction of Aruntan and Amunurunga Range
series in middle distance. The grey quartzite wall of latter series in left foreground.

ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS

Summary

218

ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS

OF THE
ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA
(Incorporated).

FOR THE YEAR FROM Novem Ber 1, 1932, ro Ocroper 31, 1933.

Orpinary Merrtinc, NovEmBer 10, 1932.

The President (Professor J. A. Prescott) in the chair, and 21 Members were
present.

Minutes of the Annual Meeting, held October 13, 1932, were read and
confirmed.

Apologies were received from the Rev. N. H. Louwyck and Mr. J. H. Gosse.

The formal resignation as Treasurer of the Society was received from Mr.
B. S. Roach. The President expressed regret at the decision of Mr. Roach. It
was moved by Professor J. Burton Cleland, seconded by Mr. J. M. Black and
carried, that the resignation be received with sincere regret.

The President then called for nominations for the office of Treasurer. Pro-
fessor T. Harvey Johnston moved, and Mr. W. J. Kimber seconded, that Dr.
Chas. Fenner be invited to act as Treasurer. There being no other nominations,
the President declared Dr. Chas. Fenner elected, if willing to act.

Dr. Chas. Fenner intimated that he accepted with pleasure the invitation
extended to him to fill this important office.

PAPER—
“The Dead Rivers of South Australia, Part I1.,” by Professor Walter
Howchin, F.G.S. Dr. Chas, Fenner, Dr, L. Keith Ward, and the President took
part in the discussion of the paper.

EX HIBITS—

Mr. B. C. Cotton exhibited some fossil shells which had been recently
presented to the S.A. Museum by Mr. W. J. Kimber.

Mr. A. G. Edquist exhibited a bowl of poppy blossoms which have
originated as garden varieties in his garden at Glenelg. These blossoms, of won-
derful size, colour and form, are the result of hybridization. Some of them
appeared in this world for the first time this year.

Mr. W. J. Kimber exhibited some fossil shells from a well 80 feet deep
at Campbelltown, where there is a large deposit of them, including at least three
species of cephalopods, casts of Cardium, foraminifera, and fragments of lignite.

Professor J. Burton Cleland read a note on behalf of Dr. A. M. Morgan,
who reported that in May, four years ago, he placed black coloured fruits of
Loranthus exocarpi, parasite on Lagunaria Patersoni, on branches of oleander.
Some of these grew and flowered sparingly in the third year, and vigorously in
the fourth year (1932). The black fruits planted yielded some plants with yellow
and green flowers and red fruits, and some with red and green flowers and black
fruits like the original.

The President exhibited some aerial photographs of part of the Murray
River in the region of Berri, which had been taken by the Royal Australian Air
Force. Also a stereoscopic aerial photograph of part of the Ninety Mile Desert.

219

Dr. L. Keith Ward gave an interesting account of the occurrence of
occluded gases occuring in various rocks in South Australia, which are released
during the process of boring when carried out under a head of water. His remarks
were illustrated by a number of lantern slides.

OrpInary MeeEtine, Aprit 13, 1933,

The President (Professor J. A. Prescott) in the chair and 31 Members were
present.

Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held November 10, 1932, were read and
confirmed. ;

Apologies were received from Rev. N. H. Louwyck, Dr. James Davidson,
Mr. A. G. Paul, and Mr. J. H. Gosse,

The President extended a hearty welcome to Sir T. Edgeworth David, an
Honorary Fellow of the Society, and the third recipient of the Miieller Medal,
and invited Sir Edgeworth to enlighten the Members on the origin of the medal,
and the circumstances connected with the award having been made to Mr. J. M.
Black.

Sir Edgeworth David thanked the President for the welcome extended to
him, and then gave a brief resumé of the history of the Mueller Medal, and the
reason why the award had been made to Mr. Black at the last meeting of the
A.N.Z.A.A.5S. in Sydney.

The President, in making the presentation, said:—“It is my privilege this
evening to present to Mr. J. M. Black, our distinguished Vice-President, the
Miieller Memorial Medal of the Australian and New Zealand Association for the
Advancement of Science, a privilege and welcome task which I have been asked
to undertake on behalf of Sir Herbert Murray, the President of the Association.
I have no need to remind Members of the services to botanical science in Australia
which have been rendered by Mr. Black. His “Flora of South Australia” has
become a standard and indispensable work of reference to all botanical workers
in the southern areas of Australia, and we have ourselves honoured him through
our own Verco Medal. The Miieller Medal was founded in 1902 and was first
awarded in 1904. It is awarded in recognition of ‘Important contributions to
Anthropological, Botanical, Geological or Zoological Science, published originally
within His Majesty’s Domimions, preference being always given to work having
special reference to Australia.” Mr. Black is the fourth Fellow of this Society to
receive the medal, previous awards having been to Professor Walter Howchin
(1913), Professor Wood-Jones (1926) and to Sir Douglas Mawson (1930).
Thirteen medals on twelve occasions have been awarded. We are proud of the
fact that Mr. Black is one of our Fellows, and I hope he will accept with it our
heartiest congratulations and best wishes.”

Mr. J. M. Black, in acknowledgment, thanked Sir Edgeworth David and the
President for their kind remarks, and referred to the increased interest taken in
Botany in South Australia at the present time compared with 20 or 30 years ago,
and the valuable collections which had recently been made by botanists and plant
lovers in various districts.

NoMINATIONS AS FELLOWS.—Mark Ledingham Mitchell, Lecturer, Fitzroy
Terrace, Prospect; George H. Clarke, B.Sc., Lecturer in Botany, Roseworthy
Agricultural College ; Alfred William Kleeman, 12 Ningana Avenue, King’s Park;
Michael Schneider, M.B., B.S., Medical Practitioner, 175 North Terrace,
Adelaide; Thomas Alfred Barnes, B.Sc., Student, 13 Leah Street, Forestville;
Kathleen de Brett Magarey, B.A., B.Sc., Teacher, 38 Winchester Street, Malvern;
Herbert Womersley, F.E.S., A.L.S., Entomologist, S.A. Museum, and 36 Wattle
Street, Fullarton Estate.

220

PAPERS—

“Inflammable Gases Occluded in Pre-Palaeozoic Rocks of S.A.,” by L.
Keith Ward, B.A., B.E., D.Sc. Sir T. Edgeworth David and Mr. C. T. Madigan
discussed various points in connection with the paper. The President thanked
Dr. Ward for giving this Society the privilege of printing his important paper.

“Geological Notes of the Cockatoo Creek and Mount Liebig Country,
Central Australia,” by Norman B. Tindale. The following Members took part in
the discussion :—Dr, C. Chewings, Mr. C. T. Madigan, Dr. L. Keith Ward, and
Dr. Chas. Fenner.

Ex HiBiTs—

Mr. E. H. Ising exhibited Loranthus miraculosus Miq., var. Melaleucae
Tate, and said this was the second record of the occurrence of the order Loran-
thaceae on Kangaroo Island. It was collected by the exhibitor in 1922 and found
growing on Melaleuca, sp., which was situated on the edge of a salt lagoon at
MacGillivray, about 10 miles south of Kingscote. This mistletoe has only been
observed on Melaleuca species, two of which, M. pauperiflora and M. parvi-
flora, are recorded in the Flora of South Australia, p. 171, where also the distribu-
tion on the mainland is shown to be the southern districts, chiefly along the coast,
Eyre Peninsula and west to Fowler’s Bay, Murray Lands, and the South-East.
No representatives of the order Loranthaceae have yet been found in Tasmania.
The above variety appears to be endemic to South Australia.

Orpvinary Meetinc, May 11, 1933.

The President (Professor J. A. Prescott) in the chair and 34 members and
visitors were present.

Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held April 13, 1933, were read and
confirmed.

An apology was received from Mr. C. T. Madigan.

The President extended a welcome to Mr. Chalmers and his daughter from
MacDonnell Downs, Central Australia, and Mr. Koehncke, as visitors.

The President then drew the attention of the Members to the loss sustained
by the Society in the death of Mr. W. W. Weidenbach, On the motion of Dr. L.
Keith Ward, the Society recorded its appreciation of the value of the work of the
late Mr. Weidenbach, and its regret at his passing. Mr. Weidenbach left a fine
record of work as a geological draughtsman, and the many maps drawn by him
gave evidence of his fine artistic sense as well as of his sound knowledge of
structural geology. He spared no effort to attain the maximum degree of
accuracy in all that he did, and this meticulous care enhanced the value of all the
work carried out by him. Mr. Weidenbach had a thorough knowledge of mining
and the occurrence of underground water, and was better able than most to think
in three dimensions. The President asked those present to indicate their approval
of the motion by standing for a moment in silence.

NoMINATION As FELLow.—Allan Donald Service, Chemist, c/o Colonial
Sugar Refinery, Glanville.

ELecTIoN as Frettows.—Mark Ledingham Mitchell; George H. Clarke,
B.Sce.; Alfred William Kleeman; Michael Schneider, M.B., B.S.; Thomas Alfred
Barnes, B.Sc.; Kathleen de Brett Magarey, B.A., B.Sc.; Herbert Womersley,
F.ELS., A.L.S.

A ballot was taken and the above-named were declared elected. Mr. Clarke
and Mr. Womersley, being present, were welcomed as Fellows by the President.

LrecruRE—

Mr. H. M. Hale and Professor T. Harvey Johnston delivered an excep-
tionally interesting and instructive lecture on “Australian Water Animals and

22)

their Shift for a Living.” Mr. Hale illustrated his remarks with a very fine series
of lantern slides and a number of specimens. Mr. W. H. Selway and Dr, L. Keith
Ward discussed various points in connection with the lecture. The President
expressed the thanks and gratitude of the Members to Mr. Hale and Professor
Harvey Johnston for their very interesting lectures.

ExHIsITs—

Mr. N. B. Tindale exhibited a number of geological specimens collected by
him in Central Australia, and said that these should have been brought forward at
the last meeting to illustrate his remarks when presenting his paper.

Miss Nellie Woods exhibited a series of clover, ranging from the normal
three-leaf to the perfect five-leaf, which had been collected in the garden of her
home in the hills, and remarked that the only period of the year that the perfect
five-leaf clover had been found by her was at the present time. Miss Woods asked
if any Botanist could inform her if this range was due to cultivation.

Professor J. Burton Cleland showed a collection of seeds of plants used
by the natives of Central Australia for food purposes. These had been collected
by Miss Jess Chalmers of MacDonnell Downs, 160 miles north-eastward of Alice
Springs. The seeds were winnowed by the natives, and included a number of
grass seeds, acacia seeds, and the minute seeds of Chenopodium rhadinostachyum
and of Portulaca oleracea. Some of these seeds had been given to Mr. Greaves,
Director of the Botanic Gardens, and pot plants were shown of the Chenopodium
and of Acacia aneura (mulga) and A. Kempeana (witchetty bush). He also
showed pot plants of a small Nicotiana growing on the sandhills in Central Aus-
tralia, and used by the natives for chewing purposes, and for comparison with
this, a stout form of Nicotsana suaveolens grown from seed from Hallett’s Cove.
Both specimens of Nicotiana had been grown by the Director of the Botanic Gar-
dens. For chewing purposes the natives prefer the large Nicotiana excelsior
growing amongst rocks, to the sandhills species.

ORDINARY MEETING, JUNE 8, 1933.

The President (Professor J. A. Prescott) in the chair and 28 Fellows and
visitors were present.

Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held May 11, 1933, were read and con-
firmed.

The President announced that on the next lecture evening the subject would
be “Modern Genetics.”

NoMINATION As FELLow.—Harold Greaves, Director, Botanic Garden,
Adelaide.

ELECTION oF FeLLtow.—Allan Donald Service, Chemist.

A ballot was taken and Mr. Service was declared elected, and, being present,
was then welcomed by the President who also extended a welcome to Miss
Magarey and any other new Fellows who may be present.

PAPERS- —

“A Preliminary Account of the Collembola-Arthropleona of Australia,’ by
H. Womerslev, F.E.S., A.L.S. In the discussion that followed Mr. W. J. Kimber
remarked that these insects attacked celery, and as large quantities of this vegetable
were exported to the Eastern States from South Australia, it was a matter of
great importance that it be kept in check. Professor J. Burton Cleland and the
President also spoke.

“Notes on the Flora of South Australia, with a Description of a New
Species, No. 1,” by E. H. Ising. The paper was concerned with species of Bassia,
one of which was new and was named after Mr. J. M. Black, Senior Vice-
President, to honour him for his botanical work in this State. The species was

222

called Bassia Blackiana. Mr. J. M. Black, Dr. Chas. Fenner, Professor J. Burton
Cleland and the President congratulated the author on his work.

“Two New Danthonias,” by A. B. Cashmore (communicated by J. M.
Black, A.L.S.). The species were named Danthonia Duttoniana and D. Richard-
sonii and were both of economic importance. The President pointed out the value
of the paper, which clearly defined two grasses which had been known but not
described.

“A Revision of the Eurymelini (Homoptera Bythoscopidae),” by J. W.
Ievans, M.A.

Ex HIBITS—

Professor J. Burton Cleland exhibited a specimen of Loranthus pendulus,
which was parasitic on the golden wattle Acacia pycnantha and also on Acacia
rhetinodes, and Loranthus Preissii growing on Acacia rhetinodes and A.
melanoxylon and Loranthus Exocarpi growing on L. Preiss, All the specimens
were collected at Tweedvale on June 5, 1933.

Mr. J. M. Black exhibited some botanical specimens sent by Mrs. V.
Petherick, Naracoorte, and included Epacris impressa (heath) and Leucopogon
ericoides, which was a more northerly site than had been previously recorded,

Orpinary MEETING, JuLy 13, 1933,

The President (Professor J. A. Prescott) in the chair and 28 Members
were present.

Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held June 8, 1933, were read and con-
firmed.

The president read a draft of the clauses recommended by the Council in
connection with the constitution of the Endowment and Scientific Research Fund.

Dr. Chas. Fenner then moved a notice of motion that the recommendation
of the Council be adopted. Seconded by Dr. ‘I. D. Campbell.

Professor T. Harvey Johnston moved, and Mr. J. M. Black seconded, that
the discussion of the notice of motion be deferred until the Ordinary Meeting to
be held in September. Carried,

It was then moved by Mr. O. A. Glastonbury, seconded by Dr. Chas, Fenner,
that the full text of the notice of motion be cireularized. Carried.

NoMINATION AS Fretrows.—James Hugo Gray, M.B., B.S., Medical Prac-
titioner, Adelaide Hospital; David Hugh Le Messurier, B.Sc., Student, 133 Mills
Terrace, North Adelaide.

The President announced that the Council has received the resignation of
Mt. A. M. Ludbrook, as Librarian, and moved that the appreciation of the Fellows
be extended to Mr. Ludbrook for his 20 years’ service, and that the thanks of the
Society be recorded in the Minutes. Dr, Chas. Fenner, in seconding the motion,
referred to the valuable work performed by Mr. Ludbrook during his tenure of
office. The motion was carried with acclamation,

PaPpER—
“Distribution of Myoporaccae in Central Australia,” by T. T. Colquhoun,
M.Se. The paper was presented by Professor J. Burton Cleland, who apologized
for the absence of the author, and said that the paper was a technical one. The
President congratulated the author on his contribution.
EXxHIBITS—

The President exhibited a coloured plate of Australian soil types, the
colour work of which was very good and true to the originals. The printing had
been done in Leipsig.

223

Mr. B. C. Cotton exhibited a number of shells from the Museum collec-
tion showing three kinds of design. The tendency for the whorls to separate
causing the spiral to become elongate. The occurrence of forms, where the shell
turns to the left instead of the right. Also malformation due to breakages.

Dr, Chas. Fenner exhibited fulgurites collected from the sandhills at Port
Noarlunga, and from Morton’s Bay, Queensland.

Dr. T. D. Campbell exhibited the heel bone of an Aborigine in which is
embedded the tooth of a shark. Apparently the native had been seized by the
foot by a shark while swimming. It seems likely that the native must have died
soon after, otherwise pathologic changes in the bone surrounding the tooth would
have been apparent.

Mr. H. H. Finlayson exhibited panoramic photographs of the north face
of Ayers Rock, and the west face of Mount Olga, taken by him in February, 1932.
He stated that the difficulties of conveying an adequate idea of the impressiveness
of these two features in photographs was very considerable, owing to their great
lateral extent, and the absence of convenient vantage points commanding the two
aspects mentioned, at a suitable distance, to include the whole in one exposure.
The pictures shown were obtained by making three exposures at fairly close range
and joining the three resulting films. Though the results were not technically
good, he considered that the method gave a truer record of these remarkable
rocks than most of those which had been published. He also exhibited specimens
of the rocks from the same outcrops. The President congratulated Mr. Finlayson
on obtaining such good pictures of these two natural features.

Mr. G. H. Clarke exhibited Loranthus Preissit growing on Cassia Sturt
(from near Roseworthy College). Loranthus Exocarpi growing on Casuarina
stricta (from Cockatoo Valley). Loranthus Exocarpt growing on Loranthus
Miquelii, the latter in turn parasitising Eucalyptus rostrata (from Cockatoo
Valley.) An O-alis, possibly a mutant form of O-alis cernua (Soursob) which
appears each year in one of the paddocks at Roseworthy College. It differs from
O. cernua, mainly in the hairiness of the leaflets, the flattened petioles, the shorter
and somewhat flattened peduncles, and in the relative lengths of style and stamens.
In the form exhibited the stigmas occupy the middle position, midway between
the inner and outer stamens. In certain other plants the styles are long and the
stigmas are at the uppermost level, the inner and outer stamens occupying the
middle and lowest levels, respectively. A pathological condition of Sonchus
oleraceus, suggestive of the “Witches Brooms” formed by certain plants as a
result of parasitic infection; in this case the condition is probably due to a high
concentration of salts in the soil. The plants have been observed to show this
abnormality only in two situations, both known to be of high saline concentration.
At a given level the plant endeavours to form the flower head, It produces an
involucre and the primordia of florets. Some of the latter may develop a corolla,
and in some cascs a whorl of stamens, but are unable to produce carpels. In lieu
of carpels, the floral axes grow erect into a series of peduncles and the whole
process is repeated at a higher level, leading to the corymbose branching structure
seen in the specimen.

Mr. Herbert M. Hale exhibited the following specimens:—The cast of a
Mirror Dory (Zenopsis nebulosus) which was taken from a specimen recently
caught off Kangaroo Island. The specimen exhibited constitutes the first record
of the species in South Australian waters. It occurs off the coasts of Japan and
the eastern coast of Australia. He also showed various reptilian monstrosities,
including multiple tails, double headedness, siamese twins, albinism and duplica-
tion of limbs.

Professor J. Burton Cleland read the following extract from a despatch
of Governor Gipps from Sydney, dated November 30, 1840, recently quoted by

224

Mr. J, F. Campbell in the Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Australian His-
torical Society (xvii., pt. vi., 1933, p. 339), which shows that over 90 years ago the
advantage of placing grain in hermetically sealed silos had been discovered.
During the last years of the Great War, at the time of the mouse plague, the same
measures were adopted with success in Australia:—“The quantity of wheat now
stored in the underground granaries, or silos, which were excavated last year at
Cockatoo Island, is 20,000 bushels, but additional silos are in progress, and if the
price of wheat continues as low as it now is in Sydney, I propose to increase the
Government stores to any amount not exceeding 100,000 bushels. The silos, of
which I have spoken, are excavations in the solid (sandstone) rock shaped like
a large bottle, and capable of holding from 3,000 to 5,000 bushels each. Being
hermetically sealed, grain of any kind may be preserved in them for years. The
total exclusion of air also entirely destroys any weevil or other insects that may
be in the grain at the time it is placed in the silos. This we found to be the case
in the wheat which was received from India. It was much infected with weevil
when put into the silos in December, 1839, but there was not a living insect in it
of any kind when taken again from the silos in March last.”

Orvinary MEETING, Aucusr 10, 1933.

The President (Professor J. A. Prescott) in the chair and 39 Members and
Visitors were present.

Minutes of the Ordinary Meetnig, held July 13, 1933, were read and con-
firmed.

The President extended a welcome to Sir Douglas Mawson on his return
from abroad, and also to Mr. Southam, the Editor of the Royal Society of
Western Australia,

The President noted the recent death of Mr. M. S. Hawker, a Fellow of this
Society, famous as a South Australian Pastoralist, and who was associated with
the Fauna and Flora Board of South Australia: and then announced that the
greatest personal loss the Society had suffered was the passing of Sir Joseph
Verco. Professor Prescott gave a brief resumé of Sir Joseph’s years of activities
and services to the Society, and informed the Members that an obituary notice
would be prepared and published in the Transactions of the Society. He asked
those present to stand in silence for a few seconds as an expression of deepest
sympathy.

Nomination as Fettow.—Herbert Clifton Hosking, B.A., Chief Inspector
of Schools, S.A., 24 Northcote Terrace, Gilberton.

EvecTion or FELLows.—Harold Greaves, Director, Botanic Garden, Ade-
laide; James Hugo Gray, M.B., B.S., Adelaide Hospital; David Hugh Le Mes-
surier, B.Se., Student, 133 Mills Terrace, North Adelaide. A ballot was taken
and the President declared them duly elected.

PapEeRS—

“A Preliminary Account of the Bdellidae (Snout Mites) of Australia,”
by H. Womersley, A.L.S., F.E.S. The President congratulated Mr. Womersley
on presenting an important paper on a new group of insects to this Society,

“Contributions to the Orchidology of Australia,” by R. S. Rogers, M.A.,
M.D., F.L.S.

The President then informed the Fellows that, owing to the death of Sir
Joseph Verco, it was necessary, according to the Rules and By-Laws of the
Society, to elect another Member on the Council. Sir Douglas Mawson nominated
Dr. L. Keith Ward. The nomination was supported by Professor Walter
Howchin. There being no other nominations, the President declared Dr. Ward
duly elected.

225

A very instructive and interesting lecture was delivered by Dr. Ivan F. Phipps
on “Heredity as we see it today,” which was illustrated with a number of lantern
slides. The following took part in the discussion which followed:—Mr. J. M.
Black, Mr. W. H. Selway, and Dr. W. Christie. The President expressed the
thanks of the Members to Dr. Phipps for his fine exposition of a very difficult
but interesting subject.

OrpiNAry MEETING, SEPTEMBER 14, 1933.

The Senior Vice-President (Mr. J. M. Black) occupied the chair and 24
Members were present.

Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held on August 10, 1933, were read and
confirmed.

The following Notice of Motion was then moved by Dr. Chas. Fenner,
seconded by Mr. C. T. Madigan :—

(a) That the Fund as set out on pages 212 and 213 of the Transactions
and Proceedings, vol. lvi., 1932, be entitled the Endowment Fund.

(6) That from the interest therefrom each year a sum not exceeding £20
(as the Council may from time to time determine) be paid into a
separate account in the Savings Bank of S.A., which with its accumu-
lated interest will be entitled the “Royal Society of S.A., Inc.,
Research Fund,” and which will be devoted to grants in aid of research
work by members of the Society for work done in Australia.

(c) That the balance of the interest from the Endowment Fund be utilized
for the cost of printing and publication of the Transactions and Pro-
ceedings of the Society, and other general purposes.

(d) That additions to the Endowment Fund may be made by the Council
from time to time from the general revenue of the Society.

(e) That applications for grants in aid of research shall set out in writing
the nature of the work to be attempted and that all such grants shall
be considered and reported on to the Council by a Research Grants
Committee, consisting of the President, Secretary, Treasurer, and one
other Member nominated by the Council from time to time.

(f) That these clauses be inserted in the By-Laws of the Society.

Professor T. Harvey Johnston moved as an amendment that sections 5, c, d,
e, and f, be struck out, seconded by Sir Douglas Mawson. The amendment was
put to the meeting and declared lost. Professor Walter Howchin moved as an
amendment that further consideration should be postponed until the next meet-
ing, seconded by Mr. W. H. Selway. The amendment was put to the meeting
and declared lost.

The original motion was then put to the meeting and declared carried.

The Chairman extended a welcome to Mr. Le Messurier as a new Fellow.

Nominations as Fettows.—Allan Walkley, B.Sc., B.A., Ph.D., Research
Chemist, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, and 8 Ralston Grove, Mrytle
Bank; Joan Eileen Walkley, B.Sc. (Lon.), 8 Ralston Grove, Myrtle Bank.

ParEers—

“The Ecology of the Aborigines of Central Australia, Botanical Notes,”
by Professors J. Burton Cleland, M.D., and T. Harvey Johnston.

“Yantanoola Caves, Geological and Physiographical Notes,’ by N. B.
Tindale.

“On Mastacomys fuscus,” by H. H. Finlayson.

226

“On some Acarina from Australia and South Africa,” by H. Womersley,
F.E.S,, A.LS.
The Chairman announced that applications were being called for the position
of Curator of the Tasmanian Museum.
Professor T, Harvey Johnston then put forward a suggestion for the con-
sideration of the Council, that a portrait of the late Sir Joseph C. Verco should
be placed on the walls of the Socitety’s Rooms.

AwnuaL MEETING, OcToser 12, 1933.

The President (Professor J. A. Prescott) in the chair and 29 Members were
present,

Minutes of the Ordinary Meeting, held September 14, 1933, were read and
confirmed.

Apologies were received from Mr. C. T. Madigan and Mr. F. C. Martin,

The President read a communication received from the Secretary, Tas-
manian Museum, asking for subscriptions toward the Clive Lord Memorial Fund.

ELecTION or FeLLows.—Herbert Cliton Iosking, B.A., Chief Inspector of
Schools, 24 Northcote Terrace, Gilberton; Allan Walkley, B.Sc., B.A., Ph.D.,
Research Chemist, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, and 8 Ralston Grove,
Myrtle Bank; Joan Eileen Walkley, B.Sc. (Lon.), 8 Ralston Grove, Myrtle Bank.
A ballot was taken and the President declared the above as duly elected. Mr.
Hosking, being present, was welcomed by the President as a new Fellow.

Nominations As FELLows.—Constance Margaret Eardley, B.Sc., Curator of
University Herbarium, 68 Wattle Street, Fullarton Estate; Violet Taylor,
Accountant, 40 Eton Street, Malvern.

The President announced that a special sub-committee had recommended that
the next award of the Sir Joseph C. Verco Medal be made to Professor J. Burton
Cleland. Professor T. Harvey Johnston, in moving that the recommendation be
endorsed, gave a brief resumé of Professor Cleland’s outstanding qualifications
and research work. The motion was seconded by Mr. G. Samuel and carried with
acclamation. Professor Cleland suitably responded,

The Annual Report of the Council was read by the Secretary. It was moved
by Mr. J. M. Black, seconded by Dr. L. Keith Ward, and carried, that the Report
be adopted.

The Financial Statement was presented by the Treasurer, It was moved
by Dr. W. Christie, seconded by Mr. E. H. Ising, and carried, that the Financial
Statement be adopted.

ELECTION OF OFFICERS FOR THE Yrar 1933-34.—-The President read the
following nominations which had been received:—Presipent, Mr. J. M. Black,
A.L.S.; SENIOR VicE-Presipent, Dr. T, D. Campbell; Junior Vice-PRresmenr,
Mr. C. T. Madigan, M.A., B.E.; Treasurer, Dr. W. Christie; Secrerary, Mr.
Ralph W. Segnit, M.A., B.Se.; Eprror, Professor Walter Howchin, F.G.S.;
Members or THE Counci.: Dr. L. Keith Ward, B.A., B.E., Dr. H. K. Fry,
D.S.O., B.Sc.; Auprrors: Mr. W. C. Hackett and Mr. O, A. Glastonbury. As
no ballot was necessary, the retiring President declared the persons above-
mentioned as duly elected.

Professor Prescott thanked Dr. Chas. Fenner for the services he had rendered
during the past year as Treasurer.

Professor Howchin informed the Fellows that he desired to be relieved of
the duties as Editor, which he had first carried out 50 years ago. Tle felt that he
must devote the whole time of the coming days to the preparation of geological
papers which he desired to have published. Ile intimated that he was willing to
carry on until the current volume of the Transactions was published. The retiring
President thanked Professor Howchin for the valuable services he had rendered

227

to the Society for so many years, and assured him that the Council would give
serious considerations to his request.
A welcome was extended to Dr. Wm. Christie and Dr. H. K. Fry as new
Members of the Council.
PAPERS—
“A dditions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 31,” by J. M. Black, A.L.S.
“Australian Fungi: Notes and Descriptions, No. 9,” by Professor J.
Burton Cleland, M.D.
“On the Eremian Representative of Myrmecobius fasciatus (Water-
house),” by H. H. Finlayson.
“On Mammals from the Lake Eyre. Basin, Part I, Dasyuridae,” by H, H.
Finlayson.
“Notes on the Flora of South Australia, ‘No. 2,” by E. H. Ising.
“New Australian Lepidoptera,” by A. Jefferis Turner, M.D., F.E.S,
The retiring President drew attention to the first Album of Officers of the
Society, which has now been completed and contains practically the whole of the
office-bearers since the foundation of the Society.

ANNUAL REPORT.

PRESENTED AT THE ANNUAL MEETING ON OcTosEr 12, 1933.

The average attendance of Fellows at the meetings held during the year has
been 29.

At the meeting held in April, the President handed to Mr. J. M. Black the
Miieller Medal, awarded to him by the Australian and New Zealand Association
for the Advancement of Science at the meeting held in Sydney, 1932.

The President extended a welcome to Professor Sir Douglas Mawson on his
return from abroad.

Professor Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, an Honorary Fellow of the Society,
was present at the meeting held in April. ,

Dr. L. Keith Ward was elected to fill the vacancy on the Council caused by
the death of Sir Joseph C. Verco.

The following Fellows took part in the Adelaide University and Museum
Anthropological Expedition to Central Australia:—Professor J. Burton Cleland
(Leader), Professor T. Harvey Johnston, Mr. H. M. Hale, Dr. H. K. Fry, and
Mr. N. B. Tindale.

Mr. B. S. Roach resigned from the office of Treasurer which he occupied for
12 years, and Dr. Chas. Fenner was elected to fill the vacancy.

Mr. A. M. Ludbrook resigned from the position of Librarian after 20 years’
service, and Mr. P. E. Madigan was appointed to that position.

During the year two of the Ordinary Meetings of the Society were devoted
to special subjects, in the form of lectures, which were well attended. The first
was delivered by Mr. H. M. Hale and Professor T. Harvey Johnston on “Aus-
tralian Water Animals and their Shift for a Living.” The second was by Dr.
Ivan F. Phipps on “Heredity as we see it Today.” Both lectures were illustrated
by lantern slides, and the former by a number of characteristic specimens.

Geological papers were read by Professor Walter Howchin, Dr. L. Keith
Ward, and two by Mr. N. B. Tindale.

Entomological papers were presented by Mr. J. W. Evans, Dr. A. Jefferis
Turner, and three by Mr. H. Womersley.

Three Zoological papers were read by Mr. H, H. Finlayson.

Botanical papers were contributed by Mr. J. M. Black, Mr. A. B. Cashmore
(communicated by Mr. J. M. Black), Mr. ‘I. T. Colquhoun, Dr. R. S. Rogers, two
by Professor J. Burton Cleland and two by Mr. E. H. Ising.

228

During the year the Society has suffered loss by death of three Fellows,
Mr, W. W. Weidenbach, who was elected in 1920, and Mr. M. S. Hawker, who
was elected in 1928.

Sir Joseph C. Verco, a Founder of the Society, and a Past President, died
in August. An Obituary Notice (with portrait) of Sir Joseph C. Verco appears
on page v,

The Membership of the Society shows an increase. The number of Fellows
elected during the year being 14. Five Fellows resigned, and 3 died. The
Membership Roll at the close of the financial year is :——Honorary Fellows, 5;
Fellows, 166; Associates, 1. Total, 172.

J. A. Prescott, President,

Ratpw W. Seanir, Secretary.

THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL.

The Council, on August 23, 1928, having resolved to recommend to the
Fellows of the Society that a medal should be founded to give honorary distinction
for scientific research, and that it should be designated the Sir Joseph Verco

cece

Medal, was submitted to the Society at the evening meeting of October 11, 1928,
and at a later meeting, held on November 8, 1928, when the recommendation of
the Council was confirmed on the following terms:—

REGULATIONS,

XI.—The medal shall be of bronze, and shall be known as the Sir Joseph
Verco Medal, in recognition of the important service that gentleman has
rendered to the Royal Society of South Australia, On the obverse side of
the medal shall be these words: ‘The Sir Joseph Verco Medal of
the Royal Society of South Australia,’ surrounding the modelled
portrait of Sir Joseph Verco, while on the reverse side of the medal there
shall be a surrounding wreath of eucalypt, with the words: ‘Awarded
10 PRUE NADES LETT) cos Rene as EO ROR Ce aE! for Research in Science,’ the
name of the recipient, and the year of the award. The Council shall select
the person to whom it is suggested that the medal shall be awarded, and
that name shall be submitted to the Fellows at an Ordinary Mecting
to confirm, or otherwise, the selection of the Council, by ballot or show
of hands. The medal shall be awarded for distinguished scientific work
published by a Member of the Royal Society of South Australia.”

AWARDS.
1929 Pror, Warrer Howcurm, F.G.S.
1930 Joun McC. Brack.
1931 Pror. Sir Doucras Mawson, B.E., D.Sc,, F.R.S.
1933 Pror. J. Burton CLerann, M.D,

BALANCE SHEETS

Summary

227

to the Society for so many years, and assured him that the Council would give
serious considerations to his request.
A welcome was extended to Dr. Wm. Christie and Dr. H. K. Fry as new
Members of the Council.
PAPERS—
“A dditions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 31,” by J. M. Black, A.L.S.
“Australian Fungi: Notes and Descriptions, No. 9,” by Professor J.
Burton Cleland, M.D.
“On the Eremian Representative of Myrmecobius fasciatus (Water-
house),” by H. H. Finlayson.
“On Mammals from the Lake Eyre. Basin, Part I, Dasyuridae,” by H, H.
Finlayson.
“Notes on the Flora of South Australia, ‘No. 2,” by E. H. Ising.
“New Australian Lepidoptera,” by A. Jefferis Turner, M.D., F.E.S,
The retiring President drew attention to the first Album of Officers of the
Society, which has now been completed and contains practically the whole of the
office-bearers since the foundation of the Society.

ANNUAL REPORT.

PRESENTED AT THE ANNUAL MEETING ON OcTosEr 12, 1933.

The average attendance of Fellows at the meetings held during the year has
been 29.

At the meeting held in April, the President handed to Mr. J. M. Black the
Miieller Medal, awarded to him by the Australian and New Zealand Association
for the Advancement of Science at the meeting held in Sydney, 1932.

The President extended a welcome to Professor Sir Douglas Mawson on his
return from abroad.

Professor Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, an Honorary Fellow of the Society,
was present at the meeting held in April. ,

Dr. L. Keith Ward was elected to fill the vacancy on the Council caused by
the death of Sir Joseph C. Verco.

The following Fellows took part in the Adelaide University and Museum
Anthropological Expedition to Central Australia:—Professor J. Burton Cleland
(Leader), Professor T. Harvey Johnston, Mr. H. M. Hale, Dr. H. K. Fry, and
Mr. N. B. Tindale.

Mr. B. S. Roach resigned from the office of Treasurer which he occupied for
12 years, and Dr. Chas. Fenner was elected to fill the vacancy.

Mr. A. M. Ludbrook resigned from the position of Librarian after 20 years’
service, and Mr. P. E. Madigan was appointed to that position.

During the year two of the Ordinary Meetings of the Society were devoted
to special subjects, in the form of lectures, which were well attended. The first
was delivered by Mr. H. M. Hale and Professor T. Harvey Johnston on “Aus-
tralian Water Animals and their Shift for a Living.” The second was by Dr.
Ivan F. Phipps on “Heredity as we see it Today.” Both lectures were illustrated
by lantern slides, and the former by a number of characteristic specimens.

Geological papers were read by Professor Walter Howchin, Dr. L. Keith
Ward, and two by Mr. N. B. Tindale.

Entomological papers were presented by Mr. J. W. Evans, Dr. A. Jefferis
Turner, and three by Mr. H. Womersley.

Three Zoological papers were read by Mr. H, H. Finlayson.

Botanical papers were contributed by Mr. J. M. Black, Mr. A. B. Cashmore
(communicated by Mr. J. M. Black), Mr. ‘I. T. Colquhoun, Dr. R. S. Rogers, two
by Professor J. Burton Cleland and two by Mr. E. H. Ising.

229

"EC6L ‘OT 3990990 ‘aprepspy

*sIOUIPNY ; VIAV “ST WV ‘AUNANOLSVID ‘O
“uOTT LLAMIVH NOIdNVHD “M
‘ruInsvaly, UOH “WHNNAA SATUVHOD *yoa1i0d punoj pue poyipny
61 ZhO IF TL 61 ZbOTF
£ bre
9 OT 61
S$ t IZ sonboy) SUIpuR{sINgO ssa7z
Il £1 OF ~“" Biseerjsny jo yue
1 Z LZ °° eon “VS Jo yuRg sduraes
—EEG] ‘OG Joquraydag ‘aourfeg ‘
eT ¢s
0 SI9 a0uBINSUT
8 OL Z 891494 ¢ el 291
00 ze AraONeIS pur soseisog ‘suluig I 2 Stl puny JuaWMOPUY UlOL] Patiajsuesy,
OlT ' Bunysry pue Suruesyy F OL ZI a juno. y Yue ssuraes
—salipunsg “ —jsorojuy “
OT TS 00 Z uesipeyy “LD
0 8 6 Surpurqyoog eevee surysyqng spiemo} uoneuo”g tf
6 8 &F ov werresqry 0 OT OF
—Aiviqry 9 3 0 sag ‘uereiqry “
S +¥6I1 Is 0 ee asureyoxy ©
Il 61 Z suysyqud IT 61 9 suonedyqng yo ayes “
9 8 8 SuNessnyyy 9 ze¢ Saq19190$ pute Aq wooy jo Tey
OI OT ZS sunurig b OL 2ST suondnosqns *
—suolsesuery Ag r 0 S0Z ZS6L ‘T Jeqopgo ‘aourjeg OL
‘ss 7 ‘P'S F Ps F ‘p's
“SLNAUNWAVd “SLdI gga
‘SE6T ‘OE JaquIaydas popus IeaxA 9} IOy syuaTIAEg pue s}d1el9ayy

(GALVUOdUOONI) VITVHLSNV HINOS AO ALAIDOS TVAOU

‘CEG ‘OL q0C ‘apreppy

‘sioppny f§ WIWV “SIVV ‘AUNANOLSVID ‘O
wMseay “USL “YYNNAA SATUVHOD uo LLaYOVH NOIANVHO “M

*yoa1I09 puNoy pue poypny

St Lep'pF 8 ST ler pt
el 9826 I Z Stl paarsoay ysoraquy “
Z £19 _ us i WUNODDV yurg ss8urareg “ ZL §&T 982'r
0 0 08¢'r” ; . one A 289 co" " “4g Jo yueg sSuraes
aoe 18 PAIS peleplyosuoy ueyersny “ 0 0 O8Z'r Y201G peyepyosuoy uerryerisny
I Z StI “ JumOsDy anusaay Aq —aourleg Oy,
‘OE Foquis3dag—ees] T RGODO—ZEET
‘sf ps ¢F ‘ ‘pS F ‘Pp Ss F
= = —— —— os ! _ = — a
CPZ ET 98@pF pede)

“E61 ‘OE Jequiajdag je sy

‘adNNA INAWMOCNY
(AALVUOCUUOONI) VITVALSNV HINOS AO ALXIDOS TVAOU

THE ENDOWMENT FUND

Summary

1921, F. R. Marston,

231

THE ENDOWMENT FUND.

SUMMARY OF THE ENDOWMENT FUND.

(Capital... ... £4,069 6s. 10d.)
Contributions.
Donations—
£ spd é£é 8 d
1908, Dr. J. C. Verco on 1,000 0 0
1908, Thomas Scarfe =. 1,000 0 0
1911, ae Verco Be' bos 150 0 0
1913, Verco shi 120 0 0
Mrs. ae Peterswald _ if 100 0 O
Small Sums... , Da: 6 0 0
2,376 0 0
Bequests—
1917, R. Barr Smith A 1,005 16 8
1920, Sir Edwin Smith tne 200 0 0
1,205 16 8
Life Members’ Subscriptions ... 225 0 0
*Interest and Discounts 156 3 10
From Current Account

GRANTS MADE IN AID OF SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH.

1916, G. H. Hardy, “Investigations into the Flight of Birds”

1916, Miss H. A. Rennie, “Biology of Lobelia gibbosa” ; an

“Possibility of obtaining from hole precipitate
samples of pure Proteolytic Enzymes”

1921, Prof. Wood Jones, Aavestigations of the Paune and Flora of [ Nayts
Archipelago” ;

.. 106 6 4

*Interest on investments has, in the main, been transferred to general revenue

for the publication of scientific papers. See Balance-sheets.

pp. 327-8.

1903.—The incorporation of the Society was duly effected and announced.
Vol. xxvii., pp. 314-5.

1905.—The President (Dr. J. C. Verco) offered to give £1,000 to the Fund
on certain conditions. Vol. xxix., p. 339.

1902.—On the motion of the late Samuel Dixon it was resolved that steps
be taken for the incorporation of the Society and the establishment of an
Endowment and Scientific Research Fund. Vol. xxvi.,

1929.The following are particulars of the contributions received and other
sources of revenuc in support of the Fund up to date:—

Oo

16

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY IN EXCHANGE

Summary

232

ROYAL SOCIETY LIBRARY.

List of Governments, Societies and Editors with whom
Exchanges of Publications are made.

AUSTRALIA.

Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, Melbourne.
Bureau of Census and Statistics, Canberra.

Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Melbourne.
Library of Commonwealth Parliament.

SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

Botanic Garden, Adelaide.

Mines Department, Adelaide.

Public Library, Museum, and Art Gallery of South Australia.
Royal Geographical Society of Australasia (S.A. Branch).
South Australian Institutes Association, Adelaide.

South Australian Muscum, Adelaide,

South Australian Naturalist, Adelaide.

South Australian Ornithologist, Adelaide.

South Australian Parliamentary Library.

University of Adelaide.

Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

NEW SOUTH WALES.

Australian Museum, Sydney.

Botanic Gardens, Sydney.

Department of Agriculture, Sydney.

Linnean Society of New South Wales.

Mines Department, Sydney.

Public Library of New South Wales.

Royal Society of New South Wales.

Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales.
School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney.
Technological Museum, Sydney.

University of Sydney.

QUEENSLAND.

Department of Agriculture, Brisbane.
Geological Survey, Brisbane,
Queensland Museum, Brisbane.

Public Library of Queensland, Brisbane.
Royal Society of Queensland, Brisbane.
University of Queensland, Brisbane.

TASMANIA.

Government Geologist, Mines Department, Hobart.
Public Library of Tasmania, Hobart.

Royal Society of Tasmania, Hobart.

University of Tasmania, Hobart.

233

VICTORIA.

Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria, Melbourne.
Government Botanist, National Herbarium, Melbourne.
Mines Department, Melbourne.

National Museum, Melbourne.

Public Library of Victoria, Melbourne.

Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne,

University of Melbourne.

WESTERN AUSTRALIA.

Geological Survey Department, Perth.
Public Library of Western Australia, Perth.
Royal Society of Western Australia, Perth.
University of Western Australia, Perth.

ENGLAND.

British Museum Library, London.

British Museum (Natural History), South Kensington.
Cambridge Philosophical Society.

Cambridge University Library.

Conchological Socicty of Great Britain and Ireland.
Entomological Society of London.

Geological Society of London,

Geologists’ Association, London.

Till Museum, Witley, Surrcy.

Imperial Institute, South Kensington.

Imperial Institute of Entomology, London.
Linnean Society of London.

Liverpool Biological Society.

Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society.
National Physical Laboratory, Teddington.
Rhodes House Library, Oxford.

Rothamsted Experimental Station, Harpenden.
Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew.

Royal Empire Society, London.

Royal Geographical Society, London.

Royal Microscopical Society, London.

Royal Society, London.

Science Museum, South Kensington.

Zoological Museum, Tring, Herts.

Zoological Society of London.

SCOTLAND.
Edinburgh Geological Society.

Geological Society of Glasgow.
Royal Society of Edinburgh.

IRELAND.
Royal Dublin Society.
Royal Irish Academy, Dublin.

ARGENTINE REPUBLIC.

Academia Nacional de Ciencias, Cordoba.
Facultad de Ciencias Medicas, Buenos Aires.

234

AUSTRIA,
Akademie der Wissenschaften, Vienna.
Geologische Bundesanstalt, Vienna,
Naturhistorisches Museum, Vienna.
Zoologisch-Botanische Gesellschaft, Vienna.

BELGIUM.
Académie Royale de Belgique, Brussels.
Instituts Solvay, Brussels.
Musée Royale d’Histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Brussels.
Société Entomologique de Belgique, Ghent.
Société Royale de Botanique de Belgique, Brussels.
Société Royale des Sciences de Liége.
Société Royale Zoologique de Belgique, Brussels.

BRAZIL.

Instituto Oswaldo Cruz, Rio de Janeiro.
Museu Paulista, Sao Paulo.

CANADA.
Canadian Geological Survey, Ottawa.
Department of Agriculture, Ottawa.
National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa.
Nova Scotian Institute of Science, Halifax.
Royal Canadian Institute, Toronto.
Royal Society of Canada, Ottawa.
University of British Columbia, Vancouver.

CHINA.
Geological Survey of China, Peiping.
Institute of Biology, National Library of Peiping.

CZECHO-SLOVAKIA.
Ceskoslovenska Botanicka Spolecnost, Prague.

DENMARK.
Conseil Permanent International pour l’Exploration de la Mer.
Danske Naturhistorisk Forening. Copenhagen.
Kobenhavn Universitets Zoologiske Museum.
K. Danske Videnskabernes Selskabs. Copenhagen.

ESTHONIA.
Universitas Tartuensis, Tartu (Dorpat).

FINLAND.
Academia Scientiarum Fennica, Helsinki.
Societas Entomologica Helsingforsiensis.
Societas Scientiarum Fennica, Helsingfors.

FRANCE,
Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris.

Société Bourguignonne d’Histoire Naturelle et de Préhistoire, Toulouse.
Société des Sciences Naturelles de ?Ouest de la France, Nantes.

235

Société Entomologique de France, Paris.
Société Géologique de France, Paris.
Société Linnéenne de Bordeaux.

Societe Linnéenne de Normandie, Caen.

GERMANY.

Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Munchen.

Berliner Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologie, und Urgeschichte.
Bibliothek der Botanischen Gartens und Museums, Berlin.

Fedde, F.: Repertorium specierum novarum regni vegetabilis, Berlin.
Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen.

Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde zu Berlin.

K. Leopoldinische Deutsche Akademie de Naturforscher, Halle.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Freiburg.

- Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin.

Senckenbergische Bibliothek, Frankftirt a. M.
Zoologische Museum der Universitat, Berlin.
Zoologische Staatsinstitut und Zoologische Museum, Hamburg.

HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.

Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu.
Hawaiian Entomological Society, Honolulu.

HOLLAND.
Musée Teyler, Haarlem.
Rijks Herbarium, Leiden.

HUNGARY.

Hydrological Dept., Hungarian Geological Soc., Budapest.
Musée National Hongrois, Budapest.

INDIA.
Colombo Museum.
Government Museum, Madras.
Geological Survey of India, Calcutta.
Royal Asiatic Society, Bombay Branch and Malayan Br.
Zoological Survey of India, Calcutta.

ITALY.

Laboratorio di Entomologia, Bologna.

Laboratorio di Zoologia Agraria, Milan.

Laboratorio di Zoologia Generale e Agraria, Portici.
Societa di Scienze Naturali ed Economiche, Palermo.
Societa Entomologica Italiana, Genova.

Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali, Milano.

Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali, Pisa.

JAPAN.
Hiroshima University.
Kyoto Imperial University.
Ohara Institute for Agricultural Research, Kurashiki,
Taihoku Imperial University.
Tokyo Imperial University.

236

MEXICO.

Instituto de Biologia, Chapultepec.
Instituto Geologico de Mexico.
Sociedad Cientifica “Antonio Alzate,’’ Mexico.

NEW ZEALAND.

Auckland Institute and Museum.

Dominion Museum, Wellington.

New Zealand Institute, Wellington.

Otago University Museum, Dunedin.

Philosophical Institute of Canterbury, Christchurch.

NORWAY.
Bergens Museum, Bergen.
Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskabs, Trondheim.
Tromso Museum.

PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.
Philippine Journal of Science, Manila,

POLAND.

Société Botanique de Pologne, Warszawa.
Société Polonaise des Naturalistes ‘“Kopernik,’’ Lwow.

RUSSIA.

Academie of Sciences, Leningrad.

Comité Géologique de Russie, Leningrade.
Institute of Plant Industry, Leningrad.
Siberian Mining Institute Library, Irkutsk.

SPAIN.

Instituto Nacional de Segunda Ensenanza de Valencia.
Real Academia de Ciencias y Artes, Barcelona.

SWEDEN.

Entomologiska Féreningen i Stockholm.
Geologiska Foreningen, Stockholm.

Stockholm’s Hoégskolas Bibliotek, Stockholm.
Regia Societas Scientiarum Upsaliensis, Upsala.

SWITZERLAND.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Basel.
Société de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle de Geneve.
Société Neuchateloise des Sciences Naturelles, Neuchatel.
Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles, Lausanne.
Zentralbibliothek, Ztirich.

UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA.

Albany Museum, Grahamstown.

Geological Society of South Africa, Johannesburg.

Royal Society of South Africa, Cape Town.

South African Museum, Cape Town.

South African Association for the Advancement of Science, Johannesburg.

237

UNITED STATES.

Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.
Academy of Science of St. Louis.

American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Boston.
American Chemical Society, Columbus, O.

American Geographical Society, New York.

American Microscopical Society, Manhattan, Kans.
American Museum of Natural History, New York.
American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia.

Arnold Arboretum, Jamaica Plain, Mass.

Biological Survey of the Mount Desert Region, Bar Harbour, Me.
Boston Society of Natural History, Boston, Mass.
Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences.

California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco.
Californian State Mining Bureau, San Francisco.
California, University of, Berkeley, Cal.

Chicago Academy of Sciences.

Citrus Experiment Station, Riverside, Cal.

Connecticut State Library, Hartford, Conn.

Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y.

Denison Scientific Association, Granville, O.

Field Museum of Natural History, Chicago, III.
Franklin Institute of the State of Pennsylvania, Philad.
Harvard Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass.
Illinois State Natural History Survey, Urbana, Il.
Illinois University Library, Urbana, Il.

Indiana Academy of Science, Indianapolis.

Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.

Kansas University, Lawrence, Kans.

Marine Biological Laboratory, Wood’s Hole, Mass.
Maryland Geological Survey, Baltimore, Md.

Michigan University, Chicago.

Missouri Botanical Garden Library, St. Louis, Mo.
Missouri, University of, Columbia.

National Academy of Science, Washington, D.C.
National Geographic Society, Washington, D.C.

New York Academy of Sciences, New York.

New York Public Library.

New York State Library, Albany, N.Y.

Ohio State University Library, Columbus, O.

Princeton University, Princeton, N.J.

San Diego Society of Natural History, San Diego, Cal.
Smithsonian Institution and Bureau of Ethnology, Washington.
United States Department of Agriculture, Washington, D.C.
United States Geological Survey, Washington, D.C.
United States National Museum, Washington, D.C.
Wagner Free Institute of Science, Philadelphia, Pa.
Washington University, St. Louis, Mo.

Yale University Library, New Haven, Conn.

URUGUAY.
Museo de Historia Natural de Montevideo.

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC

Summary

238 .

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS EXISTING ON SEPTEMBER 30, 1933.

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's

Transactions. Those marked with a dagger (7) are Lite Members,
Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note—The publications of the Society will not be sent to those whose subscriptions

are in arrear.

Bate oe Honorary Fetiows.

1910. *Bracc, Sir W. H., O.M., K.B.E., M.A, D.CL., LL.D, D.Se., F.R.S., Director of the
Royal Institution, Albemarle Street, London (Fellow 1886).

1926. *CHapMaN, F., A.L.S., National Museum. Melbourne.

1897. *Davin, Sir T. W. Epvceworto, K.BE, CMG, D.S.O,, B.A. D.Sc. F.RS,
F.G.S., Emeritus Professor of Geology, University of Sydney, Coringah, Sherbroke
Road, Hornsby, N.S.W.

1898. *Mzyricx, E. T., B.A., F.RS., F.Z.S., Thornhanger, Marlborough, Wilts, England.

1894. *Wirson, J. T., M.D. ChM., F-R-S., Professor of Anatomy, Cambridge University,
England.

FELLows.

1926. Apet, L. M., Chapman Camp, British Columbia.

1925. Anvery, W. J., 32 High Street, Burnside, S.A.

1927. *AtpERMAN, A. R., M.Sc. F.G.S., West Terrace, Kensington Gardens, S.A.

1931. Awnonrew, Rev. J. R., Woodside.

1929, AwnoeL Frank M., Box 1327G, G.P.O., Adelaide.

1895. ftAsuey, Epwin, F.L.S. M.B.0.U., Blackwood, S.A—Council, 1900-19; Vice-
President, 1919-21.

1902, *Baxer, W. H., King’s Park, S.A.

1930. Barnes, T. A., B.Sc., 13 Leah Street, Forestville.

1926. Becx, B. B., 127 Fullarton Road, Myrtle Bank, S.A.

1932, Bros, P. RK. B.D.Sc., L.D.S., 219 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1928. Best, R. J. M.Sc, A.A.C.L, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

1928. *Brst, Mrs. E. W., M.Sc., Claremont, Glen Osmond.

1931, Brircu, H, Mcl., M.R.C.S., M.R.CP., D.P.M., Mental Hospital, Parkside.

1930. Birxs, W. R,, B.Sc., 7 Kensington Road, Kensington.

1907. *Bracx, J. M., A.L.S., 82 Brougham Place, North Adelaide—Sir Joseph Verco Medal,
1930; Council, 1927-1931; President, 1933-; Vice-President, 1931-33.

1924, Browne, J. W., B.Ch., 169 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1916. *Butt, Lione. B., D.V.Sc., Laboratory, Adelaide Hospital

1923, Burnon, Roy S., B.Sc., University of Adelaide.

1921. Burton, R. J., c/o P.O., Kalgoorlie, W.A.

1922. *Campsett, T. D., D.D.Sc., Dental Dept., Adelaide Hospital, Frome Road, Adelaide—
Rep.-Governor, 1932-; Council, 1928-32; Vice-President, 1932-.

1907. *Cuarman, R. W., C.M.G, M.A, B.CE, F.R.A.S., Professor of Engineering and
Mechanics, University, Adelaide—Council, 1914-22.

1931. *Cuzwines, Cuas., Ph.D., F.G.S., “Alverstroke,” Glen Osmond.

1929. Cureistiz, W., M.B., B.S., Education Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide—
Treasurer, 1933-.

1930. Crarxe, G. H., B.Sc, Agricultural College, Roseworthy.

1895. *Cirranp, Joun B., M.D., Professor of Pathology, University, Adelaide—Council,
1921-26, 1932-: President, 1927-28; Vice-President, 1926-27,

1930. Cottrns, F. V., B.V.Sc., Green Road, Woodville.

1930. *Corogunoun, T. T., M.Se., University, Adelaide,

1907, *Cooxe, W. T., D.Sc., A.A.C.I., Lecturer, University of Adelaide.

1920. *Corron, Bernarn C., S.A. Museum, Adelaide.

1924. ve Cresricny, C. T. C., D.S.0., M.D., 219 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1929. Davinson, James, D.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond—
Council, 1932-.

1928. Daves, J. G., B.Sc. Ph. D., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

1927. *Davies, Prof. E. Harotp, Mus.Doc., The University, Adelaide.

1927, Dawson, Bernarp, M.D., F.R.C.S., Otago University, Dunedin, New Zealand.

1930. Drx, E. V., Glynde Road, Fire.

1915. *Dopp, Atan P., Prickly Pear Laboratory, Sherwood, Brisbane.

1932. Dunsronz, H. E,, M.B., B.S., J.P., 124 Payneham Road, St. Peters.

1921. Durron, G. H., B.Sc. Agricultural High School. Murray Bridge.

239

Date of

Election.

1931. Dwyer, J. M, , B.S., Adelaide Hospital.

1902. *Epguist, A. G,, 3 a rrell Street, Glenelg.

1918. *Etston, A. H,, FE S.. “T Jandyssil,” Aldgate.

1925. Encrann, H. N,, B.Sc., Commonwealth Research Station, Griffith, N.S.W.
1932. *Evans, J. W., M.A., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

1917,

1927,
1929.
1929.
1931.
1923.
1930.
1932.
1919.
1923.

1927,
1904.

1925.

1880.

1910,
1930.
1931,

1930.

1904.
1916.

1927,

1922.
1930.

1922.
1916.

1924.
1923.
1927,
1930.

1929,

1930,
1924.
1883,

1928.
1928.
1918.

1918.

1910.
1921.

1929.
1920.

1926.
1918.
1930.
1915.
1930.
1884.
1922.
1925.
1930.
1922.

*Fenner, Cuas. A. E., D.Sc. 42 Alexander Avenue, .Rose Park-—Rep.-Governor,
1929-31; Council, 1925-28; President, 1930-31; Vice-President, 1928-30; Secretary,
1924-25; Treasurer, 1932-33; Editor, 1934.

*Fincayson, H. H., The University of Adelaide.

Freney, M. RAPHAEL,

Freney, M. RrcHarp.

Frewrn, O. W., M.B., B.S., Woodville.

*Fry, H, K., D.S.O., M.B., B.S., B.Se., Glen. Osmond Road, Parkside—Council, 1933-.

Garrett, S. D., B.A., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

*Ginson, E. S. H., B.Sc., 297 Cross Roads, Clarence Gardens,

+Giastonsury, O. A., Adelaide Cement Co., Brookman Buildings, Grenfell Street.

Guover, C. R, J., Stanley Street, North Adelaide.

Goprrey, F. K,, Robert Street, Payneham, S.A.

Gorpon, "Davin, 72 Third Avenue, St. Peters.

+GOSSE, 7. H,, Gilbert House, Gilbert Place, Adelaide.

*GOYDER, Grorce, A.M.,, B.Sc. F.G.S., 232 East Terrace, Adelaide.

*GRANT, Kerr, M.Sc., Professor of Physics, University, Adelaide—Council, 1912-15.

Gray, James H., M.B., B.S., Adelaide Hospital.

Gray, JAMES T., Orroroo, S.A,

Greaves, H., Director, Botanic Garden, Adelaide.

Grirritu, H., Hove, Brighton.

Hacxketr, W. Cuamrion, 35 Dequetteville Terrace, Kent Town.

*Hackett, Dr. C. J., 196 Prospect Road, Prospect, S.A.

*Hare, H. M., The Director, S.A. Museum, Adelaide—Council, 1931-.

Hau, F. J., Adelaide Electric Supply Coy., Ltd., Adelaide.

*Ham, Witiiam, F.R.E.S., 112 Edward Street, Norwood.

}Hancocs, H. Lirson, A.M.1.C.E., M.1.M.M., A.Am.1.M.E., Bewdley, 66 Beresford
Road, Bellevue Hill, Rose Bay, Sydney.

Hawker, Captain C. A. S., M.A., M.H.R., Dillowie, Hallett, South Australia.

Huw, Frorence McCoy M., B.S., M.D., Elizabeth Street, Sydney, N.S.W.

Hoven, E. W., B.Sc., Dequetteville Terrace, Kent Town, S.A.

Hosxkine, H. C,, B.A., 24 Northcote Terrace, Gilberton.

Hosxrne, Joun W., 77 Sydenham Road, Norwood.

Hosxrine, J. S., B.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

*Hossretp, Pau S., M.Sc., Office of Home and Territories, Canberra.

*Howcuin, Proressor Watter, F.G.S., “Stonycroft,” Goodwood East—Sir Joseph
Verco Medal, 1929; Rep.-Governor, 1901-22; Council, 1883-84, 1887-89, 1890-94,
1902-; President, 1894-96; Vice-President, 1884-87, 1889-90, 1896-1902; Editor,
1883-88, 1893-94, 1895-96, 1901-1933,

Hurcompse, Miss J. C., 95 Unley Road, New Parkside.

Iroutp, Percy, Kurralta, Burnside.

*Isinc, Ernest H., c/o Comptroller’s Office, S.A. Railways, Adelaide.

*Jewnison, Rev. J. C., 7 Frew Street, Fullarton Estate.

*Jounson, E. A., M.D., M.R.C.S., Town Hall, Adelaide.

*JoHNSTON, Proressor T. Harvey, M.A., D.Sc., University, Adelaide—Rep.-Governor,
1927-29 ; Council, 1926-28; Vice-President, 1928-31; President, 1931-32.

Jounston, W. C., Government Agricultural Inspector, Riverton.

*Jones, Proressor F. Woop, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., D.Sc., F.R.S., University,
Melbourne—Rep.-Governor, 1922-27; Council, 1921-25; President, 1926-27; Vice-
President, 1925-26.

Jurtus, Epwarn, Conservator of Forests, Adelaide,

Kiuper, W. J., 28 Second Avenue, Joslin.

Kireman, A. W., 12 Ningara Avenue, Kings Park,

*LaurigE, D. F., Agricultural Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide.

Le Messurier, D. H., B.Sc., 133 Mills Terrace, North Adelaide.

Lennon, A. A. M.D., MRCS, es Brougham Place, North Adelaide.

Lenvon, Guy A,, . B.S., M.R.C.P., North Terrace,

Lewis, ‘A. S., M.D., B.S., The Maudsley Hospital, Denmark Hill, London, S.E. 5.

Louwycx, Rev, N. H., The Rectory, Yankalilla.

*Manican, C. T., M.A,, B.E., F.G.S., University of Adelaide—Council, 1930-33; Vice-
President, 1933-, -

ests

240

Date ot

Election.

1923. MarsHatt, J, C.. Darrock, Payneham.

1928. *MarcraitH, B. G., M.B., B.S., Magdalen College, Oxford, England.

1930. Macarry, Miss K. ne B., B.A., B.Sc., 38 Winchester Street, Malvern.

1932. Mawn, E. A., C/o Bank of Adelaide, Adelaide.

1929. Makrtrn, F. C., B.A., Technical High School, Thebarton.

1905. *Mawson, Sir Doveras, D.Sc., B.E., F.R.S., Professor of Geology, University, Adelaide
Sir Joseph Verco Medal, 1931; President, 1924-25; Vice-President, 1923-24, 1925-26.

1919. Mayo, Heten M., M.D., 47 Melbourne Street, North Adelaide.

1920. Mayo, Herpert, LL.B., K.C., 16 Pirie Street, Adelaide.

1929. McLaucauin, E., M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., Adelaide Hospital (removed in error from
last list).

1907. Merrosg, Rosrrt T., Mount Pleasant.

1930. Mutter, J. L., 18 Ralston Strect, Largs Bay.

1925. }tMurcHett, Professor Sir Witt1aM, K.C.M.G., M.A., D.Sc., The University, Adelaide.

1930. Mrrcurtt, Miss U. H., B.Sc., Presbyterian Girls’ College, Glen Osmond.

1930. Murcueit, M. L., B.Sc., Fitzroy Terrace, Prospect.

1897. *Morcan, A. M., M.B., Ch.B., 215 Brougham Place, North Adelaide.

1924. Morrson, A. J.. Deputy Town Clerk, Town Hall, Adelaide.

1930. Morris, L. G., Beehive Buildings, King William Street, Adelaide.

1921. Movutpen, Owen M., M.B., B.S., Unley Road, Unley.

1925. tMurray, Hon. Srr GrorckE, K.C.M.G., B.A., LL.M., Magill, S.A.

1925. Norru, Rev. WM. O., Methodist Manse, Netherby.

1930. OcxKenben. G. P., Public School, Streaky Bay, S.A.

1932, OipHant, H, R., University, Adelaide.

1913. *Osnorn, T. G. B., D.Sc., Professor of Botany, University, Sydney—Council, 1915-20,
1922-24: President, 1925-26; Vice-President, 1924-25, 1926-27,

1927, Paxrrince, T. B., B.Sc., Koonamore, via Waukaringa, S.A

1929, Panx, Harorp G., 75 Rundle Street, Adelaide.

1929, Pauui, Avec. G., B.A. B.Sc., 10 Milton Avenue, Fullarton Estate.

1924. Pearce, C., Happy Valley Reservoir, O'Halloran Hill.

1924, Perkins, A. J. Director of Agriculture, Flinders Street, Adelaide.

1928. Purpps, Ivan F., Ph.D., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

1926. *Preer, C. S., M.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

1925. *Prescotr, Proressor J. A., D.Sc. A.I.C., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen
Osmond—Council, 1927-30; Vice-President, 1930-32; President, 1932-.

1926, Price, A. Grenrett, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.G.S., St. Mark’s College, North Adelaide.

1907, #*PuLterne Rorerr H., M.B., Ch.M., North Terrace, Adelaide—Council, 1914-19, 1932-;
eae 1922-24: Vice-President, 1912-14, 1919-22, 1924-25; Secretary, 1909-12,
1925-30.

1925. RicHarpson, Professor A. E. V., M.A., D.Sc, “Urrbrae,” Glen Osmond, 5.A.

1926. *Ripvett, P. D., Technical College, Newcastle, N.S.W.

1911. *Roacu, B. S., 81 Kent Terrace, Kent Town—Treasurer, 1920-32.

1925. Rogers, L. S., B.D.Sc., 192 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1905. *Rocers, R. S. M.A. M.D., 52 Hutt Street, Adelaide—Council, 1907-14, 1919-21;
President, 1921-22; Vice-President, 1914-19, 1922-24.

1931. Rupp, E. A,, 10 Church Street, Highgate.

1922, *Samuet, Georrrey, M.Sc., University of Adelaide.

1928 Scorr, A. E., B.Se., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

1930. Scuwerper, M., M.R., B.S., 175 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1924. *Secnrt, Ratpo W., M.A., B.Sc., Assistant Government Geologist, Flinders Street,
Adelaide—Secretary, 1930-.

1891, Srerway, W. H., 14 Frederick Street, Gilberton—Council, 1893-1909.

1930, Service, A. D., c/o Colonial Sugar Refinery Co., New Farm, Brisbane.

1926. *Suearp, Haroip, Nuriootpa.

1928. SwHowez, H., 27 Dutton Terrace, Medindie.

1920. Simpson, A. A., C.M.G., C.B.E., F-R.G.S., Lockwood Road, Burnside,

1924. Srpson, Frep. N., Pirie Street, Adelaide.

1925. +Smrru, T. E. Barr, B.A., 25 Currie Street, Adelaide.

1927. Srarceton, P. S., Henley Beach, South Australia.

1922, Surron, J., Fullarton Road, Netherby.

1932. Swan, D. C, B.Se., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

1925. Symons, Ivor G., Church Street, Highgate.

1929. *Taytor, Joun K., B.A. M.Sc., Waite Agricutural Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

1929. Tez, Sipney F., Adelaide Hospital.

1923. *Tuomas, R. G, B.Sc., 29 Carter Street, Thorngate, 5.A.

1923. *Tinpare, N. B., South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

1894. *Turner, A. Jerrerts, M.D., F.E.S., Wickham Terrace, Brisbane, Queensland.

Date of

241

Election.

1925.
1930.
1930.
1924,
1929.
1912.

1930.
1930.
1931,

1920.
1930.
1923.
1931.

1929.

Turner, Duptey C., National Chambers, King William Street, Adelaide.

Wa ckiey, A., B.A., B.Sc., Ph.D. 8 Ralston Grove, Myrtle Bank.

Watkt.ey, Mrs. J. E., B.Sc., (Lon.), 8 Ralston Grove, Myrtle Bank.

Wa ker, W. D., M.B., B.S., B.Sc., c/o National Bank, King William Street.

Watters. Lance S.. 157 Buxton Street, North Adelaide.

*Warp, L. Kerry, B.A., B.E., D.Sc., Govt. Geologist, Flinders Street, Adelaide—
Council, 1924-27, 1933-; President, 1928-30; Vice-President, 1927-28.

Wuirtetaw, A. J., B.Sc., Norwood High School, Kensington.

WILKINSON, Proressor H. J., B.A.. Ch.M., M.D., University, Adelaide.

Witson, Cuas. E. C., M.B., B.S., “Woodfield,” Fisher Street, Fullarton,

*Wixton, Professor J. R., D.Sc., University of Adelaide.

*Womerscey, H., F.E.S.,, A.L.S., S.A. Museum, Adelaide.

*Woop, J. G., D.Sc., Ph.D., University of Adelaide.

*Woops, Miss N. H., M.A., Mount Torrens.

ASSOCIATE,
CLELAND, W. Parton, 31 Wattle Street, Fullarton.

PAST AND PRESENT OFFICERS OF THE SOCIETY.
PRESIDENTS.

1877-79 Pror. Ratrpu Tate, F.G.S., F.L.S. 1921-22 R. 5S. Rocers, M.A., M.D.
1879-81 Cuter Justice [Str] S. J. Way. 1922-24 R. H. Putrerne, M.3., Ch.M.

1881-82 «[Srr] Cuarves Topp, C.M.G., F.R.

1924-25 Srtr Douc.as Mawson, D.Sc, B.E.,

ALS.
1882-83 H.T.Wuutrrett, M.A., M.D., F.R.M.S. F.R.S.
1883-84 Pror. H. Lams, M.A., F.R.S. 1925-26 Pror. T. G. B. Oszorn, D.Sc.
1884-85 H. E. Mars, M.1.C.E. 1926-27. Pror. F. Woop Jones, M.B., B.S.,
1885-88 Pror.E.H.Rennisz, M.A.,, D.Sc., F.C.S., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., D.Sc., F.R.S.
1888-89 [Sir] Epwarp C. Strrtinc, CM.G., 1927-28 Pror. Joun B. CLEL AND, M.D.
Ss. "

M.A., M.D. (Cantab.), "PRC. 1928-30 L. Kerro Warp, B.A., B.E., D.Sc,
F.R. S. E.G.S.A.

1889-91 Rev. THomas Bracxzurn, B.A. 1930-31 C. A, E, Fenner, D.Sc.

1891-94 Pror. Ratpu Tate, F.G.S., F.LS. 1931-32 Pror. T. Harvey Jounston, M.A,
1894-96 Pror. Water Howcuatrn, F.G.S. D.Sc.

1896-99 W. L. CLerann, M.B. 1932-33 Prov. J. A. Prescott, D.Sc., AIC.
1899-03 Pror.E.H.Rennisz, M.A., D.Sc. F.C.S. 1933- J. M. Brack, A.L.S.

1903-21 Sir JosepH C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.

SECRETARIES.

1877 W.C. M. Frvniss. 1895-96 W. L. CieLanp, M.B.
1877-81 Watter Rurt, C.E. 1896-09 G. G. Mayo, C.E.
1881-92 W. L. Cre.ann, M.B. 1909-12. R. H. Purrerne, M.B., Ch.M.
1892-93 W. C. Grassy. 1912-24 Water Rut, CE.
1893-94 W. B. Poorer, 1924-25 Cuas, Fenner, D.Sc.
1894-95 { W. L. CLeLanp, M.B. 1925-30 R. H. Putrerne, M.B., Ch.M.

UW. B. Poote. 1930- Ratex W. Seenit, M.A., B.Sc.

TREASURERS.
1877 J. S. Lioyn. 1909-20 W. B. Poors.
1877-83. THomas H. Smeaton. 1920-32 B.S. Roacu
1883-92 Watrter Rutt, C.E. 1932-33 CHas. Fenner, D.Sc.
1892-94 W. L. Cieranp, M.B. 1933- W. Curerstiz, M.B., B.S.
1894-09 Watter Rutt, C.E.
EDITORS.

1877-83. Pror. Ratpu Tare, F.G.S., F.LS, 1894-95 Pror. Ratpu Tate, F.G.S., F.L.S.
1883-88 Pror. WaLteR Howcuin, F.G.S. 1895-96 Pror. WALTER Howcuin, nes S.
1888-93 Pror. Ratpu Tate, F.G. S., F.L.S. 1896-00 Pror. Ratew Tare, F.G. S,, EF.L.S.
1893-94 § Pror, WaLTER Howcuin, E.G. S. 1901-33 Pror. WALTER Howcnin, F.GS.

UPror. Rarpn Tare, FG. S,, F.L.S. 1934- Cuas. Fenner, D.Sc,

REPRESENTATIVE GOVERNORS.

1877-83 [Sir] Caarzes Topp, C.M.G.,F.R.A.S. 1922-27. Pror. F. Woon Jones, M.B., etc.
1883-87. H. T. Warrrett, M.A., M.D., PRM. S. 1927-29. Pror. T. H. Jounston, M.A. D.Sc.
1887-01 Pror. RALPH TATE, FG. S, FL, 8. 1929-31 Cuas. Fenner, D.Sc.

1901-22 Pror. WaLter Howcuin, FGS. 1932 T. D. CAMPBELL, D.D.Sce.

APPENDIX.

Summary

242

APPENDIX.

A LIST OF ORIGINAL PAPERS AND OTHER WORKS PUBLISHED

BY WALTER HOWCHIN FROM 1874 TO 1933.

[The Heading over each Section shows the Place of Publication.]

IL

Primitive METHODIST QuaRTERLY REVIEW AND CHRISTIAN AMBASSADOR.
Primitive MetHovist PusrisHinc House, SutTron STREET, Lonpbon.

1874.

1874.

1875.

1876.
1876.

1876.

1889.

1889.

1876.

1876.

“Scientific Dredging in the Deep Seas. Part 1.,” vol. xii., No. 47, Aug.,
1874, pp. 221-233. [The Lightning and The Porcupine Expeditions. |

“Scientific Dredging in the Deep Seas. Part IL.” vol. xii., No. 48, Nov.,
1874, pp. 353-361. [The Challenger Expedition. |

“Scientific Dredging in the Deep Seas. Part IJI.,” vol. xviit., No. 49,
Feb., 1875, pp. 36-52. [The Challenger Expedition, continued. ]

“Geikic’s Life of Murchison,” vol. xiv., No. 53, Feb., 1876, pp. 29-45.

“Sir Roderick I. Murchison and His Contemporaries,” vol. xiv., No, 54,
May, 1876, pp. 97-112.

“The Present Aspects of Geological Science,” vol. xiv., No. 56, Nov.,
1876, pp. 320-330.

“Darwinism and Design in Nature, Part L.,” vol. xxxi. (N.S., vol. xi.),
April, 1889, pp. 225-231.

“Darwinism and Design in Nature, Part I[1.,” vol. xxxi. (N.S. vol. xi),
July, 1889, pp. 498-511.

Il.
In Wutson’s Hanpsook to Morretu.

“The Geology of Morpeth and Neighbourhood.” Morpeth, 1876.

IIT.
PALAEONTOGRAPHICAL SOcIETY’s PUBLICATIONS.

“Monograph of Carboniferous and Permian Foraminifera,” by H. B.
Brady, London, 1876.

References to Howchin’s personal contributions will be found on the
following pages :—
Localities reported on, pp. 29, 30 bis, 31 bis, 39, 41 tres.
References to particular genera and species, pp. 107, 119, 120,
121,

List of occurrences at particular localities :—

Table I, Nos. 2, 15, 16, 17, 18, p. 153.
Table II. Nos, 87, 103, 107, 116, pp. 154. 156.

Numerous figured specimens and micro-sections.

1880.

1888.

1899.

1893.

1893.

1895.

1898.

1900.

1902.

1907.

1907.
1911,

1913.

1923.

243

IV.
Natura. History TRANSACTIONS OF NORTHUMBERLAND, DURHAM,
AND NEWCASTLE-ON-TYNE.

“Notes on a Find of Prehistoric Implements in Allendale, with Notes of
Similar Finds in the Surrounding Districts,” vol. vii., 1880, pp. 210-
222, Newcastle-on-Tyne.

Vv.
JouRNAL OF THE RoyaLt Microscopicar Society, LLONLOoN,

Additions to the Knowledge of the Carboniferous Foraminifera,” 1888,
pp. 1-13, pls. viti.-ix. [British Localities. ]

VI.
Tue Hassett Press, ADELAIDE.

“The Influence of the Physical Sciences on Religious Thought.” “A Paper
read before the Methodist Preachers’ Association, Adelaide, on
March 24, 1899, and published by request of the meeting.”

VII.
AUSTRALASIAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE.

“On the Occurrence of Foraminifera in the Permo-Carboniferous Rocks
of Tasmania,” vol. v., 1893, pp. 344-348, pls. 10-11. Adelaide.

“A Census of the Fossil Foraminifera of Australia,” vol. v., 1893,
pp. 348-373. Adelaide.

“Report of Glacial Research Committee, Hallett’s Cove, South Australia,”
Tate, Howchin, and David, vol. vi., 1895, pp. 315-320, pls. 49-50.
Brisbane.

“On the Evidences of Glaciation in the Inman Valley, Yankalilla, and
Cape Jervis Districts,” vol. vii, 1898, pp. 114-127, pls. 2-3. Sydney.

“Evidences of Glaciation in Hindmarsh Valley and Kangaroo Island,”
vol. viii., 1900 (1901), pp. 172-176, pls. 1, 2. Melbourne.

Glacial Research Committee (S. Aust.): “(1) Permo-Carboniferous
Glaciation of Southern Yorke Peninsula”; (2) “Glacial Beds of
Assumed Cambrian Age,” vol. ix., 1902, pp. 194-200, plate. Hobart.

Glacial Research Committee: “Cambrian and (?) Permo-Carboniferous
Glaciation in South Australia,” vol. xi., 1907, pp. 264-272. [Inman
Valley.] Adelaide.

“General Description of the Cambrian Series of South Australia,” vol. xi.,
1907, pp. 414-422. Adelaide.

Glacial Research Committee: “Cambrian and Permo-Carboniferous Gla-
ciations in South Australia,” vol. xiii., 1911, pp. 203-208. Sydney.
“The Evolution of the Physiographical Features of South Australia,”
President’s Address, Section C., vol, xiv., 1913, pp. 148-178, pls. 3-4.

Melbourne.

Glacial Research Committee: “Glacial Deposits at Yellow Cliff, etc.,
River Finke, Central Australia,” by Sir Edgeworth David and Prof.
Howchin, vol. xvi., 1923, pp. 74-94, pls. 1-3. Wellington, N.Z.

1923.

1924.

1884.

1886.

1887.

1888,

1890.

1891,

1891.

1892.

1893.

1895.

1895.

1895.

1895.

1896.

1897.

1897.

244

“The Recent Extinction of Certain Marine Animals of the Southern Coast
of Australia, together with other Facts that are suggestive of a change
in Climate,” vol. xvi., 1923, pp. 94-101. Wellington, N.Z.

“The Sturtian Tillite in the Willouran Ranges, near Marree (Hergott)
and in the north-eastern portions of the Ilinders Ranges,” vol. xvii.,
1924 (1926), pp. 67-76. Adelaide.

VITL.

TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE Royal SociETY OF
SouTH AUSTRALIA.

“On the Fossil Foraminifera from the Government Boring at Hergott
Township, with General Remarks on the Section and on other Forms
of Microzoa observed therein,” vol. viii., 1884-5, pp. 79-93.

“Remarks on a Geological Section at the New Graving Dock, Glanville,
with special reference to a Supposed Old Land Surface now below
Sea Level.,” vol. x., 1886-7, pp. 31-35.

“Remarks on an Unusual Development of a Low Vegetable Organism,”
vol. ix., 1885-6 (1887), pp. 219-220.

“The Foraminifera of the Older Tertiary of Australia (No. 1, Muddy
Creek, Victoria),” vol. xii., 1888-9 (1889), pp. 1-20, pl. 1.

“The Estuarine Foraminifera of the Port Adelaide River,” vol., x1ii.,
1890, pp. 161-169.

“The Foraminifera of the Older Tertiary. No. 2 (Kent Town Borc),
Adelaide,” vol. xiv., 1891, pp. 350-354, pl. 13, figs. 9-13.

“The Foraminifera of the Older Tertiary, Muddy Creek, Victoria—
Addenda et Corrigenda,” vol. xiv., 1891, pp. 355-356, pl. 13, figs. 9, 10.

“Note on the Occurrence of Hyalostelia in Rocks of Cambrian Age in
South Australia,” vol. xv., 1892, pp. 188-189. [For authorship, see
p. 183.]

“Notes on the Government Borings at Tarkaninna and Mirrabuckinna,
with Special Reference to the Foraminifera observed therein,”
vol, xvil., 1893, pp. 346-349.

“New Facts bearing on the Glacial Features of Hallett’s Cove,” vol. xix.,
1895, pp. 61-69.

“The Foraminifera of the Eocene [Miocene] Beds at Cape Otway.”
Included in “Correlation of the Marine Tertiaries of Australia, Part
IL., Victoria,” by R. ‘late and J. Dennant, vol. xix., 1895, p. 114.

“Carboniferous Foraminifera of Western Australia with Descriptions of
New Species,” vol. xix., 1895, pp. 194-198, pl. 10, figs. 1-8.

“Two New Species of Cretaceous Foraminifera,” vol. xix., 1895, pl. 10,
figs. 9-13.

“Notes on a Bore at Enfield, near Adelaide,” vol. xx., 1895-6, pp. 260-262.
[Fresh-water Beds.]

“On the Occurrence of Lower Cambrian Fossils in the Mount Lofty
Ranges,” vol. xxi., 1897, pp. 74-86.

President’s Address. Subject: “Recent Researches bearing on the Tora-
minifera,” vol. xxi., 1897, pp. 106-121.

1898.
1899,

1899.

1900.
1900.
1901.
1901,
1903.
1904.
1906.

1909.

1909.
1910.

1910.

1911.

1912,
1912.
1914.

1915.

1915.

1916,

245

“Further Discoveries of Glacial Remains in South Australia,” vol. xxil.,
1898, pp. 12-17. [Hindmarsh Valley. ]

“List of Foraminifera from the Murray Desert Beds,” vol. xxiii., 1899,
pp. 110-111.

“Notes on the Geology of Kangaroo Island, with Special Reference to
Evidences of Extinct Glacial Action,” vol. xxiii., 1899, pp. . 198-207,
pls. 4, 5,

“Evidences of Extinct Glacial Action in Southern Yorke Peninsula,”
vol. xxiv., 1900, pp. 71-80.

“Suggestions as to the Origin of the Salt Lagoons of Southern Yorke
Peninsula,” vol. xxv., 1900-1 (1901), pp. 1-9.

“Preliminary Note on the Existence of Glacial Beds of Cambrian Age in
South Australia,” vol. xxv., 1901, pp. 10-13.

“Notes on the Extinct Volcanoes of Mount Gambier and Mount Schank,”
vol. xxv., 1901, pp. 54-62.

“Further Notes on the Geology of Kangaroo Island,” “Aboriginal Occupa-

tion of Kangaroo Island,” vol. xxvii., 1903, pp. 75-90.

“The Geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges, Part I., The Coastal District,”

vol. xxviii., 1904, pp. 253-280, pls. 37-44.

“The Geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges, Part II.” vol. xxx., 1906,
pp. 227-262, pl. 12.

“Notes on the Discovery of a Large Mass of Living Coral in Gulf St. Vin-
cent, with Bibliographical References to the Recent Corals of South
Australia,” vol. xxxiti., 1909, pp. 242-252, pl. 16.

“Description of an Old Lake Area in Pekina Creek and its Relation to
Recent Geological Changes,” vol. xxxiii., 1909, pp. 253-261, pls. 17-18.

“The Glacial (Permo-Carboniferous) Moraines of Rosetta Head and
King’s Point, South Australia,” vol. xxxiv., 1910, pp. 1-12, pls. 1-17.

“Description of a New and Extensive Area of Permo-Carboniferous
Glacial Deposits in South Australia,” vol. xxxiv., 1910, pp. 231-247,
pls. 31-45. [Mount Compass and River Finniss Districts. ]

“Description of a Disturbed Area of Cainozoic Rocks in South Australia,
with Remarks on its Geological Significance,” vol. xxxv., 1911,
pp. 47-59, pls. 10-19. [Sea-cliffs near Sellick’s Hill.]

“On an Outlier of Older Cainozoic Rocks in the River Light, near
Mallala,” vol. xxxvi., 1912, pp. 14-20, pl. 1.

“Notes on Recurrent Transgressions of the Sea at Dry Creek,” vol. xxxvi.,
1912., pp. 34-39,

“The Occurrence of the Genus Cryptozodn in the (?) Cambrian of Aus-
tralia,” vol. xxxviii., 1914, pp. 1-10, pls. 1-5.

“A Geological Sketch-Map, with Descriptive Notes on the Upper and
Lower Torrens Limestones in the Type District,” vol. xxxix., 1915,
pp. 1-15, pl. 1.

“A List of Foraminifera and other Organic Remains obtained from Two
Borings on the Lilydale Sheep Station,’ vol. xxxix., 1915, pp. 345-351.

A Note on Hyalostelia (included in a paper by R. Etheridge, jun., on
“Hyalostea australis . . . from the Ordovician Rocks of the
MacDonnell Ranges,” vol. xl., 1916, p. 150.

1916.

1916.

1917.

1917.

1918.

1918.

1919, ©

1919.

1920.

1920.

1921.

1921.

246

“Notes on a High-level Occurrence of a Fossiliferous Bed of Upper Caino-
zoic Age in the Neighbourhood of the Murray Plains,” vol. x1., 1916,
pp. 258-261.

“The Geology of Mount Remarkable; with an Appendix containing
Petrographical Notes on the Igneous Rocks of the Foothills of Mount
Remarkable by E. O. Thiele,” vol. xl., 1916, pp. 545-583, pls. 53 and 54.

“Notes on the Remarkable Hailstorm, near Adelaide, on May 12, 1917,”
vol. xli., 1917, pp. 323-332, pl. 16.

“Notes on Diatomaceous Earth from Lord Howe Island,” vol. xli., 1917,
pp. 659-660.

“Notes on the Geology of Ardrossan and Neighbourhood,” vol. xlii., 1918,
pp. 185-225, pls. 19-29.

“A New Locality for Older Tertiary (Miocene) Fossiliferous Beds”
[Hackham], vol. xlii., 1918, pp. 294-295.

“Geological Memoranda” (First Contribution), vol. xliii., 1919, pp. 45-58,
pl. 9:—
I. ‘The ‘Sarsen’ Stones of South Australia.”

Il. ‘Pumice and other Substances occurring as Sea-drift near
Cape Banks.”

III. “Salt a Cause of Mechanical Disintegration of Rocks in Arid
Regions.”
IV. “Nodular Barytes of Peculiar Forms from Central Australia,”
pl. 9
“Supplementary Notes on the Occurrence of Aboriginal Remains Dis-

covered by Capt. S. A. White at Fulham, with Remarks on the Geo-
logical Section,” vol. xliii., 1919, pp. 81-84.

“Autoclastic, Intraformational, Enterolithic, and Desiccation Breccias and
Conglomerates, with References to some South Australian Occur-
rences,” vol. xliv., 1920, pp. 300-321, pls. 16-21.

“Miscellanea,” vol. xliv., 1920, pp. 379-383 :—
I. “Obituary Notice of Robert Etheridge, Jun.”
Il. “The Solvent Effects of Sea-water on Limestones.”
Ill. ®“Note on the Generic Position of Certain Australian Cam-
brian Trilobites.”
IV. “Sarsen Stones and Drift Pumice in New Zealand.”

“Crinoids from the Cretaceous Beds of Australia, with Description of a
New Species,” vol. xlv., 1921, pp. 1-4, pl. 1.

“Geological Memoranda” (Second Contribution), vol. xlv., 1921, pp. 25-
35, pls. 5-7 -—

I. “Miniature Serpuline, Atells,” pl. 5.
II. “Pseudo-Cryptozoén Structure.”
Ill. “A Prehistoric Alluvial Fan of Exceptional Character at the
Mouth of the Glen Osmond Gorge,” pls. 6 and 7.
IV. “The Occurrence of Scoriaceous Boulders in the Ancient
Gravels of the River Torrens.”

1921.

1921.

1922.

1923.

1924.

1925.

1926.

1926.

1927.

1928.

1929.

1929.

1930.

1931.

1933.

1896.

247

“On the Occurrence of Aboriginal Stone Implements of Unusual Types in
the Tableland Regions of Central Australia,” vol. xlv., 1921, pp. 206-
230, pls. 11-21.

“On the Methods Adopted by the Aborigines of Australia in the Making
of Stone Implements, based on Actual Observations,” vol. xlv., 1921,
pp. 280-281.

“A Geological Traverse of the Flinders Range from the Parachilna Gorge
to the Lake Frome Plains,” vol. xlvi., 1922, pp. 46-82, pl. 4.

“A Geological Sketch-section of the Sea-cliffs on the Eastern Side of
Gulf St. Vincent from Brighton to Sellick’s Hill, with Descriptions,”
vol. xlvii., 1923, pp. 279-315, pls. 22-26.

“Further Discoveries of Permo-Carboniferous Glacial Features near
Hallett’s Cove,” vol. xlviii., 1924, pp. 297-302, pls. 26-28.

“The Geographical Distribution of Fossiliferous Rocks of Cambrian Age
in South Australia, with Geological Notes and References,” vol. xlix.,
1925, pp. 1-26, with Maps and Geological Sections.

“The Geology of the Barossa Ranges and Neighbourhood in Relation to
the Geological Axis of the Country,” vol. 1., 1926, pp. 1-16, pl. 1.

“The Geology of Victor Harbour, Inman Valley, and Yankalilla Districts,
with Special Reference to the Great Inman Valley Glacier of Permo-
Carboniferous Age,” vol. 1, 1926, pp. 89-119, pls. 7-16.

“The Sturtian Tillite in the Neighbourhood of Eden and in the Hundreds
of Kapunda, Neales, and English, South Australia,” vol. li, 1927,
pp. 330-349, pls. 14 and 15.

“The Sturtian Tillite and Associated Beds on the Western Scarps of the
Southern Flinders Ranges,” vol. lii., 1928, pp. 82-94.

“On the Probable Occurrence of the Sturtian Tillite near Nairne and
Mount Barker,” vol. ltii., 1929, pp. 27-32.

“Notes on the Geology of the Great Pyap Bend (Loxton), River Murray
Basin, and Remarks on the Geological History of the River Murray,”
vol. liit., 1929, pp. 167-195, pls. 6-8.

“The Geology of Orroroo and District,” vol. liv., 1930, pp. 159-176,
pls. 8 and 9.

“The Dead Rivers of South Australia, Part I—The Western Group,”
vol. lv., 1931, pp. 113-135, coloured map, and pl. 5.

“The Dead Rivers of South Australia, Part II].—The Eastern Group,”
vol. tvii., 1933, pp. 1-41, coloured map and pls. 1-4.

IX.
LINNEAN Society or New Sours WALES.

“Note on the Occurrence of Casts of Radiolaria in Pre-Cambrian (?)
Rocks, South Australia,” by T. W. E. David and W. Howchin,
vol, xxi., 1896, pp. 571-583, pls. 39 and 40.

1905.

1907.

248

X,
MEMOIRS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF NEw SouTrH WALES.

“A Monograph of the Foraminifera of the Permo-Carboniferous Lime-
stones of New South Wales,” by F. Chapman and W. Howchin.
Palaeontology No. 14, 1905, E. F. Pittman (Letter of Transmissal),
p. vii. Stratigraphical Note, T. W. E. David, pp. ix.-xvi. Fora-
minifera, Chapman and Howchin, pp. 1-22, pls. 1-4,

XI.
WESTERN AUSTRALIAN GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.
“Foraminifera from a Calcareous Marlstone, Gingin.” Bull. 27, 1907,
pp. 38-43. Mines Dept., Perth.

XII.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE RoyaL GEOGRAPHICAL SociEry oF AUSTRALASIA,

1909.

1910.

1908.

1912.

1914.

1920.

1920.

SoutH AUSTRALIAN BRANCH.

“Geological Observations on Some of the Localities Visited by the
s.s. Governor Musgrave Party (A.A.Ad.Sc. Adelaide Meeting) in
Jan., 1907,” vol. x., 1907-8 (1909), pp. 204-219, pls. 23-27.

XIII.
GOVERNMENT OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA,

“Native Animals of South Australia,” Department of Intelligence, Bull. 14,
pp. 1-7. Govt. Printer, Adelaide.

XIV,
QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF THE GroLocicaL Socrety, Lonpon.

“Glacial Beds of Cambrian Age in South Australia,” vol. Ixiv., May, 1908,
pp. 234-259, pls. 19-26.
XV.

JouRNAL or GeoLocy, Universiry or Cuicaco, U.S.A,

“Australian Glaciations,” vol. xx., No 3, 1912, pp. 193-227. [Seven photo-
graphs reproduced. |
XVI.

SouTH AUSTRALIAN HANDBOOK.
BriTisH ASSOCIATION, AUSTRALIAN MEETING.

“Geology and Physiography of South Australia,” pp. 209-244. Govt.
Printer, Adelaide.
XVII.

UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE.

Commemoration Address: “The Physical Sciences in Relation to Mental
Culture.” Hassell & Son, Adelaide.

XVIII.

Tue OrriciaL YEAR Book oF THE COMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA.

Special Article: ‘‘Past Glacial Action in Australia,” No. 13, 1920,
pp. 1,133-1,146. Govt. Printer, Melbourne.

1926.

1928.

1933.

1917,

1918.

1920.

1929.

XIX.
THe SoutH AUSTRALIAN ORNITIIOLOGIST.

“Some References to the Literature concerning the Extinct Emu of Kan-
garoo Island,” vol. viii., pt. 7, 1926, pp. 244-253.

XX.
RECORDS OF THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MusEuM.

“A New and Very Large Crioceratid Ammonoid from the Cretaceous of
Central Australia.” By Walter Howchin and F. W. Whitehouse,
vol. iii., No. 4, May, 1928, pp. 483-492.

“A Rejoinder to some Recent Ethnological Papers,” vol. v., No. 1. Aug.,
1933, pp. 1-11.

XXI.
THE FOLLOWING ARE BouND VOLUMES.

“The Geography of South Australia, with an Introduction by Professor
J. W. Gregory.” Revised Edition, 1917. 318 pages and 76 illustra-
tions, Whitcombe and Tombs. [Out of print. ]

“The Geology of South Australia (in Two Divisions) :—

Div. 1,: An Introduction to Geology (Physiographical and Struc-
tural) from the Australian Standpoint.

Div. 2.: The Geology of South Australia, with Notes on the Chief
Geological Systems and Occurrences in the other Australian
States.”

Pages: XVI. and 543, with 330 illustrations, Govt. Printer, Adelaide.
[Out of print.]

“An Introduction to Geology, Physiographical and Structural, being
Division I. of the Geology of South Australia.” Reprinted separately.
Pages V. and 340, with 258 illustrations. Govt. Printer, Adelaide.
fOut of print.]

“The Geology of South Australia, with Notes on the Chief Geological
Systems and Occurrences in the other Australian States.” Second
Edition Revised and Enlarged, 1929. Pages XV. and 320, with 157
illustrations. Gillingham & Co. Limited, Adelaide.

Hanpbsooxs or THE FLorA AND FauNa or SouTH AUSTRALIA, ISSUED BY THE
Britis Scrence Guitp (Sours AusrratiAn BrancH), AND PUBLISHED BY

FAVOUR OF THE HONOURABLE THE PREMIER.

1925-1930. “The Building of Australia and the Succession of Life, with Special

Reference to South Australia.” In Three Parts, Pages: XII, and
750, with 274 Illustrations :-—

Part I. The Pre-Palaeozoic and Palaeozoic Divisions, pp. 1-203.
Part II. The Mesozoic Divisions, pp. 205-339.
Part III. The Cainozoic (or Tertiary) Divisions, pp. 339-750.

[The three Parts can be had separately.] Govt. Printer, Adelaide,

W. #.

GENERAL INDEX

Summary

250

GENERAL INDEX.

[Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described

are new to science.]

Aborigines of Central Australia: Botanical
Notes concerning, 113, 117; substances used
as food, 115; narcotics, 116; aromas used,
116; woods used for weapons, etc. 117;
plants used for decorative purposes, 117

Acacia aneura (Mulga), used by natives, 120;
salicina, 152; spinescens, 152; obliqua, 152;
mollissima, 153; Kempeana (witchety
bush) used by natives, 120

Acarina from Australia and South Africa,
108

Achorutes rosaceus, 63; cirratus, 63; new-
mani 63; hirtellus, 65

Acropolitis hedista, 171

Adrapsa fapinosfola, 168

Aldinga, in ancient river valley, 35

Amanita cinereo-annulosa, 187

Amaranthus Mitchellii var, grandiflorus, 186

American Beach (K.I1.), Bore at, 43

Amphopyra rubripuncta, 161

Ancient River Systems, Correlation and Age
of, 38, 39

Annual Meeting, 226

Annual Report, 227

Anomis microphrica, 166

Anstey’s Hill Road (Highbury), scarp of
ancient gravels at, 24

Anurida granaria, 61

Anystis baccarum, 111

Apatetris dinota, 173

Appendix, List of Original Papers and other
Works Published by Walter Howchin, 242

Aracoptera imbecilla, 161

Argyroploce microlychna, 172

Aristida Browniana, 145; arenaria, 146;
echinata, 146; cchinata var. nitidula, 146;
muricata, 146; biglandulosa, 146; anthoxan-
thoides, 147; latifolia, 147; latifolia var.
minor, 147; ramosa, 147; calycina, 147

Aristotelia ochrostephana, 173

Arotrophora neanthes, 171

Asperula gemella, 157

Astrebla Jappacea, 149

Astrosporina emergens, 192;
.discissa, 192; imbricata, 192

Attatha regalis, 164

Australian Fungi, 187

Avitta quadrilinea, 167

exigua, 192;

Bacophylla, 181; B. eupasta, 181

Baker’s Gully, near Clarendon, 36

Balance-sheets, 229

Barossa and adjoining Hundreds, 21; fault-
block, 22

Baryphanes, 167; B. niphosema, 167

Basedow, H., quoted, 31

Bassia Blackiana, 91; ventricosa, 93; lani-
cuspis, 93; uniflora, 93; intricata, 93;
eriacantha, 93; echinopsila, 93; Tatei, 93;
bicornis, 93; convexula, 93; articulata, 150;
Andersonti, 185

Bdella lignicola, 101

Bdellidae (Snout Mites) of Australia. <A
Preliminary Account of, 97; Synopsis of
genera, 100

Belair, ancient river deposits at, 31

Biscirus, key to species, 102; B. COdonto-
scirus) virgulatus, 104; B. (Biscirus) inter-
medius, 104; B. (B.) uncinnatus, 106; B.
(B.) silvaticus, 106; B. (B.) thori, 106;
B, (B.) lapidarius, 106; B. (B.) symmetri-
cus, 106; B. (B.) hickmant, 107; B. (B.)
australicus, 107

Black, J. M., Additions to the Flora of South
Australia, 143; Presentation of the Mueller
Medal, to, 219

Blackham, H. H., silicified tree in gravel pit,
24

Blackwood, sections at, showing ancient river
deposits, 30

Blennodia pterosperma, 186

Boerhavia diffusa, 151

Booborowie South, ancient consolidated alluvia,
9

Bore at American Beach (K.1.), 43

Bore near Minlaton (Y.P.), 45

Brachycyttara, 165; B. erypsipyrrha, 165

Brachystomella, 58; B. parvula, 59; afurcata,
59; acantha, 59; fungicola, 60; anomala, 60

Brown, H. Y. L., quoted, 21

Bulbine scmibarbata, 150; semibarbata var.
depilata, 183

Bulbophyllum Weinthali, 95

Calandrinia pumila, 186

Carpobrotus aequilaterus, 151

Cashmore, A. B., Two New Danthonias, 72

Centaurea nigra, 158

Ceratrimeria maxima, 57

Chaetocercus cristicauda hillieri, 200

Clare, physiographical features, 6

Clarendon, consolidated alluvia near, 36; on
Elijah White’s property, 35

Cleland, J. B., Australian Fungi, No. 9, 187

Cleland, J. B. Exhibit: A Collection of sceds
of plants used by the natives of Central
Australia for food purposes, 221; Read a
dispatch of Governor Gipps (1840) prov-
ing that silos, for grain, were used in Aus-
tralia at that time, 223; Awarded the Sir
Joseph C. Verco Medal, 226

251

Cleland, J. B., and T. H. Johnston, Ecology
of the Aborigines of Central Australia;
Botanical Notes, 113

Clerodendron floribundum,
natives, 123

Clitopilus austratiana, 189

Cockatoo Creek, Central Australia, Geology
of, 206, 210

Collembola-Arthropleona of Australia, 48, 50

Collybia tortipes, 187; penetrans, 187; per-
cava, 187; elegans, 187; fusca, 188

Colquhoun, T, T., Distribution of Myopo-
raceae in Central Australia, 94

Consolidated Alluvia near Spalding, 4;
between Spalding and Clare, 6; in the
Wakefield Valley district, 7; Yongala and
Canowie Belt, 8; near Dutton, 17; near
Marrabel, 18; Nuriootpa and Rowland’s
Flat, 19; Barossa, 21; One Tree Hill, 22;
Anstey’s Hill, 24; Hope Valley, 25; Black-
wood, 30; Happy Valley, 31; Morphett
aaa 32; Noarlunga, 34; Onkaparinga, 35,

ek Sia to the Orchidology of Austra-
ia,

Coprinus arenacolens, 194; virgulacolens, 194

Correlation and Age of the Ancient Alluvial
Beds, 38

Cortinarius (Phlegmacium?) lilacino-fulvus,
190; vinaceo-lamellatus, 191; ochraceo-
fulvus, 191; fragilipes, 191; radicatus, 191;
C. (Myxamicium) sinapicolor, 191; micro-
archeri, 191; albidus, 191; C. (Inoloma)
areolato-imbricatus, 191

Cradle Valley, Tasmania, Mastacomys fuscus,
still extant in, 125

Crocanthes venustula, 179; thiomorpha, 179

Cryophytum nodiflorum, 151

Cryphimaea, 162; C. poliophasma, 163

Cunaxa setirostris, 111; taurus, 111

Cycloprora symprepes, 160

Cyperus aristatus, 150

Cyta latirostris, 100

roots eaten by

Dactyloctenium radulans, 149

Danthonia Duttoniana, 72; Richardsonii, 72
Danthonias, Two New, 72

Dasyuridae from the Lake Eyre Basin, 195
Dasyuroides byrnei pallidor, 202

Dawson, Peterborough, Yongala, Booborowie, |

Riverton, Stockport, Wasleys, and Two
Wells ancient river channel, 7

Dead Rivers of South Australia, Part IT.
Eastern Group, 1

Dictyolus australis, 194

Dimorphocoma minutula, 158

Dinocrana, 181; D. chrysomitra, 181

Distribution of Myoporaceae in Central Aus-
tralia, 94

Doratifera ochroptila, 169

Dudgeona polyastra, 171

Dumigania, 163; D. iochlora, 163

Dutton, physiographical features, 17

East, J. J., quoted, 10

Ecology of the Aborigines of Central Aus-
tralia; Botanical Notes, 113

Eden Hills, ancient river deposits at, 31

Elytrophorus spicatus, 149

Endowment Fund, together with Grants-in-
aid of Research: Proposed new Regula-
tions were read, as per Notice of Motion,
and adopted, 225; particulars concerning,
231; Balance-sheet, 230

Entoloma reticulata, 189; muscorum, 189;
serrata, 189

Epicopistis, 179; E. pleurospila, 180

Epipaschia nephelodes, 170

Eragrostis elongata, 147; xerophila, 148;
Kennedyae, 148

Erceia spilophracta, 165

Eremian Representative of Myrmecobius
fasciatus, 203

Eremophila (list of), 94; E. Battii, 157;

Willsii var. integrifolia, 157

Eressa sicnothyris, 160

Eriachne Isingiana, 148

Erythrina vespertilio (Bean-trec), uscd by
natives, 121 .

Eublemma amphidasys, 161

Eucalyptus dichromophloia (Bloodwood),
grub of galls on, eaten by natives, 122;
E. diversifolia, 155; vimirtalis, 155; imcras-
sata var. protrusa, 155

Eucosma perplexa, 172

Eudunda, physiographical features, 17

Euphorbia Stevenii, 153; Cyparissias, 154

Eurymela erythrocnemis, 76; rubrolimbata,
76; bakeri, 78

Eurymelessa, 88; E. moruyana, 88; froggatti,

"88

Eurymelini (Homoptera Bythoscopidae), A
Revision, of, 73; miscellaneous notes on, 89

Eurymelita, 89; E. terminalis, 89

Eurymeloides bicincta, 83; pulchra, 83;
lineata, 84; punctata, 84; perpusilla, 86;
marmorata, 86; adspersa, 87; walkeri, 87;
minutum, 87; nigra, 88

Eurymelops rubrovittata, 80; 82;
latifascia, 82; generosa, 82

Evans, J. W., A Revision of the Eurymelini
(Homoptera Bythoscopidac), 73

Exchange List of Periodicals, 232

bicolor,

Faulted segments in foothills near Adelaide,
29, 39

Fellows, List of, 238

Finlayson, H. H., On Mastacomys fuscus,
125; Mammals from the Lake Eyre Basin,
195; the Eremian Representative of Myrme-
cobius fasciatus, 203

Flammula punctata, 193; cincta, 193; brevipes,
193

Flora of South Australia (Ising), 91, 183;
(J. M. Black) 143

Fodina miranda, 165; pergrata, 166

Foothills, near Adelaide, a Truncated Seg-
ment, 27, 29

252

Frankenia granulata, 154

Freshwater Creek and Deep Creek, in ancient
fluviatile sediments, 3

Friesea mirabilis, 56

Fungi, Australian, 187

Gawler, Roseworthy Agricultural College,
and St. Kilda, geological features, 13

Gawler Town Hill, 24

Geological Notes on the Cockatoo Creek and
Mount Liebig Country, 206

Gladiolus cuspidatus, 150

Gongylodes, 180; G. centrocia, 180

Goodenia unilobata, 157; heterophylla, 158

Hackham, geological features, 34

Hale, H. M., and T. H. Johnston, Lecture on
Australian water animals and their shift for
a living, 220

Hallett’s Cove, ancient river course near, 34

Halotydeus destructor, 108

Hamlcy Brdige, geological features, 12

Hann Range, Central Australia, geological
features, 206, 210

Happy Valley, bed of ancient river, 31

Hawker, M. S., Obituary Notice, 224

Hedymiges, 160; H? aridoxa, 160

Hydrocotyle tripartita, 155

Hemiarcha metableta, 174; bastpercna, 174

Iibiscus crassicalyx, 154

Hope Valley, 25; bores at, 25-26; Post-
Miocene age of alluvia, 27

Howchin, W., The Dead Rivers of South
Australia, Part II, The Eastern Group, 1;
resignation as Editor, 226; List of Original
Papers, ete., published by him, 242

Howland, Rev, B. S., 4 (foot-note), 10

Butt and Hill Rivers, geological history of, 5

Hydrocotyle tripartit, 155

Hygrophorus fuligineo-squamosus, 187

Hypena caerulealis, 169

Hypenodes mesoscia, 169

Hypermeces, 170; H. xanthochyta, 170

Hypogastrura armata, 50; manubrialis, 52;
purpurascens, 52; pseudo-purpurascens, 53

Index, 250

Indigofera enneaphylla, 153

Inflammahle Gases Occluded in the Pre-
Palaeuzoic Rocks of South Australia, 42,
219

Inocybe serrata, 192; fulvo-olivaceac, 192;
granulosipes, 192; Murrayana, 192

Iseilema membranacea, 143; actinostachys,
144; vaginiflora, 144

Ising, E. H., Notes on the Flora of South
Australia, 91, 183

Isotoma petraea, 157

Iva axillaris, 158

Johnston, T. H., and J. B. Cleland, Ecology
of the Aborigines of Central Australia;
Botanical Notes, 113

i

Johnston, T. H., and H. M. Hale, Lecture on
Australian water animals and their shift
for a living, 220

Kangarilla Flats, an old river channel, 36

Kapunda District, physiographical features,
17

Kensington Gardens bore, 27

Kidman’s, Sir Sidney, Bore, 16

Knott’s Hill, borders an ancient river valley,
36

Kochia tomentosa var. platyphylla, 185; var.
appressa, 186; K. Georgei, 186; eriantha,
186; scleroptera, 93

Koonunga, physiographical features, 18

Labdia chaleoplecta, 172

Lepidium papillosum, 186

Lepidoptera, New Australian, 159

Lepiota cervicolor, 187

Leptochloa digitata, 143

Leptonia albida, 189; macrospora, 189; ta-
bacina, 189; radicata, 189; fusco-marginata,
190

Lepturus pannonicus, 143

Leurosancla, 173; L. humilis, 173

Liebig, Mount, geological features, 113, 115,
116

Lophosancla, 175; L. stenochorda, 175

Loranthus Maidenii, 185; quandang,
Murrayi 185

Lotus australis var exstipulatus, 153

Ludbrook, A. M., Resignation as Librarian,
222

Lyndoch, ancient river deposits, 20

185 ;

Madigan, C. T., quoted, 38

Mammals from the Lake Eyre Basin, 195

Mannanarie, Jamestown, Spalding, Clare, and
Wakefield Valley, ancient river channel, 2

Map of Parts of the Hundreds of Munno
Para, Para Wirra, and Yatala, showing
ancient fluviatile areas, 23

Marrabel, consolidated alluvia near, 18

Marsilia hirsuta, 183

Martin’s Gully, Gawler, geological features,
13 :

Mastacomys fuscus, 125

Mclaren Vale, physiographical features, 37

Medicago reticulata, 153

Microcala quadrangularis, 155

Minlaton, bore near, 45

Minuria integerrima, 158; denticulata, 158

Moraca xerospatha, 150

Morphett Vale, ancient river deposits, 33

Mount Bold, River Onkaparinga changed its
course near, 35

Mount Liebig Country, 206, 211, 215

Mount Panorama, and an ancient river
course, 36

Mycena subnigra, 188; eucalyptorum, 188;
Cunninghamiana, 188; fusca, 188; sub-
capillaris, 188; albida-fusca, 188

Myoporaceae in Central Australia, 94

253

Myoporum montanum, 94
Myrmecobius fasciatus var. rufus, 203

Namangana fulvescens, 161

Narycia commatica, 180

Naucoria arenacolens, 193

Neachoruies, 61; N. glauerti, 61

Neslia paniculata, 152

New Australian Lepidoptera, 159

Nicotiana Gossei, 155; ingulba, 156; excel-
sior, 156; macrocalyx, 156

Noarlunga, physiographical features, 34

Noorda hemilcuca, 170

North Para River, 14, 19, 20

Notes on the Flora of South Australia
(Ising), 91, 183

Nuriootpa, ancient river deposits at, 19

Nyctipao phaca, 164

Odontella lamellifera, 57

Odontoscirus virgulatus, 111

Ocnothera stricta, 154; affinis, Cambess, 155

Omphalia paludicola, 188; alearis, 188

One Tree Hill, extensive ancient fluviatile
deposits, 22

Oncerosancla, 175; O. euopa, 175

Onkaparinga River, its physiographical fea-
tures and history, 35, 37

Onychiurus Gervais, 65: 66;
ambulans, 66; armatus, 66

Orchidology of Australia, 95

Orthozancla, 167; O, rhythmotypa, 168

Oruza megalospila, 162

Oxalis compressa, 153

fimetarius,

Painta Springs, Central Australia, 211

Panaeolus paludosus, 193

Pantydia dochmosticha, 166

Papaver somnifcrum var. setigerum, 151

Past and Present Officers of the Society, 241

Pauroeurymela, 79; P. amplicincta, 79; parva,
79

Paxillus psammophilus, 194

Pennisetum macrourum, 143

Penthaleus bicolor, 110

Peplidium maritimum, 156

Peterborough and the North-castern Plain,
ancient river system, 7

Peter’s Creek, near Kangarilla, 36

Phipps, I. F., Lecture on “Heredity as we see
it Today,” 225

Pholiota subtogularis, 190; serrulata, 190;
grammum, 190; imperfecta, 190; Squar-
rosipes, 190

Pickett’s Hill, shows section in ancient con-
solidated alluvia, 36

Platyeurymela, 78; P. semifascia, 78; atra,
79

Pleurotus malleeanus, 189

Pliocene horizons, near Adelaide, 39

Plusia didymospila, 163

Podaxon pistillaris, stalked puff-ball, the
powder from which is used by natives on
face for decoration, 124

Poduroidea, Superfamily of, 48, 50

Poccilasthena cisseres, 159

Point Pass, physiographical features, 16

Poterium Sanguisorba, 153

Preliminary Account of Collembola-Arthro-
pleona of Australia, 48

Proceedings, Abstract of, 218

Protolechia trichroma, 176; polioxysta, 176;
tyroessa, 176; meurosticha, 177; ochro-
bathra, 177; obscura, 177; euprepta, 177;.
emmeles, 178; arenaria, 178

Psalliota vinacea, 193

Pseudachorutes rhaeticus, 57

Psilurus aristatus, 149

Pterocaulon sphacelatum, 158

Piyssoptera, 181

Pultenaea scabra, 153

Revision of the Eurymelini (Homoptera
Bythoscopidae), 73; miscellaneous notes on,
89

Reynella, ancient river deposits at, 32

River Broughton Depression, 2

River Light, physiographical features, 12

River Onkaparinga and its Deserted Valley,
35; an interesting physiographical study, 37

Riverton and Tarlee, physiographical fea-
tures, 10

River Torrens, geological history of, 28

River Wakefield Valley, an ancient river
course, 6

Robertstown, Nuriootpa, Barossa, Hope Val-
ley, Blackwood, and Noarlunga, ancient
river channel, 16

Rogers, R. S.,Contributions to the Orchidology
of Australia, 95 ;

Roseworthy Agricultural College and Neigh-
bourhood, geological features, 15

Rowland’s Flat, ancient river deposits, 19

Russula persanguinea, 193; viridis, 193

Saddle Bags Range, 36

Salter’s Springs, ancient consolidated alluvia
near, 7

Sampson’s Flat and Southwards,
river deposits at, 24

Sandy Creek, 20

Santalum lanccolatum, 150

Scammell’s Well, near Willunga, 37

Schismus barbatus, 149

Scirus _longirostris, 101;
hessei, 111

Scoular, Gavin, quoted, 15

Sminthopsis crassicaudata
larapinta, 199

Snout Mites of Australia, 97

Some Acarina from Australia and South
Africa, 108

South Para River, 14, 21

Spalding and Neighbourhood, ancient con-
solidated alluvia, 4

Spinifex inermis, 143

Stathmopoda ranthocrana, 179

Stenopetalum nutans, 186

ancient

dubitatus,

102;

197;

centralis,

254

Stictoptera aequisecta, 162

Stipa nitida, 149; acrociliata, 149

St Kilda Bore, 15

St. Kitt’s Creek, 18

Stockport, River Light, Hamley Bridge, and
Wasleys, physiographical features, 11

Stockwell, relation to ancient river system, 18

Swainsona tephrotricha, 152; smiflora, 152;
adenophylla, 152

Tamba grandis, 168

ce a Caves, 130; geological notes on,
13

Tanunda, ancient river deposits at, 19

Tanycyttara, 174; T. xanthomochla, 174

Tapinogyna oxypeuces, 159

Tarlec, physiographical features, 10

Tate, R., quoted, 38

Taxeotis liumbosa, 159

Tecoma doratoxvlon, wood used by natives
for spears, 123

Templetonia egena, 153

Tepper, J. G. O., quoted, 19

Tindale, N. B., Tantancola Caves, South-
East of South Australia, 130; Geological
Notes on the Cockatoo Creek and Mount
Liebig Country, 206

Tinea mesoporphyra, 182; sulphurata, 182

Tortrix eurystropha, 171

Tree, fossilized, in gravel pit, 24

Trianthema crystallina var. clavata, 186

Trichinium helipteroides var minor,
semilanatum, 186

Trifolium arvense, 153

Triglochin elongata, 183

Trigonella monspeliaca, 152

Triodia, “gum,” used by natives, 118

Tullbergia trisetosa, 67; australica, 68

186;

eae A. J. New Australian Lepidoptera,
1
Two New Danthonias, 72

Upper Light District, physiographical fea-
tures, 17

Verco Medal, Sir Joseph, 228

Verco, Sir Joseph, President’s reference to
the death of, 224; Obituary Notice, v.

Ward, L. K., Inflammable Gases Occluded in
the Pre-Palaeozoic Rocks of South Aus-
tralia, 42, 219

Wasleys, geological features, 13

Weidenbach, W. W., Obituary Notice, 220

Wickham’s Hill, a boundary of ancient river
course, 37

Womersley, H., A Preliminary Account of
the Collembola-Arthropleona of Australia,
48; A Preliminary Account of the Bdel-
lidae (Snout Mites) of Australia, 97;
Some Acarina from Australia and South
Africa, 108

Woodward, H. P., quoted, 21

Xenylla maritima, 53; grisea, 53; Mttorals,
53; mucronata, 56; occidentalis, 56

Yongala and Canowie Belt, ancient consoli-
dated alluvia at, 8

Zygophyllum ammophilum, used by natives,
121

Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1933. Vol. LVIL, Plate I.

Pig. 1,

Vig,

?

Ancient Alluvial Plateau between Hutt and Hill Rivers. East Escarpment.

Plateau of Consolidated Alluvium, as in Fig. 1. General View.

Gillingham & Co. Limited. Printers, Adelaide.

Tras, and Proc. Roy Soc.

Fig 1,

S. Austr, 1933,

Vol, LVIL, Plate

Ancient River Plateau, west of Stockport.

Eastern Escarpment.

Fie. 3
gg 3.

High-level River Terrace, east of Stockport.

Distant view.

Alluvial Capping on top of hill

Same as Fig. 2, Near view

Cilineham & Co. Lumited

Il,

Printers, Adelaide.

Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1933.

VoL LVIIL., Plate [11.

Vig.

?

River Terrace near Anstey’s Hill, Hope Valley,

Old Consolidated Alluvium unconformably on Decomposed Slates. Blackwood.

Gillingham & Co, Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Trans. and Proc. Roy, Soc. S. Austr., 1933. Vol. LVLI., Plate IV.

Fig. 1, Ancient Alluvial Sand-rock. Railway cutting near Morphett Vale.

Fig. 2. Ancient Gravels resting unconformably on Miocene. Railway, Hackham.

Gillmgham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Trans. and Proc, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1933. Vol. LVII., Plate V.

Gillingham & Co, Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Vol. LVIL., Plate VI.

Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1933,

and Proc.

Trans,

me

B x14

H. T. Condon

Del.

1

H x13

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1933. Vol LVIL., Plate VLI.

Mastace

which

in

Cotiutry

the

ot

witte features

ym the north, she

tre

A view

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide,

Trans and Proc. Roy. Soc, S. Austr., 1933. Vol. LVIL, Plate VIII.

—

1. Isetlema actinostachys. 2.1. membranacea. 3. 1, vaginiflora. 4. Elytrophorus spicatus.
5. Aristida anthoxanthoides. 6. A. latifolia var minor. 7. A, echinata. 8. A. Browniana.
9. A. biglandulosa. 10. Eragrostis elongata.

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Trans. and Proc, Ray. Soc. S. Austr., 1933. Vol, LVIL, Plate IX.

1. Nicotiana ingulba, 2. Bassia articulata. 3. Frankenia granulata. 4. Swainsona uniflora,
5. Hibiscus crassicalyx. 6. Eriachne Isingiana.

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Trans, and Proc. Royal Soc. S. Austr., 1933.

Vol. LVIL., Plate X.

Fig, 1.

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide,

CONTENTS

Page
Osituary Notice: Sir Joseph Verco. With Portrait .. 7. Se oe ie
Howcuin, Pror. W.: The Dead Rivers of South Australia, Part Il. = Ths ‘ates
Group. With Map. Plates i. toiv. .. 1
Warp, Dr. L .K.: Inflammable Gases Cette in the Fre Fics Rocks of South
Australia a : 42
Womerstey, H.: A Prion Ame of the: Esileaieie ehionsenc of Australia 48
Casumore, A. B.: Two New Danthonias (Communicated by J. M. Black) = See 6 2
Evans, J. W.: A Revision of the Eurymelini (Homoptera Bythoscopidae) = ees
Istnc, E. H.: Notes on the Flora of South Australia—No. 1 =. i= a we ok
CoLtgunHoun, T. T.: Distribution of Myoporaceae in Central Australia .. ee ace OF
Rocers. Dr. R. S.: Contributions to Orchidology of Australia oe pen 95
Womerstey, H.: A Preliminary Account of the Bdellidae (Snout Mites) of Ruswalia . 97
Womerstey, H.: On some Acarina from Australia and South Africa = 108
Cieranp, Pror. J. B., and Pror. T. H. Jounston: The Ecology of the Abotigiies of
Central Australia; Botanical Notes. Plate vy. a = ee Brvetes PK
Finiayson, H. H.: On Mastacomys fuscus (Thomas). Plates ° vi. at Wiices oa se 12
Tinpate, N. B.: Tantanoola Caves, South-East of South Australia. Geological and
Physiographical Notes .. kee me - Sree 1)
Biack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South — No. 31. Plates viii. and ix. .. 143
Turner, Dr. A. J.: New Australias Lepidoptera = cs a e459
Isinc, E. H.: Notes on the Flora of South Australia—No. 2. ze ; a Pees 1
CLeLAnp, Pror. J. B.: Australian Fungi. Notes and userietions —No, 9 = 187

Fintayson, H. H.: On Mammals from the Lake Eyre Basin. Part I—The Dacyacies 195
Fintayson, H. H.: On the Eremian ae of Myrmecobius fasciatus (Water-

house) st mE 203
TINnDALE, N. B.: Geological Se on the ‘Celestia Check at Moarit Licbig Country,

Central Australia. Plate x. * a5 fa veg = = F 206
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS — = = = rs ss Re i ey noes
AnnuaL Report & m3 i= 33 Ss a8 = a, = <3 eee
Str JosrrpH VerRco MEDAL Sy = = Ps = “ss sf ae 5 Aree 773)
BALANCE-SHEETS Ss a 4 a = ia < os 3 = 229-230
ENDOWMENT FuND ne ea = ee af = = ar ee = ae oh
Donations To Liprary IN EXCHANGE ea > = = >. es oe Se oe
List or FeLLtows, MEMBERS, ETC... 4 a AS 35 a = iad eOe
Past AND PRESENT OFFICERS OF THE SOCIETY ae 241

Aprenpix: A List of Original Papers and other Works Published = Walter Howchin 2A2
INDEX SS ee af ee aoe = ae +8 se = a ie va 250